Mechanical Technical Specifications

BUSINES PARK - P0015-821
KNOWLEDGE ECONOMIC CITY - KEC
MADINAH KSA
MECHANICAL & BMS WORKS
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
MAY 2024
Page 1 of 429
MECHANICAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIV 21-FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
SECTION DESCRIPTION
21 05 00 Common Work Results for Fire Suppression
21 05 19 Meters and Gages for Fire-Suppression Systems
21 05 29 Hangers and Supports for Fire Suppression Piping & Equipment
21 12 00 Fire Suppression Standpipes
21 13 13 Wet Pipe Sprinkler System
21 13 39 Foam Water System
21 22 00 Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems
21 31 13 ELECTRIC-DRIVE, CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMPS
21 31 16 DIESEL-DRIVE, CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMPS
21 34 00 PRESSURE-MAINTENANCE PUMPS
21 22 00 AERSOL System
VENDOR LIST
Page 2 of 429
ASAYEL AL-OMRAN ARCHITECTS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION KNOWLEDGE ECONOMIC CITY – KEC
SECTION 210500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
SECTION 210500
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION
PART 1 PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The requirements of the Contract Documents, including the General Conditions and special
Conditions, apply to the work of this division.
B. In case of conflict between these General Provisions and the Special and General Conditions
the more restrictive requirements govern as determined by the Engineer.
C. The drawings are schematic and diagrammatic and are intended to be a graphic representation
of the contract requirements. Due to restrictions of scale, complete details cannot be shown.
It is however assumed to represent a complete installation. The contractor shall be responsible
for providing a complete installation, coordination with other trades, and coordination with
field conditions.
D. Riser diagrams and schematic diagrams generally indicate equipment connections to be used
for various systems. Provide all work shown on diagrams whether or not it is duplicated on
the plans.
E. Specifications include incomplete sentences. Words or phrases such as "the contractor shall,"
"shall be," "furnish," "provide," "a," "an," "the," and "all" have been omitted for brevity.
F. Except where modified by a specific notation to the contrary, the indication and/or description
of any item, in the Drawings or Specifications or both, carries with it the instruction to furnish
and install the item complete with all appurtenances or accessories necessary to complete any
required system, regardless of whether or not this instruction is explicitly stated as part of the
indication or description.
G. Specifications and Drawings are complimentary and are to be taken together for a complete
interpretation of the work. Where conflicts exist between the drawings and specifications, the
item(s) of greater quantity or cost shall be provided for in the contract price.
H. Drawings of necessity utilize symbols and schematic diagrams to indicate various items of
work. Neither of these have any dimensional significance nor do they delineate every item
Page 3 of 429
required for the intended installation. Install the work in accordance with the diagrammatic
intent expressed on the electrical and mechanical drawings, and in conformity with the
dimensions indicated on final architectural and structural working drawings and on equipment
shop drawings.
I. Certain details appear on the drawings, which are specific with regard to the dimensioning and
positioning of the work. These details are intended only for the purpose of establishing general
feasibility. They do not obviate field coordination for the indicated work.
J. Derive information as to the general construction from structural and architectural drawings
and specifications.
K. Responsibility of contractor is to ensure that all works are in conformity with drawings,
international stated codes and local regulations.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Where used in this document and accompanying drawings, the following words are defined as
listed:
1. "Provide" to furnish, install and connect up complete and ready for safe and regular
operation of particular work referred to.
2. "Install" to erect, mount and connect complete with related accessories.
3. "Furnish" or "Supply" to purchase, procure, acquire and deliver complete with related
accessories.
4. "Work" labor, materials, equipment, apparatus, controls, accessories and other items
required for proper and complete installation.
5. "Concealed" embedded in masonry or other construction, installed in furred spaces, within
double partitions or hung ceilings, in trenches, in crawl spaces or in enclosures.
6. "Exposed" not installed underground or "concealed" as defined above.
7. "Indicated," "shown" or "noted" as indicated, shown or noted in the contract documents.
8. "Similar" or "equal" in materials, weight, size, design and efficiency of specified product.
9. "Reviewed," "satisfactory," "accepted," or "directed" as reviewed, satisfactory, accepted or
directed by or to Engineer.
10. "Architect," "Engineer," "Project Manager," "Owner," the party or parties responsible for
interpreting, accepting and otherwise ruling on the performance under "The Contract."
11. "This Contract", "The Contract" the agreement covering the work to be performed by "The
Contractor."
12. "The Specifications," "This Section, Part, Division of the Specifications" the documents
specifying the work to be performed by "The Contractor."
13. "Other," "Other Contractor”, persons, parties, or trades responsible for work of the project
other than "the Contractor".
14. "Project Manager" or "Construction Manager" is defined as the Owner's authorized
representative.
Page 4 of 429
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND STANDARDS
A. Make the complete installation in accordance with all state and local municipal codes, all
applicable codes and authorities having jurisdiction, and the applicable requirements and
standards of the following:
AIA - American Insurance Association

IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
ANSI - American National Standards Institute
ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
AWS - American Welding Society
MSS - Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and
Fitting Industry
NEC - National Electrical Code
NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association
LPC - Loss Prevention Council
UL - Underwriters Laboratories
ULC - Underwriters Laboratories of Canada
NFPA - National Fire Protection Association
FM - Factory Mutual
ISO - International standards organization
Refer to the Engineer for decisions on any items or requirements noted in the specifications or
drawings which conflict with the standards listed above. Provide all work necessary to comply
with these requirements at no extra cost to the Owner
1.4 ORGANIZATION OF THE WORK
A. Implement the work called for under this contract simultaneously with the work of other Trades
in a manner such as not to delay the overall progress of the project. Be prepared to furnish
promptly to other Trades involved at the project all information and measurements relating to
the work which they may require. Cooperate with them in order to secure the harmony
necessary in the interest of the project as a whole.
Page 5 of 429
B. Put work in place as fast as possible to meet all construction schedules.
C. Keep a competent superintendent in charge of the work. Replace such superintendent if

unsatisfactory to the Project Manager.
D. Maintain a complete file of Contract and shop drawings at the Site available for inspection by
the Engineer and Project Manager.
E. Provide every facility to permit inspection or observation of the work by the Engineer during
the course of construction.
F. Be responsible for work until its completion and final acceptance; replace any of the same
which may be damaged, lost or stolen, without additional cost to the Owner.
1.1
1.5 ACCEPTANCE OF THE WORK
A. Make all workmanship, equipment and materials supplied under this contract acceptable to the
Engineer, who has the power to reject any items, which in their judgment are not in full
accordance with the Drawings and Specifications.
1.2
1.6 PERMITS, CERTIFICATES, AND FEES
A. Obtain and deliver a final Certificate of Approval from the applicable inspection authority
having jurisdiction. Make delivery to the Construction Manager for transmittal to the Owner
upon completion of the work and before final payment. Pay all charges made by the inspection
authority and include their cost in the bid.
B. Include the procurement of and payment for all permits, certificates and fees for the
performance of the work in compliance with codes, applicable laws and municipal regulations
including those from local utilities for services.
1.3
1.7 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Specifications and the accompanying drawings are intended to secure the provisions of all
material, labor, equipment, and services necessary to install complete, tested, and ready for
operation the FIRE PROTECTION Systems in accordance with the Specifications and
Drawings. Provide all systems complete with necessary appurtenances and minor auxiliaries,
including offsets to clear interferences and supports, which are not shown but are needed to
make each system complete in every respect.
Provide all work described in the Specifications and not shown on the Drawings, or vice versa,
in complete working order. If mention has been omitted of any item of work or material,
necessary for completion of the system, then such items must be and are hereby included.
1.8 EXAMINATION OF EXISTING CONDITIONS
Page 6 of 429
A. Before submitting a proposal, the Contractor is responsible for visiting the site of the work and
becoming thoroughly familiar with all conditions and limitations. The submission of a proposal
will be construed as evidence that such an examination has been made, and later claims for
labor, equipment or materials required for difficulties encountered which could have been
foreseen had such an examination been made will not be recognized.
B. Verify all grades, elevations, dimensions, and clearances at the site.
C. Verify existing conditions and bring any discrepancies to the Engineer’s attention in writing
prior to proposal submission.
1.9 SHOP DRAWINGS AND OTHER INFORMATION REQUIRED
A. Prior to purchasing equipment or materials, submit a list of proposed manufacturers to the

Engineer for approval.
B. Shop drawings, which are submitted out of sequence or without supplemental information
necessary for proper evaluation of the submission are subject to delays in processing.
C. Shop drawings must bear the General Contractor's stamp certifying:
1. That he has checked the submitted subcontractor's shop drawings.

2. That the submitted shop drawing is fully coordinated with all interfacing trades and with
other trades where interference may occur.
3. That the submitted shop drawings are in conformance with the contract documents.
D. Prior to assembling or installing the work, submit the following for review:
1. Catalog information and factory assembly drawings, as required for a complete explanation
and description of all items of equipment.
2. Field installation drawings, as required to explain fully all procedures involved in erecting,
mounting and connecting all items of equipment.
3. Scale drawings indicating insert and sleeve locations.
4. Scale composite drawings, showing all duct work, piping, lighting fixtures, main conduit
runs and drainage piping above the hung ceilings and in the mechanical equipment rooms.
The drawings will indicate pipe and duct sizes and their elevation above the floor. Obtain
layout of plumbing, HVAC and electrical work from the respective contractor for inclusion
on the composite drawing. The signature of each contractor on the composite drawing will
attest to full coordination of these drawings.
E. Materials installed or work performed without acceptance of materials is done at the risk of the
Contractor, and the cost of removal of such material or work, which is judged unsatisfactory
for any reason, is at the expense of the Contractor.
F. Documents will not be accepted for review unless:
1. Number of copies and type of paper complies with the requirements of contract "General
conditions”.
Page 7 of 429
2. Complete information pertaining to appurtenances and accessories is included.
3. Submitted as a package where documents pertain to related items.
4. Properly marked with service or function identification as related to the project, where they
consist of catalog sheets displaying other items, which are not applicable.
5. Properly marked with external connection identification as related to the project where they
consist of standard factory assembly or field installation drawings.
G. Shop drawings and other submissions, which are submitted for review, will be returned with a
Shop Drawing stamp indicating actions based on reviews that are made and Contractor's
responses that may be necessary. Actions noted regarding "REVIEW" and "RESPONSE"
portions of the shop drawing stamp are defined as explained in project General Requirements
(Division 1), and Contract General & Special Conditions.
1.4
1.10 RECORD DRAWING
A. Before commencing work, procure complete set of black and white prints of Contract
Drawings.
B. Maintain prints in field office and permanently record, in colored pencil, on such prints, at time
of occurrence, deviations from Contract Drawings, due to:
1. Field Coordination
2. Addenda
3. Bulletins
C. Dimension underground utilities from permanent identifiable structural points.
D. Make drawings available for the Engineer’s periodic inspection and submit for review with
as-Built Drawings.
1.5
1.11 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS
A. Before commencing work, procure complete set of reproducible transparencies of Contract

Drawings.
B. Neatly revise to conform to Record Drawings.
C. Conspicuously indicate major deviations in Mechanical Equipment Rooms by specific

reference to shop drawings of these rooms and provide an accurate and complete record of the
work as installed.
D. Upon completion of work, submit signed and certified reproducible transparencies as as-Built
and referenced Shop Drawings, along with marked up prints of Record Drawings, to the
Engineer for acceptance.
E. Submit complete copy on computer diskette, with complete list of contents.
1.12 COORDINATION OF WORK WITH OTHER TRADES
Page 8 of 429
A. Coordinate the work of this division with the work of all other Contracts and the utility
company and so arrange that there will be no delay in the proper installation and completion of
any part or parts of each respective work wherein it may be interrelated with that of this
Contract so that generally all construction work can proceed without delaying the completion
of the project.
B. Examine contract drawings and specifications for all other trades relating to this project, verify
all governing conditions at the site, and become fully informed as to the extent and character
of the work required and its relation to other work in the building. No consideration will be
granted for any alleged misunderstanding of the materials to be furnished for work to be done.
C. Scaled and figured dimensions with respect to the items are approximate only; sizes of
equipment have been taken from typical equipment items of the class indicated. Before
proceeding with work, carefully check all dimensions and sizes and assume full responsibility
for the fitting-in of equipment and materials to the building and to meet architectural and
structural conditions.
D. Coordinate work with other disciplines. Confer with other contractors whose work might affect
this installation; and arrange all parts of this work and equipment in proper relation to the work
and equipment of others, with the building construction and with architectural finish so that
this work will harmonize in service, appearance, and function.
E. Install exposed piping to provide the maximum amount of headroom coordinated with the
Architectural drawings above the finished floor. Install piping concealed in areas where hung
ceilings or other furred spaces are indicated.
F. Refer to the Architectural Drawings for ceiling heights, locations and types of hung ceilings
and furred spaces.
G. Furnish to the Trade Contractors for general construction, detailed advance information
regarding all requirements related to work under other Divisions and/or Sections. Furnish
sizes, accurate data, and locations of any and all pads, pits, chases, sleeves, and slots through
floor slabs, walls, foundations, ceilings, roof, and other special openings required for work
under this Division.
1.6
1.13 DELIVERY AND RECEIVING
A. Owner-furnished equipment will be delivered, crated or otherwise packaged to the site delivery
point selected by the Project Manager. The Contractor is responsible for accepting delivery of
all Owner-furnished items, which are under his trade jurisdiction and place them in their final
location.
B. Where items cannot be immediately placed in their final position, the Contractor is responsible
for storing and protecting all Owner-furnished items until the time of their final installation.
The contractor is responsible for the care and protection of the items until acceptance by the
Owner. Coordinate delivery of Utility Company furnished equipment with the delivery policy
of that company.
1.7
Page 9 of 429
1.14 PROTECTION, MAINTENANCE AND PRODUCT HANDLING OF FIRE PROTECTION
EQUIPMENT
A. Deliver and store FIRE PROTECTION equipment/piping at the site properly packed and crated
until finally installed. Store materials in spaces as designated by the General Contractor.
Investigate each space through which equipment must be moved. If necessary, have equipment
shipped from manufacturer in crated sections of size suitable for moving through restricted
spaces.
B. Adequately protect uninstalled and installed equipment and materials against loss or stealing,
damage caused by water, paint, fire, plaster, moisture, acids, fumes, dust or other environmental
conditions, or physical damage, during delivery, storage, installation and shutdown conditions.
Replace any damaged or stolen material without extra cost to the Owner Except the equipment
that has been handed over to the owner or tenants.
C. Provide effective protection for all material and equipment against damage that may be caused
by environmental conditions. Do no work when conditions of temperature in area or moisture
on materials or substrates are not in accordance with material manufacturer's recommended
conditions for installation.
D. Maintain all equipment and systems installed, until issuance of the certificate of practical
completion. The operation of the equipment by the Owner does not constitute an acceptance
of the work. Work will be accepted only after the Contractor has adjusted his equipment,
demonstrated that it fulfills the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications, and has
furnished all required certificates.
E. Provide effective protection against damage for all materials and equipment during shipment,
and storage at the Project Site. Cover all stored equipment to exclude dust and moisture. Place
stored equipment on pallets or racks with appropriate weather cover.
F. After piping and equipment are installed, cover openings to prevent entrance of water and
foreign materials. Close openings with temporary metal or plastic caps.
G. Protect all rough and finished floors and other finished surfaces from damage, which may be
caused by construction materials and methods. Protect floors with tarpaulins, drip pans and
oil-proof floor covering. Protect finished surfaces from welding and cutting splatters with
baffles and splatter blankets. Protect finished surfaces from paint droppings, adhesive and other
marring agents with drop cloths. Protect other surfaces with appropriate protective measures.
H. Deliver materials to Project Site in manufacturer's original unopened containers with

manufacturer's name and product identification clearly marked thereon.
I. After completion of project, clean the exterior surfaces of equipment furnished in this Division
including concrete residue, to the Engineer’s satisfaction.
1.15 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS
Page 10 of 429
A. Provide Equipment and Materials required for installation under the Specifications new and
without blemish or defect. Provide equipment and materials, which will meet with the
acceptance of authorities having jurisdiction over the work. Where such acceptance is
contingent upon having the products listed or labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., or
other test laboratory, provide products so listed or labeled. Where no specific indication as to
the type or quality of material or equipment is indicated, furnish a first class standard article.
B. Wherever a manufacturer of a product is specified and the terms "other approved" or "approved
equal" or "equal" or "similar to" are used, the substituted item must conform in all respects to
the specified item, and meet the Engineer’s approval. Consideration will not be given to claims
that the substituted item meets the performance requirements with lesser construction.
Performance as delineated in schedules and in the Specifications indicates minimum
performance. In many cases, equipment is oversized to allow for pick-up loads, derating and
future loads which cannot be delineated under the minimum performance.
C. Provide all equipment, piping, valves, etc. of one type (such as pumps) produced by one
manufacturer.
D. Substituted equipment where permitted and accepted must conform to space requirements.
Replace at Contractor's expense any substituted equipment that cannot meet space
requirements, whether accepted or not. Make any modifications of related systems as a result
of substitutions at Contractor's expense.
E. Note that shop drawings, or other information submitted in accordance with the requirements
hereinbefore specified, do not assure that the Engineer attests to the dimensional suitability of
the material or equipment involved. Engineer's approval of shop drawings for substituted
equipment, does not waive the Contractor's responsibility to assure proper fit with adequate
clearances for maintenance.
F. Substitutions of equipment for that listed on the schedules or designated by model number in
the Specifications will not be considered if the item listed or described is not a regular cataloged
item shown in the current catalog of the manufacturer and been successfully used for a period
of not less than five years.
1.16 ACCESS DOORS IN FINISHED CONSTRUCTION
A. Access doors as required for operation and maintenance of concealed equipment, valves,
controls, pull boxes, etc., shall be provided by the General Contractor under another section of
the specification.
B. Coordinate and prepare a location, size, and function schedule of access doors required and
deliver to a representative of the installing Trade and the Engineer for acceptance.
1.8
1.17 COMMISSIONING AND PERFORMANCE TESTING
Page 11 of 429
A. The commissioning and performance testing shall be carried out by an independent
specialized firm. Full details of the capability and experience of such firm shall be submitted
to the Engineer for review and approval
1.18 PERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
A. After completion of all required equipment and system tests and unless specifically noted
elsewhere in these specifications, provide at owner's convenience, knowledgeable personnel
and necessary equipment to reasonably instruct and demonstrate the operation and maintenance
of said equipment and system. Arrange for the related manufacturer or authorized
representative to assist with this orientation. The orientation shall be a minimum of five (5)
days in addition to start up time.
B. Before requesting acceptance of work, furnish five (5) copies in bound form of a complete
instruction manual, typewritten or printed.
C. Include the following in the operation and maintenance manuals:
1. Table of Contents
2. Introduction - Explanation of manual and its use
3. Description of system or equipment
a. Complete schematic drawings of all systems

b. Functional and sequential description of all systems.
4. Systems operation
a. Operation procedures
b. All posted instruction charts
5. Maintenance
a. Systems trouble-shooting charts
b. Procedures for checking out functions
c. Recommended list of spare parts and cost
d. Schedule of recommended maintenance
6. Listing of manufacturers
7. Manufacturer's data: Where multiple model, type and size listings are included, clearly
and conspicuously indicate those that are pertinent to this installation.
a. Description - literature, drawings, illustrations, certified performance charts, technical

data, etc.
b. Operation
c. Maintenance - including complete trouble-shooting charts
d. Parts list
e. Names, addresses telephone, and fax numbers of recommended repair and service
companies
f. Guarantee data
Page 12 of 429
1.19 GUARANTEES AND CERTIFICATION.
A. Guarantee all work to be free from leaks or defects. Replace or repair, as directed by Engineer,
defective materials or workmanship, as well as damage to the work of the Trades resulting from
same for the duration of stipulated guarantee periods.
B. The duration of guarantee periods following the date of acceptance of the entire work, shall be
a minimum of one 400 days, or as stated in the Contract General & Special Conditions.
C. Submit certification attesting to the fact that specified performance and other criteria are met
by all items of equipment.
1.9
1.20 SITE VISITS FOR OBSERVATION
A. As the project progresses, the Architect, at his discretion, will perform site visits to observe
the mechanical and electrical installations. At the conclusion of these site visits, punch lists
or non-compliance notices will be issued to the appropriate Contractor for the deficiencies in
the work of his trade. Complete all work and perform all corrective measures as required by
the punch lists. After this corrective and completion work has been accomplished advice the
Architect in writing that every item on the punch lists has been completed.
1.21 IDENTIFICATION
A. Valves
1. Valve identification to comply with MSSSP-25.

2. Attach a 2" round brass tag stamped with designating numbers 1" high filled in with black
enamel to each valve.
3. Securely fasten valve tag to valve spindle or handle with a brass chain.
4. Appropriate ceiling tile markers, in areas where removable ceilings occur to indicate
location of valves or other devices, to be provided under the general construction division
of these specifications.
B. Motor Control Identification
1. Mount black lamacoid nameplates on each motor controller identifying primary control
function and individual position indication such as Pump No. 1, etc. Nameplates to be cut
through to white background and have beveled edges. Mounted with chromium plated
acorn head screws.
C. Schedule and Charts
1. Furnish to Owner's Representative three (3) complete framed plastic laminated valve tag
schedules. Schedule to indicate tag number, valve location by floor and nearest column
number, valve size and service controlled.
Page 13 of 429
D. Piping Identification and color Coding
1. Apply color coded Polyvinyl Chloride pipe bands identifying pipe contents and direction
of flow.
2. On exposed piping, apply bands on 30 foot centers of straight runs, at valve locations, at
point where piping enters and leaves a partition, wall, floor or ceiling.
3. On concealed piping installed above removable ceiling construction, apply bands in
manner described for exposed piping.
4. On concealed piping installed above non-removable ceiling construction, or in pipe shafts,
apply bands at valve or other devices that are made accessible by means of access doors or
panels.
5. Apply bands at exit and entrance points to each vessel, tank or piece of equipment.
6. Band widths to be 8 inch for pipes up to 10 inch diameter and 16 inch wide for larger
diameter piping. Letter heights stating service to be preprinted on band, 3/4 inch high for
8 inch bands and 1-1/4 inch high for 16 inch bands.
7. Colors to conform to ASA Standard A13.1. Provide 24 additional bands of each type for
future use by owner's personnel.
8. Follow manufacturer's instructions for application procedures using non-combustible
materials and contact adhesives.
1.10
1.22 PAINTING
A. Deliver all equipment with standard factory finish or as specified. Clean all equipment before
acceptance by the Owner.
B. Except as otherwise specified, priming will be done under other Sections of the work.
C. Any Material transported in a piping system will be color-coded. Positive Identification of

contents of A piping system shall be by lettered legend giving the name of the material in full
or abbreviated form. Arrows will be used to indicate the direction of flow. Color-coding shall
be applied to the entire exposed piping system. Identifying color of materials one word in
piping systems are as follows:
Material Color
Fire protection water Red
Sprinkler, water Red
Make-up water Green
Sprinkler drain Red
Water Green
1.23 DRIP PAN
A. Examine the drawings, and in cooperation with the Electrical Trade confirm the final location
of all electrical equipment to be installed in the vicinity of piping. Plan and arrange all overhead
Page 14 of 429
piping no closer than 2'-0" (600 mm) from a vertical line to electric motors and controllers,
switchboards, panel boards, or similar equipment.
B. Where the installation of piping does not comply with the requirements of foregoing paragraph,
where feasible, the piping shall be relocated.
C. Furnish galvanized steel gutters as follows:
1. Provide and erect a gutter of 18 gauge galvanized steel under every pipe which is within
2'-0" (600 mm) of being vertically over any motor, electrical controllers, switchboards,
panel boards, or the like.
2. Each gutter shall be welded and made watertight, properly suspended and carefully pitched
to a convenient point for draining. Provide a 3/4" drain, with valve as directed, to nearest
floor drain or slop sink, as approved.
3. In lieu of such separate gutters, a continuous protecting sheet in similar construction,
adequately supported and braced, properly rimmed, pitched and drained, may be provided
over any such motor, and extending 2'-0" (600 mm) in all directions beyond the motor, over
which such piping has to run.
1.24 TRAINING
A. The Contactor shall instruct and train personnel, designated by the Owner for the purpose, in
the operation and maintenance of every part, device and equipment in the systems with
particular emphasis on proper start-up and shutdown procedures, preventive maintenance and
lubrication procedures with the recommended lubricants overhaul and major maintenance
methods, adjustment and calibration of instruments and controls, the use of special tools and
safe practices.
B. The Owner will bear all the expenses of his personnel allocated for this purpose
PART 2 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM

PART 3
Page 15 of 429
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and special Conditions, apply to
work of this section.
B. The requirements of this section apply to equipment specified elsewhere in the specification.
4.1
1.2 DESCRIPTION OF WORK
A. Work includes providing all labor, supervision, materials, equipment, accessories, services and
tests necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, all basic materials and
methods for fire protection systems in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.
4.2
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of products of types and capacities

required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
Provide products produced by a manufacturer listed as an Acceptable Manufacturer in this
section.
4.3
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data including printed technical literature, installation,
instructions, and catalog cuts for materials, parts, devices, finish, and performance data.
4.4
1.5 SLEEVES
A. Sleeve Product Schedule:
Type Designation Sleeve Materials
1. #18 gauge, galvanized steel

2. Standard weight, galvanized steel pipe
3. Standard weight galvanized steel pipe with a continuously welded water stop of 1/4" steel
plate extending from outside of sleeve a minimum of 2" all around; similar to F & S
Manufacturing Corp. Fig. 204.
4. Cast iron pipe sleeve with center flange; similar to James B. Clow and Sons No. F-1430 and
F-1435.
5. Standard weight galvanized steel pipe with flashing clamp device welded to pipe sleeve or
watertight sleeves.
Page 16 of 429
B. Sleeve Caulking and Packing Product Schedule:
Type Designation Caulking & Packing Requirements
1. Oakum, hemp or lead

2. Incombustible, permanently plastic, waterproof, non-staining caulking compound or pack
with fibrous glass to within 1/2" of both construction surfaces and finish with caulking
compound as per above. For floor and roof slabs, finish is required on top side of slab only.
3. Packed mineral wool sealed with Johns-Manville "Duxseal" or approved equal; install
set screw escutcheons on both sides of wall.
1.6 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Material: anodized aluminum, chrome plated brass for finished spaces; plain brass, cast iron or
aluminum for unfinished spaces. Set-screw or spring tension design.
4.5
1.7 DRIP PAN
A. Examine the drawings, and in cooperation with the Electrical Trade confirm the final location of
all electrical equipment to be installed in the vicinity of piping. Plan and arrange all overhead
piping no closer than 2'-0" (600 mm) from a vertical line to electric motors and controllers, panel
boards, or similar equipment.
Where the installation of piping cannot comply with the requirements of foregoing paragraph,
obtain approval from the Engineer to relocate the piping as far away from the electrical equipment
as possible and provide drip pans as follows:
1. Provide and erect a gutter of 18 gauge galvanized steel under every pipe which is within 2'-0"
(600 mm) of being vertically over any motor, electrical controllers, switchboards, panel
boards, or the like.
2. Each gutter to be welded and made watertight, properly suspended and carefully pitched to
a convenient point for draining. Provide a 3/4" drain, in vicinity of nearest floor drain
terminated in a manner where drip will be noticed or as otherwise approved.
B. In no case will piping be installed in electrical switchgear or electric service rooms. Provide a
secondary, concrete slab vaulted encasement in all cases where such condition cannot be avoided.
Page 17 of 429
PART 5 PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.1 GENERAL EXECUTION
A. Inspection
1. Examine conditions under which equipment is to be installed. Notify Architect in writing of

conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until
unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
B. Installation
Install as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable codes and
regulations and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that installation
complies with requirements and serves intended function.
Coordinate as necessary to interface installation with other work.
2.2 SLEEVES
A. Provide sleeves for each pipe passing through walls, partitions, floors and roofs except multiple
pipe penetrations may be accommodated in a common boxed opening. Provide code complying
packing, caulking or cement fill between pipes and edges of boxed openings.
B. Pack and/or caulk space between pipe or pipe insulation and sleeve as indicated in sleeve
application schedule below. Finish with smooth appearance even with sleeve surface.
C. Sleeve and Sleeve Caulking Application Schedule:
Sleeve Type Location Sleeve Caulking and Packing

Type
5 Membrane waterproof floor, roof and wall 2 by another trade
Note: Membrane construction
2 Non-membrane water-proof wall construction 1 or 2
where flashing is required
1 or 2 Interior walls, partitions and floors 2
3 or 4 Exterior Walls 1
2 Interior fire rated shaft walls 3
D. Sleeve Sizes:
For Uninsulated Piping: two pipe sizes larger than pipe passing through sleeve or a minimum of
1/2" clearance between inside of sleeve and outside of pipe.
Page 18 of 429
E. Sleeve Length Schedule:
Location Sleeve Length
Floor Slabs Equal to depth of floor construction including finish; in waterproof floor
construction, sleeves to extend minimum of 2" above finished floor level.
Roof Slabs Equal to depth of roof construction including insulation plus 4".
Provide threaded or caulked counter flashing to extend down
over roofing membrane on pipe.
Walls and Equal to depth of construction and
Partitions terminated flush with finished surfaces.
2.3 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Provide escutcheons on all exposed piping through walls, partitions, floors and ceilings.
Escutcheon inside diameter to closely fit pipe outside diameter or insulation outside diameter
where pipe is insulated. Cover penetration hole in construction.
B. Escutcheon Application Schedule:

Location Type
Finished Spaces Anodized aluminum, chrome plated brass
Unfinished Spaces Plain brass, cast iron or
Excluding mechanical aluminum equipment room
2.4 PAINTING
A. CLEAN equipment, material, piping etc. inside and outside by effective and approved methods
to remove loose mill scale, blisters, sand, plaster, paint dropping, debris, dirt, oil, grease, labels,
and all foreign matter. Clean and brush work in stages as directed before painting or concealing.
Page 19 of 429
B. SURFACES TO THE BE PAINTED: clean with wire brush and cleaning solution. Do not apply
paint to wet or damp surface.
C. BLACK STEEL PIPING including flanges, bolts, nuts, cast iron valves and accessories, valve
wheels and all ferrous parts to be painted with two coats of zinc chromate primer whether or not
they are to be insulated. When bare or exposed to view, they are to be further painted with two
coats of approved oil paint.
D. PIPING run in trenches, shafts, underground or outdoors, including flanges, bolts, nuts, valves
and all ferrous parts to be painted with two coats of zinc chromate primer and two coats of heavy
bituminous solution paint.
E. PIPING when directed by the Engineer piping in machine room is to be painted to conform to
the ASME colour code. Alternatively stencil pipes to show service, size and direction of flow.
Insulated pipes to be colour coded and stencilled over the external jacket.
F. HANGERS AND SUPPORTS including clamps, rods, bolts, nuts etc. are to be painted with two
coats of zinc chromate primer and where exposed to view with two additional coats of approved
oil paint.
G. DAMAGED SURFACES of equipment to be restored to original condition by cleaning and

painting as directed.
H. UNFINISHED SURFACES to be painted as directed.
I. Hot SURFACES to be painted with approved heat resistant paint.
J. APPLY PAINT in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.
END OF SECTION 210500

ASAYEL AL-OMRAN ARCHITECTS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION KNOWLEDGE ECONOMIC CITY – KEC
SECTION 210519 – Meters and Gages for Fire-Suppression Systems
SECTION 210519
Meters and Gages for Fire-Suppression Systems
1.0 INSTRUMENTS AND GAUGES
1.1 Pressure and Altitude Gauges
Generally, valve pressure gauges shall be installed at the following location
a) at each pump discharge and suction, both installed at the height,
b) on system pressurization equipment,
c) on each side of pressure reducing valve sets,
d) on closed expansion vessels,

Page 20 of 429
Gauges installed on fire protection water piping system shall be provided with gauge cock of straight pattern, ground
plug type with lever handle.
The pressure gauge range shall be chosen in such a way that the indicator will be situated near a middle position
during normal operating conditions. The gauge shall have an adjustable pointer.
Gauges shall be burden tube type to BS 1780, 100mm diameter, except those installed in platrooms which shall be
150mm diameter. gauges shall have enameled mild steel case with chrome bezel, substantial glass face, and
phosphor bronze bourdon tube. dial face shall be white with black scale graduation and numbering
Gauges shall have overall accuracy of one percent (1%) of scale range.
Gauge shop drawing and gauge shall be approved by the engineer and gauges shall all be of the same manufacture.
Gauges shall comply with the following schedule:
1.5 2.5 3.0 4.5 10 (bar) Pressures
0-3 0-5 0-6 0-10 0-20 (bar) Gauge range
0.5 1 1 1 2 (bar) Figure intervals
100 100 100 100 500 (mbar) Intermediate
1.2 Fire pump flow meters:
UL listed and FM approved Fire pump flow meter to be venturi type with carbon steel body, with rated pressure of for
500 psi with butt-weld, grooved, or class 300-flanged connections.
Minimum range of flow meter shall be at least twice the rated flow rate capacity of the fire pump, with a minimum
accuracy of 2% of the actual flow rate.
1.3 AIR VENTING AND SEPARATION
Manual air vents shall be provided at all high points in piping systems (including devices connected into piping
systems) or wherever air can be trapped. "High Points in Piping Systems" are defined as any points in the piping
system in which the piping or equipment on either side of that point drops below that point thus forming a pocket.
A globe valve shall be provided on the connection between main and air vent.
Page 21 of 429
Air vents and globe valves shall have the same pressure rating as specified for the valves for the various piping
systems.
A DN 15 drain line shall be run from each air vent to the nearest open drain with discharge arranged so that it is
readily accessible and visible.
All air vents shall be numbered and labelled and a schedule shall be prepared and presented showing the vent
number and location as for valve schedules.
1.4 AUTOMATIC AIR VENTS
Automatic air vents shall only be installed where particularly indicated on the drawings. Vents shall have a float and
integral valve plug with seat to discharge chamber. The discharge chamber shall have a tapped port for drain line
extension.
An isolating globe valve shall be installed between the main and the air vent and both shall be pressure rated for the
system. Drain lines shall be extended to the nearest open drain.
SECTION 210529
HANGERS AND SUPPORT FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION PIPING & EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
Page 22 of 429
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and special Conditions, apply to work of
this section.
B. Common Work Results for Fire Suppression, Section 210500, applies to work of this Section.
C. The requirements of this section apply to equipment specified elsewhere in the specification.
A. Provide seismic restraining type support systems for all floor and ceiling mounted mechanical and
electrical equipment, piping, panels, and etc. in accordance with these specifications, the contract
drawings and drawing supplements.
B. Provide seismic restraining type vibration isolation systems to eliminate transmission of movement from
the equipment to the structure or connected piping or conduit systems. All vibration isolation devices to
be of the seismic restraint type.
C. All reference herein to methods and techniques of equipment support apply to Mechanical, fire
protection systems.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of products of types and capacities required
and described herein, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than
10 years.
B. Provide products produced by a single manufacturer.
C. Standard Compliance: Federal Spec. WW-H1716, ASA Code for Pressure Piping, ASTM A 575-73,
MSS SP-58-67, MSS SP-69-66, ANSI Code for pressure piping.
D. All hanging, restraining and isolating methods and techniques to be as indicated on the documents, in
NFPA Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Mechanical Systems 1994 Edition, NFPA 13, 1994 UBC,
ANSI A58.1, 1981, Title 24 CAC, GSA, and ATC-3. Where techniques are proposed that deviate from
those detailed in the contract documents, they must be clearly detailed and stamped by a Professional
Engineer as indicated under submittals.
Page 23 of 429
1.28 MANUFACTURER'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic control equipment to have the following responsibilities:
1. Determine vibration isolation and seismic restraint sizes and locations.
2. Provide piping and equipment isolation systems and seismic restraints as
scheduled or specified.
3. Guarantee specified isolation system deflection.
4. Provide installation instructions, drawings and field supervision to assure
proper installation and performance.
5. Purchased and/or fabricated equipment must be designed to safely accept
external forces of ½ G load in any direction for all rigidly and resiliently
supported equipment, and piping without failure and permanent
displacement of the equipment. Life safety equipment such as fire pumps,
sprinkler piping, and machinery, must be capable of safely accepting
external forces up to ½ G load in any direction without permanent
displacement. Substitution of "Internally Isolated" mechanical equipment in
lieu of the specified isolation of this section must be approved for individual
equipment units and is acceptable only if above acceleration ratings are
certified in writing by equipment manufacturer and stamped by a licensed
civil or structural engineer.
1.29 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data including printed technical literature and catalog cuts,
indicating maximum loads, dimensions, and recommended installation procedures.
B. Indicate locations of vibration isolation, inserts, anchors, and guides on piping shop drawings.
C. Submit for review full detailed drawings and calculations indicating all proposed deviations to the
methods and devices specified in the contract documents. These drawings and calculations to be
stamped by a Structural or Civil Professional Engineer attesting to the adequacy of the device or
Page 24 of 429
method to restrain the equipment without failure while subject to an external lateral force of ½ G
acceleration.
D. Samples when requested.
PART 2 – PRODUCTS
2.5 PRODUCT GENERAL
A. It is the objective of this specification to provide the necessary design for the control of excessive noise
and vibration in the building due to the operation of machinery or equipment, and/or due to
interconnected piping or conduit.
B. The installation of all vibration isolation units, and associated hangers and bases, to be in accordance
with the details of the vibration isolation manufacturer.
C. All vibration isolators to have either known non-deflected heights or calibration markings so that, after
adjustment, when carrying their load, the deflection under load can be verified, thus determining that the
load is within the proper range of the device and that the correct degree of vibration isolation is being
provided according to the design.
D. All isolators to operate in the linear portion of their load versus deflection curve. Load versus deflection
curves to be furnished by the manufacturer and must be linear over a deflection range of not less than
50% above the design deflection.
E. The theoretical vertical natural frequency for each support point, based upon load per isolator and
isolator stiffness, not to differ from the design objectives for the equipment as a whole by more than
+/-10%.
F. All neoprene mountings to have a Shore hardness of 30 to 60 +/-5, after minimum aging of 20 days or
corresponding oven-aging
2.6 PIPE SUPPORT PRODUCT SCHEDULE
A. Provide pipe supports and components in accordance with the following schedule:
Page 25 of 429
ITEM MANUFACTURE MAKE
Variable Spring Hanger 51,52,53
(Single & Double Rod and Base)
180o Shield 40
Pipe Saddle 39 A or B
Beam Clamp 28
Welded Beam Attachment 22
Clevis Hanger 1
Clevis Roller Hanger 43
Two Rod Roller Hanger 41
C.I. Roll Stand 44
Adjustable C.I. Roll Stand 46
Adjustable Pipe Stanchion 38
Single Bolt Riser Clamp 8
Double Bolt Pipe Clamp 3
U-Bolts 24
Welded Steel Bracket 32,33

Page 26 of 429
Insert 18
Continuous Slotted Insert 18
Seismic Pipe Clamp 4
B. Provide a factory applied Zinc Chromate coating on all hanger components including rods, inserts,
clamps, stanchions, and brackets. Field touch-up damaged painting with Zinc Chromate repair paint.
C. Provide hangers, rods, clamps and straps with a non-metallic coating, for electrolytic protection,
especially designed for copper tubing.
D. Provide pipe alignment guides of carbon steel having four machined guiding fingers and a guiding
cylinder.
E. The structural engineer must approve method of hanging before work is started. The contractor under
this Section is responsible for materials and workmanship as described in this Section, and must make
sure that all hangers and supports are properly and permanently connected to building structure. All
structural hanging materials, except variable spring units, must have a safety factor of 5 built-in.
2.7 EQUIPMENT RESTRAINT
A. Restrain equipment and components to safely accept a ½ G external lateral force without failure while
maintaining all equipment, piping, and conduit, etc. in a captive position. Seismic restraints not to short
circuit isolation systems or transmit objectionable, non-rotating or reciprocating vibration noise.
Restraint systems to be Types I, II, III, IV or V as described herein.
B. No cast-iron legs may be used unless indicated on the equipment shop drawings and approved prior to
purchase.
Page 27 of 429
C. Seismic Restraint Types:
1. Restraint, Type I: To comply with general characteristics of spring isolators
having a minimum O.D. to O.H. of .8 to 1 and minimum runout of 50% to
solid. To incorporate built-in snubbing restraint in all directions. To be
capable of supporting equipment at a fixed elevation during equipment
erection. Cast or aluminum housings, unless ductile iron, are not
acceptable. System to be field bolted or welded to deck with ½ G
acceleration capability.
2. Restraint, Type II: Each corner or side to incorporate a seismic restraint
having a minimum 5/8" thick resilient pad limit stops working in all directions.
Restraints to be made of plate, structural members or square metal tubing
concentric within a welded assembly incorporating resilient pads. Angle
bumpers are not acceptable. System to be field bolted or welded to deck
with ½ G acceleration capability.
3. Restraint, Type III: Metal cable type with approved end fastening devices to
equipment and structure. See details on drawings. System to be field
bolted to deck or overhead structural members using two sided beam
clamps to steel or appropriately designed insert for concrete. All parts of
system including cables, clamps, excluding fastenings are to be single
vendor furnished to assure seismic compliance. When Type III system is
used with isolated equipment slack with 1/2" cable deflection.
4. Restraint, Type IV: Double deflection neoprene isolator encased in ductile
iron or steel casing minimum .30 static deflection. System to be field bolted
or welded to deck with ½ G acceleration capacity.
5. Restraint, Type V: Non-Isolated equipment to be field bolted or welded
(powder shots not acceptable) to structure to resist seismic forces specified.
Bolt diameter and imbedment data must be shown in certified calculations
stamped by a licensed engineer.
2.8 VIBRATION ISOLATION

Page 28 of 429
A. Isolate all floor or ceiling mounted reciprocating equipment and all rotating equipment above 2 hp from
the structure by use of seismic restraint type vibration isolators of a design not requiring separate
directional snubbers except where indicated. Manufacturer's rail or base mounted packaged equipment
may be rigidly restrained to concrete housekeeping pads if isolators of the type specified herein are
factory installed between the equipment and the base.
B. Vibration Isolator Types:
1. Spring isolators to incorporate the following:
a. Minimum diameter of 0.8 of the loaded operating height.
b. Corrosion resistance where exposed to corrosive environment with:
1. Springs cadmium plated or electro-galvanized.
2. Hardware cadmium plated.
3. All other metal parts hot-dip galvanized.
c. Reserve deflection (from loaded to solid height) of 50% of rated
deflection.
d. Minimum 1/4" thick neoprene acoustical base pad on underside,
unless designated otherwise.
e. Designed and installed so that ends of springs remain parallel and
all springs are installed with adjustment bolts.
f. Non-Resonant with equipment forcing frequencies or support
structure natural frequencies.
2. Spring hanger rod isolators to incorporate the following:
a. Spring element seated on a steel washer within a neoprene cup
incorporating a rod isolation bushing.

Page 29 of 429
b. Steel retainer box encasing the spring and neoprene cup.
3. (Same as Seismic Restraint, Type IV):
a. Double deflection neoprene isolator encased in ductile iron or steel
casing minimum .30 static deflections. System to be field bolted or
welded to deck with ½ G acceleration capacity.
4. Elastomer hanger rod isolators to incorporate the following:
a. Molded unit type neoprene element with projecting bushing lining
rod clearance hole.
b. Neoprene element to be minimum 1-3/4" thick.
c. Steel retainer box encasing neoprene mounting, capable of
supporting equipment or piping up to four times the rated load in
case of isolator failure.
d. Clearance between mounting hanger rod and neoprene bushing
shall be minimum of 1/8".
e. Minimum static deflection of 0.35".
5. Combination spring/elastomer hanger rod isolators incorporating the
following:
a. Spring and neoprene isolator elements in a steel retainer box.
Neoprene element to be double deflection type with a minimum
thickness of 1-3/4". Single deflection elements are unacceptable.
Springs must be seated in a neoprene cup with extended rod
bushing through bottom of box.
b. Characteristics of spring and neoprene as described in Type A and
Type E isolators.
Page 30 of 429
6. Pad type elastomer mountings to incorporate the following:
a. 0.75" minimum thickness.
b. 50 psi maximum loading.
c. Ribbed or waffled design.
d. Minimum 0.10" deflection per pad thickness.
e. 1/16" galvanized steel plate between multiple layers or pad
thickness is required if multiple layers are used.
f. A suitable bearing plate to distribute load must be located on top
pad layer if equipment support cover 3/4 of the pad area or less.
a. Laminate canvas duck and neoprene.
b. Maximum loading 1000 psi.
c. A suitable bearing plate to distribute load must be located on top
pad layer if equipment support covers 3/4 of the pad area or less.
d. Minimum thickness to be 1/2".
8. Isolated Clevis:
a. Vibration isolation manufacturer to provide an isolated clevis
hanger for pipe support that combines a unit clevis or rod roller
hanger and a Type (C, E or F) isolation hanger into one assembly.
System to be pre-compressed to allow for rod insertion and
standard leveling.
b. Deflections and type to be as listed in "Equipment Installation" in
Part 3 of this section
9. Rail Type Spring Isolators:
Page 31 of 429
a. Rail type spring isolators to provide steel members of sufficient
strength to prevent flexure during equipment operation.
b. Springs to be the same as Type A with seismic restraint Type II or
seismic restraint Type I or IV isolation.
10. Pipe Anchors:
a. Vibration isolator manufacturer to provide an all directional
acoustical pipe anchor, consisting of a telescopic arrangement of
two sizes of steel tubing separated by a minimum 1/2" thickness of
heavy duty neoprene and duck or neoprene isolation material.
Vertical restraints to be provided by similar material arranged to
prevent vertical travel in either direction. Allowable loads on the
isolation material not to exceed 500 psi and the design to be
balanced for equal resistance in any direction. Isolation to be
bolted or welded to structure.
2.9 EQUIPMENT BASES
A. Integral Structural Steel Base.
1. Reinforced as required to prevent base flexure at equipment start-up and
misalignment of driver and driven units. Centrifugal fan bases complete with
motor slide rails drilled for driver and driven unit mounting template.
2. Must be utilized with seismic restraint Types I, II or IV.
B. Concrete Inertia Base.
1. Vibration isolator manufacturer to furnish rectangular structural concrete
forms for floating foundation. Bases for split case pumps to be large enough
to provide support for suction and discharge base elbows. The base depth
Page 32 of 429
to be a minimum of 1/10 of the longest span, but not less than 5" or greater
than 14". Forms shall include minimum concrete reinforcement consisting of
1/2" bars or angles welded in place on 6" centers running both ways. A
layer 1-1/2" above the bottom and an additional top layer of reinforcing steel
as above for all bases exceeding 120" in one direction. Isolators to be set
into pocket housings which are an integral part of the base construction and
set at the proper height to maintain a 1" clearance below the base. Bases to
be furnished with templates and anchor bolt sleeves as part of this system.
C. Isolated Curb.
1. Curb mounted rooftop equipment to be mounted on structural spring
isolation curbs that directly sit on roof construction and are flashed and
water-proofed into roof's membrane waterproofing system. Manufacturer's
curb shall not be used.
2. All spring locations to have removable waterproof covers to allow for spring
adjustment and/or removal.
3. Curbs to be sound attenuating type which will utilize standard 2" roof
insulation installed by the roofer for sound attenuation or will require 2" of
interior lining if specifically noted on schedules or drawings.
4. All spring mounts to be as Isolator.
5. Curbs to be rated for ½ G of acceleration and shall be wind restrained for
110 mph wind loads.
6. Curbs to have NRCA approval.
7. Package Options:
a. Curbs to include a means of incorporating a sound barrier package,
Type SBC-3 consisting of two layers of waterproof sheetrock. This
barrier to be supplied and installed in the field by the appropriate
contractor.
Page 33 of 429
b. An elevation kit, to allow for up to 8" of roof pitch.
8. Curbs to be welded or bolted to building steel or bolted to concrete decks to
attain acceleration criteria. Curbs to be Type P-6000 having a minimum of 3"
rated static deflection.
D. Roof Isolation Rail System.
1. Rooftop fire protection systems to be installed on continuous equipment
support piers which will combine a regular equipment support and an
isolation system into one assembly.
2. The system to be designed with 2" (or 3") static deflection steel springs
which are both adjustable, removable and interchangeable after equipment
has been installed.
3. Rails to use type spring mounts.
4. The system to maintain the same operating and installed height both with
and without the equipment load and to be fully restrained during wind load
conditions allowing no more than 1/4" motion in any direction.
5. The isolation pier to be designed to accept membrane waterproofing.
6. The entire assembly to be dry galvanized or plastic coated.
7. System design must permit a minimum of ½ G of acceleration.
8. Curbs to be welded or bolted to building steel or bolted to concrete decks to
attain acceleration criteria.
9. System to be Model R-7000 as manufactured by Mason Industries or
approved equal.
E. Isolated Rail Base.
1. Rails to be constructed from structural steel angles as required to prevent
flexure and misalignment under load.
2. Each rail to be the full length of the supported equipment and be welded to a
series of vertically restrained spring isolators described above.

Page 34 of 429
3. Angles to have bolt together ties at the ends and center to form one rigid
base platform.
4. System to be bolted or welded to deck and shall be designed for minimum ½
G of acceleration.
5. Mason Type TRSLR, or approved equal.
F. Non-Isolated Curb.
1. Non-Isolated curb mounted rooftop equipment to be mounted on structural
curbs that meet 1 G acceleration criteria.
2. Curbs to accept standard 2" roof insulation installed in the field by the roofer
and be waterproofed in accordance with NRCA Standard.
3. Curbs to be welded or bolted to building steel or bolted to building steel or
bolted to concrete decks to attain acceleration criteria.
4. Curbs to be Type B-6000 by Mason or approved.
2.10 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS
A. Elastomer
1. Manufactured of nylon tire cord and EPDM, both molded and cured in
hydraulic presses.
2. Straight connectors to have two spheres reinforced with a molded-in,
external ductile iron ring between spheres.
3. Flexible elbows to be long radius reducing type.
4. Rated 250 psi at 170oF dropping in a straight line to 170 psi at 250oF for
sizes 1-1/2" to 12", elbows to be rated no less than 90% of straight
connections.
Page 35 of 429
5. Sizes 10" to 12" to employ control cables with neoprene end fittings isolated
from anchor plates by means of 1/2" bridge bearing neoprene bushings.
6. Minimum safety factor, 4 to 1 at maximum pressure ratings.
7. Connectors bolted to victaulic type couplings or gate, butterfly or check
valves to have a minimum of 5/8" flange spacer installed between connector
and coupling flange.
8. Submittals to include test reports.
9. Connectors are Type MFTNC Superflex, by Mason, or approved equal.
B. Flexible End Grooved Couplings, by Victulic Company or approved equal.
C. Flexible Stainless Hose
1. Stainless steel braided flexible metal hose.
2. 2" pipe size and smaller with male nipple fittings.
3. 2-1/2" and larger pipe size with fixed steel flanges.
4. Suitable for operating pressure with 3:1 minimum safety factor.
5. Lengths are as shown on drawings.
Mason Type BSS, or approved equal.
D. Unbraided Exhaust Hose
1. Low pressure stainless steel annularly corrugated.
2. Fitted with flanged ends.
3. Maximum temperature 1500oF.
Mason Type SDL-RF, or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Page 36 of 429
A. Hangers or clamps installed in contact with copper or brass pipe, to be of copper or provide lead or fiber
shields between iron hangers and clamps to prevent electrolytic corrosion.
B. Furnish and install auxiliary steel required for pipe supports. Chain straps, perforated bars, wire
hangers or expansion shields are not permitted.
C. Prime Paint: all black iron hangers to be installed underground, including rods, inserts, clamps,
stanchions, brackets, etc., with zinc chromate, before installation.
D. Anchor points: provide to permit the piping system to expand and contract freely in opposite directions
from the anchored points. Anchors may be double bolt riser clamps and shall be located halfway
between guide points and no less than 1 per 100-foot run.
E. Guide points: Locate in piping system on either side of expansion joints and, or loops, as specified
herein and shown on drawings to permit free axial movement only in pipe main runs. Elbows at ends of
straight pipe runs flanking expansion joints or loops are considered expansion joints.
F. Trapeze hangers with suspension rods having double nuts and securely attached to the construction in
an approved manner may be used in lieu of separate clevis hanger.
G. Maximum weights on hanger rods assuming a maximum operating temperature of 450oF to be such
that stress in tension will not exceed 9000 psi the root area of threaded portion.
H. Minimum hanger rod sizes:
Rod Size Pipe Size
9.53 mm (3/8 inch) Up to 2 inches
12.7 mm (1/2 inch) 2-1/2 to 3-1/2 inches
Page 37 of 429
15.88 mm (5/8 inch) 4 to 5 inches
19.05 mm (3/4 inch) 6 inches
I. Conventional Hanger Locations Schedule for Horizontal Pipes:
J. The following schedule is for conventional, non-seismic type hangers. See plans for seismic restrained
hanger location schedule which may replace the conventional hangers at those locations. All other
conventional hangers are required.
1. Steel pipe and Conduit:
a. Below 1-1/4": Support a maximum of 8 feet (1.5 m) intervals.
b. 1-1/4" and over: Support a maximum of 10 feet (3.0 m) intervals.
2. Copper tubing:
a. 1-1/4 inch" over: Support a maximum of 10 feet (3.0 m) intervals.
b. Below 1-1/4": Support a maximum of 8 feet (1.5 m) intervals.
3. Branch piping 5 feet and longer: Provide separate supports.
K. Conventional Support Locations Schedule for Vertical Pipes:
1. Threaded pipe:
a. At every other story height.
2. Copper tubing:
a. At each story height but not more than 10 ft intervals.

Page 38 of 429
L. Connect pipe hangers and anchors to the building structure as follows:
1. Support piping only from building structural steel or approved galvanized
steel inserts embedded in poured concrete.
2. Where piping revisions are required and are approved after slabs are
poured, piping 3 inches and smaller may be supported at intermediate points
by "Phillips," or other approved 3/4 inch expansion bolts and shields,
provided main supports are not less than 20 ft on centers.
3. Attach intermediate supports for piping 4 inches and larger to concrete
beams or columns by means of 4" x 3/8" thick clip knee angles with 3/4 inch
expansion bolt in shear (horizontal) and supporting rod at 90 degrees from
anchor bolt.
M. Isolation and seismic systems must be installed in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.
Vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment or piping resulting in piping
stresses or misalignment.
N. Mechanical equipment to be isolated from the building structure by means of noise and vibration
isolators as scheduled on the drawings.
O. All piping 2" and over located in mechanical equipment rooms and run from connected equipment for 50
feet, to incorporate isolation hangers.
P. All mechanical fire protection piping system and vertical risers to be isolated from the building structure
by means of noise and vibration isolation guides and supports as described herein.
Q. Each motor assembly to be supported on a single structural steel frame.
3.2 SEISMIC BRACING EXECUTION
Page 39 of 429
A. All equipment whether isolated or not to be bolted to the structure to allow for minimum 1 G of
acceleration. Bolt points, diameter of inserts, and imbedment depth to be submitted as part of the
submission for each piece of equipment and certified by a licensed civil or structural engineer.
B. All structurally suspended, overhead equipment, isolated or non-isolated, to be four point independently
braced seismic restraining system.
C. Install seismic restraining system for overhead suspended non-isolated equipment, piping, electrical
conduit and slack with 1/2" cable deflection for isolated systems.
D. Seismically restrain all piping and electrical conduit with restraining system in accordance with the
following schedule:
1. Water Pipe and Electrical Conduit, Schedule 10, 20, or 40 Weld or Victaulic:
a. Lateral Brace: Maximum 40 feet intervals.
b. Longitudinal Brace: Maximum 80 feet intervals.
2. Gas, Fuel, Oil:
b. Maximum 40 feet intervals.
E. Place floor mounted equipment on 4" high concrete housekeeping pads properly doweled or expansion
shielded to deck to meet acceleration criteria. Mount vibration isolating devices and related inertia
blocks on concrete pad. Concrete work specified in Division 3.
F. Seismic restraints are not required for the following:
1. Gas piping less than 1" I.D.
2. Piping and conduit in boiler and MER rooms less than 1-1/4" I.D.
Page 40 of 429
3. Other piping less than 2-1/2" I.D.
4. All rectangular ducts less than 6 sq.ft. in cross sectional area.
5. All round ducts less than 28" in diameter.
6. All piping suspended by individual clevis hangers 12" in length or less from
the top of the pipe support to the bottom of the support for the hanger.
7. All top supported ducts suspended by hangers 12" or less in length from the
top of the duct support to the bottom of the support for the hanger.
G. Chimneys and stacks passing through floors are to be bolted at each floor level or secured above and
below each floor with riser clamps.
H. Chimneys and stacks running horizontally to be braced every 30 feet with an approved restraining
system.
I. For overhead supported equipment, overstress of the building structure must not occur. Bracing may
occur from:
1. Flanges of structural beams.
2. Upper or lower truss chords in bar joist construction at the panel points.
3. Cast in place inserts or drilled and shielded inserts in concrete structures.
J. Pipe risers through cored shafts require no further seismic bracing. (Core diameter to be maximum 2"
larger than pipe O.D.)
3.3 PIPING ISOLATORS
A. All piping, except fire standpipe systems and electrical conduits, are included under this section.
B. Installation:
1. Isolate piping outside the shafts as follows:

Page 41 of 429
a. All water piping in machine rooms.
b. Piping where exposed on roof.
c. Water piping and boiler breaching within 50 feet (or 100 diameters
if greater than 50 feet) from connected rotating equipment and
pressure reducing stations.
d. All water piping connected to reciprocating or rotating equipment up
to 50 ft. from equipment connection.
2. The isolators to be installed with the isolator hanger box attached to, or hung
as close as possible to, the structure.
3. The isolators to be suspended from substantial structural members, not from
slab diaphragm, unless specifically permitted.
4. Hanger rods to be aligned to clear and not short circuit the hanger box.
5. Horizontal suspended pipe 2" and smaller and all steam piping to be
suspended by isolators with a minimum of 3/8" deflection. Water pipe larger
than 2" to be supported with a minimum of 1" (or same static deflection for
the first three locations) as isolated equipment to which pipe connects,
whichever is greater.
a. Hanger can substitute for the above.
6. Horizontal pipe, floor supported at slab to be supported with a minimum
static deflection of 1" or same deflection as isolated equipment to which pipe
connects, whichever is greater.
7. Vertical riser guides, if required, to avoid direct contact of piping with
building.
Page 42 of 429
8. Pipe anchors, or guides where required, to utilize resilient pipe anchors,
Mason Industries Type or equivalent, to avoid direct contact of piping with
building.
9. Riser sway supports, where required, to utilize two neoprene elements to
accommodate tension and compression forces.
10. Pipe Extension and Alignment Connectors: Provide connectors at riser
takeoffs, and elsewhere as required, accommodating misalignment.
C. Isolator Position
1. As close to building structure as possible; direct bolting is optimal.
2. Between building structure and supplementary steel, if required.
3. Suspend isolators from rigid and massive support points.
4. Supplementary steel to be sized for a maximum deflection 0.08 inches at
center span.
5. Support water piping in shafts and floor supports entering shaft with isolator
or pads to prevent direct contact of piping with building structure.
6. Guide and anchor piping in shafts, as required, with approved mounting
designs incorporating pads to prevent direct contact of piping with building
structure.
D. Additional Isolator Requirements
1. The minimum operation clearance between the equipment frame or rigid
steel base frame and the housekeeping pad or floor to be 1". Minimum
operating clearance between concrete inertia base and housekeeping pad or
floor to be 2".
Page 43 of 429
2. The equipment structural steel or concrete inertia base to be placed in
position and supported temporarily by blocks or shims, as appropriate, prior
to the installation of the machine and isolators.
3. The isolators to be installed without raising the machine and frame
assembly.
4. After the entire installation is complete and under full operational load, to
adjust the isolators so that the load is transferred from the blocks to the
isolators and so that all isolators are barely free, remove shims.
5. Isolation mounting deflection to be the minimum specified or as scheduled
on the drawings.
6. Install equipment with flexibility in wiring connection.
7. Verify that all installed isolator and mounting systems permit equipment
motion in all directions. Adjust or provide additional resilient restraints to
limit equipment start-up lateral motion to 1/4".
8. Prior to start-up, clean out all foreign matter between bases and equipment.
Verify that there are no isolation short circuits in the base, isolators or
seismic restraints.
3.4 INSPECTION
A. On completion of installation of all vibration isolation devices herein specified, the factory representative
or Professional Engineer retained by the Contractor to inspect the completed system and report in
writing any installation error, improperly erected isolation devices or other faults in the system that could
affect the performance of the system. Contractor to submit a report to the Project Director, including the
manufacturer's representative’s final report, indicating all isolation reported as properly installed or
requiring correction. Include a report by the Contractor on steps taken to properly complete and correct
the isolation work.
SECTION 211200
Page 44 of 429
FIRE SUPPRESSION STANDPIPES
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and special Conditions, apply to work of
this section.
A. Work Includes: Providing all labor, material, equipment and service necessary to complete and make
ready for operation by the Owner, complete automatic Fire & Jockey packaged pump systems in
Accordance with drawings and specifications.
B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere
1. Electrical Wiring: Division 26
2. Concrete - Division 3
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacturer of Fire pump package Systems required,
whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with the requirements of National Fire Protection Association (NFPA),
VDE/DIN, IEC, BS, Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL), and Factory Mutual (FM), Local Building and
Fire Department rules and regulations.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
Page 45 of 429
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog data and brochures of equipment, and certification by
manufacturers indicating conformance to specific requirements and tests.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit materials, performance data, pump curves.
C. Calculation: Submit hydraulic calculations.
1.5 FIRE STANDPIPE HYDRANT AND HOSE REEL STATION
A. General:
1. Supply and install fire hose cabinets wherever shown and to the details indicated on the Drawings.
2. The fire hose reel shall be supplied with automatic stop valve & the cabinet shall be suitable for
recess-mounting.
3. The hose reel shall be mounted on a swinging arm with internal waterways which swings 180
degrees.
4. The swinging arm will have a dual function a) As a swinging & supportive arm, b) as the water
supply to the internal center of the drum.
5. The automatic stop valve opens to provide full capacity within just two revolutions of the reel.
6. The hose reel will be with side disc powder coated to RAL 3001 red gloss 15, or stainless steel
brushed or polished finish for doors & frames according to project architectural requirements.
7. Cabinet back-wall shall be made of 0.8 mm galvanized plate.
8. The hose reel shall be equipped with a Coupling System.
9. The hose reel shall be equipped with a jet/spray/shut-off nozzle.
10. The hose shall conform to EN694 standards for hose reels.
11. The Hose reel center parts shall be made of brass/plastic.
12. The hose reel shall be equipped with adjustable brakes.
13. Cabinet shall be equipped with door catches/release handle grip size.
14. Cabinets shall be supplied with coordinated knock-outs.
15. Cabinet shall have equipped with totally concealed hinges.
16. Door signs shall be in accordance with Council Directive 92/58/EEC.

Page 46 of 429
17. Hose Reel & cabinet shall be in accordance with EN-671-1 latest edition.
18. Hose Reel & cabinet shall be CE marked with copy of CE compliance certificate showing
registration no. Certificate to be included in technical submittal for approval.
19. Hose material shall be rubber or high strength PVC conforming to EN694 standards for hose reels.
20. Hose reel technical submittal must be accompanied by an illustration chart showing the capacity &
throw lengths.
B. At each valve hydrant station include the following items
1. 65 mm cast brass angle valve, all polished.
2. 65 mm cadmium plated steel escutcheon.
3. 65 mm pressure restricting DSIC. Where required polished brass.
4. 65 mm fire department hose and nozzle following fire brigade requirements and installed in cabinet.
5. 25 mm Hose, reel, nozzle and valve installed in recessed cabinet.
6. (As Shown on drawings).
C. FIRE HOSE LANDING VALVE
1. Fire hose landing valve shall be angle type, 300 psi (2070 Kpa) pressure regulating globe valve
complete with polished, chrome-plated brass body and trim, red cast iron wheel handle, bronze
stem, renewable composition disc, threaded 2 1/2" (65mm) psi female inlet and quick coupling
adapter outlet with polished brass chrome plated cap and chain. Landing valve shall be UL/FM with
thread adaptor to comply with local fire brigade requirements.
1.6 SIAMESE CONNECTIONS:
A. Free Standing Type
1. 90º angle body, polished brass floor plate, adapters, plugs and chains. Double clapper, 2-way size
as indicated on drawings; branded: "combination standpipe and sprinkler systems."
1.7 ROOF MANIFOLD

Page 47 of 429
A. Two-way rough brass roof manifold, complete with two valves, two caps and chains.
1.8 HYDRANTS
A. Free Standing Type
1. 90º- angle body, polished brass floor plate, adapters, plugs and chains. 2-way no clappers; size as
indicated on drawings; branded: "Hydrant."
B. Hydrant Control Valve
1. For each of the above specified hydrants furnish a square steel extension rod that has a special
coupling for attaching to a standard gate valve stem. Include cap and chain; escutcheon lettered
"hydrant control valve," polished brass.
1.9 AUTOMATIC BALL DRIP
A. Close against pressure and automatically drain line inside check valves.
1.10 STREET FIRE HYDRANTS
A. Dry barrel type street fire hydrants to be connected to the existing and extended pressurized
underground fire water main, hydrants shall be according to AWWA C502.
1.11 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
A. Pressurized Water
Page 48 of 429
1. 6 liters with heavy wall construction, stainless steel discharge lever and fixed carry handle with wall
bracket, chrome plated valve body with replaceable molded valve stem seal, UL rating 2A.
B. Dry Chemical (ABCD - Multi-Purpose)
1. Heavy duty steel cylinder with red enamel finish replaceable molded valve stem seals, metal valve
and siphon tube, with wall bracket UL rating 4A, 60 BC.
C. Carbon Dioxide
1. Heavy duty aluminum cylinder with red enamel finish with wall bracket, UL rating 5BC.
1.12 TAMPER SWITCH
A. Valve supervisory switches on all control valves throughout mounted not to interfere with the normal
operation of the valve and adjusted to operate within two revolutions of the valve control or when the stem
has moved no more than one-fifth of the distance from its normal position.
B. Switch mechanism in a weatherproof die cast aluminum box with a tapped conduit entrance and
incorporating the necessary facilities for attachment to the valve.
C. Switch housings finished in red baked enamel.
D. Entire installed assembly tamper-proof and arranged to cause a switch operation if the housing cover is
removed or if the unit is removed from its mounting.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.1 INSPECTION
Page 49 of 429
A. Examine conditions under which the fire standpipes are to be installed. Notify Architect in writing of
conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
2.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install fire standpipe system and accessories as indicated in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions, requirements of applicable Standards, and with recognized industry practices to ensure that
installation complies with requirements and serves intended function.
B. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of fire standpipe work with other work.
C. Temporary Fire Standpipe (by others, following all items required for temporary fire protection)
1. Concurrent with the erection of the superstructure, install the fire standpipe system at the stair
locations.
2. Provide a temporary Siamese connection and identify with a red light.
3. Interconnect the riser bases and provide for plugging or capping when work is not being done on
the system.
D. Combined Sprinkler and Standpipe System
1. All fire standpipe risers to have 0.S. & Y riser control valves with tamper switches.
2. For all Siamese connections provided a sign that indicates a combination fire standpipe and
sprinkler system.
3. Provide a pressure gauge at the top of each riser.
4. Schedule 5 or 10 and threaded lightweight steel pipe not permitted.
E. Fire Extinguishers
Page 50 of 429
1. Provide fire extinguishers in sizes and quantities so as to ensure the required protection throughout
the entire building.
2. Refer to the National Fire Protection Association Pamphlet Number 10, Portable Fire Extinguisher,
for design requirements. In general all public spaces and corridors shall be provided with a 6 kg
(13 lbs) dry chemical multi-purpose fire extinguisher. Location a maximum of 25M (82 feet) from
the furthest point of access (50M between two extinguishers).
3. Final location of fire extinguishers subject to approval of the local fire department.
F. Drains and Test Pipe
1. Provide valved section inside building, and at other locations indicated or requiring same for
complete drainage of systems. Siamese drains to be automatic ball drips. Other drains to be
valved and/or plugged as required.
2. Provide test pipes at top of risers, at ends of main runs inside building, at electrical alarm devices,
and at other indicated or required locations. Test pipes to be valved and piped to discharge
through proper orifice at approved locations.
3. Provide approved required accessories such as sight glass, gauges, etc.
2.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. During the progress of the work, test the fire standpipe system piping in the presence of the Engineer and all
other authorities in jurisdiction.
B. Test the piping in full accordance with local code requirements and NFPA Code requirements, but in no
case test at less than 14 bars (200 psig) hydrostatic pressure for less than 2 hours.
C. Repair or replace with new work defects disclosed by the tests. Tests to be repeated as directed, until all
work is proven satisfactory.
Page 51 of 429
D. Take due precautions to prevent damage to the building and its contents as a result of this test. Repair and
make good any damage caused by these tests.
E. During construction, properly cap all lines and equipment nozzles so as to prevent the entrance of sand, dirt,
etc. Each system of piping to be flushed (for the purpose of removing grit, dirt, sand, etc., from the piping for
as long as time as is required to thoroughly clean the system).
SECTION 211313
WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions, and Division-1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
Page 52 of 429
B. The requirements specified in this section apply to all related sections in this Division. The
requirements of all related sections, elsewhere in this division also apply to this section unless specified
to the contrary.
A. Work Includes: Providing all labor, material, equipment and services necessary to complete make
ready and set to work for acceptance by the Owner, a complete wet pipe sprinkler system throughout
and C02 extinguishing systems in accordance with drawings and specifications.
A. Acceptable manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacturer of Fire Suppression Systems
required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years as
approved by the Architect.
VDE/DIN, IEC, BS, Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL), and Factory Mutual (FM), Conrad Corporation
Fire Safety Standards, Local Building and Fire Department rules and regulations.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's catalog data and brochures of equipment and certification by
pump and motor manufacturers indicating conformance to specific requirements and tests.
C. Calculations: Submit hydraulic calculations for all systems.
Page 53 of 429
1. Hydraulic calculations for sprinkler systems to be submitted showing uniform water distribution and
to allow for friction loss in piping.
2. Density, area of sprinkler operation and water supply requirements to be in accordance with Table
2-2.1.1b of NFPA, Volume 13 for hydraulically designed sprinkler systems.
3. For dry pipe systems, increase the areas of sprinkler operation by 30% without revising density.
D. Certification: Submit the following
1. A certified test report showing actual reading taken during a factory-conducted test as a complete
unit by the pump manufacturer in conformance with the requirements of NFPA (1990) Pamphlet
No. 20 including a hydrostatic test to twice working pressure, but in no case to less than 17.5 bars
(250 psig).
2. A certified characteristic curve showing the pump performance based upon the results of the
factory test.
3. A plot of engine speed vs. pump capacity over the entire range from shutoff beyond 150 % of
design capacity.
E. Factory Test: Test the entire controller assembly prior to shipment including, but not restricted to, each
function the controller may be required to perform including remote alarms, remote start, automatic start
with manual shutdown, pressure drop start, manual start-stop; circuit breaker at 300 % full load, 600 %
full load, and short circuit current settings; and a high potential test of the controller power circuits at not
less than two times the rated voltage plus 1000 volts.
1.5 PIPE AND FITTING SCHEDULE
Service Pipe Fittings
All wet pipes 50mm and smaller Seamless black steel schedule 40 Threaded malleable iron 150 LB class
ASTM A 53 Grade “ A “ ANSI B 16.3 or schedule 40 butt-
welded fittings.
All wet pipes over 65 mm. Black steel schedule 40 ASTM A 53 Wrought steel butt welding ANSI B
grade A . 16.9 ( schedule 40 ),
Page 54 of 429
All wet pipes over 65 mm Black steel schedule # 40 roll or cut Optional grooved Fitting
grooved according ASTM-A53
1.6 VALVES
A. General: UL listed and FM approved, with minimum 1200-kPa (175-psig) non-shock working-pressure
rating. Valves for grooved-end piping maybe furnished with grooved ends instead of type of ends
specified.
B. Gate Valves, DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: UL 262; cast-bronze, threaded ends; solid wedge OS&Y and
rising stem.
C. Gate Valves, DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and larger: UL 262, iron body, bronze mounted, taper wedge, OS&Y,
and rising stem. Include replaceable, bronze, wedge facing rings, flanged ends, and integral indicating
device.
D. Swing Check Valves, DN50 (NPS 2) and Smaller: UL 312 or MSS SP-80, Class 150;
Bronze body with bronze disc and threaded ends.
E. Swing Check Valves, DN65 (NPS 2-1/2) and larger: UL 312, cast-iron body and bolted cap, with bronze
disc or cast-iron disc with bronze-disc ring and flanged ends.
F. Split-Clapper Check Valves, DN100 (NPS 4) and larger: UL 312, cast-iron body with rubber seal,
bronze-alloy discs, and stainless-steel spring and hinge pin.
G. Alarm Check Valves: UL 193, 1200-kPa (175-psig) working pressure, designed for horizontal or vertical
installation, with cast-iron flanged inlet and outlet, bronze grooved seat with O-ring seals, and single-
hinge pin and latch design. Include trim sets for bypass, drain, electric sprinkler alarm switch, pressure
gages, retarding chamber, and fill-line attachment with strainer.
1.7 SPRINKLER HEADS
Page 55 of 429
A. Spray type, with 1/2 nominal discharge orifice. Ordinary temperature rating 160o - 175o throughout
except where special conditions exist.
B. Spray type, with 3/4 nominal discharge orifice,11.2 k-factor, Ordinary temperature rating 160o - 175o for
the mechanical workshop area.
C. Types
1. Upright - Brass Finish
2. Pendent - Polished Chrome Finish
3. Concealed - Chrome Cover Plate
4. Sidewall (horizontal) - Polished Chrome Finish
5. Sidewall Horizontal Extended Coverage - Polished Chrome Finish.
6. Pendant -Rapid Response Model "G/HSW/EC4" (Glass Bulb)
1.8 WATERFLOW SWITCH
A. Vane-Type Water Flow Detectors installed on the sprinkler system piping as designated on the
drawings. Detectors designed for mounting on either vertical or horizontal piping, not to be mounted in
a fitting or adjacent to any fitting that changes the direction of water flow.
B. Having a sensitivity setting to signal any flow of water that equals or exceeds the discharge from one
sprinkler head. Detector switch mechanisms to incorporate an instantly recycling pneumatic retard
element with an adjustable range of 0 to 70 seconds.
C. Weatherproof dust tight construction and with a 12.7 mm conduit entrance, finished in red baked
enamel.
1.9 TAMPER SWITCH
A. Valve supervisory switches installed on all control valves throughout. Switches mounted so not to
interfere with the normal operation of the valve and adjusted to operate within two revolutions of the
valve control or when the stem has moved no more than one fifth of the distance from its normal
position.
Page 56 of 429
B. Switch mechanism contained in weatherproof die cast aluminum with a 25mm tapped conduit entrance
and incorporate the necessary facilities for attachment to the valve. Switch housings finished in red
baked enamel.
C. The entire installed assembly to be tampers proof and arranged to cause a switch operation if the
housing cover is removed or if the unit is removed from its mounting.
1.10 HANGERS
A. Sprinkler piping and risers to be substantially supported from the building structure. Types of hangers
and installation methods in accordance with the requirements of NFPA #13, Section 4-6.2.
B. Branch lines, not less than one hanger for each length of pipe.
C. Loops or Mains, at least one hanger between each two branch lines.
1.11 GAUGES
A. Provide a pressure gauge at each sprinkler floor control valve assembly.
B. Gauges: 11.5mm dial, cast brass case, shutoff cock, double spring, graduated to twice the working
pressure.
1.12 SIGNS AND SEALS
A. Furnish and install signs and seals as and where required by NFPA #13, and the Local Building and
Fire Authorities.
B. Sprinkler systems designed hydraulically to be provided with a sign adjacent to control valve assembly
indicating, hydraulic calculation data.
C. Signs to be located near the device in a conspicuous position.

Page 57 of 429
D. For type of signs and seals refer to NFPA # 13 appendixes "A” item A-4.7.1.1.4.
1.13 VALVE TAGS AND DIAGRAMS
A. Attach a brass tag with red numbers to each valve.
B. Provide a piping diagram of the sprinkler system: indicate the location of all control valves by number
and designating the purpose of each valve. Diagram and valve chart (with type of valve and location) to
be set under glass in red painted frames.
1.14 VALVES
A. All valves shall be UL/Underwriters Laboratory approved.
B. All pressure reducing valves shall be factory set and marked adjustable type and shall be provided with
a pressure gauge up and downstream with a maximum reading 350 kPa above maximum operating
pressure.
1.15 SPARE PARTS
A. Provide 50 spare sprinkler heads of the various types with wrenches neatly packaged in marked, hinged
cover, steel boxes.
B. Provide ten spare valves of each type and size up to 100mm and three of each size and type larger
than 100mm.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which the sprinkler systems are to be installed. Notify Architect in writing of
conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until
Page 58 of 429
2.2 INSTALLATION
A. Pipe and Fittings
1. Threads full and clean cut and burrs formed in cutting to be reamed. In screwing up the pipe, care
to be taken that the pipe does not extend into the fitting obstructing the waterway. Joint compound
applied to the threads of the pipe and not to the fittings or sprinklers. Pipe to be straightened
before installation to prevent pockets.
2. The use of threaded light weight, XL, Schedule 5 or 10, steel pipe throughout or in part is not
acceptable.
3. Do not use couplings except where pipe is more than 6M in length between fittings.
4. Utilize a one-piece reducing fitting wherever a change is made in the size. The use of bushings or
reducing flanges will not be permitted.
5. Where risers are 75mm in size or larger, provide a flange joint at the riser at each floor.
6. Unions: Heavy ground joint type and used only on pipes 50mm and smaller.
7. Grooved type couplings with grooved fittings may be used throughout or in part.
8. Provide unions at connections to each piece of equipment for dismantling. Unions to be of same
strength and manufacture used in the respective piping system and of ground joint type.
9. Shoulder nipples can be used, close nipples are not acceptable.
10. Break-away type fittings are not acceptable.
B. Valves
1. Control valves, pressure reducing valves, check valves, waterflow switches, pressure switches, to
be easily accessible for maintenance and removal.
2. Install valves only in the upright or horizontal position. Manufacturer's name and working pressure
identified on valve.
3. Install gate valves so they can be repacked while open and under pressure.
4. Provide gate valves 150mm and larger with a 50mm by-pass assembly.
C. Sprinkler Heads
1. Where headroom is low or where sprinklers are liable to be damaged in either the pendant or
upright position, protect by means of approved metal sprinkler guards.

Page 59 of 429
2. Install all upright sprinkler heads to be parallel to piping.
3. Install sprinkler heads tight to bottom of hung ceilings, with care that the finish is not damaged.
4. Locate sprinkler heads installed in ceiling tiles within a tolerance of + 12.7mm of the centerline of
the tile and to be coordinated with Architect.
5. Make concealed type sprinkler head cover plates flush with the ceiling plane to limit shadow effect.
Tolerances greater than + 3mm are unacceptable.
6. Install standard sidewall sprinkler heads a minimum of 100mm and a maximum of 300mm from the
ceiling. Exact location to be coordinated with Architect.
7. Install rapid/quick response sprinkler heads based upon the manufacturer's Underwriter's Listing.
D. Drains
1. Arrange the permanent installation of piping that all or any part of the work can be completely
drained. Pitch piping so as to drain to the drain riser or auxiliary drains.
2. Provide drain assemblies with a globe or angle type valve and spill to an receptacle without
flooding.
3. Drain risers, piping and fittings galvanized.
E. Inspector's Test Connections
1. Install 25mm diameter test assembly at each floor and system. Connections to terminate in an
outlet giving a flow equivalent to one operating sprinkler.
2. Assembly to include: Glove or angle valve, sight glass, 12.7mm orifice, union and all other
appurtenances required for a complete assembly.
A. Piping
1. Hydrostatically test sprinkler system under pressure of 13.8 bars for two hours.
2. When the installation of a floor system has been completed, test independent of the rest of the
building.
3. During the test period, the sprinkler system is not connected to the domestic water system.
Page 60 of 429
4. Disconnect devices, equipment and piping which are not designed for the test pressure and install
plugs and blind flanges to close openings.
5. Replace work found defective, after replacement, test work again as specified.
6. Keep a complete record of all test data, submit in triplicate.
7. After tests are completed, flush all piping at a flow rate using sufficient water to produce a minimum
velocity of 0.8 M/S. Continue until discharge water shows no discoloration, drain at low points.
8. After flushing and cleaning, prepare system for service by immediately filling piping.
PIPING AND FITTING MATERIAL FOR FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
A. Manufacturers: firms regularly engaged in manufacture of piping, fittings, and jointing materials of types
and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less
than 3 years. Provide products produced by a manufacturer listed as an Acceptable Manufacturer in
this section.
B. Cast, stamp or roll manufacturer's name on each pipe length, and cast stamp or roll manufacturer's
symbol and pressure rating on each fitting.
C. Standard Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, ANSI, ASTM, CS, CISPI or
approved equal and as follows:
Material Authority Spec. Number
Black Steel Pipe ASTM A 53-Grade "A" schedule 40.
Page 61 of 429
Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe ANSI A21.51, AWWA C158
Malleable Screwed Fitting-150 lb ANSI B16.3
class
Malleable Iron Screwed Fitting – 300 ANSI B16.3
lb. class
Cast Iron Screwed Drainage Fitting ANSI B16.12
Cast Iron Screwed Fitting ANSI B16.4
Wrought Steel Schedule 40 welding ANS B16.9
fittings
Cast Iron Flanged Fittings and ANSI B16.1
Flanges, Standard Weight Ductile AWWA C110
iron Fitting
2.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: submit manufacturer's data including printed technical literature, installation, instructions,
and catalog cuts for each type of pipe and pipe fitting.
B. Submit piping schedule showing manufacture, pipe or tube weight, fitting type, and joint type for each
piping system.
2.6 PIPING MATERIALS
A. Galvanized Steel Pipe
1. Pipe schedule 40 steel pipe .to ASTM A – 53
2. Fittings:
a. Galvanized malleable iron, flat band threaded steam pattern.
b. Grooved malleable iron.

Page 62 of 429
c. Threaded cast iron drainage pattern.
3. Joints:
a. Red or white lead and oil or approved pipe compound or Teflon tape on male threads.
b. Standard weight grooved with enameled malleable iron ribbed flex coupling; ASTM A47 with
Buna-N gasket. Victaulic Style 77 or Tyler #100 Standard.
c. Standard weight grooved joint with enameled malleable iron ribbed rigid coupling; ASTM A47
with Buna-N gasket. Victaulic Style 07 or approved equal.
B. Black Steel Pipe
1. Pipe: Schedule 40 steel pipes, ANSI B36.20 and ASTM A-53.
2. Fittings:
a. Standard malleable iron steam pattern fittings with flat band; ANSI B16.3 and B16.9.
b. Standard weight steel threaded, welds, flanged or grooved.
3. Joints:
a. Red or White lead and oil or other approved compound or Teflon tape on male threads.
b. Fuse welding.
c. Standard weight grooved with enameled malleable iron ribbed flex coupling; ASTM A47 with
Buna-N gasket. Victaulic Style 77 or Tyler #100 Standard or approved equal.
d. Standard weight grooved joint with enameled malleable iron ribbed rigid coupling; ASTM A47
with Buna-N gasket. Victaulic Style 07 or approved equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
Page 63 of 429
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General
1. Install pipes and pipe fittings as indicated on the plans and elsewhere in the specifications, in
accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve permanently leak-proof piping
systems, capable of performing each indicated service without piping failure. Install each run with
minimum joints and couplings, but with adequate and accessible unions for disassembly and
maintenance/replacement of valves and equipment. Align piping accurately at connections, within
1/16" misalignment tolerance.
2. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of piping, fittings, and jointing with other work.
3. Locate piping runs except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally (pitched to drain) and
avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Orient horizontal runs parallel with walls and column lines.
Locate runs as shown or described by diagrams, details and notations or, if not otherwise indicated,
run piping in shortest route which does not obstruct usable space or block access for servicing
building and its equipment. Hold piping close to walls, overhead construction, columns and other
structural and permanent-enclosure elements of buildings.
4. Do not run piping through electric rooms, electric spaces, electric closets, or other electrical or
electronic equipment spaces unless unavoidable, and specifically indicated on the plans, in which
case, install drip pan below and 12" beyond foot print of such piping. Spill drip pan drain on floor of
adjacent space where flow will be noticed. Do not spill to a receptacle.
5. Clean exterior surfaces of installed piping system of superfluous materials and prepare for
application of specified coatings (if any). During construction, properly cap all lines and equipment
nozzles so as to prevent the entrance of sand, dirt, etc. Each system of piping to be flushed prior
to testing for the purpose of removing grit, dirt, sand, etc., from the piping for as long as time as is
required to thoroughly clean the system.
6. Except for concrete, corrugated metal, hub-and-spigot, clay, and similar units of pipe, provide
factory-applied plastic end-caps on each length of pipe and tube. Maintain end-caps through
shipping, storage and handling as required to prevent pipe-end damage and eliminate dirt and
moisture from inside of pipe and tube. Where possible, store pipe and tube inside and protected
from weather. Where necessary to store outside, elevate above grade and enclose with durable,
Page 64 of 429
waterproof wrapping. Cap, plug or otherwise close ends of installed piping when not being worked
on to prevent the entrance of debris.
7. In erecting pipe, friction wrenches and risers shall be used exclusively, any pipe cut, dented or
otherwise damaged shall be replaced.
8. All fittings, unions and connections at pumps, tanks or other major equipment 2 1/2 inches and over
in size shall be assembled with flanged joints and approved gaskets.
9. Caulking of pipe joints to remedy leaks will not be permitted except on caulked piping.
B. Joints
1. Threaded pipe: In accordance with ANSI B2.1; cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream
threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint compound, or pipe
joint tape (Teflon) where recommended by pipe/fitting manufacturer, on male threads only at each
joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed.
2. Nipples: Any piece of pipe 8 inch in length and less shall be considered a nipple. All nipples with
unthreaded portion 1-1/2 inch and less shall be extra heavy. All other nipples shall be of weight
corresponding to fitting connected. Only shoulder nipples shall be used, close nipples will not be
acceptable.
3. Solder: In accordance with recognized industry practice. Cut tube ends squarely, ream to full
inside diameter, and clean outside of tube ends and inside of fittings. Apply solder flux to joint
areas of both tubes and fittings. Insert tube full depth into fitting, and solder in manner which will
draw solder full depth and circumference of joint. Wipe excess solder from joint before it hardens.
4. Weld: pipe joints in accordance with ASME Code for Pressure Piping, B31, and in accordance with
recognized industry practice and as follows:
a. Weld pipe joints only when ambient temperature is above 0oF (-18oC) where possible.
b. Bevel pipe ends at a 37.5o angle where possible, smooth rough cuts, and clean to remove
slag, metal particles and dirt.
c. Use pipe clamps or tack-weld joints with 1" long welds; 4 welds for pipe sizes to 10", 8 welds
for pipe sizes 12" to 20".
d. Build up welds with stringer-bead pass, followed by hot pass, followed by cover or filler pass.
Eliminate valleys at center and edges of each weld. Weld by procedures which will ensure
Page 65 of 429
elimination of unsound or unfused metal, cracks, oxidation, blow-holes and non-metallic
inclusions.
e. Do not weld-out piping system imperfections by tack-welding procedures; refabricate to comply
with requirements.
f. At Installer's option, install forged branch-connection fittings wherever branch pipe is indicated;
or install regular "T" fitting.
5. Flanged: Match flanges within piping system, and at connections with valves and equipment.
Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to provide uniform compression of gaskets.
3.2 INSPECTIONS AND TESTS
A. General
1. Examine conditions under which piping is to be installed. Notify Construction Manager and
Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with
work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
2. After installation, and prior to testing, insulating or painting inspect piping in accordance with
procedures of ASME B31. Inspect each run of each system for completion of joints, supports and
accessory items.
3. Do not put any systems in operation until they have been tested, inspected, and approved by all
authorities having jurisdiction. During the progress of the installation, notify the Owner's
representative and the authorities, at least 48 hours prior to such test or inspection. Set up and
prepare all tests in advance of scheduled test time. Perform all tests in the presence of a plumbing
official.
4. Submit to Owner signed copies of all test reports and approvals and maintain copy of same at site
until acceptance of the work.
5. During the progress of the work, pressure test the various piping systems including mains, risers,
branches and fixture roughing as directed or as required to permit insulation, general construction
and built-in rough work to proceed.
Page 66 of 429
6. Provide all apparatus and temporary work for tests. Take all due precautions to prevent damage to
the building or its contents as a result of such test. Pay for all such damage to the building or work
of other trades caused by such test. After testing, remove all water to prevent freeze-up.
7. After testing, remove and/or repair joints as required and retest. No caulking of pipe joints to
remedy leaks will be permitted except where lead and oakum joints are used.
8. Sprinkler Drainage Piping: fill with water to produce at least 20 feet head at highest point of section
tested. Let stand with no loss of level for a period of four hours.
9. Fire Standpipe and Sprinkler System: test in full accord with NFPA Code requirements but in no
case less than 200 psig hydrostatic pressure for a period not less than two hours.
3.3 PIPE APPLICATION SCHEDULE
PIPING MATERIAL FITTINGS & JOINTS APPLICATION
Galvanized steel pipe Galvanized malleable iron steam All sprinkler drain piping.
pattern.
Black steel pipe. Galvanized threaded malleable All fire standpipe and sprinkler
iron steam pattern. piping up to and including Diam.
50mm.
Black steel pipe Grooved plain malleable iron All fire standpipes and sprinkler
steam pattern, pipes over Diam. 50mm.
HDPE pressure pipes according Socket fusion thermal welded. All underground Fire Protection
to PN 16. piping system internal & exterior
networks.
VALVES FOR FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM
Page 67 of 429
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of products of types and capacities required,
whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3 years. Provide
valves produced by a manufacturer listed as an Acceptable Manufacturer in this section.
B. Name of manufacturer and working pressure cast or stamped on each valve.
C. Standard's Compliance:
1. Face-to-face and end-to-end dimensions flange and welded end valves comply with ANSI B16.10.
2. Forged Ball Valves: ASTM B-283 Alloy C37700.
3. Cast Brass Ball Valves: ASTM B-584 Alloy C84400.
4. Cast Iron Valves: MSS SP-70 and MSS SP-85.
5. Bronze Valves: MSS SP-80
6. Bronze 85-5-5-5, ASTM B62
7. Valve Identification: MSS SP-25
8. Bronze Check Valves: ANSI/ASTM B62/MSS SP-80
9. Cast Iron Check Valves: ANSI/ASTM A-126 Grade B/MSS SP-71
D. Valves to be the product of a single manufacturer wherever possible
3.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data including printed technical literature, installation, instructions,
and catalog cuts for materials, parts, devices, finish, maintenance manual and performance data where
applicable.
B. Manufacturers' Specifications and Engineering Data to Include:
1. Each type valve
2. Materials for all parts
3. Pressure ratings
Page 68 of 429
4. Schedule of major control valves, check valves and pressure reducing valves.
5. Certificates: Manufacturers certification that valves and accessories meet or exceed specification
requirements.
6. Maintenance data and spare parts list for each type valve. Include this data in maintenance
manual.
8. Cast Iron Check Valve: ANSI/ASTM A-126 Grade B/MSS SP-71
PART 4 - PRODUCTS
4.1 GENERAL
A. Furnish valves with IPS, soldered or flanged ends as required by the piping system in which they are
installed.
B. WOG pressure rating to be minimum 100 psi above maximum operating pressure of system.
C. All gate valve and globe valve packing gland assemblies to be designed for repacking while open and
under pressure.
D. All valves to have identification plates indicating name of manufacturer and working pressure.
E. All iron body valves to have enamel coated interior.
F. All gate type control valves shall be OS & Y with supervisory (tamper) switches.
G. Provide all valves at equipment with flanged ends on equipment side for easy removal.
H. All ball valves to be full port opening blow out proof stem, hard chrome plated forged brass ball.
I. Provide stop plug as renewable stop for disc hanger, construct disc and hanger as one piece and
support hanger by hanger pins with removable side plug for all swing check valves.
Page 69 of 429
4.2 SILENT CHECK VALVES
A. For each pump discharge line, provide Val-Matic 1800 BN.2 Series iron body stainless steel trim, center
guided disc with replaceable bushing, Buna-N seating for approves equal.
B. For each Siamese connection line, provide Val-Matic 500 Series biased swing-flex check valve for
approves equal...
4.3 BRANCH PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES
1 Single seat design, bronze body, 416 stainless steel trim, slotted piston type. Replaceable pressure
reducing insert top and bottom guided with union connections. Similar to JRG Model 1130 for approves
equal. Provide gate valve upstream accessible from access door 10 year guarantee.
PART 5 - EXECUTION
5.1 GENERAL
A. All valves to be installed only in upright or horizontal positions unless otherwise required by the
drawings.
B. All valves to be installed in accessible locations to facilitate easy removal for repair or replacement.
5.2 VALVE APPLICATION SCHEDULE
Valve Type Application
Gate Valves Control shut-off valve for all sprinkler fire protection systems.
Check Valves Swing type on Siamese connections except pump discharge lines. Non-slam
type on fire & jockey pump discharge lines.
5.3 INSTALLATION
Page 70 of 429
A. Install Class 125 valves in portions of system where water pressure does not exceed 100 psig. Install
Class 220 valves in portions of system where water pressure does not exceed 200 psig. Install Class
250 valves in portions of system where water pressure does not exceed 350 psig.
B. Provide valve box and cover on all valves for underground services.
C. Provide separate "Y" strainers upstream of all pressure reducing valves.
SECTION 211339
FOAM WATER SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of contract, including General and special conditions and Division -1,
“General requirements”, apply to work of this section.
A. Work includes: Providing all labor, material, equipment and service necessary to complete and make ready
for operation by the owner.
B. One fixed, self-contained, constant flow, induction type, foam system with oscillating monitors shall be
located on the helicopter landing pad. The system shall use film forming fluoroprotein (FFFP) foam
compounds at 3% induction. The specification is based upon the use of a Bell 222 helicopter type with an
overall length of 14.41 meters. The system shall be provided and installed strictly in accordance with local
fire and aviation regulations.
Page 71 of 429
C. All inter-connecting pipe work and supports shall be heavyweight galvanized mild steel to BS 1387.
D. For helicopter landing pad two oscillating foam monitors shall be provided each capable of delivering 50% of
the minimum foam solution required. The monitors shall be water driven from a connection from the building
combined fire stand pipe and sprinkler riser system.
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacturer of foam fire suppression systems required,
VDE/DIN, IEC, BS, Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), and factory mutual (FM), fire safety standards,
local building and fire department rules and regulations.
C. SUBMITTALS
D. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s catalog data and brochures of equipment indicating conformance
to specific requirements and tests.
E. Shop Drawings: Submit materials, performance data.
F. Calculations: Submit hydraulic calculations for the foam suppression system in accordance with NFPA
Volume 16.
G. Hydraulic calculations for foam systems to be submitted showing uniform foam distribution and to allow
for friction loss in piping.
H. Certification: Submit the following:
A certified test report showing actual reading taken during a factory.
Page 72 of 429
SECTION 212200
CLEAN AGENT FIRE EXTINGUISHING SYSTEM
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fire detection system.
B. Control and supervision systems.
C. FM200 storage and distribution suppression system.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Hardware: Release hardware for automatic closing doors.
B. Section 210500- General provisions for fire protection works.
C. Section 210548- vibration and seismic controls for fire-suppression piping and equipment.
D. Section 211313- Wet-pipe sprinkler Systems.
E. Section 211316- Dry-pipe sprinkler Systems.
F. Section 210519- Meters and Gages for Fire-Suppression Systems.
G. Section 262726 - Wiring Devices.
H. Section 260583 - Wiring Connections.
I. Section 284600 - Fire Detection and Alarm.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Class 150 and 300.
B. ANSI/ASME B16.9 - Factory Made Wrought Steel Butt welding Fittings.
C. ANSI/ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
D. ANSI/ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings.
Page 73 of 429
E. ANSI/ASME B31.1 - Power Piping.
F. ANSI/ASME SEC 8 - Pressure Vessels.
G. ANSI/ASME SEC 9 - Welding and Brazing Qualifications.
H. ANSI/AWS A5.8 - Specifications for Brazing Filler Metal.
I. ANSI/AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.
J. ANSI/NFPA 2001 - FM200 Fire Extinguishing Systems.
K. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electric Code.
L. ANSI/NFPA 72A - Local Protective Signaling Systems.
M. ANSI/NFPA 72E - Automatic Fire Detectors.
N. ASME B40.1 - Gauges - Pressure Indicating Dial Type-C Elastic Element.
O. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless.
P. ASTM A106 - Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service.
Q. ASTM A135 - Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe.
R. ASTM A234 - Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and Elevated
Temperatures.
S. ASTM B32 - Solder Metal.
T. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube.
U. FM - Factory Mutual Approval Guide.
X. NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems.
Y. UL - Fire Protection Equipment Directory.
Z. UL 393 - Indicating Pressure Gauges for Fire and Protection Services.
AA. UL 404 - Gauges, Indicating Pressure, for Compressed Gas Service.
1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design, fabrication, and installation: In compliance with requirements and recommendations of ANSI / NFPA 2001.
B. Fire Protection System: Total flooding of hazard area with 7 percent concentration by volume of FM200 in
max. 10 seconds discharge time, to extinguish fire.
Page 74 of 429
C. System is fixed installation with equipment designed and installed to provide fire-extinguishing capability for
underfloor & occupied area of areas shown and clarified in design drawings.
1.5 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide sufficient amount of FM200 liquid to convert into FM200 vapor. Consider the following when
computing volume:
1. Volume of hazard area.
2. Specific volume of FM200 vapor.
3. Additional quantities of FM200 required to compensate for openings, pipe losses, and nitrogen dilution.
4. Forced ventilation, fan coast downtime and damper actuation time.
5. Mechanical smoke control system.
6. Other special conditions affecting extinguishing efficiency.
B. Locate FM200 supply and backup supply in each hazard area.
C. Interface system with building fire alarm system, smoke control system & emergency power off system.
1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide total flooding of 7 percent FM200 concentration by volume, in maximum 10 seconds discharge time.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: To bear stamp of approval of authority having jurisdiction, Fire Marshall, Owner's fire
insurance underwriter. Indicate detailed layout of system, including piping and location of each component. Include
control diagrams, wiring diagrams, and written sequence of operation.
B. Product Data: To bear stamp of approval of authority having jurisdiction, Fire Marshall, Owner's fire
insurance underwriter. Furnish each piece of equipment comprising the system including cylinders, manifolds,
control panel, nozzles, detectors, alarm bells or horns, switches, and annunciators.
C. Samples: Submit one sample of each detector, manual pull station, and nozzle.
D. Design Data: Submit design calculations bearing stamp of approval of authority having jurisdiction, Fire
Marshall, Owner's fire insurance underwriter. Results

Page 75 of 429
shall include calculations that verify system pressures, nozzle flow rate, orifice code numbers, piping pressure losses,
component flow data, and pipe sizes.
E. Test Reports: Indicate successful completion of tests.
F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate installation of equipment and system components.
G. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that system meets or exceeds specified requirements and ANSI/NFPA
2001.
H. Welders Certification: Submit certificate indicating compliance with [ANSI/ASME SEC 9] [ANSI/AWS D1.1].
1.8 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Accurately record exact location of equipment, equipment identification markings, conduit and piping routing
details, and agent storage positions.
1.9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Include electrical schematic written description of system design, drawings illustrating control logic and
equipment locations, and technical brochures describing equipment.
B. Include list of recommended spare parts.
C. Include checklists and procedures for emergency situations, troubleshooting techniques, abort functions,
system control panel operation, trouble procedures, and safety requirements.
A. Perform Work in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 70, ANSI/NFPA 72A, and ANSI/NFPA 72E; applicable UL,
ULC, FM, LPC & ISO standards; and requirements of applicable codes and ordinances.
B. Indicate manufacturer's name and pressure rating on valve body. Indicate manufacturer, type, and size, part
number, orifice code or orifice diameter on discharge nozzles. Markings shall be standard and visible after
installation.
C. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ANSI/ASME SEC 9.
D. Welders Certification: To ANSI/ASME SEC 9 ANSI/AWS D1.1.

Page 76 of 429
E. Maintain one copy of each document on site.
1.11 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing of products specified in this Section with minimum
five years documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section with minimum ten years documented
experience approved by manufacturer, who maintains a UL listed FM200 recharging station and is capable of
providing replacement charge within 24 hours.
C. Design system using a UL, ULC, LPC or FM approved calculation method under direct supervision of a
Professional Engineer:
1. Experienced in design of this work.
2. Licensed at the place where the Project is located.
1.12 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable ANSI/NFPA 2001 code for system.
B. Conform to ANSI/NFPA 70 and ANSI/NFPA 72A code for electrical wiring and wiring devices.
C. Provide certification of inspection approval of FM200 fire protection system by authority having jurisdiction.
1.13 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site
B. Accept materials and components on site in shipping containers. Inspect for damage.
C. Deliver and store equipment in shipping containers with labelling in place. Deliver FM200 in approved
containers.
1.14 WARRANTY
Page 77 of 429
A. Provide one-year warranty.
B. Warranty: Include coverage for replacement FM200
1.15 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Conduct inspections 6 and 12 months from Date of Substantial Completion to verify proper operation of
system and to check agent container weight and pressure. Include a thorough check of controls, detection and alarm
systems.
B. Submit documents, certifying satisfactory system conditions Include manufacturer's certificate of acceptance
of Inspector's qualifications.
1.16 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Submit maintenance materials.
B. Provide one complete set of special tools required for servicing and maintaining equipment.
C. Provide one of each type of detector.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
Refer To The Attached Manufacturer List.
2.2 PIPE AND PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53 or A106, Schedule 40, black.
1. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.3 malleable iron class 300 for sizes 2 inch (50 mm) and smaller, or ASTM A234,
forged steel welding type fittings.
Page 78 of 429
2. Joints: Screwed, ANSI/AWS D1.1 welded, or grooved and shouldered pipe end couplings.
B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B88, Type M, L & K hard drawn.
1. Fittings: ANSI/ASME B16.18 cast copper or ANSI/ASME B16.22 wrought copper.
2. Joints: ASTM B32, solder 95-5 Tin Antimony, ANSI/AWS A5.8, B Cup silver braze.
C. Pipe Hangers: ANSI/ASME B31.1, UL or FM approved split clamp up to 2-1/2 inch (60 mm) size, riser
clamps over 2-1/2 inch (60 mm) size, adequate to offset discharge thrust.
D. Escutcheons: Chrome plated pressed or stamped brass, one- piece or split pattern, minimum 2 inches (50
mm) larger than opening.
E. Gauges: ASME B40.1, UL 393, UL 404, [FS GG-G-76] [3-1/2 inch (90 mm)] diameter cast aluminum case,
phosphor bronze bourdon tube, rotary brass movement, brass socket, front re- calibration adjustment, black figures
on white background, 1 percent mid-scale accuracy, scale calibrated both psi and kPa.
2.3 MANUAL PULL STATIONS
A. Single action control: Molded surface housing fitted with "pull down" lever which locks in position after
releasing spring-loaded contact switch.
B. Double action control: Molded surface housing fitted with "push in" tab and "pull down" lever which locks in
position after releasing spring-loaded contact switch.
C. Labeling: Locate engraved label adjacent to each manual pull station, indicating area protected, and that
actuation will cause Halon discharge.
2.4 IONIZATION DETECTORS
A. Detector, ANSI/NFPA 72E, UL listed, adjustable sensitivity, operating on ionization principle, activated by
combustion products, plug-in, twist-lock unit easily removed from base.

Page 79 of 429
B. Ionization chambers: Dual, one for fire detection and second for reference, stabilizing detector for changes
in temperature, humidity, and pressure.
C. Amplifier-Switching Circuit and Indicator Lamp: Solid state, two-wire, operating on detector line voltage. On
alarm, unit shall lock and be reset at control panel.
D. Adjustment: Manual for normal or high sensitivity, with sensitivity setting visible and requiring no special
tools.
2.5 PHOTOELECTRIC DETECTORS
A. Detector: ANSI/NFPA 72E, UL listed, adjustable sensitivity, with LED light source and photocell, activated
by smoke, plug-in, twist-lock unit easily removed from base.
B. Amplifier-Switching Circuit and Indicator Lamp: Solid state, two-wire operating on detector line voltage. On
alarm, unit shall lock and be reset at control panel.
C. Adjustment: Manual for normal or high sensitivity, with sensitivity setting visible and requiring no special
tools.
2.6 DISCHARGE NOZZLES
A. Discharge: To provide required rates of discharge and coverage and to distribute FM200 uniformly
throughout protected area.
B. Construction: One-piece chrome plated brass or aluminum nozzle with textured finish with female pipe
thread integral on body. Direct discharge parallel to ceiling.
C. Identification: Permanently mark nozzles to show equivalent single orifice diameter.
2.7 FM200 CYLINDERS
A. Cylinders: Standard model and size for ease of replacement and addition. Design, fabricate, certify, and
stamp cylinders in accordance with ANSI/ASME SEC 8.
B. Contents: Fill cylinders with required FM200. Pressurize with dry nitrogen to 360 PSIG (2482 KPa) plus or
minus 5 percent total pressure at 70 degrees F.
Page 80 of 429
C. Identification: Permanent plate, specifying agent, tare and gross weight, pounds of FM200 and
pressurization level; installed so plate is visible and readable.
D. Safety Release: Equip cylinders with frangible disc safety device.
E. Cylinder Valves: Heavy duty forged brass, incorporating safety release pressure operated manual control,
solenoid discharge valve, and pressure gauge. Provide solenoid pilot valves for each cylinder or bank of cylinders.
F. Manifold: Provide for systems with more than one cylinder, with rack to secure each cylinder and check
valves between each cylinder discharge and manifold.
2.8 CONTROL CABINET
A. UL, ULC, LPC, ISO or FM approved as alarm and releasing device, with solid state internal circuitry
enclosed in NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 cabinet.
B. Provide supervision to ANSI/NFPA 72A, Class (A) of following circuits for wire break or ground faults:
1. Zone detection loops.
2. Remote manual discharge stations.
3. Suppression system solenoid valves.
4. Power supply and circuit wiring and fuse.
5. Battery interconnecting wires and fuse.
6. Alarm in abort mode.
C. Equip panel with following standard features:
1. Visual and audible annunciation of trouble or alarm signals.
2. Panel reset switch.
3. Trouble alarm silence switch with ring back feature.
4. Cross zone detection.
5. Battery test meter and switch.
6. Manual discharge switch.
7. Deadman abort switch.
8. Programmable timers for pre-discharge and discharge, 0 - 60 second cycle.

Page 81 of 429
9. Isolated relay contactors for external alarm or equipment and ventilation shutdown.
10. Relay contactors for general trouble signal.
11. Relay contactor activated by detector zone board in alarm or trouble mode.
D. Provide sealed led – acid batteries and charger for continuous operation of detection, alarm, actuation and
supervision functions for 48 hours. Provide automatic battery switch-over upon failure of primary power supply.
E. Conceal control switches and indicators, with exception of Power On, Master Trouble, Supervisory Trouble,
Circuit 1 Alarm, Circuit 2 Alarm and Release Indicators. Provide the following annunciation.
1. Power On : Green.
2. System Trouble : Amber.
3. Battery Trouble : Amber.
4. Circuit 1 Trouble : Amber.
5. Circuit 2 Trouble : Amber.
6. Ground Fault : Amber.
7. Release trouble : Amber.
8. Alarm Circuit 1 : Red.
9. Alarm Circuit 2 : Red.
10. Agent Release : Red.
11. Alarm Silence : Amber.
12. Battery Polarity : Amber.
13. Abort Trouble : Amber.
14. Alarm Output Trouble : Amber.
15. Supervisory Trouble : Amber.
2.9 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT
A. Alarm Bells: Low voltage to allow supervision of circuit wiring, of modular design, with minimum sound level
of 88 db at 10 ft (3 meters).
B. Alarm Horns: Low voltage to allow supervision of circuit wiring, with minimum sound level of 90 db at 10 feet
(3 meters)
Page 82 of 429
2.10 OPERATING SEQUENCE
A. Actuation of one detector in either zone circuit:
1. Illuminate zone indicator.
2. Energize alarm horn.
3. Shut down air-conditioning system and close dampers.
4. Close doors to area.
5. Signal building fire alarm system.
B. Actuation of second detector on second zone circuit:
1. Illuminate zone indicator.
2. Energize alarm horn.
3. Shut down power to protected equipment.
4. Actuate time delay for up to 60 seconds.
5. Release FM200 into protected area.
6. If abort switch is engaged, delay release.
7. Upon abort switch disengagement release FM200 unless system cleared and reset.
C. Discharge of FM200.
1. Sounds alarm horns.
2. Operates strobes.
D. Temperature Detection.
1. Lower Temperature: Illuminate indicator and energize horn.
2. Higher Temperature: Shut down power to protected equipment.
PART 3 EXECUTIONS
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that spaces are ready to receive work.

Page 83 of 429
B. Verify that enclosing walls are continuous above ceilings and below raised floors to enable required
concentration to be built up and maintained for required time to ensure effective fire extinction.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and ANSI/NFPA 2001
B. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. [Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.] Remove scale and dirt on inside
and outside before assembly. Blow out pipe before nozzles or discharge devices are installed.
C. Route piping in orderly manner, concealed, plumb and parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient.
Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with use of space and other work.
D. Securely support piping in accordance with ANSI/ASME B31.1 with allowance for FM200 thrust forces, and
thermal expansion and contraction.
E. Use grooved mechanical couplings and fasteners only in accessible locations. Roll groove piping only.
F. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.
G. Prepare pipe, fittings, supports, and accessories for finish painting,
H. Identify in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 2001 requirements. Place directional arrows and system labels
wherever piping changes direction and minimum 20 feet (6 meters) on straight runs.
I. Secure cylinders as indicated on Drawings. [Where manifolded, mount and support by rack as indicated.
For each system provide same size cylinders containing equal amounts of liquid.]
J. In rooms with suspended ceiling tiles, clip or retain tiles within 4 foot (1.2 m) radius of the nozzles to prevent
lifting during discharge.
L. Make final connections between equipment and system wiring under direct supervision of factory trained
representative of manufacturer.
M. Install engraved plastic instruction plate, detailing emergency procedures, at control panel and at each
manual discharge and abort switch location. At control panel identify control logic units, contacts, and major circuits
with permanent nameplates.
N. At hazard area walls pack space between pipe, pipe sleeve or surface penetration with mineral fiber with
elastomer calk to depth of 1/2 inch (13 mm). Provide escutcheons where exposed piping passes through walls,
floors, and ceilings. Seal pipe penetrations of fire separations.
Page 84 of 429
O. Locate discharge nozzle approximately 6 inches (150 mm) above or below ceiling and 6 inches (150 mm)
below raised floors. Avoid interference with other piping and equipment.
P. Locate remote manual releases at one or more doors to protect area where indicated. Locate deadman
abort switch adjacent.
Q. Provide signal to building fire alarm system.
R. Provide interlock with automatic closing door releases.
S. Provide interlock with motorized dampers.
3.3 TESTING
A. Provide testing and analysis.
B. Test distribution piping and valving, prior to nozzle installation, to 50 psig (340 kPa) air pressure test.
Inspect joints using soap water solution or halide torch or lamp. Repair leaks and retest. Maintain test pressure for
four hours.
C. Upon completion of installation provide final checkout inspection by factory trained representative of
manufacturer to ascertain proper system operation. Leave system in a fully commissioned and automatic readiness
state with circuitry energized and supervised.
D. Test circuits including automatic discharge, manual discharge, equipment shut-down, alarm devices, and
storage container pressure. Test supervision of each circuit.
E. Check each ionization detector with a sensitivity meter, adjust. Record sensitivity, and include record in test
report.
F. Submit original copies of tests, indicating that factory trained technical representatives of the manufacturer
have inspected and tested systems and are satisfied with methods of installation, connections and operation.
3.4 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Prepare and start systems.
B. Provide experienced manufacturer's field engineer to supervise installation and performance testing of the
system.
Page 85 of 429
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
A. Provide systems demonstration.
B. Demonstrate that components except cylinder discharge assembly, are functioning properly and in
conjunction with controls system.
C. Submit integrated step-by-step test procedure for approval 30 days prior to start of demonstration.
1. Arrange meeting prior to demonstration with representatives of the Owner, the Owner's Underwriter, and the
installer.
2. Perform visual inspection and overall review of system installed.
3. Place minimum of three UL listed recording analyzers in space. Provide certification that testing devices
have been checked by recognized testing authority within two weeks of date of demonstration.
4. Certify that replacement charge can be provided within 24 hours of demonstration.
D. Discharge system using manual-release switch mounted on control panel. Run discharge test with
compressed nitrogen at 360 psig (2500 kPa) FM200 After discharge, check cylinders for complete pressure release.
E. After satisfactory completion of discharge test, fill cylinders with amount of FM200 specified in design
calculations.
SECTION 213113
ELECTRIC-DRIVE, CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMP
PART 1 -GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and special Conditions and Division-1,
"General requirements", apply to work of this section.

Page 86 of 429
B. Common work results for firefighting, Section 210500, applies to work of this Section.
A. Work Includes: Providing all labor, material, equipment and service necessary to complete and make
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacturer of Fire pump package Systems required,
1.4 SUBMITTALS
C. Warranty period: shall be 5 years as per client requirement.
D. Certification
Page 87 of 429
1. Submit a certified test report showing actual reading taken during a factory-conducted test as a complete
unit by the pump manufacturer in conformance with the requirements of NFPA Pamphlet No. 20 including a
hydrostatic test to twice working pressure.
2. A certified characteristic curve showing the pump performance based upon the results of the factory test.
3. A plot of engine speed vs. pump capacity over the entire range from shut off beyond 150% of design
capacity.
E. Factory Test: Test the entire controller assembly prior to shipment including, but not restricted to,
each function the controller may be required to perform including remote alarms, remote start, automatic start with
manual shutdown, pressure drop start, manual start-stop; circuit breaker at 300% full load, 600% full load, and short
circuit current settings; and a high potential test of the controller power circuits at not less than two times the rated
voltage plus 1000 volts.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
Refer To The Attached Manufacturers List.
2.2 AUTOMATIC FIRE PUMPS
A. Pump: Horizontal, split case, bronze fitted, centrifugal fire pump listed by Underwriters Laboratories and/or
approved by Factory Mutual; meeting all the requirements of the National Fire Protection Association Pamphlet #20,
standard for the installation of centrifugal fire pumps and acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction; where
Page 88 of 429
installation procedures conflict between NFPA recommendations and the approving authorities, the authority’s
requirements take precedence.
B. Pump rating: Total dynamic head (TDH) and electrical characteristics, refer to schedule on drawings.
C. Suction conditions: 0 pounds per square inch pressure with pump to deliver not less than 150% of rated
capacity at a pressure not less than 65% rated head; shut-off pressure not to exceed 120% of the rated pressure.
D. Include the following accessories for each fire pump:
1. Eccentric suction reducer
2. Discharge tee
3. Main relief valve
4. Test header
5. Casing relief valve
6. Overflow cone, enclosed type
7. Suction and discharge gauges
8. Coupling guard
9. Automatic air release valve
E. Mount the pump and driver on a common base plate of either cast iron or fabricated steel and direct connect
through a flexible coupling protected by a suitable guard.
F. Provide name and capacity plate with pump.
G. Electric pump driver: Horizontal foot mounted ball bearing induction motor, 3 phase, 60 hertz with open
drip-proof NEMA enclosure; motor locked rotor current not to exceed the values stated in NFPA #20.
2.3 AUTOMATIC FIRE PUMP CONTROL PANELS
Page 89 of 429
A. Fire pump controller: Factory assembled, wired and tested unit conforming to all requirements of NFPA
Pamphlets #20, Centrifugal Fire Pumps and #70, National Electrical Code with controller Underwriters listed and
Factory Mutual approved.
B. Controller: Combined manual and automatic type designed for wye-delta starting. (Closed transition type.)
Housed in a NEMA type 3R rain-tight and weatherproof wall mounted enclosure.
C. All controller components, including circuit breakers and contacts, to be front mounted, front wired, and front
accessible for maintenance; circuit breaker interrupting capacity.
D. Include the following accessories:
1. Automatic transfer switch
2. Isolation switch
3. Circuit breaker
4. Minimum run timer
5. Power available lamp
6. Remote contacts for pump running and power available
7. Start - stop pushbuttons
8. Emergency run button
9. Load shedding
10. Low suction pressure alarm with remote contacts
E. Control
1. Starting
a. Automatic pressure switch
b. Supervisory power failure
2. Stopping
a. Manual
2.4 ALARM DEVICES

Page 90 of 429
A. Alarming for pump equipment to be wired to the Fire Alarm Panel furnished and installed under
another section of the work. Panel to have the following functions:
1. Fire pump running
2. Fire main low pressure
3. Fire pump loss line power
4. Phase Reversal
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which the packaged fire pump systems are to be installed. Notify Architect in
writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install packaged fire pump systems and accessories as indicated in accordance with manufacturer's
written instructions, requirements of applicable Standards, and with recognized industry practices to
ensure that installation complies with requirements and serves intended function.
B. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of packaged fire pump systems work with other work.
C. Install diesel engine drive to NFPA 37.
D. Provide access space around pumps for service. Provide no less than minimum as recommended by
manufacturer.
Page 91 of 429
E. Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. Support piping adjacent to pump
such that no weight is carried on pump casings. For base mounted pumps, provide supports under
elbows on pump suction and discharge.
F. Provide drains for bases and seals, piped to and discharging into floor drains
G. Mount unit on vibration isolators
H. Provide piping for fuel supply and return connected to motor. Provide piping to and from exhaust
silencer with thimble at wall or proof penetrations.
I. Insulate piping associated with pump, casing and exhaust silencer.
J. Provide for connection to electrical service
K. Lubricate pumps before start-up
L. Check, align, and certify base mounted pumps by qualified millwright prior to start-up
3.3 FILED QUALITY CONTROL
A. Common work results for firefighting, Section 210500
B. Perform hydrostatic flow test on entire system in accordance with NFPA 20
C. Require test to be witnessed by, fire marshal, authority having jurisdiction, owner's insurance
underwriter, and architect/engineer.
Page 92 of 429
SECTION 213116
DIESEL-DRIVE, CENTRIFUGAL FIRE PUMP
PART 1 -GENERAL
C. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and special Conditions and Division-1,
D. Common work results for firefighting, Section 210500, applies to work of this Section.
Page 93 of 429
C. Work Includes: Providing all labor, material, equipment and service necessary to complete and make
D. Related Work Specified Elsewhere
C. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacturer of Fire pump package Systems required,
D. Standards Compliance: Comply with the requirements of National Fire Protection Association (NFPA),
1.4 SUBMITTALS
C. Certification
Page 94 of 429
capacity.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.2 DIESEL ENGINE DRIVE
A. Engine: conform to NFPA 1247, arranged for automatic operation and include over speed/ over crank switch
and drive, two contractor switches, low oil pressure and high water temperature warning switches, and fuel
shutoff solenoid, with wiring terminating in junction box.
B. Include following engine accessories:
1. Stub shaft
2. Oil bath air cleaner
3. Water cooled exhaust manifold
4. Heat exchanger
Page 95 of 429
5. Mechanical speed governor
6. Fuel filter
7. Lube oil filter and by-pass valve
8. Lube oil cooler and relief valve
9. Fuel pump
10. Instrument panel with tachometer, hour meter, oil pressure gauge,
Water temperature gauge, ammeter, hand speed control and start switch.
11. Starting system including generator/alternator, starting motor and voltage regulator
12. Exhaust silencer, residential type.
13. Flexible exhaust tubing,
C. Cooling water system: Closed system with cooling water supply to heat exchanger from fire pump
discharge. Include four (4) manual shut-off valves (including by-pass line), two strainers, pressure regulating
valve, automatic solenoid valve and pressure gauge.
D. Storage batteries: Dual lead acid batteries with cables and battery racks.
E. Fuel system: [ 300 gallon (1140 liter) ] above ground storage tank, fill pipe and cap, manual shut-
off valve, flame arrestor, oil level gauge, braided bronze flexible connectors, seamless type L copper tubing with
flared joints.
F. Automatic diesel engine controller: Enclosed in floor mounted 14 gage (1.8mm) steel housing, UL
listed and labeled.
1. Controller: Function to automatically start fire pump from water pressure control switch or
test switch.
2. Stop push button: To manually stop engine.
Page 96 of 429
3. Automatic conditions: controller shall alternate batteries automatically on each 15 second
cranking cycle. Alarm if engine not started after six attempts.
4. Battery charger: Dual, built-in, to recharge batteries within 24-hour period, with automatic
overload protection (current limiting), individual voltmeters and ammeters for each battery.
5. Individual pilot lights and common alarm bell for:
a. Low Engine oil pressure
b. High Engine jacket water temperature
c. Failure to start automatically
d. Charger failure
e. Battery 1 Failure
f. Battery 2 Failure
g. Over speed shutdown
6. Power: [220] volt, single phase, 50 HZ.
G. Remote alarm and signal panel: provide wall mounted panel in NEMA 3R enclosure with:
1. Engine running light
2. Common engine failure light for:
a. Low Engine oil pressure
b. High Engine jacket water temperature
c. Failure to start automatically
d. Charger Failure
e. Battery 1 Failure
f. Battery 2 Failure
g. Over speed shutdown
3. Power on light
Page 97 of 429
4. Switch off light indicating position of main control switch (off or manual).
5. Power: [220] volt, single phase and 50 HZ.
2.3 AUTOMATIC FIRE PUMP CONTROL PANELS
A. Fire pump controller: Factory assembled, wired and tested unit conforming to all requirements of
NFPA Pamphlets #20, Centrifugal Fire Pumps and #70, National Electrical Code with controller Underwriters listed
and Factory Mutual approved.
B. Controller: Combined manual and automatic type designed for wye-delta starting. (Closed
transition type.) Housed in a NEMA type 3R rain-tight and weatherproof wall mounted enclosure.
C. All controller components, including circuit breakers and contacts, to be front mounted, front wired,
and front accessible for maintenance; circuit breaker interrupting capacity.
D. Include the following accessories:
1. Automatic transfer switch
2. Isolation switch
3. Circuit breaker
4. Minimum run timer
5. Power available lamp
6. Remote contacts for pump running and power available
7. Start - stop pushbuttons
8. Emergency run button
9. Load shedding
10. Low suction pressure alarm with remote contacts
E. Control
1. Starting
a. Automatic pressure switch

Page 98 of 429
b. Supervisory power failure
2. Stopping
b. Manual
2.4 ALARM DEVICES
4. Phase Reversal
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which the packaged fire pump systems are to be installed. Notify
Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until
3.2 INSTALLATION
Page 99 of 429
M. Install packaged fire pump systems and accessories as indicated in accordance with manufacturer's
N. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of packaged fire pump systems work with other work.
O. Install diesel engine drive to NFPA 37.
P. Provide access space around pumps for service. Provide no less than minimum as recommended by
manufacturer.
Q. Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. Support piping adjacent to pump
such that no weight is carried on pump casings . For base mounted pumps, provide supports under
R. Provide drains for bases and seals, piped to and discharging into floor drains
S. Mount unit on vibration isolators
T. Provide piping for fuel supply and return connected to motor. Provide piping to and from exhaust
U. Insulate piping associated with pump, casing and exhaust silencer.
V. Provide for connection to electrical service
W. Lubricate pumps before start-up
X. Check, align, and certify base mounted pumps by qualified millwright prior to start-up

Page 100 of 429
D. Common work results for firefighting, Section 210500
E. Perform hydrostatic flow test on entire system in accordance with NFPA 20
F. Require test to be witnessed by, fire marshal, authority having jurisdiction, owner's insurance
Page 101 of 429

SECTION 213400
PRESSURE MAINTENANCE PUMP
PART 1 -GENERAL
E. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and special Conditions and Division-1,
F. Common work results for fire fighting, Section 210500, applies to work of this Section.
E. Work Includes: Providing all labor, material, equipment and service necessary to complete and make
F. Related Work Specified Elsewhere
Page 102 of 429

E. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacturer of Fire pump package Systems required,
F. Standards Compliance: Comply with the requirements of National Fire Protection Association (NFPA),
1.4 SUBMITTALS
C. Certification
capacity.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
Page 103 of 429

2.2 JOCKEY PUMPS CONTROL PANELS
A. Factory assembled, wired and tested jockey pump controller, UL listed and of the same
manufacturer as the main fire pump controller with a full voltage magnetic starter, fusible disconnect switch,
"Hand-Off-Automatic" selector switch, "START" pushbutton and a pressure switch.
B. Include the following accessories:
1. Fused disconnect switch
2. Across-the-line starter
3. Hand-off-automatic selector switch mounted on cabinet
4. Running period timer
5. Pressure switch with adjustable cut-in and cut-out pressure
6. Overload heaters
7. Control circuit transformer
C. Assemble, wire and test controllers at the factory prior to shipment.
2.3 ALARM DEVICES

Page 104 of 429
4. Phase Reversal
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which the packaged fire pump systems are to be installed. Notify
Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until
3.2 INSTALLATION
Y. Install packaged fire pump systems and accessories as indicated in accordance with manufacturer's
Z. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of packaged fire pump systems work with other work.
AA. Install diesel engine drive to NFPA 37.
BB. Provide access space around pumps for service. Provide no less than minimum as recommended by
manufacturer.
CC. Decrease from line size with long radius reducing elbows or reducers. Support piping adjacent to pump
such that no weight is carried on pump casings . For base mounted pumps, provide supports under
DD. Provide drains for bases and seals, piped to and discharging into floor drains
Page 105 of 429
EE. Mount unit on vibration isolators
FF. Provide piping for fuel supply and return connected to motor. Provide piping to and from exhaust
GG. Insulate piping associated with pump, casing and exhaust silencer.
HH. Provide for connection to electrical service
II. Lubricate pumps before start-up
JJ. Check, align, and certify base mounted pumps by qualified millwright prior to start-up
G. Common work results for fire fighting , Section 210500
H. Perform hydrostatic flow test on entire system in accordance with NFPA 20
I. Require test to be witnessed by, fire marshal, authority having jurisdiction, owner's insurance
underwriter, and architect/engineer .
A. Common work results for fire fighting , Section 210500
C. Require test to be witnessed by, fire marshall, authority having jurisdiction, owner's insurance
Page 106 of 429

SECTION 212200
AERSOL SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
B. NFPA 2010 – 2010 edition.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes condensed aerosol extinguishing systems and the following:
1- Extinguishing agent system.
Detection and alarm devices.
2. Control and alarm panels.
3. Accessories.
4. Connection devices for and wiring between system components.
5. Connection devices for power and integration into building's fire alarm system.
1.3 DEFINITIONS
A. ATS: Acceptance Testing Specifications.
B. EPO: Emergency Power Off.
A. Condensed aerosol fire-extinguishing system shall be an engineered system for total flooding of the hazard area
Page 107 of 429
including the room cavity below the ceiling and below the raised floor.
B.Provide separate zones above and below the raised floor. If smoke is detected below the raised floor, agent shall
be discharged in the underfloor zone only. If smoke is detected above the raised floor, agent shall be discharged in
zones above and below the floor.
1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design condensed aerosol extinguishing system and obtain approval from authorities having jurisdiction. Design
system for Class A, B, or C fires as appropriate for areas being protected and include safety factor. Use condensed
aerosol indicated and in concentration suitable for normally occupied areas.
B. Performance Requirements: Discharge condensed aerosol within maximum 60 seconds and maintain design
concentration density for 10-minute holding time in hazard areas in accordance with NFPA 2010.
C. Cross-Zoned Detection: Devices located in two separate zones. Sound alarm on activating single-detection
device, and discharge extinguishing agent on actuating single-detection device in other zone.
D. Verified Detection: Devices located in single zone. Sound alarm on activating single-detection device, and
discharge extinguishing agent on actuating second-detection device.
E. System Operating Sequence: As follows:
1. Actuating First Detector: Visual indication on annunciator panel, energize audible alarm and visual alarms (slow
pulse), shut down air-conditioning and ventilating systems serving protected area, close doors in protected area, and
send signal to fire alarm system.
2. Actuating Second Detector: Visual indication on annunciator panel, energize audible and visual alarms (fast
pulse), shut down power to protected equipment, start time delay for extinguishing-agent discharge for 30 seconds,
and discharge extinguishing agent. On agent discharge, release preaction valve to allow water to fill sprinkler
system.
3. Extinguishing-agent discharge will operate audible alarms and strobe lights inside and outside the protected area.
Page 108 of 429

F. System Operating Sequence: System shall be cross-zoned, Rate of Rise Heat Detectors and photoelectric
detectors reporting to a fully programmable microprocessor-based control panel programmed to operate as follows:
1. If one photoelectric detector and Rate of Rise Heat Detectors reaches the third detection level (Fire 1), agent
discharge will be initiated as described for the third detection level (Fire 1) below.
2. Rate of Rise Heat Detectors :
a. First Detection Level (Alert): Mild audible and visual indication on annunciator
panel. Strobe lights flash slowly in the protected area.
b. Second Detection Level (Action): Strong audible and visual indication on
annunciator panel. Strobe lights flash rapidly in the protected area.
c. Third Detection Level (Fire 1): Strong audible and visual indication on
annunciator panel. Energize horn(s), bell(s), and strobe light(s) in the
protected area and outside entry doors. Shut down air-conditioning and
ventilating systems serving the protected area, and close doors in the
protected area. Send signal to fire alarm system, initiate 30-second time
delay for extinguishing-agent discharge, and discharge extinguishing agent.
At agent discharge, terminate power to equipment in the protected area.
d. Fourth Detection Level (Fire 2): Same as Fire 1.
G. Manual stations shall immediately discharge extinguishing agent when activated.
H. Operating abort switches will delay extinguishing-agent discharge while being activated,
and switches must be reset to prevent agent discharge. Release of hand pressure on the
switch will cause agent discharge if the time delay has expired.
I. EPO: Will terminate power to protected equipment immediately on actuation.
K. Power Transfer Switch: Transfer from normal to stand-by power source.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
Page 109 of 429
A. Product Data: For the following:
1. Extinguishing agent units.
2. Control panels.
3. Detection devices.
4. Manual stations.
5. Switches.
6. Alarm devices.
7. Aerosol units and supports.
B. LEED Submittal:
1. Product Data for Credit EA 4: Documentation required by Credit EA 4 indicating
that aerosol agents comply.
C. Shop Drawings: Signed and sealed by a qualified professional engineer. Include design
calculations. Include the following for hazard-area enclosure, drawn to scale:
1. Plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work. Indicate
dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly,
components, and location and size of each field connection.
2. Wiring Diagrams: Power, signal, and control wiring.
3. Design Calculations: For weight, volume, and application density of extinguishing agent required for each
hazard area.
4. Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show ceiling penetrations, ceiling-mounted items, and the
following:
a. Extinguishing-agent units, detectors, and
accessories.
b. Method of attaching hangers to building structure.

Page 110 of 429
c. Other ceiling-mounted items including light fixtures, diffusers, grilles,
speakers, and access panels.
5. Occupied Work Area Plans: Show the following:
a. Controls and alarms.
b. Extinguishing-agent units if mounted in
space, detectors, and accessories.
c. Equipment and furnishings.
6. Access Floor Space Plans: Show the following:
a. Extinguishing-agent units, detectors, and
accessories.
b. Method of supporting units.
D. Permit Approved Drawings: Working plans, prepared according to NFPA 2010, that have
been approved by authorities having jurisdiction. Include design calculations.
E. Field quality-control test reports.
F. Maintenance Data: For components to include in maintenance manuals.
A. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction
where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering
services are defined as those performed for installations of condensed aerosol extinguishing systems that are similar
to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.
B. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of condensed aerosol
Page 111 of 429
extinguishing systems and are based on the specific system indicated. Refer to Division 01 Section "Product
Requirements."
C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a
testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.
1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are
packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing
contents. Deliver extra materials to Owner.
1. Detection Devices: Not less than 20 percent of amount of each type installed.
4. Extinguishing Agent: Not less than 100 percent of amount installed in largest
hazard area.
2. Approved brand is FirePro Systems Ltd or equal specification.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. In other Part 2 articles were titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply
to product selection:
1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers
offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not
limited to, manufacturers specified.
2.5 EXTINGUISHING-AGENT UNITS
A. Description: Stainless Steel 304 or 12.03 Steel zinc plated and powder coated housing :
Page 112 of 429

1. Finish: Manufacturer's standard color, stainless steel or epoxy paint.
2. Brackets: Factory fabricated retaining brackets; suitable for unit support, maintenance, and replacement.
2.6 FIRE-EXTINGUISHING AGENT
A. Condensed aerosol agent should comply with the following requirements:
Technical specifications
General
The fire fighting system shall be based on the condensed aerosol generator principle.
The condensed aerosol generator is a fire fighting system using solid material, which on activation is transformed into
a rapidly expanding fire extinguishing aerosol based on potassium compounds. The extinguishing action is effected
through physical and chemical chain reactions, which do not alter significantly the quantity of oxygen present in the
environment.
Physical Action
It is implied in the chemical - physical characteristics of the alkaline metals such as Potassium, which require the
least amount of energy of ionization (lowest ionization potential) and therefore eliminate the electrons from the atoms.
The required amount of energy is supplied from the abundance of energy present in the flame. Potassium is therefore
transformed into P+ (radical with a positive charge).
Chemical Action
During combustion, in the flame, a reaction is produced between atoms and unstable molecular fragments (radicals),
which allow the reaction to continue (chain reaction of radicals). Potassium radicals (P) react, during combustion,
with the free radicals (mainly unstable hydroxyl radicals, OH) forming a very stable compound. Therefore the
reaction is interrupted and the flame is extinguished.

Page 113 of 429
Physical Characteristics
The fire fighting system shall satisfy with the following main physical conditions and characteristics:
 It is non-toxic
 It is non corrosive
 The decomposition products are not acidic (they do not contain hydrogen fluoride, hydrogen bromide, hydrogen
chloride or other acids)
 It is not classified as a pyrotechnic product (The approved code is only 9.1).
 Does not contain pyrotechnic material (e.g. nitro guanidine or nitrocellulose or cyano-guanidine (dicyandiamide)
either in the solid aerosol forming compound and/or in the cooling material) therefore there is no risk of
explosion.
 The polymeric resin (binding material, part of the solid aerosol forming compound) does not contain carcinogenic
chemicals, such as Formaldehyde, Phenol Polymer or similar.
 It is friendly to the ozone layer
 The generators are containers which are non-pressurized
 Does not deplete the oxygen content
 Fire Extinguishing Aerosol Generators must have a fully automatic and autonomous (independent) system of fire
detection using the thermocord (or a thermal actuator) or can be activated electrically through an fire alarm
extinguishing panel
 The thermocord (Thermal actuator) acts as a fail safe mechanism which will activate the generators in the event
that the generators are connected to a conventional detection and activation system which fails to operate.
 Classes of Fire A,B,C.
 Generators must be fully autonomous and automatic when using the thermocord (thermal actuator). The system
can simultaneously be connected to any conventional detection and activation system.
 Life time of fire extinguishing material: up to 15 years.
 Dual activation mode (the option of thermocord/thermal actuator activation must always be available as a safety
mechanism)
Page 114 of 429

 It offers a safety mechanism whereby if the generator is connected to an external detection system which fails
the generator will still activate when the thermocord detects the fire.
 Must not release cyanides in any form and/or ammonia, nitrogen oxides.
System Description
The condensed aerosol generator shall be contained in a metal painted enclosures with a wire connection for the
electrical ignition.
On the underside of the device must be a screen for the even distribution of the extinguishing agent.
Must be a port for the insertion of a temperature sensitive cord/thermal actuator for the thermal ignition of the device.
The screen shall be selected for the even distribution through the space protected.
The system shall be initiated electrically or thermally. The electrical initiation shall be effected through a dedicated
Fire Control Panel.
The condensed aerosol generator system shall be compatible and must be connected to operate with an existing Fire
Alarm System already installed.
The design of the system must cover total flooding of the area volume and not object protection.
Certificates/Approvals/Experience.
 The system must be approved by the local Fire Brigade Authority or any other Fire Brigade of EU countries.
 The manufacturer must be certified with ISO 9001:2008 (the scope of the ISO Certification has to specifically
referred to the manufacturing of the full range of products) and possibly with ISO 14001:2004 (this will be
considered an advantage).
 The system must have a Product Liability insurance to cover any damage derived by malfunctioning.
 The self activation temperature of the solid compound must be above 250oC, and certified by an accredited
Institute.(This value indicates that the solid aerosol forming compound does not contain pyrotechnic
materials, which self activate at a temperature lower than 180 oC).
Page 115 of 429

 The solid aerosol forming compound does not contain pyrotechnic materials (e.g. nitro-guanidine, cyano-
guanidine (dicyandiamide) or nitrocellulose either in the solid aerosol forming compound and/or in the
cooling material) therefore there is no risk of explosion. This should be stated in the MSDS, issued by the
Manufacturer.
 The polymeric resin (binding material) does not contain carcinogenic chemicals, such as Formaldehyde,
Phenol Polymer or similar. This should be stated in the MSDS, issued by the Manufacturer.
 Certified as per EU directives on CE markings (products have to bear the CE marking).
 Acceptance by the US Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) SNAP programme as an alternative to
ozone depleting substances. The product must be listed in the EPA products’ listing.
 Health and Safety assessment by accredited institutes as per Green Policies directives (products have to
bear the “Green Label”).
 Toxicological reports by an European Notified Body / Accredited Authority to be supplied with tender
documents, indicating that it is an environmentally friendly non toxic product).
 Product Certification / Listing by any of the following International Accredited Institutes, e.g. UL, ULC, BSI,
KIWA, LPCB, VDS, etc. which certify / list all models and all mechanical components (brackets, etc.)
according to the existing standards on condensed aerosol technology (CEN/TR 15276, BRL-K23001/3,
NFPA 2010, UL2775,ISO15779, etc).
 Test Reports/certificates from accredited laboratory that the aerosol is not harmful to electrical/electronic
equipment.
 Certificate from accredited Institutes certifying the lifetime of the product to be 15 years.
2.7 CONTROL PANELS
A. Description: FMG approved or NRTL listed, including equipment and features required
for testing, supervising, and operating aerosol fire-extinguishing system.
UL listed as a complete system (Extinguishing panel, Sequential activator, Aerosol generator).
B. Power Requirements: 120/240-V ac; with electrical contacts for connection to system
components and fire alarm system, and transformer or rectifier as needed to produce
power at voltage required for accessories and alarm devices.
Page 116 of 429

1. Mounting: Surface.
C. Supervised Circuits: Separate circuits for each independent hazard area.
1. Detection circuits equal to the required number of zones,
assigned to the required number of zones.
2. Manual pull-station circuit.
3. Alarm circuit.
4. Release circuit.
5. Abort circuit.
6. EPO circuit.
D. Provide the following control-panel features:
1. Electrical contacts for shutting down fans, activating dampers, and operating
system electrical devices.
2. Automatic switchover to standby power at loss of primary power.
3. Service disconnect to interrupt system operation for maintenance with visual status
indication on the annunciator panel.
E. Standby Power: Lead-acid or nickel-cadmium batteries with capacity to operate system
for 72 hours and alarm for minimum of 15 minutes. Include automatic battery charger,
with varying charging rate between trickle and high depending on battery voltage, that is
capable of maintaining batteries fully charged. Include manual voltage control, dc
electrical contacts for connection to control panel, and suitable
enclosure.
2.8 DETECTION DEVICES
A. Description: Comply with NFPA 2001 and NFPA 72, and include the following types:
Page 117 of 429
1. Ionization Detectors: Comply with UL 268, dual-chamber type, having sampling
and referencing chambers, with smoke-sensing element.
2. Photoelectric Detectors: Comply with UL 268, consisting of LED light source and
silicon photodiode receiving element.
3. Rate of Rise Heat Detectors: Comply with UL 268, consisting of LED light source.
2.9 MANUAL STATIONS
A. General Description: UL or EN approved low voltage compatible with controls. Include contacts for connection
to control panel.
B. Manual Release: "MANUAL RELEASE" caption, and Yellow finish. Unit can manually
discharge extinguishing agent with operating device that remains engaged until unlocked.
C. Abort Switch: "ABORT" caption, momentary contact, with Blue finish.
2.10 SWITCHES
A. Description: FMG approved or NRTL listed, where available, 230-V ac or low voltage
compatible with controls. Include contacts for connection to control panel.
B. Power Transfer Switches: Key-operation selector, for transfer of release circuit
signal from main supply to reserve supply.
2.11 ALARM DEVICES
A. Description: UL or EN approved, low voltage, and surface mounting, unless
otherwise indicated.
B. Bells: Minimum 6-inch (150-mm) diameter.

Page 118 of 429
C. Horns: 90 to 94 dBA.
D. Strobe Lights: Translucent lens, with "Gas Release" or similar caption.
2.12 ELECTRICAL POWER AND WIRING
A. Electrical power, wiring, and devices are specified in Division 26.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with hazard-area
leakage requirements, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting work
performance.
1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 CONNECTIONS
A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of fittings, and specialties.
B. Connect electrical devices to extinguishing control panel . Electrical
power, wiring, and devices are specified in Division 28 Section "Fire Detection and Alarm."
3.3 LABELING
A. Install labeling extinguishing-agent units, other equipment, and panels
according to NFPA 2010.
Page 119 of 429

B. Install signs at entry doors for protected areas to warn occupants that they are entering a
room protected with a condensed Aerosol fire extinguishing system.
C. Install signs at entry doors to advise persons outside the room the meaning of the horn(s),
bell(s), and strobe light(s) outside the protected space.
COMMISSIONING OF THE FIRE EXTINGUISHING PANEL
1) Before applying power to the extinguishing panel, the Aerosol Generators and any other fire external modules,
must be physically isolated from the system. This will prevent any accidental activation of the Fire Extinguishing
Aerosol Generators.
2) When power is applied, if all connections are correct, only the green Power On and either the Automatic and
Manual or Manual Only indicators should be lit. If any fault indicators are lit the wiring to the appropriate input or
output should be checked an all faults cleared before proceeding.
3) Once the panel is fault free, it can be configured with the desired options as described in the Operation and
Maintenance manual of the panel.
4) Once the panel has been configured the system should be thoroughly tested to ensure that the control panel
responds as expected and required.
5) Connect all lamps in place of Aerosol Generators.
6) Activate the system and ensure that all lamps, light.
7) After satisfactory testing, all final connections to the fire external modules / Aerosol Generators should be made
and circuit continuity should be verified (no fault on the Extinguishing Line)
8) Disconnect the lamps and connect the Aerosol Generators.
3.5 DEMONSTRATION
Page 120 of 429
A. Train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain condensed aerosol
extinguishing systems.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING
SECTION 22 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING

SECTION 22 05 19 METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
SECTION 22 05 23 GENERAL – DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
HANGERS AND SUPPORT FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
SECTION 22 05 29
EQUIPMENT
SECTION 22 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
SECTION 22 07 00 PLUMBING INSULATION
SECTION 22 11 16 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
Page 121 of 429

SECTION 22 11 19 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
SECTION 22 11 23 DOMESTIC WATER PUMPS
SECTION 22 12 23 FACILITY INDOOR POTABLE-WATER STORAGE TANKS
22 13 16 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING

SECTION
22 13 19 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
SECTION 22 13 29 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS
SECTION 22 14 13 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
SECTION 22 14 26 FACILITY STORM DRAINS
SECTION 22 33 30 ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
SECTION 22 40 00 PLUMBING FIXTURES
SECTION 220500 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING
C. The requirements of the Contract Documents, including the General and Special Conditions, and
Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this division.
D. In case of conflict between these General Provisions and the Special and General Conditions the
more restrictive requirements govern as determined by the Engineer.
Page 122 of 429

E. The drawings are schematic and diagrammatic and are intended to be a graphic representation of
the contract requirements. Due to restrictions of scale, complete details cannot be shown. It is
however assumed to represent a complete installation. The contractor shall be responsible for
providing a complete installation, coordination with other trades, and coordination with field
conditions.
F. Riser diagrams and schematic diagrams generally indicate equipment connections to be used for
various systems. Provide all work shown on diagrams whether or not it is duplicated on the plans.
G. Specifications include incomplete sentences. Words or phrases such as "the contractor shall,"
"shall be," "furnish," "provide," "a," "an," "the," and "all" have been omitted for brevity.
H. Except where modified by a specific notation to the contrary, the indication and/or description of
any item, in the Drawings or Specifications or both, carries with it the instruction to furnish and
install the item complete with all appurtenances or accessories necessary to complete any
required system, regardless of whether or not this instruction is explicitly stated as part of the
indication or description.
I. Specifications and Drawings are complimentary and are to be taken together for a complete
interpretation of the work. Where conflicts exist between the drawings and specifications, the
item(s) of greater quantity or cost shall be provided for in the contract price.
J. Drawings of necessity utilize symbols and schematic diagrams to indicate various items of work.
Neither of these have any dimensional significance nor do they delineate every item required for
the intended installation. Install the work in accordance with the diagrammatic intent expressed
on the electrical and mechanical Drawings, and in conformity with the dimensions indicated on
final architectural and structural working drawings and on equipment shop drawings.
K. Certain details appear on the drawings, which are specific with regard to the dimensioning and
positioning of the work. These details are intended only for the purpose of establishing general
feasibility. They do not obviate field coordination for the indicated work.
L. Derive information as to the general construction from structural and architectural drawings and
specifications.
M. Responsibility of contractor is to ensure that all works are in conformity with drawings,
international stated codes and local regulations.
1.34 DEFINITIONS
A. Where used in this document and accompanying drawings, the following words are defined as
listed:
Page 123 of 429

1. "Provide" to supply and install/connect complete and ready for safe and regular operation the
particular work referred to.
accessories.
4. "Work" labor, materials, equipment, apparatus, controls, accessories and all other items
required for proper and complete installation.

7. "Indicated,” "shown" or "noted" as indicated, shown or noted on drawings or specifications.
8. "Similar" or "equal" in materials, weight, size, design, capacity and efficiency of specified
product.
9. "Reviewed," "satisfactory," "accepted," "approved" or "directed" as reviewed, satisfactory,

accepted, approved or directed by or to Engineer.
10. "Architect", “Engineer”, "Project Manager", "Owner," the party or parties responsible for
interpreting accepting and otherwise ruling on the performance under "The contract."
11. "The Contract", the agreement covering the work to be performed by "The Contractor."
12. "The Specifications", The Section, Part, Division of the Specifications" the documents
specifying the work to be performed by "The Contractor."
13. "Other," persons, parties, or trades responsible for work of the project other than the
contractor.
14. "Project Manager" or Construction Manager is defined as the owner's Authorized

Representative.
1.35 QUALITY ASURANCE AND STANDARDS
A. Make the complete installation in accordance with all state and local municipal codes, all
applicable codes and authorities having jurisdiction, and the applicable requirements and
standards of the following:
BS British Standards
ASA American Standards Association
AGA American Gas Association
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
ANSI American National Standards Institute
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers
ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers

ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials
Page 124 of 429
AWS American Welding Society
AWWA American Water Works Association
IBR Institute of Boiler and Radiator Manufacturers
AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association
MSS Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry
NEC National Electrical Code
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute
SBI Steel Boiler Institute
UL Underwriters Laboratories
SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association
NFPA National Fire Protection Association

EN European Norms
B. Refer to the Architect for decisions on any items or requirements noted in the specifications or
drawings which conflict with the standards listed above. Provide all work necessary to comply
with these requirements at no extra cost to the Owner.
1.36 ORGANIZATION OF WORK
A. Implement the work called for under these specifications simultaneously with the work of other
Trades in a manner such as not to delay the overall progress of the project. Be prepared to furnish
promptly to other Trades involved at the project all information and measurements relating to the
work which they may require. Cooperate with them in order to secure the harmony necessary in
the interest of the project as a whole.
C. Keep a competent superintendent in charge of the work. Replace such superintendent if

unsatisfactory to the Project Manager.
D. Maintain a complete file of Contract and shop drawings at the Site available for inspection by the
Engineer and Project Manager.
E. Provide every facility to permit inspection or observation of the work by the Engineer during the
course of construction.
F. Be responsible for work until its completion and final acceptance; replace any of the same which
may be damaged, lost or stolen, without additional cost to the Owner.
Page 125 of 429

A. Make all workmanship, equipment and materials supplied under these specifications acceptable
to the Engineer who has the power to reject any items which in its judgment are not in full
A. Make all workmanship, equipment and materials supplied under these specifications acceptable
to the Engineer who has the power to reject any items which in its judgment are not in full
B. Include the procurement of and payment for all permits, certificates and fees for the performance
of the work in compliance with codes, applicable laws and municipal regulations including those
from local utilities for services.
1.39 SCOPE OF WORK
A. The Specifications and the accompanying drawings are intended to secure the provisions of all
material, labor, equipment, and services necessary to install complete, tested, ready for operation
and set to work the Plumbing Systems in accordance with the Specifications and Drawings.
Provide all systems complete with necessary appurtenances and minor auxiliaries, including
offsets to clear interferences and supports, which are not shown but are needed to make each
system complete in every respect. Provide all work described in the Specifications and not shown
on the Drawings, or vice versa, in complete working order. If mention has been omitted of any
item of work or material, necessary for completion of the system, then such items must be and
are hereby included.
A. Before submitting a proposal, the Contractor is responsible for visiting the site of the work and
becoming thoroughly familiar with all conditions and limitations. The submission of a proposal
will be construed as evidence that such an examination has been made, and later claims for labor,
equipment or materials required for difficulties encountered which could have been foreseen had
such an examination been made will not be recognized.
B. Verify all grades, elevations, dimensions, and clearances at the site.
C. Verify existing conditions and bring any discrepancies to the Engineer’s attention in writing prior
to proposal submission.
A. Prior to purchasing equipment or materials, submit a list of proposed manufacturers to the

Engineer for approval.
B. Shop drawings, which are submitted out of sequence or without supplemental information
necessary for proper evaluation of the submission may be subject to delays in processing.
C. Shop drawings must comply with Division I conditions and bear the Contractor's stamp
certifying:
Page 126 of 429

1. That it has checked the submitted shop drawings.
2. That the submitted shop drawing is fully coordinated with all interfacing trades and with
other trades where interference may occur.
3. That the submitted shop drawings are in conformance with the contract documents, except
for the following substitutions and/or changes.
1 ----
2 ----
3 ----
Etc. Signed ----------------"
1. Catalog information and factory assembly drawings, as required for a complete explanation
and description of all items of equipment / piping.
4. Scale composite drawings, showing all duct work, piping, lighting fixtures, main conduit
runs and drainage piping above the hung ceilings and in the mechanical equipment rooms.
The drawings will indicate pipe and duct sizes and their elevation above the floor. Obtain
layout of fire protection, HVAC and electrical work from the respective contractor for
inclusion on the composite drawing. The signature of each contractor on the composite
drawing will attest to full coordination of these drawings.
E. Materials installed or work performed without acceptance of materials is done at the risk of the
Contractor, and the cost of removal of such material or work, which is judged unsatisfactory for
any reason, is at the expense of the Contractor plus cost of any other work affected.
1. Number of copies and type of paper complies with the requirements of the general conditions.
Page 127 of 429

consist of catalog sheets displaying other items, which are not applicable.
G. Shop drawings and other submissions, which are submitted for review, will be returned with a
Shop Drawing stamp indicating actions based on reviews that are made and Contractor's
responses that may be necessary. Actions noted regarding "REVIEW" and "RESPONSE"
portions of the shop drawing stamp are defined as explained in project General Requirements
(Division 1), and Contract General & Special Conditions.
1.42 RECORD DRAWING
A. Before commencing work, procure complete set of black and white prints of Contract Drawings.
B. Maintain prints in field office and permanently record, in colored pencil, on such prints, at time
of occurrence, deviations from Contract Drawings, due to:
1. Field Coordination.
2. Addenda.
3. Bulletins
D. Make drawings available for the Engineer's periodic inspection and submit for review with
As-Built Drawings.
A. Before commencing work, procure complete set of reproducible transparencies of Contract

Drawings.
B. Neatly revise to conform to Record Drawings.
C. Conspicuously indicate major deviations by specific reference to shop drawings and provide an
accurate and complete record of the work as installed.
D. Upon completion of work, submit signed and certified reproducible transparencies as As-Built
and referenced Shop Drawings, along with marked up prints of Record Drawings, to the Engineer
for acceptance.
E. Submit complete copy on computer diskette, submit two copies on tape with complete list of
contents.
Page 128 of 429

A. Coordinate the work of this division with the work of all other Trade and the utility company and
so arrange that there will be no delay in the proper installation and completion of any part or parts
of each respective work wherein it may be interrelated with that of this Contract so that generally
all construction work can proceed without delaying the completion of the project.
B. Examine contract drawings and specifications for all other trades relating to this project, verify
all governing conditions at the site, and become fully informed as to the extent and character of
the work required and its relation to other work in the building. No consideration will be granted
for any alleged misunderstanding of the materials to be furnished for work to be done.
C. Scaled and figured dimensions with respect to the items are approximate only; sizes of equipment
have been taken from typical equipment items of the class indicated. Before proceeding with
work, carefully check all dimensions and sizes and assume full responsibility for the fitting-in of
equipment and materials to the building and to meet architectural and structural conditions.
D. Coordinate work with other disciplines. Confer with other contractors whose work might affect
this installation; and arrange all parts of this work and equipment in proper relation to the work
and equipment of others, with the building construction and with architectural finish so that this
work will harmonize in service, appearance, and function.
E. Install exposed piping to provide the maximum amount of headroom coordinated with the
Architectural drawings above the finished floor. Install piping concealed in areas where hung
ceilings or other furred spaces are indicated.
F. Refer to the Architectural Drawings for ceiling heights, locations and types of hung ceilings and
furred spaces.
G. Furnish to the Trade Contractors for general construction, detailed advance information regarding
all requirements related to work under other Divisions and/or Sections. Furnish sizes, accurate
data, and locations of any and all pads, pits, chases, sleeves, and slots through floor slabs, walls,
foundations, ceilings, roof, and other special openings required for work under this Division.
A. Owner-furnished equipment will be delivered, crated or otherwise packaged to the site delivery
point selected by the Project Manager. This Contractor is responsible for accepting delivery of
all Owner-furnished items, which are under his trade jurisdiction and place them in their final
location.
B. Where items cannot be immediately placed in their final position, the Contractor is responsible
for storing and protecting all Owner-furnished items until the time of their final installation. The
contractor is responsible for the care and protection of the items until acceptance by the Owner.
Coordinate delivery of Utility Company furnished equipment with the delivery policy of that
company.
1.46 PROTECTION, MAINTENANCE AND PRODUCT HANDLING OF PLUMBING

EQUIPMENT /PIPING.
Page 129 of 429

A. Deliver and store Plumbing equipment / piping at the site, properly packed and crated until finally
installed. Investigate each space through which equipment must be moved. If necessary, have
equipment shipped from manufacturer in crated sections of size suitable for moving through
restricted spaces.
B. Adequately protect uninstalled and installed equipment and materials against loss or stealing,
damage caused by water, paint, fire, plaster, moisture, acids, fumes, dust or other environmental
conditions, or physical damage, during delivery, storage, installation and shutdown conditions.
Replace any damaged or stolen material without extra cost to the Owner.
C. Provide effective protection for all material and equipment against damage that may be caused
by environmental conditions. Do no work when conditions of temperature in area or moisture
on materials or substrates are not in accordance with material manufacturer's recommended
conditions for installation.
D. Maintain all equipment and systems installed, until issuance of the certificate of practical
completion. The operation of the equipment by the Owner does not constitute an acceptance of
the work. Work will be accepted only after the Contractor has adjusted its equipment,
demonstrated that it fulfills the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications, and has
furnished all required certificates.
E. Provide effective protection against damage for all materials and equipment during shipment,
and storage at the Project Site. Cover all stored equipment to exclude dust and moisture. Place
stored equipment on pallets or racks with appropriate weather cover.
F. After piping and equipment are installed, cover openings to prevent entrance of water and foreign
materials. Close openings with temporary metal or plastic caps.
G. Protect all rough and finished floors and other finished surfaces from damage, which may be
caused by construction materials and methods. Protect floors with tarpaulins, chip pans and
oil-proof floor covering. Protect finished surfaces from welding and cutting splatters with baffles
and splatter blankets. Protect finished surfaces from paint droppings, adhesive and other marring
agents with drop cloths. Protect other surfaces with appropriate protective measures.
H. Deliver materials to Site in manufacturer's original unopened containers with manufacturer's

name and product identification clearly marked thereon.
I. After completion of project, clean the exterior surfaces of equipment furnished in this Division
including concrete residue, to the Engineer’s satisfaction.
A. Provide Equipment and Materials required for installation under the Specifications new and
without blemish or defect. Provide equipment and materials, which will meet with the acceptance
of authorities having jurisdiction over the work. Where such acceptance is contingent upon
having the products listed or labeled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., or other test laboratory,
provide products so listed or labeled. Where no specific indication as to the type or quality of
material or equipment is indicated, furnish a first class standard article.
B. Wherever a manufacturer of a product is specified and the terms "other approved" or "approved
equal" or "equal" or "similar to" are used, the substituted item must conform in all respects to the
Page 130 of 429
specified item, and meet the Engineer’s approval. Consideration will not be given to claims that
the substituted item meets the performance requirements with lesser construction. Performance
as delineated in schedules and in the Specifications indicates minimum performance. In many
cases, equipment is oversized to allow for pick-up loads, derating and future loads which cannot
be delineated under the minimum performance.
C. Provide all equipment, piping, valves, etc of one type produced by one manufacturer.
D. Substituted equipment where permitted and accepted must conform to space requirements.
Replace at Contractor's expense any substituted equipment that cannot meet space requirements,
whether accepted or not. Make any modifications of related systems as a result of substitutions
at Contractor's expense.
E. Note that shop drawings, or other information submitted in accordance with the requirements
hereinbefore specified, do not assure that the Engineer attests to the dimensional suitability of the
material or equipment involved. Engineer's approval of shop drawings for substituted equipment,
does not waive the Contractor's responsibility to assure proper fit with adequate clearances for
maintenance.
F. Substitutions of equipment for that listed on the Schedules or designated by model number in the
Specifications will not be considered if the proposed substitution is not a regular cataloged item
shown in the current catalog of the manufacturer and has not been successfully used for a period
of not less than five years or more.
A. Access doors as required for operation and maintenance of concealed equipment, valves,
controls, pull boxes, etc., shall be provided by the General Contractor under another section of
the specification.
B. Coordinate and prepare a location, size, and function schedule of access doors required and
deliver to a representative of the installing Trade and the Engineer for acceptance.
C. COMMISSIONING AND PERFORMANCE TESTING
D. The commissioning and performance testing shall be carried out by an independent specialized
firm. Full details of the capability and experience of such firm shall be submitted to the Engineer
for review and approval.
1.49 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
A. After completion of all required equipment and system tests and unless specifically noted
elsewhere in these specifications, provide at owners/operator's convenience, knowledgeable
personnel and necessary equipment to instruct and demonstrate the operation and maintenance
of said equipment and systems. Arrange for the related manufacturer or authorized representative
to assist with this orientation. The orientation shall be a minimum of five (5) days in addition to
start up time.
B. Before requesting acceptance of work, furnish five (5) copies in bound form of a complete
operation and maintenance manual, typewritten or printed.
Page 131 of 429
C. Include the following in the operation and maintenance manuals:
3. Description of system and/or equipment
5. Maintenance
c. Recommended list of spare parts and cost.
7. Manufacturer's data: Where multiple model, type and size listings are included, clearly and
conspicuously indicate those that are pertinent to this installation.
a. Description - literature, drawings, illustrations, certified performance charts, technical

data, etc.
b. Operation
d. Parts list
e. Names, addresses and telephone numbers of recommended repair and service companies
f. Guarantee data
1.50 GUARANTEES AND CERTIFICATIONS
A. Guarantee all work to be free from leaks and defects. Replace or repair, as directed by the
Engineer, defective materials or workmanship, as well as damage to the work of the Trades
resulting from same for the duration of stipulated guarantee periods.
B. The duration of guarantee periods following the date of acceptance of the entire work, shall be a
minimum of one (1) year, or as stated in the Contract General & Special Conditions.
Page 132 of 429

C. Submit certification attesting to the fact that specified performance and other criteria are met by
all items of equipment.
A. As the project progresses, the Architect, at his discretion, will perform site visits to observe the
mechanical and electrical installations. At the conclusion of these site visits, punch lists or non-
compliance notices will be issued to the appropriate Contractor for the deficiencies in the work
of his trade. Complete all work and perform all corrective measures as required by the punch
lists. After this corrective and completion work has been accomplished advice the Architect in
writing that every item on the punch lists has been completed.
1.52 PAINTING
A. Deliver all equipment with standard factory finish or as specified. Clean all equipment before
acceptance by the Owner.
B. Except as otherwise specified, priming will be done under other Sections of the work.
C. Any Material transported in a piping system will be color-coded. Positive Identification of

contents of a piping system shall be by lettered legend giving the name of the material in full or
abbreviated form. Arrows will be used to indicate the direction of flow. Color-coding shall be
applied to the entire exposed piping system. Identifying color of materials one word in piping
systems are as:
1.53 MATERIAL COLOR
Blow-off water Yellow

Fire Protection Water Red
Fuel Gas Yellow
Hot Water Yellow
Sanitary, Water Green
Sprinkler, Water Red
Storm Sewer Green
Make-up Water Green
Waste Water Green
Water Green
1.54 DRIP PAN
A. Examine the drawings, and in cooperation with the Electrical Trade confirm the final location of
piping no closer than 2'-0" (600 mm) from a vertical line to electric motors and controllers,
switchboards, panel boards, or similar equipment.
B. Where the installation of piping does not comply with the requirements of foregoing paragraph,
where feasible, the piping shall be relocated.
Page 133 of 429
C. Furnish galvanized steel gutters as follows:
1. Provide and erect a gutter of 18 gauge galvanized steel under every pipe which is within 2'-0"
(600 mm) of being vertically over any motor, electrical controllers, switchboards, panel
2. Each gutter shall be welded and made watertight, properly suspended and carefully pitched
to a convenient point for draining. Provide a 3/4" drain, with valve as directed, to nearest
floor drain or slop sink, as approved.

1.55 TRAINING
A. The Contractor shall instruct and train personnel, designated by the Owner for the purpose, in the
operation and maintenance of every part, device and equipment in the systems with particular
emphasis on proper start-up and shutdown procedures, preventive maintenance and lubrication
procedures with the recommended lubricants overhaul and major maintenance methods,
adjustment and calibration of instruments and controls, the use of special tools and safe practices.
B. The Owner will bear all the expenses of his personnel allocated for this purpose.
BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR PLUMBING SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions, and
Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
requirements of all related sections, elsewhere in this division also apply to this section unless
specified to the contrary.
Page 134 of 429

tests necessary to complete make ready and set to work for acceptance by the Owner, all basic
materials and methods for plumbing systems in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.
A. Acceptable manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of products of types and

capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less
than 5 years. Provide products produced by a manufacturer listed as an Acceptable Manufacturer
in this section, or European manufacturers of approved equal quality and reputation as approved
by the Architect.
1.59 SUBMITTALS
1.60 SLEEVES
A. Sleeve Product Schedule:
Type Designation Sleeve Materials
1. 1.31m thick gauge, galvanized steel
2. Standard weigh galvanized steel pipe
3. Standard weight galvanized steel pipe with a continuously welded water stop of 6mm steel
plate extending from outside of sleeve a minimum of 50mm all around; similar to F & S
Manufacturing Corp. Fig. 204.
4. Cast iron pipe sleeve with center flange; similar to James B. Clow and Sons No. F-1430 and
F-1435.
5. Standard weight galvanized steel pipe with flashing clamp device welded to pipe sleeve or
watertight sleeves.
B. Sleeve Caulking and Packing Product Schedule:
Type Designation Caulking & Packing Requirements
"A" Oakum, hemp or lead
"B" Incombustible, permanently plastic, waterproof, non-staining caulking compound or pack

with fibrous glass to within 12mm of both construction surfaces and finish with caulking
Page 135 of 429
compound as per above. For floor and roof slabs, finish is required on top side of slab
only.
"C" Packed mineral wool sealed with Johns-Manville "Duxseal" or approved equal; install set
screw escutcheons on both sides of wall.
1.61 ESCUTCHEONS
1. Material: anodized aluminum, chrome plated brass for finished spaces; plain brass, cast iron or
aluminum for unfinished spaces. Set-screw or spring tension design.
1.62 ELECTRIC MOTORS, MOTOR CONTROLS AND STARTERS
A. General:
1. Provide all motors, starters and controls including switches, appurtenances and enclosure
panels for plumbing and fire protection equipment except where otherwise specified.
2. If makes and models of equipment other than that specified are accepted, make proper
adjustments of speed sizes and power, and other characteristics. All costs for changes
resulting there from will be borne by the Contractor.
3. All motors, starters and accessories to comply in all respects with the most recent practice of
the A.I.A., NEMA, IEEE, NFPA and the requirements.
4. Furnish and install all wiring integral with equipment, starters and disconnect switches for
packaged equipment such as; domestic water booster system, hot water heaters, sewage
ejector, sump pumps, and drinking water chillers. Furnish all starters and disconnect switches
for all other plumbing equipment (non-packaged equipment) for installation under Division
26.
5. Furnish and install aquastats and other controlling devices. Provide point-to-point wiring
diagram for wiring under Division 26.
B. Motors:
1. Provide electric motors of sizes and capacities as specified for driving plumbing equipment.
Each motor will be of proper power and speed to suit the specified capacities of equipment
and be non-overloading throughout its range of operation.
2. Each motor will be equipped with suitable electric lead wire positioning gasket at the point
where such leads pass through the motor frame into the motor terminal box. Such gasket
Page 136 of 429

will be arranged to insure that under no conditions will the lead wires be subjected to abrasion
against the metal of the motor frame.
3. Minimal motor construction and component materials will be suitable for continuous
operation in a 40oC ambient at nameplate voltage.
4. All motors regardless of type (open, encapsulated or enclosed) will have a service factor of
at least 1.15 for continuous operation within its ambient operating temperature. Provide
certification of this service factor for all motors which are to be operated in ambients above
40oC.
5. Power Supply
a. Less than .37kW: For operation on 240 volt, 50 Hz, single phase.
b. .37kW and more: For operation on 415 volt, 50 Hz, three phase.
Starters & Controls:
6. All plumbing motors will be provided with HOA selector switches except hot water
circulating pumps may be provided with thermal overload switch type starters. All selector
switches will be of the maintained contact type. All pushbuttons will be of the momentary
contact type.
7. All coils, cores, resistance, insulation, contacts, trippers, etc., will be of the approved type.
All parts subject to wear or arcing will be renewable.
8. All starters and switches will be in full accordance with all local and code requirements.
9. Starters for motors up to and including 5.5 kW will be direct starting, across-the-line type.
Starters for motors larger than 5.5 kW will be reduced voltage type. Motor types will be
designed for Star Delta starting where reduced voltage is required.
10. Starter will be combination fused or unfused as indicated on the motor control sheet and will
be suitable for the motor served.
11. Starters will be provided with thermal overload elements on all three phases sized to match
the motor's nameplate amperage.
12. All motor control to be provided with control circuit transformers.
13. Provide lamacoid nameplates attached to each starter identifying the system and motor
served.
14. All controls to be factory prewired packages with auxiliary contacts for all required control
wiring connections. Contractor to provide all required control wiring. Where loose starting
control components are substituted and accepted in lieu of specified factory prewired
packages. Contractor will coordinate wiring changes and additions required and will bear all
additional expenses due to the substitutions made.
Page 137 of 429

15. All Electrical panels to be NEMA rated to suit the environment where installed. Control
panels to have motor run lights, selector switches and system gauges, etc. mounted in cover
plate.
16. Aqua stats: Liquid filled, immersion type sensor, with adjustable mercury tribe switch as
manufactured by Mercoid Smith Company No. DA-37. Install in oversized tee.
1.63 CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT SUPPLIED BY OTHERS AND FUTURE EQUIPMENT
A. Capped Outlets: Provide soldered, flanged or threaded pipe ends for extension and connection
to equipment by supplying trade.
A. Inspection
1. Examine conditions under which equipment is to be installed. Notify Architect in writing of

B. Installation
1. Install as indicated, in accordance with these specifications and the manufacturer's written
instructions, applicable codes and regulations and in accordance with recognized industry
practices to ensure that installation complies with requirements and serves intended function.
All work to be aligned and level.
2. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation with other work.
2.2 SLEEVES
A. Provide sleeves for each pipe passing through walls, partitions, floors and roofs except multiple
pipe penetrations may be accommodated in a common boxed opening. Provide code complying
packing, caulking as specified or cement fill between pipes and edges of boxed openings.
B. Pack and/or caulk space between pipe or pipe insulation and sleeve as indicated in sleeve
application schedule below. Finish with smooth appearance even with sleeve surface.
C. Sleeve and Sleeve Caulking Application Schedule:
Sleeve Location and Packing Type Sleeve Caulking

Type
Page 138 of 429
5 Membrane waterproof floor, roof and B
wall Note: Membrane
5 Non-membrane water proof wall Construction by another
construction where flashing is trade A or B
required
1 or 2 Interior walls, B
Floors
3 or 4 Exterior walls A
2 Interior fire C
Rated shafts walls
D. Sleeve Sizes:
For Uninsulated Piping: two pipe sizes larger than pipe passing through sleeve or a minimum of
12mm clearance between inside of sleeve and outside of pipe.
For Insulated Piping: adequate size to accommodate the full thickness of pipe covering with clearance for packing
and caulking.
E. Sleeve Length Schedule:
Location Sleeve Length

Floor Slabs Equal to depth of floor construction including finish; in waterproof floor
construction, sleeves to extend minimum of 50mm above finished floor
level.
Roof Slabs Equal to depth of roof construction including insulation plus 100mm.
Provide threaded or caulked counter flashing to extend down over roofing
membrane on pipe.
Walls and Equal to depth of construction and
Partitions terminated flush with finished surfaces.
2.3 ESCUTCHEONS
A. Provide escutcheons on all exposed piping through walls, partitions, floors and ceilings.
Escutcheon inside diameter to closely fit pipe outside diameter or insulation outside diameter
where pipe is insulated. Cover penetration hole in construction.
Page 139 of 429

B. Escutcheon Application Schedule:
Location Type
Finished Spaces Anodized aluminium, chrome
Plated brass
Unfinished Spaces Plain brass, cast iron or
Excluding mechanical aluminium Equipment room
2.4 CONNECTIONS TO EQUIPMENT PROVIDED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A. Capped Outlets: Provide capped or plugged outlets for irrigation systems and for all HVAC
equipment. Capped or plugged outlet to be provided within five meters of equipment connections
or as indicated, whichever is closer. Coordinate elevation, size and pressure requirements.
B. Provide flanged or union valved connections at equipment requiring periodical maintenance.

Make connections to equipment so that equipment may be removed, replaced or repaired with
minimum piping disruption.
C. Contamination Protection: Provide minimum protection for lines connected to all HVAC
equipment and other submerged inlets. Where required by Code or elsewhere herein, provide
approved type reduced pressure back flow preventer or double check backflow preventer. (See
"Domestic Water Systems.")
D. Provide all indirect waste piping as indicated on the plumbing drawings, kitchen or laundry
equipment drawings or as indicated in the equipment schedules. Run indirect waste piping in or
below cabinet work in corners and as required to maximize usefulness of cabinet space. Position
indirect waste piping and receptacles so as not to create a tripping hazard. Obtain approval of
proposed piping arrangement from the Architect prior to installation.
Page 140 of 429

SECTION 220519 METERS AND GAUGES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 8 PART 1 – INSTRUMENTS AND GAUGES
1.64 PRESSURE AND ALTITUDE GAUGES
Generally, valve pressure gauges shall be installed at the following location
a. at each pump discharge and suction, both installed at the height,

b. on system pressurization equipment,
c. on each side of pressure reducing valve sets,
d. on closed expansion vessels,
e. on inlet and outlet of evaporators, condensers and cooling towers,
Gauges installed on hot, chilled and cooling water piping shall be provided with a gauge cock of
straight pattern, ground plug type with lever handle.
The pressure gauge range shall be chosen in such a way that the indicator will be situated near a
middle position during normal operating conditions. The gauge shall have an adjustable pointer.
Gauges shall be bourdon tube type to BS 1780, 100mm diameter, except those installed in plant rooms
which shall be 150mm diameter. Gauges shall have enameled mild steel case with chrome bezel,
Page 141 of 429
substantial glass face, and phosphor bronze bourdon tube. Dial face shall be white with black scale
graduation and numbering.
Gauges shall have overall accuracy of one percent (1%) of scale rang.
Gauge shop drawing and gauge shall be approved by the engineer and gauges shall all be of the same
manufacture.
Gauges shall comply with the following schedule:
Pressures (bar) 10 4.5 3.0 2.5 1.5

Gauge range (bar) 0-20 0-10 0-6 0-5 0-3
Figure intervals (bar) 2 1 1 1 0.5
Intermediate (bar) 500 100 100 100 100
1.65 THERMOMETERS
All thermometers shown on the drawings, listed in schedules or specified herein shall be mercury-in-
steel thermometers to BS 5235, 150 mm diameter dial size in main hot water heater and chiller plant
rooms, and 100 mm diameter dial size elsewhere, with black enameled mild steel case with chrome
bezel and substantial glass face. Stem immersion length shall be 100 mm and shall be bottom or back
connection. Thermometers shall match the pressure gauges and both are to align wherever possible.
Thermometers shall be complete with stainless steel well with 50mm lagging extension.
Thermometers shall be installed with dials or scales in vertical positions in the following locations:
a. On evaporator, condenser and cooling tower inlet and outlet connections

b. On hot water heater and hot water heater flow and return headers.
c. On all flow mains entering plant rooms.
d. On the primary hot water supply flow and return lines.
Page 142 of 429
e. On the main secondary hot water heater and chilled water supply lines.
Wells for mercury-in-glass stem thermometers shall be installed at water inlet and outlet to each
evaporator of the water chilling units and in any other locations shown on the drawings or called in
the schedules.
All thermometers shall be located so as to be easily read from the usual walking space at floor level
or on platforms.
1.66 AIR VENTING AND SEPARATION
Manual air vents shall be provided at all high points in piping systems (including devices connected
into piping systems) or wherever air can be trapped. "High Points in Piping Systems" are defined as
any points in the piping system in which the piping or equipment on either side of that point drops
below that point thus forming a pocket.
A globe valve shall be provided on the connection between main and air vent.
Air vents and globe valves shall have the same pressure rating as specified for the valves for the
various piping systems.
A DN 15 drain line shall be run from each air vent to the nearest open drain, with discharge arranged
so that it is readily accessible and visible.
All air vents shall be numbered and labeled and a schedule shall be prepared and presented showing
the vent number and location as for valve schedules.
1.67 AUTOMATIC AIR VENTS
Automatic air vents shall only be installed where particularly indicated on the drawings. Vents shall
have a float and integral valve plug with seat to discharge chamber. The discharge chamber shall have
a tapped port for drain line extension.
An isolating globe valve shall be installed between the main and the air vent and both shall be pressure
rated for the system. Drain lines shall be extended to the nearest open drain.
Page 143 of 429
1.68 SELF-SEALING TEST POINTS
In addition to those shown on the drawings and described elsewhere, test points shall be provided as
follows:
a. An inlet and outlet of each cooler battery and heat exchanger.

b. On all secondary headers.
c. At all heating and cooling piping main branches.
d. At each port of each automatic control valve.
e. On cooling connections to air handling units.
f. At entry to and exit from each plant room heating and chilled water service.
g. On inlet and outlet of strainer DN 150 and above.
h. On inlet and outlet of each gas fired hot water heater.
i. On inlet and outlet of each hot water calorifier.
Test points shall be dual purpose for pressure gauge and thermometer, be mounted on the sides of
pipes, and shall repeatedly reseal.
Two pressure gauges and two thermometers of appropriate ranges shall be supplied for use with the
test points.
Page 144 of 429

SECTION 220523 GENERAL-DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING
PART 9 PART 1 – GENERAL
A. Drawings and general requirements of Contract, including General and special Conditions, apply
to work of this section.
Extent of valves required by this section is indicated on drawings and/or specified in other
Division 21, 22 sections.
A. Work includes providing all material, labor, supervision and services for valves of the various
fire protection systems in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.

Provide valves produced by a manufacturer listed as an Acceptable Manufacturer in this section.
B. Name of manufacturer and working pressure cast or stamped on each valve.
C. Standard's Compliance:
Page 145 of 429
10. Face-to-face and end-to-end dimensions flange and welded end valves comply with ANSI
B16.10.
11. Forged Ball Valves: ASTM B-283 Alloy C37700.
12. Cast Brass Ball Valves: ASTM B-584 Alloy C84400.
13. Cast Iron Valves: MSS SP-70 and MSS SP-85.
14. Bronze Valves: MSS SP-80
15. Bronze 85-5-5-5, ASTM B62
16. Valve Identification: MSS SP-25
18. Cast Iron Check Valves: ANSI/ASTM A-126 Grade B/MSS SP-71
D. Valves to be the product of a single manufacturer wherever possible
1.72 SUBMITTALS
C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data including printed technical literature, installation,
instructions, and catalog cuts for materials, parts, devices, finish, maintenance manual and
performance data where applicable.
D. Manufacturers' Specifications and Engineering Data to Include:
9. Each type valve
10. Materials for all parts
11. Pressure ratings
12. Schedule of major control valves, check valves and pressure reducing valves.
13. Certificates: Manufacturers certification that valves and accessories meet or exceed
specification requirements.
Page 146 of 429

14. Maintenance data and spare parts list for each type valve. Include this data in maintenance
manual.
16. Cast Iron Check Valve: ANSI/ASTM A-126 Grade B/MSS SP-71
9.1
1.73 GENERAL
A. Furnish valves with IPS, soldered or flanged ends as required by the piping system in which they
are installed.
B. WOG pressure rating to be minimum 7 bars (100 psi) above maximum operating pressure of
system.
C. All gate valve and globe valve packing gland assemblies to be designed for repacking while open
and under pressure.
D. All valves to have identification plates indicating name of manufacturer and working pressure.
E. All iron body valves to have enamel coated interior.
F. All gate type control valves 76 mm (3") and larger to be OS & Y.
G. Provide all valves at equipment with flanged or union ends on equipment side for easy removal.
H. All ball valves to be full port opening blow out proof stem, hard chrome plated forged brass ball.
I. Provide stop plug as renewable stop for disc hanger, construct disc and hanger as one piece and
support hanger by hanger pins with removable side plug for all swing check valves.
1.74 VALVE CONSTRUCTION/APPLICATION SCHEDULE
The following are of Red and White Corporation's model numbers except where otherwise
noted:
Valve Type Pipe Press. Rate Size Bonnet/Stem Assembly Material/ (Class)/ Body
Steam/WOG Model # Style
Gate 65 mm (2-1/2")125#/200# & UB/RS AB/IPS or SE 293
Smaller
Gate 76 mm (3")125#/200# & Larger OS&Y/RS IBBM/FL 421
Gate 65 mm (2-1/2")150#/300#& UB/RS AB/IPS or SE 299
Smaller
Gate 76 mm (3") 150#/300#& Larger OS&Y/RS Stockham IBBM/FL D-623
Page 147 of 429
Gate 76 mm (3")250#/500#& Larger OS&Y/RS Stockham IBBM/FL F-667
Ball 51 mm (2")150#/600#& Smaller Chrome Ball AB/IPS or SE
5044F/Buna-N-2-piece
5049F O Rings
Ball 65 mm (2-1/2") 150#/600#& 76 Chrome Ball, AB/IPS or SE Rings
mm (3") Buna-N-3-piece 5050/5051
Gas 20 mm (3/4") & Smaller AB/IPSRW Ball 5200L
Gas 51 mm (2")& /125#& Smaller Crane Plug AB/IPS 252

Gas Lub 65 mm (2-1/2") & /175#102 mm IBBM Rockwell 142 &
" Plug143
Gas Lub 152 mm (6") & /200# Larger IBBM Rockwell 169
Plug
Globe 65 mm (2-1/2") &150#/200# UBAB/ Composition
Smaller Disc Stockham B-24
Check All150#/300# Spring/Wafer IBBM/BOLTNibco
(Silent) W910
Check All150#/500# Spring/Wafer IBBM/BOLT Nibco
(Silent) W960
Check Type All125#/200# FL/Swing IBBM
Check 65 mm (2-1/2") &150#/ Smaller Swing #236 AB
Check 76 mm (3") &125#/200# Larger Swing #435 IBBM
Thermostatic 15mm (1/2”) & Larger
Balancing 150/200# Teflon coated valve AB TA (hydroids)
Valve with sensor
1.75 SILENT CHECK VALVES
A. For each clear water pump discharge line, provide Val-Matic 1800 BN.2 Series iron body
stainless steel trim, center guided disc with replaceable bushing, Buna-N seating or approved
equal.
B. For each waste water pump discharge line, provide Val-Matic 500 Series biased swing-flex check
valve or approved equal.

10.1
2.1 GENERAL
A. All valves to be installed only in upright or horizontal positions unless otherwise required by the
drawings.
Page 148 of 429

B. All valves to be installed in accessible locations to facilitate easy removal for repair or
replacement.
C. Soldered valves shall be disassembled when soldering.
2.2 VALVE APPLICATION SCHEDULE
Valve Type Application

Gate Valves Control shut-off valve for all domestic water systems.
Thermostatic Balancing
Valves Domestic hot water balancing cocks.
Ball Valves Optional control shut-off valves, 76 mm (3 inches) and smaller.

Optional domestic hot water balancing cocks.
Check Valves Swing type on domestic water except pump discharge lines. Non-slam
type on domestic pump discharge lines. Weighted lever type swing on
ejector and sump pump discharge lines.
2.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install Class 125 valves in portions of system where water pressure does not exceed 7bars (100
psig). Install Class 150 valves in portions of system where water pressure does not exceed 14
bars (200 psig). Install Class 250 valves in portions of system where water pressure does not
exceed 24 bars (350 psig).
B. Provide valve box and cover on all valves for underground services.
C. All water supply system control valves and check valves 65 mm (2 1/2 inch) and smaller to be
all bronze construction. 65 mm (2-1/2") and smaller control valves to have union bonnets. All
water system control valves 76 mm (3 inch) and larger to be outside screw and yoke.
D. Water supply system control valves and check valves 76 mm (3 inch) and larger to be iron body
flanged, with bronze internal parts.
E. Provide separate "Y" strainers upstream of all pressure reducing valves.
Page 149 of 429

SECTION 220529 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND
EQUIPMENT
D. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
and Division-1 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
E. Common Work Results for Plumbing, Section 220500, applies to work of this Section.
F. The requirements of this section apply to equipment specified elsewhere in the specification.
11.1
A. Provide seismic restraining type support systems for all floor and ceiling mounted mechanical
and electrical equipment, piping, ductwork, electrical conduit, panels, and etc. in accordance with
these specifications, the contract drawings and drawing supplements.
B. Provide seismic restraining type vibration isolation systems to eliminate transmission of

movement from the equipment to the structure or connected piping or conduit systems. All
vibration isolation devices to be of the seismic restraint type.
C. All reference herein to methods and techniques of equipment support apply to Mechanical,
Plumbing and Electrical systems.
11.2

required and described herein, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for
not less than 10 years.
B. Provide products produced by a single manufacturer.
C. Standard Compliance: Federal Spec. WW-H1716, ASA Code for Pressure Piping, ASTM A
575-73, MSS SP-58-67, MSS SP-69-66, ANSI Code for pressure piping.
D. All hanging, restraining and isolating methods and techniques to be as indicated on the
documents, in BOCA and SMACNA Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Mechanical Systems
and Plumbing Systems, 1982 Edition, NFPA 13, 1982 UBC, ANSI A58.1, 1981, Title 24 CAC,
Page 150 of 429
GSA, and ATC-3. Where techniques are proposed that deviate from those detailed in the contract
documents, they must be clearly detailed and stamped by a Professional Engineer as indicated
under submittals.
11.3
1.79 MANUFACTURER'S RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic control equipment to have the following
responsibilities:
2. Provide piping and equipment isolation systems and seismic restraints as scheduled or
specified.
4. Provide installation instructions, drawings and field supervision to assure proper installation
and performance.
5. Purchased and/or fabricated equipment must be designed to safely accept external forces of
½ G load in any direction for all rigidly and resiliently supported equipment, piping and
ductwork without failure and permanent displacement of the equipment. Life safety
equipment such as fire pumps, sprinkler piping, emergency generators, and machinery, must
be capable of safely accepting external forces up to ½ G load in any direction without
permanent displacement. Substitution of "Internally Isolated" mechanical equipment in lieu
of the specified isolation of this section must be approved for individual equipment units and
is acceptable only if above acceleration ratings are certified in writing by equipment
manufacturer and stamped by a licensed civil or structural engineer.
1.80 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data including printed technical literature and catalog cuts,
C. Submit for review full detailed drawings and calculations indicating all proposed deviations to
the methods and devices specified in the contract documents. These drawings and calculations
to be stamped by a Structural or Civil Professional Engineer attesting to the adequacy of the
device or method to restrain the equipment without failure while subject to an external lateral
force of ½ G acceleration.
PART 12 PART 2 – PRODUCTS

12.1
2.4 PRODUCT GENERAL
Page 151 of 429
D. It is the objective of this specification to provide the necessary design for the control of excessive
noise and vibration in the building due to the operation of machinery or equipment, and/or due
to interconnected piping or conduit.
E. The installation of all vibration isolation units, and associated hangers and bases, to be in
accordance with the details of the vibration isolation manufacturer.
F. All vibration isolators to have either known non-deflected heights or calibration markings so that,
after adjustment, when carrying their load, the deflection under load can be verified, thus
determining that the load is within the proper range of the device and that the correct degree of
vibration isolation is being provided according to the design.
G. All isolators to operate in the linear portion of their load versus deflection curve. Load versus
deflection curves to be furnished by the manufacturer and must be linear over a deflection range
of not less than 50% above the design deflection.
H. The theoretical vertical natural frequency for each support point, based upon load per isolator
and isolator stiffness, not to differ from the design objectives for the equipment as a whole by
more than +/-10%.
I. All neoprene mountings to have a Shore hardness of 30 to 60 +/-5, after minimum aging of 20
days or corresponding oven-aging.
12.2
2.5 PIPE SUPPORT PRODUCT SCHEDULE
A. Provide pipe supports and components in accordance with the following schedule:
ITEM MANUFACTURE
MAKE
Variable Spring Hanger 51,52,53
(Single & Double Rod and Base) 180o Shield 40
Pipe Saddle 39 A or B
Beam Clamp 28
Welded Beam Attachment 22

Clevis Hanger 1
Clevis Roller Hanger 43
Two Rod Roller Hanger 41
C.I. Roll Stand 44
Adjustable C.I. Roll Stand 46
Adjustable Pipe Stanchion 38
Single Bolt Riser Clamp 8
Double Bolt Pipe Clamp 3
U-Bolts 24
Welded Steel Bracket 32,33
Insert 18
Continuous Slotted Insert 18
Page 152 of 429
Seismic Pipe Clamp 4
B. Provide a factory applied Zinc Chromate coating on all hanger components including rods,
inserts, clamps, stanchions, and brackets. Field touch-up damaged painting with Zinc Chromate
repair paint.
C. Provide hangers, rods, clamps and straps with a non-metallic coating, for electrolytic protection,
especially designed for copper tubing.
D. Provide pipe alignment guides of carbon steel having four machined guiding fingers and a
guiding cylinder.
E. The structural engineer must approve method of hanging before work is started. The contractor
under this Section is responsible for materials and workmanship as described in this Section, and
must make sure that all hangers and supports are properly and permanently connected to building
structure. All structural hanging materials, except variable spring units, must have a safety factor
of 5 built-in.
A. Restrain equipment and components to safely accept a ½ G external lateral force without failure
while maintaining all equipment, piping, and conduit, etc. in a captive position. Seismic restraints
not to short circuit isolation systems or transmit objectionable, non-rotating or reciprocating
vibration noise. Restraint systems to be Types I, II, III, IV or V as described herein.
B. No cast-iron legs may be used unless indicated on the equipment shop drawings and approved
prior to purchase.
1. Restraint, Type I: To comply with general characteristics of spring isolators having a

minimum O.D. to O.H. of .8 to 1 and minimum runout of 50% to solid. To incorporate
built-in snubbing restraint in all directions. To be capable of supporting equipment at a fixed
elevation during equipment erection. Cast or aluminum housings, unless ductile iron, are not
acceptable. System to be field bolted or welded to deck with ½ G acceleration capability.
2. Restraint, Type II: Each corner or side to incorporate a seismic restraint having a minimum
5/8" thick resilient pad limit stops working in all directions. Restraints to be made of plate,
structural members or square metal tubing concentric within a welded assembly
incorporating resilient pads. Angle bumpers are not acceptable. System to be field bolted or
welded to deck with ½ G acceleration capability.
3. Restraint, Type III: Metal cable type with approved end fastening devices to equipment and
structure. See details on drawings. System to be field bolted to deck or overhead structural
members using two sided beam clamps to steel or appropriately designed insert for concrete.
All parts of system including cables, clamps, excluding fastenings are to be single vendor
Page 153 of 429

furnished to assure seismic compliance. When Type III system is used with isolated
equipment slack with 1/2" cable deflection.
4. Restraint, Type IV: Double deflection neoprene isolator encased in ductile iron or steel casing
minimum .30 static deflection. System to be field bolted or welded to deck with ½ G
acceleration capacity.
5. Restraint, Type V: Non-Isolated equipment to be field bolted or welded (powder shots not
acceptable) to structure to resist seismic forces specified. Bolt diameter and imbedment data
must be shown in certified calculations stamped by a licensed engineer.
A. Isolate all floor or ceiling mounted reciprocating equipment and all rotating equipment above 2
hp from the structure by use of seismic restraint type vibration isolators of a design not requiring
separate directional snubbers except where indicated. Manufacturer's rail or base mounted
packaged equipment may be rigidly restrained to concrete housekeeping pads if isolators of the
type specified herein are factory installed between the equipment and the base.

1. Spring isolators to incorporate the following:
j. Minimum diameter of 0.8 of the loaded operating height.

k. Corrosion resistance where exposed to corrosive environment with:
1. Springs cadmium plated or electro-galvanized.

2. Hardware cadmium plated.
3. All other metal parts hot-dip galvanized.
l. Reserve deflection (from loaded to solid height) of 50% of rated deflection.

m. Minimum 1/4" thick neoprene acoustical base pad on underside, unless designated
otherwise.
n. Designed and installed so that ends of springs remain parallel and all springs are installed
with adjustment bolts.
o. Non-Resonant with equipment forcing frequencies or support structure natural
frequencies.
2. Spring hanger rod isolators to incorporate the following:
a. Spring element seated on a steel washer within a neoprene cup incorporating a rod
isolation bushing.
b. Steel retainer box encasing the spring and neoprene cup.
3. (Same as Seismic Restraint, Type IV):
c. Double deflection neoprene isolator encased in ductile iron or steel casing minimum .30
static deflections. System to be field bolted or welded to deck with ½ G acceleration
capacity.
4. Elastomer hanger rod isolators to incorporate the following:

Page 154 of 429
a. Molded unit type neoprene element with projecting bushing lining rod clearance hole.
b. Neoprene element to be minimum 1-3/4" thick.
c. Steel retainer box encasing neoprene mounting, capable of supporting equipment or
piping up to four times the rated load in case of isolator failure.
d. Clearance between mounting hanger rod and neoprene bushing shall be minimum of
1/8".
e. Minimum static deflection of 0.35".
5. Combination spring/elastomer hanger rod isolators incorporating the following:
a. Spring and neoprene isolator elements in a steel retainer box. Neoprene element to be
double deflection type with a minimum thickness of 1-3/4". Single deflection elements
are unacceptable. Springs must be seated in a neoprene cup with extended rod bushing
through bottom of box.
b. Characteristics of spring and neoprene as described in Type A and Type E isolators.
a. 0.75" minimum thickness.

b. 50 psi maximum loading.
c. Ribbed or waffled design.
d. Minimum 0.10" deflection per pad thickness.
e. 1/16" galvanized steel plate between multiple layers or pad thickness is required if
multiple layers are used.
f. A suitable bearing plate to distribute load must be located on top pad layer if equipment
support cover 3/4 of the pad area or less.
a. Laminate canvas duck and neoprene.

b. Maximum loading 1000 psi.
c. A suitable bearing plate to distribute load must be located on top pad layer if equipment
support covers 3/4 of the pad area or less.
d. Minimum thickness to be 1/2".
8. Isolated Clevis:
a. Vibration isolation manufacturer to provide an isolated clevis hanger for pipe support
that combines a unit clevis or rod roller hanger and a Type (C, E or F) isolation hanger
into one assembly. System to be pre-compressed to allow for rod insertion and standard
leveling.
b. Deflections and type to be as listed in "Equipment Installation" in Part 3 of this section
9. Rail Type Spring Isolators:
a. Rail type spring isolators to provide steel members of sufficient strength to prevent
flexure during equipment operation.
Page 155 of 429
b. Springs to be the same as Type A with seismic restraint Type II or seismic restraint Type
I or IV isolation.
10. Pipe Anchors:
a. Vibration isolator manufacturer to provide an all directional acoustical pipe anchor,

consisting of a telescopic arrangement of two sizes of steel tubing separated by a
minimum 1/2" thickness of heavy duty neoprene and duck or neoprene isolation material.
Vertical restraints to be provided by similar material arranged to prevent vertical travel
in either direction. Allowable loads on the isolation material not to exceed 500 psi and
the design to be balanced for equal resistance in any direction. Isolation to be bolted or
welded to structure.
12.3
2.8 EQUIPMENT BASES
A. Integral Structural Steel Base.
1. Reinforced as required to prevent base flexure at equipment start-up and misalignment of

driver and driven units. Centrifugal fan bases complete with motor slide rails drilled for
driver and driven unit mounting template.
B. Concrete Inertia Base.
1. Vibration isolator manufacturer to furnish rectangular structural concrete forms for floating
foundation. Bases for split case pumps to be large enough to provide support for suction and
discharge base elbows. The base depth to be a minimum of 1/10 of the longest span, but not
less than 5" or greater than 14". Forms shall include minimum concrete reinforcement
consisting of 1/2" bars or angles welded in place on 6" centers running both ways. A layer
1-1/2" above the bottom and an additional top layer of reinforcing steel as above for all bases
exceeding 120" in one direction. Isolators to be set into pocket housings which are an integral
part of the base construction and set at the proper height to maintain a 1" clearance below the
base. Bases to be furnished with templates and anchor bolt sleeves as part of this system.
C. Isolated Curb.
1. Curb mounted rooftop equipment to be mounted on structural spring isolation curbs that
directly sit on roof construction and are flashed and water-proofed into roof's membrane
waterproofing system. Manufacturer's curb shall not be used.
2. All spring locations to have removable waterproof covers to allow for spring adjustment
and/or removal.
3. Curbs to be sound attenuating type which will utilize standard 2" roof insulation installed by
the roofer for sound attenuation or will require 2" of interior lining if specifically noted on
schedules or drawings.
4. All spring mounts to be as Isolator.
Page 156 of 429
5. Curbs to be rated for ½ G of acceleration and shall be wind restrained for 110 mph wind
loads.
7. Package Options:
a. Curbs to include a means of incorporating a sound barrier package, Type SBC-3

consisting of two layers of waterproof sheetrock. This barrier to be supplied and installed
in the field by the appropriate contractor.
b. An elevation kit, to allow for up to 8" of roof pitch.
8. Curbs to be welded or bolted to building steel or bolted to concrete decks to attain

acceleration criteria. Curbs to be Type P-6000 having a minimum of 3" rated static deflection.
D. Roof Isolation Rail System.
1. Rooftop fire protection systems to be installed on continuous equipment support piers which
will combine a regular equipment support and an isolation system into one assembly.
2. The system to be designed with 2" (or 3") static deflection steel springs which are both
adjustable, removable and interchangeable after equipment has been installed.
3. Rails to use type spring mounts.
4. The system to maintain the same operating and installed height both with and without the
equipment load and to be fully restrained during wind load conditions allowing no more than
1/4" motion in any direction.
acceleration criteria.
9. System to be Model R-7000 as manufactured by Mason Industries or approved equal.
E. Isolated Rail Base.
1. Rails to be constructed from structural steel angles as required to prevent flexure and
misalignment under load.
2. Each rail to be the full length of the supported equipment and be welded to a series of
vertically restrained spring isolators described above.
3. Angles to have bolt together ties at the ends and center to form one rigid base platform.
4. System to be bolted or welded to deck and shall be designed for minimum ½ G of
acceleration.
5. Mason Type TRSLR, or approved equal.
F. Non-Isolated Curb.
1. Non-Isolated curb mounted rooftop equipment to be mounted on structural curbs that meet 1
G acceleration criteria.
2. Curbs to accept standard 2" roof insulation installed in the field by the roofer and be
waterproofed in accordance with NRCA Standard.
Page 157 of 429

3. Curbs to be welded or bolted to building steel or bolted to building steel or bolted to concrete
decks to attain acceleration criteria.
12.4
A. Elastomer
1. Manufactured of nylon tire cord and EPDM, both molded and cured in hydraulic presses.
2. Straight connectors to have two spheres reinforced with a molded-in, external ductile iron
ring between spheres.
4. Rated 250 psi at 170oF dropping in a straight line to 170 psi at 250oF for sizes 1-1/2" to 12",
elbows to be rated no less than 90% of straight connections.
5. Sizes 10" to 12" to employ control cables with neoprene end fittings isolated from anchor
plates by means of 1/2" bridge bearing neoprene bushings.
7. Connectors bolted to victaulic type couplings or gate, butterfly or check valves to have a
minimum of 5/8" flange spacer installed between connector and coupling flange.
9. Connectors are Type MFTNC Superflex, by Mason, or approved equal.
B. Flexible End Grooved Couplings, by Victulic Company or approved equal.

C. Flexible Stainless Hose
2. 2" pipe size and smaller with male nipple fittings.
3. 2-1/2" and larger pipe size with fixed steel flanges.
Mason Type BSS, or approved equal.
D. Unbraided Exhaust Hose

3. Maximum temperature 1500oF.
Mason Type SDL-RF, or approved equal
PART 13 PART 3 – GENERAL EXECUTION
A. Hangers or clamps installed in contact with copper or brass pipe, to be of copper or provide lead
or fiber shields between iron hangers and clamps to prevent electrolytic corrosion.
Page 158 of 429

B. Furnish and install auxiliary steel required for pipe supports. Chain straps, perforated bars, wire
hangers or expansion shields are not permitted.
D. Anchor points: provide to permit the piping system to expand and contract freely in opposite
directions from the anchored points. Anchors may be double bolt riser clamps and shall be
located halfway between guide points and no less than 1 per 100-foot run.
E. Guide points: Locate in piping system on either side of expansion joints and, or loops, as
specified herein and shown on drawings to permit free axial movement only in pipe main runs.
Elbows at ends of straight pipe runs flanking expansion joints or loops are considered expansion
joints.
F. Trapeze hangers with suspension rods having double nuts and securely attached to the
construction in an approved manner may be used in lieu of separate clevis hanger.
G. Maximum weights on hanger rods assuming a maximum operating temperature of 450oF to be

such that stress in tension will not exceed 9000 psi the root area of threaded portion
H. Minimum hanger rod sizes:
Rod Size Pipe Size
9.53 mm (3/8 inch) Up to 2 inches

12.7 mm (1/2 inch) 2-1/2 to 3-1/2 inches
19.05 mm (3/4 inch) 6 inches
I. Conventional Hanger Locations Schedule for Horizontal Pipes:
J. The following schedule is for conventional, non-seismic type hangers. See plans for seismic
restrained hanger location schedule which may replace the conventional hangers at those
locations. All other conventional hangers are required.
1. Steel pipe and Conduit:
a. Below 1-1/4": Support a maximum of 8 feet (1.5 m) intervals.

b. 1-1/4" and over: Support a maximum of 10 feet (3.0 m) intervals.
2. Copper tubing:
Page 159 of 429
a. 1-1/4 inch" over: Support a maximum of 10 feet (3.0 m) intervals.
b. Below 1-1/4": Support a maximum of 8 feet (1.5 m) intervals.
3. Branch piping 5 feet and longer: Provide separate supports.
K. Conventional Support Locations Schedule for Vertical Pipes:
1. Threaded pipe:
a. At every other story height.
2. Copper tubing:
a. At each story height but not more than 10 ft intervals.
L. Connect pipe hangers and anchors to the building structure as follows:
1. Support piping only from building structural steel or approved galvanized steel inserts
embedded in poured concrete.
2. Where piping revisions are required and are approved after slabs are poured, piping 3 inches
and smaller may be supported at intermediate points by "Phillips," or other approved 3/4 inch
expansion bolts and shields, provided main supports are not less than 20 ft on centers.
3. Attach intermediate supports for piping 4 inches and larger to concrete beams or columns by
means of 4" x 3/8" thick clip knee angles with 3/4 inch expansion bolt in shear (horizontal)
and supporting rod at 90 degrees from anchor bolt.
M. Isolation and seismic systems must be installed in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions. Vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment or piping
resulting in piping stresses or misalignment.
N. Mechanical equipment to be isolated from the building structure by means of noise and vibration
isolators as scheduled on the drawings.
O. All piping 2" and over located in mechanical equipment rooms and run from connected
equipment for 50 feet, to incorporate isolation hangers.
P. All mechanical fire protection piping system and vertical risers to be isolated from the building
structure by means of noise and vibration isolation guides and supports as described herein.
Q. Each motor assembly to be supported on a single structural steel frame.
A. All equipment whether isolated or not to be bolted to the structure to allow for minimum 1 G of
acceleration. Bolt points, diameter of inserts, and embedment depth to be submitted as part of
the submission for each piece of equipment and certified by a licensed civil or structural engineer.
B. All structurally suspended, overhead equipment, isolated or non-isolated, to be four point

independently braced seismic restraining system.
Page 160 of 429
C. Install seismic restraining system for overhead suspended non-isolated equipment, piping,
electrical conduit and slack with 1/2" cable deflection for isolated systems.
D. Seismically restrain all piping and electrical conduit with restraining system in accordance with
the following schedule:
1. Water Pipe and Electrical Conduit, Schedule 10, 20, or 40 Weld or Victaulic:
a. Lateral Brace: maximum 40 feet intervals

b. Longitudinal Brace: Maximum 80 feet intervals
2. Gas, Fuel, Oil:

b. Maximum 40 feet intervals.
E. Place floor mounted equipment on 4" high concrete housekeeping pads properly doweled or
expansion shielded to deck to meet acceleration criteria. Mount vibration isolating devices and
related inertia blocks on concrete pad. Concrete work specified in Division 3.
1. Gas piping less than 1" I.D.

2. Piping and conduit in boiler and MER rooms less than 1-1/4" I.D.
3. Other piping less than 2-1/2" I.D.
4. All rectangular ducts less than 6 sq.ft. in cross sectional area.
5. All round ducts less than 28" in diameter.
6. All piping suspended by individual clevis hangers 12" in length or less from the top of the
pipe support to the bottom of the support for the hanger.
7. All top supported ducts suspended by hangers 12" or less in length from the top of the duct
support to the bottom of the support for the hanger.
G. Chimneys and stacks passing through floors are to be bolted at each floor level or secured above
and below each floor with riser clamps.
H. Chimneys and stacks running horizontally to be braced every 30 feet with an approved restraining
system.
I. For overhead supported equipment, overstress of the building structure must not occur. Bracing
may occur from:

Page 161 of 429

J. Pipe risers through cored shafts require no further seismic bracing. (Core diameter to be
maximum 2" larger than pipe O.D.)
13.1
B. Installation:

c. Water piping and boiler breaching within 50 feet (or 100 diameters if greater than 50
feet) from connected rotating equipment and pressure reducing stations.
d. All water piping connected to reciprocating or rotating equipment up to 50 ft. from
equipment connection.
2. The isolators to be installed with the isolator hanger box attached to, or hung as close as
possible to, the structure.
3. The isolators to be suspended from substantial structural members, not from slab diaphragm,
unless specifically permitted.
5. Horizontal suspended pipe 2" and smaller and all steam piping to be suspended by isolators
with a minimum of 3/8" deflection. Water pipe larger than 2" to be supported with a
minimum of 1" (or same static deflection for the first three locations) as isolated equipment
to which pipe connects, whichever is greater.
a. Hanger can substitute for the above.
6. Horizontal pipe, floor supported at slab to be supported with a minimum static deflection of
1" or same deflection as isolated equipment to which pipe connects, whichever is greater.
7. Vertical riser guides, if required, to avoid direct contact of piping with building.
8. Pipe anchors, or guides where required, to utilize resilient pipe anchors, Mason Industries
Type or equivalent, to avoid direct contact of piping with building.
9. Riser sway supports, where required, to utilize two neoprene elements to accommodate
tension and compression forces.
10. Pipe Extension and Alignment Connectors: Provide connectors at riser takeoffs, and
elsewhere as required, accommodating misalignment.

4. Supplementary steel to be sized for a maximum deflection 0.08 inches at center span.
5. Support water piping in shafts and floor supports entering shaft with isolator or pads to
prevent direct contact of piping with building structure.
Page 162 of 429
6. Guide and anchor piping in shafts, as required, with approved mounting designs
incorporating pads to prevent direct contact of piping with building structure.
1. The minimum operation clearance between the equipment frame or rigid steel base frame
and the housekeeping pad or floor to be 1". Minimum operating clearance between concrete
inertia base and housekeeping pad or floor to be 2".
2. The equipment structural steel or concrete inertia base to be placed in position and supported
temporarily by blocks or shims, as appropriate, prior to the installation of the machine and
isolators.
3. The isolators to be installed without raising the machine and frame assembly.
4. After the entire installation is complete and under full operational load, to adjust the isolators
so that the load is transferred from the blocks to the isolators and so that all isolators are
barely free, remove shims.
5. Isolation mounting deflection to be the minimum specified or as scheduled on the drawings.
7. Verify that all installed isolator and mounting systems permit equipment motion in all
directions. Adjust or provide additional resilient restraints to limit equipment start-up lateral
motion to 1/4".
8. Prior to start-up, clean out all foreign matter between bases and equipment. Verify that there
are no isolation short circuits in the base, isolators or seismic restraints.
13.2
3.4 INSPECTION
A. On completion of installation of all vibration isolation devices herein specified, the factory
representative or Professional Engineer retained by the Contractor to inspect the completed
system and report in writing any installation error, improperly erected isolation devices or other
faults in the system that could affect the performance of the system. Contractor to submit a report
to the Project Director, including the manufacturer's representative’s final report, indicating all
isolation reported as properly installed or requiring correction. Include a report by the Contractor
on steps taken to properly complete and correct the isolation work.
SECTION 220553 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT
Page 163 of 429

G. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions.
H. General Requirements for Mechanical systems, Section 220500 & 210500, applies to work of
this section.
I. The requirements of this Section apply to equipment specified elsewhere in the specification.
14.1
A. The work includes the providing of all labor, supervision, materials, equipment, accessories,
services and tests necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the Owner.
14.2
1.83 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, including printed technical literature.
PART 15 PART 2 – PRODUCTS

15.1
2.10 GENERAL
J. All exposed and uninsulated pipes, ferrous supports, gantries, brackets and steelwork in the
Contract works shall be painted in accordance with this section of the Specification.
K. The contractor shall obtain from the supplier of any paint or similar product detailed instructions
for the use of that product, specific to the conditions found on the contract. These shall include
details of storage, preparation of steelwork, application method and conditions, over coating and
any other relevant points.
L. The contractor shall comply with the manufacturer's instructions for the use of any product,
unless these are in conflict with the requirements of this specification. Areas of conflict shall be
brought to the attention of the Owner's Authorized Representative.
15.2
2.11 APPLICATION OF PAINT SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Reference shall be made to BS 7079 - preparation of steal before application of paints and related
products, part 0 - introduction.
B. Prior to surface preparation the surfaces shall be cleaned of dirt, grease, loose rust and other
contaminants. No pipe shall be used which has corroded beyond Grade C of BS 7079: Part A1.
Page 164 of 429

C. The contractor shall ensure that all pipe work shall be delivered from the factory thoroughly blast
cleaned to Sa2.5 quality, as defined in BS 7079: Part A1 and suitably protected to prevent rust
formation before application of the paint scheme. The surface roughness after cleaning shall not
exceed a peak-to-trough amplitude of 80um.
D. Prior to application of primer steel surfaces shall be cleaned of dirt, grease and other
contaminants. Any rust present shall be completely removed by blast cleaning or wire brushing
to the standard noted above. Severely pitted steelwork shall not be used.
E. Galvanized steel shall be degreased by scrubbing with a warm detergent solution (2% Teepol or
equivalent) followed by water washing, followed by treatment with a mordant solution (British
Rail 'T-Wash' or equivalent), followed by water washing once the surface has returned black.
Any areas where the surface does not turn black shall be recleaned and re-treated.
F. The quality of surface preparation specified must be obtained at the time of priming.
G. Areas to be welded shall be masked off prior to priming, and re-prepared and primed to the same
quality after welding.
2.12 PAINT SCHEME
A. The criteria in the following clauses shall be used to define which scheme should be used in a
given situation where not specifically given in the paint scheme schedule.
SCHEME P/1: Internal uninsulated copper pipe work and internal steel support systems
(in a dry place).
SCHEME P/2: Internal uninsulated steel pipe work (in dry spaces and away from the
building perimeter, where condensation is likely to occur only in exceptional circumstances.
Includes pipes which are insulated with an integral vapour barrier).
SCHEME P/3 : External and light well insulated steel pipe work and all steel support
systems (in a position in which condensation is likely to occur from time to time, and which the
paint is unlikely to be maintained).
SCHEME P/4: Internal uninsulated steel pipe work and internal steel support systems (in
a position in which condensation is likely to occur from time to time, and in which maintenance
of the paint is possible).
SCHEME P/5: External galvanized steel pipe work and external galvanized steel
supports. If the Contractor has reason to believe that the conditions will in fact be more onerous
than those in the relevant clause above, he shall draw this to the attention of the Owner's
Authorized Representative.
Page 165 of 429
The various paint schemes shall be as detailed below (DFT shall mean dry film thickness):
SCHEME P/1 Surface preparation : As above
Primer : Zinc phosphate oil/alkyd primer, 40

microns DFT
Finishes : Oil/alkyd finish (colour specified
elsewhere)
SCHEME P/2 Surface preparation : As above
microns DFT
SCHEME P/3 Surface preparation : Type 1
microns DFT.
barrier Coat (1) : High build bituminous coating, chocolate
brown, 100 microns DFT.
barrier Coat (2) : High build bituminous coating, black,
100 microns DFT.
SCHEME P/4 Surface preparation : Type 1
microns DFT
Barrier Coat (1) : Oil/alkyd MIO barrier coat, 75 microns
DFT
Undercoat : Oil/alkyd undercoat, 40 microns
DFT
Finish : Oil/alkyd finish
SCHEME P/5 Surface preparation : Etch prime
Barrier : Cold tar epoxy, 125 microns DFT
Where a Contractor wishes to modify the specified paint scheme he shall demonstrate that
the proposed alternative is at least equivalent to the specified scheme, and that it will not
create compatibility problems with any adjacent scheme.
Page 166 of 429

All paints in a single scheme shall be supplied by the same manufacturer.
Primers in which red oxide (red iron oxide) is the primary colouring agent shall not be used.
2.13 APPLICATION OF PAINT
A. The Contractor shall demonstrate by means of samples submitted before commencement of the
work, the methods he intends to use and the quality of work that will be achieved.
B. All work adjudged by the Owner's Authorized Representative to be worse in quality than the
samples shall be rejected.
C. All painting shall be carried out by skilled painters under competent supervision.
D. Each coat of paint shall be applied to a clean and suitable surface to produce a continuous film
of paint of uniform and even thickness.
E. As soon as the priming coat has dried, an extra stripe coat of paint shall be applied to all edges,
corners, cervices, bolt heads, welds and any similar areas, using the same paint as for the primer
but in a contrasting shade.
F. The dry film thickness shall be measured after each coat has dried using any of the methods of
BS 3900: Part C5 for measuring dry film thickness. Wet film thickness measurements shall not
be used, other than for control purposes.
G. The adhesion of the paint scheme shall be measured and using any of the methods of BS 3900:
Part E6 and carried out on representative areas chosen to be non-obtrusive in the final condition.
Areas worse than classification 2 of that standard shall be cleaned to bare metal and repainted.
H. The test areas shall be touched-up in accordance with this Specification.
2.14 DAMAGED SURFACES
A. The Contractor take all necessary precautions to minimize damage to steal and to paint coatings
during handling, installation and thereafter.
B. Where damage or breakdown has occurred, or in any other place where the paintwork does not
comply with this Specification the Contractor shall touch-up to an equivalent standard to the
up\damaged paint, and in such a way that the areas of touch-up shall not be visually apparent.
C. The Contractor shall demonstrate to the Owner's Authorized Representative that his proposals for
touching-up shall include details of surface preparation, area of overlap, type and thickness of
paint to be used and any other relevant features, shall produce work in accordance with this
Specification.
Page 167 of 429
15.3
2.15 PIPE WORK IDENTIFICATION
Pipe work identification shall be in accordance with item 1-20 section 220500 & 220553 the pipework
Identification Specification.
SECTION 220700 PLUMBING INSULATION
Page 168 of 429

J. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions, and
K. The requirements specified in this section apply to all related sections in this Division. The
A. The work includes the providing of all labor, supervision, materials, equipment, accessories,
services and tests necessary to complete, make ready and set to work for operation by the Owner,
all insulation in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.
A. Manufacturers: firms regularly engaged in manufacture of insulation of types and capacities

Provide safety and motor disconnects produced by a manufacturer listed as an acceptable
manufacturer in this section.
B. Standards Compliance: comply with requirements of ASTM C534-70, UL723, NFPA 255, and
ASTM E84.
1.87 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: submit manufacturer's data including printed technical literature, installation,
instructions, and catalog cuts for each type of insulation.
B. Fabrication instructions for pipe, pipe fittings, valves and equipment insulation, including butt
joints and longitudinal lap.
16.1
1.88 PIPE INSULATION TYPE "A"
A. Pipe Insulation: flame-attenuated glass fiber, bonded with thermosetting resin, maximum K
factor of .25 at 75oC mean temperature.
B. Fittings and Valve Insulation: same type and thickness as adjacent pipes, less jacket.
C. Jackets: factory applied, all-purpose fiberglass reinforced Kraft paper bonded to aluminum foil
and permanently fire treated for a Composite maximum of 25 flame spread and 50 smoke
developed; pressure sensitive tape closure for longitudinal lap and a butt strip for adjoining
sections.
Page 169 of 429

D. Joints Seals: seal off the ends of pipe insulation at intervals not more than 7 .3 meters (24
feet ) on centers for straight runs, and at all flanges, valves and fittings; Benjamin Foster BF30-35
Sealant.
E. Fittings Jackets: vapor resistant one-piece premolded polyvinyl chloride fitting cover. Install
over factory precut insulation and secure by taping the ends to the adjacent pipe covering; similar
to Zest on, Inc.
F. Finish: jacket to be suitable for painting with a latex or water-based paint.
1.89 PIPE INSULATION TYPE "B"
A. Pipe Insulation: Flexible elastomeric insulation equal to Self-Seal Armaflex 2000. Maximum K
Factor of .25 BTU in /hF2 at 75C mean temperature.
B. Fittings: May be fabricated from miter cut tubing or commercially available PVC Fitting covers
with insulation inserts; similar to Zeston, Inc.
C. Joint Seals: Seal adjoining sections of pipe insulation with 520 adhesive or 40 MM (1 1/2 “ )
wide 3M #471 tape or equal.
D. Finish: Provide two coats of WB Armaflex finish on all foam insulation exposed to the weather.
1.90 PIPE INSULATION INSERTS
A. Pipe insulation inserts shall have same K-Factor as adjacent insulation to be similar to manville
thermo – 12
PART 17 PART 2 – EXECUTION
2.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which insulation is to be installed. Notify Architect in
writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work
until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
2.2 INSULATION SCHEDULE
Service Type Minimum Thickness

Page 170 of 429
All outdoor cold water piping A 50 mm (2 inch)
(50mm Fiber glass)
Outdoor Piping
1. Finish with a 0.7 mm thick aluminum jacket which has a factory applied moisture barrier. For
all applications where it is available, above the fiberglass insulation the jacketing shall be factory
attached to the insulation and installed per manufacturer's recommendation.
2. Where field applied jacketing must be used, it shall be applied with 50 mm overlap facing down
from the weather and shall be secured with an aluminum band 12 x .3 mm and seals applied on
300 mm centers with bands applied directly over but overlaps. As an alternate, the jacketing may
be applied with rivets. Where jacketing is cut out or abuts an un-insulated surface, the joint shall
be sealed with foam sealant.
3. Fittings and valves shall be insulated and finished with mitered sections of the insulation with
factory attached aluminum jackets installed per manufacturer's recommendation.
2.3 RIGID INSERT SCHEDULE
Pipe Size Length
40mm ( 1 1/2 “) to 65mm( 2 1/2") 254mm (10”)
75mm to (3”) to 152 mm (6”) 305mm (12”)
200mm to 254mm ( 10”) 406mm (16”)
305mm (12”) & Over 559mm (22”)
2.4 INSTALLATION
A. Install insulation as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in

accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that installation complies with
specifications and serves intended purpose.
B. Coordinate with other work, as necessary to interface installation of insulation with other work.
Page 171 of 429
C. Install insulation on pipe system subsequent to installation of heat tracing, testing and acceptance
of tests.
D. Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure
complete and tight fit over surfaces to be covered.
E. Cover valves, fittings and similar item in each piping system with equivalent thickness and
composition of insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded, precut or job
fabricated units except where documents call for insulation to be another type.
F. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Install each continuous run of piping
with fall length units of insulation with single cut piece to complete run. Do not use out pieces
or scraps abutting each other. Install pipe hanger insulation insert at all hangers of equal thickness
to adjacent insulation. Install insulation protection shields at each pipe hanger between jacket
and hanger.
G. Install rigid pipe insulation inserts on all pipes passing through floor sleeves and through fire
rated walls and fire rated partition or ceiling openings in order to maintain required fire rated
composite for sleeve caulking. In lieu of this requirement, insulation may be deleted from hot
pipes below 71C at the point where they pass through the building's construction.
H. Install all-purpose insulation jackets over all hot pipe insulation. Install a continuous unbroken
vapor barrier seal over all cold water pipe to prevent condensation on cold pipes and hangers,
supports, anchors, etc., which are secured directly to cold pipes. For hot pipes, apply 76mm wide
vapor barrier type or band over the butt joints.
I. Where insulation is specified for piping, also insulate all connections, vents, drains and piping
connected to the system which are subject to heat loss or gain.
J. Do not use staples on hot pipe insulation jackets if hot water heat maintenance system is used.
SECTION 221116 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING
Page 172 of 429

A. Provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions, and Division-1 Specification
sections, apply to work of this section.
18.1
tests necessary to complete, make ready and set to work for acceptance by the Owner, all piping,
fittings and jointing materials for plumbing systems in accordance with Drawings and
Specifications.
18.2
A. Acceptable manufacturers: firms regularly engaged in manufacture of piping, fittings, and

jointing materials of types and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use
in similar service for not less than 5 years. Provide products produced by a manufacturer listed
as an Acceptable Manufacturer in this section as approved by the Architect.
C. Standard Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, ANSI, ASTM, CS,
CISPI and as follows:
Copper Water Tubing (Types ASTM B-88, ANSI A23.1

"K" & "L") (Hard Temper)
Brass Pipe 85% Red Brass FS-WW-P351, ANSI H27.1,

ASTM B43
DWV Copper Tube ASTM B306
Page 173 of 429

Cast Brass Screwed
Fittings 860 kPa Class ANSI B16.15
Cast Brass Solder Joint ANSI B16.18

Fittings
Cast Copper Fittings ANSI B16/23
Wrought Copper Solder ANSIB16.18/B16.29

Joint Fittings
Brass Compression Fittings ANSI A40.2
Cast Bronze Brazing MIL-F-0011830

Fittings
Bronze Flanges ANSI B16.24
Cast Iron Flanged Fittings ANSI B16.1

and Flanges, Standard
Weight
Brazing Alloys Having Class BCUP5

Point Higher Than
538C.
Brazing Filler Metal
ASTM-B260-62T
Poly propylene Pipes DIN 8077/78, DIN EN ISO 15874,
ASTM F 2389 & DIN 16962.
18.3
Page 174 of 429
1.94 SUBMITTALS
instructions, and catalog cuts for each type of pipe and pipe fitting.
B. Submit piping schedule showing manufacture, pipe or tube weight, fitting type, and joint type for
each piping system.
18.4
A. Galvanized Steel Pipe
1. Pipe: Schedule 40 seamless drawn steel pipe, galvanized inside and out; ASTM A-120 and
A53.
2. Fittings:
a. Galvanized malleable iron, flat band threaded steam pattern.

b. Grooved malleable iron.
c. Threaded cast iron drainage pattern.
3. Joints:
a. Red or white lead and oil or approved pipe compound or Teflon tape on male threads.
b. Standard weight grooved with enameled malleable iron ribbed flex coupling; ASTM A47
with Buna-N gasket. Victaulic Style 77 or Tyler #100 Standard.
c. Standard weight grooved joint with enameled malleable iron ribbed rigid coupling;
ASTM A47 with Buna-N gasket. Victaulic Style 07.
B. Copper Tubing
1. Tube: Copper seamless drawn extrusion, hard tempered; Types "K" or "L" ASTM B-88-66A
and ANSI H23.1.
2. Fittings:
a. Cast solder brass; ANSI B16.18.

b. Wrought copper solder; ANSI B16.22.
c. Bronze roll groove per ASTM 75.
Page 175 of 429

3. Joints:
a. 95-5 solder ASTM B32, Grade 95TA.

b. Silver braze.
C. DWV Copper
1. Pipe: Copper tubing, seamless drawn extrusion, hard temper; ASTM B-306 66a and ANSI
H23.6.
2. Fittings:
a. Cast bronze or wrought copper; ANSI B16.23.

b. Cast bronze, Sovent type; ANSI B16.32.
3. Joints: 95-5 tin lead solder; ASTM B32.
D. Copper Pipe
1. Pipe: Threadless, Type "TP"; ANSI H26.2.

2. Fittings: Wrought copper solder, ANSI B16.18.
3. Joints: Silver brazes.
E. Brass Pipe:
1. Pipe: Seamless red brass, 85% copper; ANSI H27.1 and ASTM, B-43.
2. Fittings: Cast brass, 85% copper, malleable pattern, ANSI B16.16.
3. Joints: Red or white lead and oil or approved pipe compound.
F. Polypropylene (PP-R) (fusiolen PP-R)
1. Pipe: DIN 8077/78. SDR 7.4, Faser Composite, with UV resistant coating for exposed to sun
piping
2. Fittings: DIN 16952.
3. Joints: Thermal welding to DIN standard.
G. POLYETHYLENE PIPES (PE) PIPES
Note: LDPE (low density) pipes have a certain flexibility while HDPE (high density) Pipes are
rigid.
Page 176 of 429

The material from which the pipes and fittings are made shall conform to the applicable
requirements of the Standard(s) indicated.
Fittings shall be made either for solvent cement joints, elastomeric sealing ring type
joints (push-in or mechanically fixed), or coupling sleeve joints as indicated and shall
comply with one of the following Standard(s) as appropriate:
AWWA C 901 or equivalent
Polyethylene (PE) pipes shall comply with the following Standard(s):
1. SASO 1401 polyethylene pipe, pipe diameter as indicated,
- type LDPE (low density),
- type HDPE (high density),
- class 1, nominal pressure up to 2,5 bar.
- class 2, nominal pressure up to 4 bar.
- Jointing: compression sealing ring, mechanically fixed by proprietary non-
corrosive compression fittings.
2. ISO 4127 Polyethylene (PE) pipes for water supply, allowable hydrostatic pipe
design stress to comply with water supply system design stress, pipe diameter as
indicated.
- Jointing: rigid joints, fusion welded.
3. AWWA C 901 Polyethylene (PE) pressure pipe, for water, pressure class and
dimension ratio (DR) to comply with system design pressure, pipe diameters as
indicated.
4. ASTM D 3035 Polyethylene (PE) plastic pipe (DR-PR). Based on controlled
outside diameter, pressure rating (PR) and dimension ratio (DR) to comply with
system design pressure, pipe diameters as indicated.
5. ASTM D 2239 Polyethylene (PE) plastic pipe (SIDR-PR), pressure rating (PR) and
standard dimension ratio (SDR) to comply with system design pressure, pipe
diameters as indicated.
Page 177 of 429
6. ASTM D 2104 Polyethylene (PE) plastic pipe, Schedule 40, pressure rating (PR) to
comply with system design pressure, pipe diameters as indicated.
7. DIN 8075 Polyethylene (PE) pipes, pipe diameter as indicated,
- PE-HD type, for non-pressure applications.
- material designation (PE 63, PE 80, PE 100) as indicated.
Jointing: compression sealing rings, mechanically fixed by proprietary non-corrosive compression fittings
1.96 UNDERGROUND PIPE PROTECTION
A. Polyethylene Tape - Field Applied
1. Polyethylene, 12 mil thick, field applied after testing.

2. Scrape and hand wire brush piping clean with solvent and apply a primer coat. Wrap pipe
using a 50% overlap.
B. Polyethylene - Mill Wrapped
1. Polyethylene, 10 mil thick, mill applied; FS-L-C 530b.

2. Field wrap joints as specified for field applied polyethylene tape.
18.5
1.97 INSTALLATION
A. General
accordance with recognized industry practices which will achieve permanently leak proof
piping systems, capable of performing each indicated service without piping failure.
Install each run with minimum joints and couplings, but with adequate and accessible unions
for disassembly and maintenance/replacement of valves and equipment. Align piping
accurately at connections, within 1/400mm misalignment tolerance.
Page 178 of 429

2. Coordinate as necessary to interface installation of piping, fittings, and jointing with other
work.
3. Locate piping runs except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally (pitched to
drain) and avoid diagonal runs wherever possible. Orient horizontal runs parallel with walls
and column lines. Locate runs as shown or described by diagrams, details and notations or,
if not otherwise indicated, run piping in shortest route which does not obstruct usable space
or block access for servicing building and its equipment. Hold piping close to walls,
overhead construction, columns and other structural and permanent-enclosure elements of
buildings.
4. Do not run piping through electric rooms, electric spaces, electric closets, or other electrical
or electronic equipment spaces unless unavoidable, and specifically indicated on the plans,
in which case, install drip pan below and 300mm beyond foot print of such piping. Spill drip
pan drain on floor of adjacent space where flow will be noticed. Do not spill to a receptacle.
5. In erecting pipe, friction wrenches and risers shall be used exclusively; any pipe cut, dented
or otherwise damaged shall be replaced at no cost to Owner.
6. All fittings, unions and connections at pumps, tanks or other major equipment 75mm and
over in size shall be assembled with flanged joints and approved gaskets.
B. Joints
1. Threaded pipe: In accordance with ANSI B2.1; cut threads full and clean using sharp dies.
Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply pipe joint
compound, or pipe joint tape (Teflon) where recommended by pipe/fitting manufacturer, on
male threads only at each joint and tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed.
2. Nipples: Any piece of pipe 200mm in length and less shall be considered a nipple. All
nipples with unthreaded portion 40mm and less shall be extra heavy. All other nipples shall
be of weight corresponding to fitting connected. Only shoulder nipples shall be used, close
nipples will not be acceptable.
3. Solder: Cut tube ends squarely, ream to full inside diameter, and clean outside of tube ends
and inside of fittings. Apply solder flux to joint areas of both tubes and fittings. Insert tube
full depth into fitting, and solder in manner which will draw solder full depth and
circumference of joint. Wipe excess solder from joint before it hardens.
Page 179 of 429

4. Weld: pipe joints in accordance with ASME Code for Pressure Piping, B31, and in
accordance with recognized industry practice and as follows:
a. Weld pipe joints only when ambient temperature is above -18oC.

b. Bevel pipe ends at a 37.5o angle where possible, smooth rough cuts, and clean to remove
c. Use pipe clamps or tack-weld joints with 25mm long welds; 4 welds for pipe sizes to
250mm 8 welds for pipe sizes 300 to 500mm.
d. Build up welds with stringer-bead pass, followed by hot pass, followed by cover or filler
pass. Eliminate valleys at center and edges of each weld. Weld by procedures which
will ensure elimination of unsound or unfused metal, cracks, oxidation, blow-holes and
non-metallic inclusions.
e. Do not weld-out piping system imperfections by tack-welding procedures; refabricate to
comply with requirements.
f. At Installer's option, install forged branch-connection fittings wherever branch pipe is
indicated; or install regular "T" fitting.
Clean flange faces and install gaskets. Tighten bolts to provide uniform compression of
gaskets.
6. Brazing: certify brazing procedures, brazers, and operators in accordance with ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX, for shop and job-site brazing of piping work.
7. Mechanically Formed Connections: State amount to be deducted from bid if mechanically

formed tee connection and/or couplings are provided in accordance with the following:
a. Tees
Size of wall thickness of both run tube and branch tube are listed by manufacturer of
forming equipment as "Acceptable Application."
Height of drawn collar is not less than 3 times wall thickness of run tubing.
End of branch tube is notched to conform to inner curve of run tube, and dimpled to set
exact penetration depth into collar.
Resulting joint is minimum of 3 times as long as thickness of thinner joint member, and
brazed using B-Cup series filler metal.
b. Couplings
Form couplings by first annealing area at end of tube where expansion will occur. Insert
tube expander to die size required and expand tube end to accept tubing of same size.
Page 180 of 429
Resulting joint is minimum of 3 times as long as thickness of tube, and brazed using B-CuP
series filler metal.
c. Jointing system to be "T-Drill" or approved equal. Obtain written approval of deduct

alternate from Engineer prior to using mechanically formed joints.
A. General
1. Examine conditions under which piping is to be installed. Notify Architect in writing of

2. After installation, and prior to testing, insulating or painting inspect piping in accordance
with procedures of ASME B31. Inspect each run of each system for completion of joints,
supports and accessory items.
3. Do not put any systems in operation until they have been tested, inspected, and approved by
the Architect. During the progress of the installation, notify the Architect, at least 48 hours
prior to such test or inspection. Set up and prepare all tests in advance of scheduled test time.
Perform all tests in the presence of the Architect. Submit to the Architect signed copies of
all test reports and approvals and maintain copy of same at site until acceptance of the work.
4. During the progress of the work, pressure test the various piping systems including mains,
risers, branches and fixture roughing as directed to permit insulation, general construction
5. Provide all apparatus personnel and temporary work for tests. Take all due precautions to
prevent damage to the building or its contents as a result of such test. Pay for all reinstatement
of work caused by such damage to the building or work of other trades caused by such test.
6. After testing, remove and/or repair joints as required and retest. No caulking of pipe joints
to remedy leaks will be permitted except where lead and oakum joints are used.
B. Domestic water, Steam, Condensate, Fuel oil & Irrigation water Piping: fill with water and test
to 1-1/2 times the system working pressure but not less than 1380 kPa with no loss in pressure
for a period of one hour. Test to include all valves if designed to withstand such pressure.
Page 181 of 429

Item Piping Material Fittings & Joints Application
A Galvanized Steel Galvanized malleable All piping system inside

Pipe. iron steam pattern. pump rooms
B PP-R (Poly Electrically welded For all cold and hot water
Propylene) Piping & with pipes using piping.
Fittings PN20 to heating elements.
DIN8078 &
DIN1696
HDPE pressure
pipes according to Socket fusion thermal
PN 16. welde All underground domestic
C
water supply piping system
internal & exterior networks

SECTION 221119 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
C. Domestic Water Piping, section 221116, applies to work of this section.
Page 182 of 429

D. General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping, section 220523, applies to work of this section.
E. The requirements of this section apply to equipment specified elsewhere in the specification.
F. Earthwork, civil specifications applies to work of this section.
A. Work Includes providing all labor, supervision, materials, equipment and tests necessary to
complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, potable cold water, hot water and hot water
circulating systems to fixtures and equipment.
B. Provide cold water service(s) from street main including required applications and related fees.
Provide water meter(s) and approved piping rig and/or all related applications and fees. If
required, provide meter with remote reader located as directed.

Provide products produced by a manufacturer listed as an Acceptable Manufacturer in this
section.
B. Applicable Standards:
1. All Applicable Local Codes

2. National Standard Plumbing Code
3. NSF National Sanitation Foundation
4. PDI Plumbing and Drainage Institute
5. ASSE
1.103 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data including samples, printed technical literature,
installation, instructions, and catalog cuts for materials, parts, devices, finish, and performance
data.
B. Coordinated piping, inserts and structural drawings, including coordinates and elevations.
C. Indicate proposed changes in pipe sizes and changes in basic system scheme.
Page 183 of 429

1.104 VACUUM BREAKERS
A. Brass body and internal trim, full size orifice, spill-loss design silicon disc suitable for
temperatures up to 210oF, meet or exceed the requirements of ASSE Standard 1001.
B. Watts Model 288A Series or approved equal.
1.105 AIR RELIEF VALVES
A. To operate under pressure to allow entrapped air to escape by a float, lever and needle valve
assembly. Needle shall be guided Buna-N seat, float and internal levers to be stainless steel 150
psig WWP.
B. APCO Model 50 or Spirax Sarco Model 13W or approved equal.

1.106 HOSE BIBBS
A. Rough brass angle Bibb, standard hose thread outlet, metal tie handle, renewable seat. Install a
matching finish vacuum breaker at each hose outlet. Rough brass in Mechanical and non-finished
areas and polished brass plate in finish areas. Install a control valve in the supply piping
B. Mueller Brass Co. Model V-1017
Dick Fig. #3501 or approved equal.
1.107 HOSE STATIONS
20 mm mixing faucet (60 Co hot water and cold water)
A. Flush wall box with key operated hinged cover, integral vacuum breaker, 20mm hose thread
nozzle, and female key operated valves with composition washers and renewable seats.
B. Stainless steel hose rack with a heavy duty spray nozzle and 15-meter hose.
1. Similar to Smith No. 5760 modified or equal approved.
C. Provide 2 operating keys.
Page 184 of 429

D. Bronze finishes.
E. Install a control valve on each of the supply CW & HW piping.
1.108 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS
A. All stainless steel construction shock absorbers, each with a pre – charged air chamber of nesting
steel bellows, and each sized to suit the connecting pipe size and the equipment at it is provided
for
1.109 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Drawn steel case with 114.3 mm (4 1/2") diameter dial, white coated with black figures and
gradations. 0-100 psig, 0-160 psig or 0-300 psig pressure range. Ernst Gage Co. Fig. 23 with
Fig. 58 brass cock.
B. 51 mm (2") diameter spring held, surface type, 70-370oF.
1.110 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Di-electric pipe or flanged union isolating joints, for all connections between ferrous and
non-ferrous pipe.
19.1
1.111 STRAINERS
A. Strainers "Y" type, full pipe size and fitted with blow-off gate valves.
B. Basket screens: brass with perforations suited for the service intended, unless otherwise
specified.
C. Strainer body material: same as valve specified for specific system.
1.112 WATER TANK
A. Poly Ethylene plastic tanks, complete, including but not limited to galvanized steel sleeves,
inserts, frames, pipes & flanges for the two compartments water tank pump suction lines, supply
filling lines, overflow pipes, drain lines, covers, ladders, access doors, also, including filling
Page 185 of 429
modulating float valves & isolating valves, audio visual alarm probe system and all other required
pipe connections with valves and water level alarm system & interconnecting piping system
between tanks and pumps
1.113 WATER STORAGE TANKS MODULATING FLOAT VALVES
A. The valve to modulate to maintain a constant liquid level in a suction tank by compensating for
variations in supply or demand and to close on rising level.
B. The valve is to consist of a hytrol main valve, a cover mounted variable orifice proportioning
pilot control and a remote float control. This valve is to be hydraulically operated, diaphragm
actuated, globe pattern. The stem in the main valve to be guided both top and bottom by a bearing
in the valve seat. All necessary repairs in the valve to be possible without removing the valve
from the line. The valve to be all bronze construction. Mount stainless steel float and float rod
in stilling well.
C. The valve to be similar in all respects to the 427G01AKXH150F modulating float valve with
Model No. CFM-2KK float pilot mechanism as manufactured by the CLA-VAL Co., Newport
Beach, CA, and as Greenwich, CT (203) 661-2733 or approved equal.
2.1 INSTALLATION
A. Arrange all water piping to drain to low points and provide for air elimination at all high points.
B. Arrange mains to permit expansion and contraction without strain by means of elbow swings
and/or expansion joints.
C. Provide a riser control valve on each water riser.
D. Provide a control valve in suction and discharge connections to each piece of equipment.
E. All valves, rechargeable shock absorbers, etc., to be easily accessible for maintenance and/or
removal.
F. Make all ferrous to non-ferrous pipe connections with approved dielectric pipe or flange union
isolating joints to prevent any electrolytic action between dissimilar metals.
Page 186 of 429

G. Provide unions at connections to each piece of equipment for easy dismantling and at such other
points to facilitate installation. Unions shall be of same strength and manufacturer used in the
respective piping systems and of ground joint type.
2.2 CLEANING AND FLUSHING OF PIPING SYSTEMS
A. After flushing system in accordance with Section 220500, provide chlorine treatment of the
domestic hot and cold water systems:
1. Disinfect these systems, including water service connections, with chlorine in accordance
with AWWA Standard C601-54 before they are placed in service.
2. Chlorine dosage: Not less than 50 parts per million.
3. Following a contact period of not less than 24 hours, flush the chlorinated water from the
system with clean greater than 0.2 parts per million.
4. Open and close valves being disinfected several times during the 24-hour period.
5. Repeat disinfection until piping meets the following bacteriological test:

 Take two (2) samples of water from different risers on each floor.
 Test two 10-ml portions of each sample for coliform present.
 Repeat until all tests are negative
6. Repeat flushing of complete system.
2.3 CROSS CONTAMINATION PROTECTION
A. Install the following as a minimum to protect against cross contamination. Contact the Governing
Water Authority, Health Department, and Building Department and provide greater protection
where required.
B. Provide a check valve on all hot or cold water connections to mechanical equipment.
C. Provide a check valve on hot and cold water supplies to equipment such as coffee makers, ice
makers, dishwashers and all other similar food service equipment.
D. Provide reduced pressure zone device on service to fire protection systems which have
supplemental water supply from a non-potable source whether manual or automatic.
Page 187 of 429
2.4 AIR RELIEF VALVES
A. Install at all high and trap
2.5 HOSE BIBBS
A. Install in mechanical equipment rooms, laundry rooms, and kitchen and in each toilet room with
a floor drain not provided with an automatic trap primer.
2.6 VACUUM RELIEF VALVE
A. Install on cold water inlet pipe to water heaters down stream of shut off valve when located more
than 6 m (20 feet) above fixtures served.
2.7 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Provide in position which can be easily read from standing position on floor.
B. Pressure Gauge Application Schedule:

Location Pressure Range
Water service to building
Inlet and outlet to water heaters
Inlet to PRV's
Outlet from PRV's
Inlet and outlet from booster system
2.8 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS
A. Provide on all connections between ferrous and non-ferrous pipe materials in water systems.
2.9 STRAINERS
Page 188 of 429

A. Provide strainers in inlet lines; to all temperature regulating, pressure regulating, automatic
modulating or open and shut control valves and upstream of each pump.
SECTION 221123 WATER BOOSTER PUMPS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and
21.1
tests necessary to complete, make ready and set to work for acceptance by the Owner, all pumps
for the plumbing systems in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.
Page 189 of 429

B. Provide factory start-up for domestic water booster system.
21.2
A. Acceptable manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of products of types and

than 5 years. Provide products produced by a manufacturer listed as an Acceptable Manufacturer
in this section as approved by the Architect/Engineer.
21.3
2.13 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data including printed technical literature, installation
instructions, and catalog cuts for materials, parts, devices, finish, dimensions, detail of valving and
piping arrangements, wiring diagrams of prewired controllers, required control wiring and power
wiring diagrams. Written description of sequence of operation, pump curves indicating service
conditions, written operating instructions including start-up and shut-down. Maintenance data
including written instructions on items requiring periodic maintenance and parts list and
certification that pumps have been hydraulically tested for pressure and flow.
21.4
2.14 MULTIPLE DOMESTIC BOOSTER PUMPING SYSTEMS
B. Furnish and install factory packaged pump variable speed constant pressure booster system with
all controls, motors, valves, stainless steel 316 for suction and discharge headers etc., mounted
on a common concrete base. The system shall be capable of automatically providing a constant
system pressure with a flow rate range as indicated on the plans. System shall require only bolting
in place to housekeeping pad and installation of the shaft columns. Pump construction shall be of
the stainless steel fitted type with cast-iron casing.
Ship system pre-mounted onto positioning top, rails connected to the base flange and companion
flange, all with required lifting lugs to aid in installation.
C. Pump Description: vertical multi-stage.
1. Motor: Ball Bearing squirrel cage induction type

2. Casing: Cast Iron
3. Casing wear rings: Bronze
4. Impeller: Stainless steel 316
5. Stainless. Stainless steel.
6. Seal: Mechanical, Ni-resist and carbon faces.
7. Bearings: Grease lubricated cartridge type
D. Provide a spring loaded, non-slam silent check valve PRV combination on each pump discharge
line with feed line piping and isolation valves. Suction and discharge headers shall be same
material as connecting piping. Provide dielectric couplings between dissimilar materials.
Page 190 of 429
E. Power and Control Panel
Furnish a single enclosure power and control panel NEMA 1. Enclosure shall be steel and
furnished with industrial grade enamel. It shall house all control components including frequency
converter unit with logical programmable controller.
3- Circuit breaker disconnects switches through door with door interlock for each pump.
3- Magnetic across-the-line starter with 3 phase overload protection for each pump.
4- Pump running lights (3 active and 1 future) for each pump.
4- H-O-A selector switches (3 active and 1 future) for each pump
1- Automatic pump alternator with manual override selector switch, reading adaptable to 4
pump alternation.
1- 220 volt control transformer.
3- Alarm indicating lights for each pump
1- Audible alarm with silencing button, and remote trouble alarm contacts
1- Set of necessary control relays and other accessory devices required to permit the system to
operate in conformance with specification.
3- Mercoid adjustable dead band pressure switches for each pump.
1- Low suction level cutout circuit to interface with suction tank controls.
All of the above to be factory internally prewired and tested in accordance with the provisions of
the National Electrical Code.
All control wires shall be individually numbered and each component shall be labeled
accordingly. All internal wiring shall be copper stranded, A.W.G. with a minimum insulation of
90 degrees C. The complete assembly shall have a UL listing mark for industrial control panels.
F. Instrumentation and Controls:
1. Low suction pressure shutdown

2. Alarm light, horn and reset button
3. Automatic restart after alarm condition has returned to normal, with alarm indicating light
remaining lit until manually reset.
4. High system pressure indication and shutdown logic
Page 191 of 429
5. Low system pressure indication.
6. ASA Grade A pressure gauges 110mm for indication of system, suction and each pump's
discharge pressure
G. Factory Prefabrication
The entire booster system shall be factory prefabricated on a common structural steel stand with
all interconnecting piping and wiring completed and operationally tested prior to shipment. The
complete package shall also include isolation valves on the suction and discharge of each pump.
Suction and discharge pipe manifolds, as well as copper tubing with shutoff cocks for gauges and
pressure switches, will be furnished assembled. The only field connection required will be
system suction and discharge headers, the impellers, the drain tube, and a single power
connection at the control panel.
H. Factory Test and Certification
The factory shall certify in writing that the water pressure booster system and its component parts
have undergone a complete electric and hydraulic test prior to shipment. The test shall include a
system operating flow test from zero to 100% design flow rate under the specified suction and
net system pressure conditions using each pump as lead and lag.
Certification shall include copies of the test data as recorded by Micro Processor Base System
certifying the following:
1. Flow rate of each pump

2. Dynamic head
3. Starting torque
4. Revolutions per minute
5. KW
6. Pump efficiency
7. Main pump alternation by 24-hour timeclock
I. Guarantee
The water pressure booster system shall be guaranteed in writing by the manufacturer for a period
of one year from date of issuance of certificate of practical completion against defects in design,
materials, or construction.
Page 192 of 429

J. Start-Up Service
The service of a factory trained representative shall be made available on the job site to check
installation and start-up and instruct operating personnel.
2.15 ALARM ANNUNCIATION
A. Provide remote contacts for alarm connections to alarm panels provided by another trade.
B. All wiring to panel to be provided by Electrical Contractor.
C. Alarms shall be provided for the following:
1. Domestic booster system trouble.
2.16 SHOP COATINGS
A. Steel and Iron Surfaces: Prime and paint.
Machined, Polished and Nonferrous Surfaces: Coat with rust preventive compound.
PART 2 – EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Verify that structures, piping and equipment are compatible.
3.2 ADJUSTMENTS
A. Pump Operation
B. Control Operation
C. Alarm Operation
D. Alignment
3.3 INSTALLATION
Page 193 of 429
A. Completely align and level pumps, motors and bases. Where pumps and motors are shipped as a
unit, realign them in the field.
B. Grout base plates completed to provide to rigid non-deflecting support.
C. Secure pumps to bases with proper size anchor bolts
D. Install and align mechanical seals in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
E. Construct all apparatus of materials and pressure ratings suitable for the conditions encountered
during continuous operation.
F. Provide casing connections for vent, drain, suction and discharge pressure gauges.
G. Balance impellers and all other moving components statically and dynamically.
H. Match centrifugal pump impellers and casings so that at specified operating conditions, the impeller
diameter is not more than 90% of the maximum diameter impeller which can satisfactorily operate
in the casing.
Page 194 of 429

SECTION 221223 FACILITY INDOOR POTABLE-WATER STORAGE TANKS
PART 1 - GENERAL
K. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including Conditions of Contract and Division 1
Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
A. Work Includes providing all labor, supervision, materials, equipment and tests necessary to
complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, potable cold water, hot water and
hot water circulating systems to fixtures and equipment.
B. Provide cold water service(s) from street main including required applications and related
fees. Provide water meter(s) and approved piping rig and/or all related applications and
fees. If required, provide meter with remote reader located as directed.
Page 195 of 429


required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 3
years. Provide products produced by a manufacturer listed as an Acceptable Manufacturer
in this section.
1. All Applicable Local Codes
5. ASSE
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data including samples, printed technical literature,
installation, instructions, and catalog cuts for materials, parts, devices, finish, and
performance data.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DOMESTIC WATER STORAGE TANK CONTROL AND ALARM DEVICES
A. A two compartment concrete tank will be constructed under another division of the work.
This division (2.11) to provide all required pipe sleeves, covers, access doors, overflows
filling, suction and other required pipe connections.
Page 196 of 429
B. Provide complete system alarm and control probe system consisting of B & W Control, Inc.
Suspension wire type E-1P probes, E-55 flanged type electrode holder suspension wires of
the required length and number for the functions described on the pump room detailed
drawings, induction relays with 220 volt primary and secondary coils rated at 50 Hz and
alarm panel to be mounted in the pump room.
C. All wiring and mounting of panel to be done by the electrical trade.
D. Furnish for installation by electrical trade alarm panel and required relays. Alarm to be of
the audio visual type with lights for one high water level and low water levels and power
and alarm silencing button on exterior of door.
Panel to be provided with contacts to be wired by electrical trade to give general cistern
trouble alarm at a remote central alarm panel and to interface with domestic water pumps
to stop pumps during low water level conditions. Panel to have manual override control for
any and all functions.
E. See drawings for alarm levels.
2.2 WATER STORAGE TANKS MODULATING FLOAT VALVES
A. The valve to modulate to maintain a constant liquid level in a suction tank by compensating
for variations in supply or demand and to close on rising level.
B. The valve is to consist of a hytrol main valve, a cover mounted variable orifice proportioning
pilot control and a remote float control. This valve is to be hydraulically operated,
diaphragm actuated, globe pattern. The stem in the main valve to be guided both top and
bottom by a bearing in the valve seat. All necessary repairs in the valve to be possible
without removing the valve from the line. The valve to be all bronze construction. Mount
stainless steel float and float rod in stilling well.
C. The valve to be similar in all respects to the 427G01AKXH150F modulating float valve with
Model No. CFM-2KK float pilot mechanism as manufactured by the CLA-VAL Co., Newport
Beach, CA, and as Greenwich, CT (203) 661-2733 or approved equal.
Page 197 of 429

2.3 CONCRETE WATER TANKS
A. All pipe connections to concrete tanks shall be galvanized steel to ASTM A53 schedule 40 with
flanged or screwed ends as appropriate.
B. All pipes cast into concrete walls shall be fitted with puddle flanges. Puddle flanges shall be at
least 200mm larger than the diameter of the pipe and a minimum thickness of 6mm. Puddle
flanges shall be permanently fixed to pipe by welding or other equally secure method.
C. Pipes shall be cast into concrete walls so that the puddle flange is central to the wall thickness.
D. Pipes shall be installed square to the wall and true to level.
E. Pipework coatings shall be made good on exposed pipe sections on completion of the work.
F. Exposed ends of pipework shall be capped to protect ends from damage until installation is
complete.
2.4 WATER TANKS SURFACE FINISH
A. The Concrete water tanks surface shall be smooth with no lumps or Protrusions and provided
with non-toxic GRP lining as per (ASTM, ASME or ANSI), standards.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Arrange all water piping to drain to low points and provide for air elimination at all high
points.
B. Arrange mains to permit expansion and contraction without strain by means of elbow
swings and/or expansion joints.
C. Provide a riser control valve on each water riser.
Page 198 of 429

D. Provide a control valve in suction and discharge connections to each piece of equipment.
E. All valves, rechargeable shock absorbers, etc., to be easily accessible for maintenance
and/or removal.
F. Make all ferrous to non-ferrous pipe connections with approved dielectric pipe or flange
union isolating joints to prevent any electrolytic action between dissimilar metals.
G. Provide unions at connections to each piece of equipment for easy dismantling and at such
other points to facilitate installation. Unions shall be of same strength and manufacturer
used in the respective piping systems and of ground joint type.
3.2 CLEANING AND FLUSHING OF PIPING SYSTEMS
A. After flushing system in accordance with Section 15010, provide chlorine treatment of the
domestic hot and cold water systems:
1. Disinfect these systems, including water service connections, with chlorine in

accordance with AWWA Standard C601-54 before they are placed in service.
2. Chlorine dosage: Not less than 50 parts per million.
3. Following a contact period of not less than 24 hours, flush the chlorinated water
from the system with clean greater than 0.2 parts per million.
4. Open and close valves being disinfected several times during the 24 hour period.
5. Repeat disinfection until piping meets the following bacteriological test:
· Take two (2) samples of water from different risers on each floor.
Page 199 of 429

· Test two 10-ml portions of each sample for coliform present.
· Repeat until all tests are negative
6. Repeat flushing of complete system.
3.3 CROSS CONTAMINATION PROTECTION
A. Install the following as a minimum to protect against cross contamination. Contact the
Governing Water Authority, Health Department, and Building Department and provide
greater protection where required.
B. Provide a check valve on all hot or cold water connections to mechanical equipment.
C. Provide a check valve on hot and cold water supplies to equipment such as coffee makers,
ice makers, dishwashers and all other similar food service equipment.
D. Provide reduced pressure zone device on service to fire protection systems which have
supplemental water supply from a non potable source whether manual or automatic.
3.4 COMMISSIONING
L. Perform the following final checks before filling:
1. Verify that tests of tanks are complete.

2. Verify that tests of piping systems are complete.
3. Check piping connections for leaks.
4. Verify that air precharge in precharged tanks is correct.
5. Verify that pressure relief valves have correct setting.
6. Test operation of tank accessories and devices.
7. Manually operate relief valves.
8. Adjust pressure settings.
9. Manually operate vacuum relief valves.
10. Adjust vacuum settings.
11. Check for proper seismic restraints.
Page 200 of 429

M. Filling Procedures: Follow manufacturer's written procedures. Fill tanks with water to operating
level.
SECTION 221316 SANITARY WASTE AND VENT PIPING
A. Provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions, and Division-1 Specification
22.1
Specifications.
22.2
A. Acceptable manufacturers: firms regularly engaged in manufacture of piping, fittings, and

Page 201 of 429

C. Standard Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, ANSI, ASTM, CS,
No Hub and Cast Iron Soil ASTM A-888 & Cast Iron Soil
Pipe and Fittings Pipe Institute Standards No.301
Malleable Iron Screwed ANSI B16.3
Fittings 1035 kPa Class


Cast Iron Screwed Drainage ANSI B16.12
Fittings

Weight

Point Higher Than
538C.
ASTM-B260-62T
Page 202 of 429

UPVC Piping & Fittings Schedule
40DWV ASTM D–1785&D-2665
22.3
3.7 SUBMITTALS
B. Submit piping schedule showing manufacture, pipe or tube weight, fitting type, and joint type for
each piping system.
22.4
A. Service Weight Cast Iron Soil Pipe (SVCI)
1. Pipe: Service weight centrifugally spun cast iron soil pipe hub and spigot coated inside and
out; ANSI A1125.1; ASTM A74.
2. Fittings: Hub and spigot, cast iron drainage fittings.
3. Joints:
Neoprene rubber gasket, compression; CISPI HSN-72; ASTM C-564.

Lead and oakum caulked; Type 1-FS-QQ-C-40
B. Hubless Soil Pipe
1. Pipe: No-hub weight, cast iron soil pipe, coated inside and out, to ASTM A 888 labeled with
the CI mark of quality and performance CISPI 301-72.
2. Fittings:
a. No-hub weight cast iron
3. Joints:
a. Rubber sealing sleeve and solid, non-corrugated shield with stainless steel ASTM C 564
b. Rubber sealing sleeve and cast iron bolted coupling; CISPI 301-72; MG Coupling Co.
C. Galvanized Steel Pipe
Page 203 of 429

4. Pipe: Schedule 40 seamless drawn steel pipe, galvanized inside and out; ASTM A-120 and
A53.
5. Fittings:
d. Galvanized malleable iron, flat band threaded steam pattern.
e. Grooved malleable iron.
f. Threaded cast iron drainage pattern.
Joints:
g. Red or white lead and oil or approved pipe compound or Teflon tape on male threads.
h. Standard weight grooved with enameled malleable iron ribbed flex coupling; ASTM A47
with Buna-N gasket. Victaulic Style 77 or Tyler #100 Standard.
i. Standard weight grooved joint with enameled malleable iron ribbed rigid coupling;
ASTM A47 with Buna-N gasket. Victaulic Style 07.
D. Polyvinyl Chloride (UPVC)
4. Pipe: Rigid drain waste and vent unplasticized, normal impact; schedule 40 ASTM D –
1785 & D – 2665
5. Fittings: UPVC socket ASTM standard
6. Joints: Solvent Cement or rubber
E. High density poly ethylene (HDPE)
1. Pipe: Rigid drain waste and vent unplasticized, normal impact; schedule 40 ASTM D –
1785 & D – 2665
A. Polyethylene Tape - Field Applied
B. Polyethylene - Mill Wrapped

Page 204 of 429
3.10 INSTALLATION
A. General
work.
buildings.
application of specified coatings (if any). During construction, properly cap all lines and
equipment nozzles so as to prevent the entrance of sand, dirt, etc. Each system of piping to
be flushed prior to testing for the purpose of removing grit, dirt, sand, etc., from the piping
for as long as time as is required to thoroughly clean the system.
13. Except for hub-and-spigot, clay, and similar units of pipe, provides factory-applied plastic
end-caps on each length of pipe and tube. Maintain end-caps through shipping, storage and
handling as required preventing pipe-end damage and eliminating dirt and moisture from
inside of pipe and tube. Where possible, store pipe and tube inside and protected from
weather. Where necessary to store outside, elevate above grade and enclose with durable,
waterproof wrapping. Cap, plug or otherwise close ends of installed piping when not being
worked on to prevent the entrance of debris.
Page 205 of 429

B. Joints
g. Weld pipe joints only when ambient temperature is above -18oC.

h. Bevel pipe ends at a 37.5o angle where possible, smooth rough cuts, and clean to remove
i. Use pipe clamps or tack-weld joints with 25mm long welds; 4 welds for pipe sizes to
j. Build up welds with stringer-bead pass, followed by hot pass, followed by cover or filler
k. Do not weld-out piping system imperfections by tack-welding procedures; refabricate to
l. At Installer's option, install forged branch-connection fittings wherever branch pipe is
gaskets.
d. Tees
Page 206 of 429

e. Couplings
Resulting joint is minimum of 3 times as long as thickness of tube, and brazed using
B-CuP series filler metal.
f. Jointing system to be "T-Drill" or approved equal. Obtain written approval of deduct

A. General

B. Sanitary Drainage and Vent Piping: cap end or plug as required and fill with water to produce at
least 3 meters head at highest point of section tested. Let stand with no loss of level for a period
of four hours. After water pressure test, fill traps with water and conduct smoke test.
Page 207 of 429

22.5
UPVC PN10 pipes for All inside buildings above

Tapered sleeve with
gravity sewer schedule ground sanitary, Waste, Soil,
A solvent cement joints,
40 according ASTM Condensate drain & vent
and rubber ring joints
D1785 piping systems.
UPVC PN10 pipes for
Tapered sleeve with
gravity sewer schedule All Underground Waste, Soil
B solvent cement joints,
40 according ASTM & vent piping systems
and rubber ring joints
D1785
Galvanized malleable All piping system inside
C Galvanized Steel Pipe
iron steam pattern. pump rooms
Page 208 of 429

SECTION 221319 SANITARY WASTE PIPING SPECIALTIES
C. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions
D. Common Work Results for Plumbing, Section 220500 applies to work of this Section.
E. Sanitary Waste and Vent Piping, section 221316 , applies to work of this section
F. The requirements of this section apply to equipment specified elsewhere in the specification.
G. Earthwork civil specifications apply to work of this section.
A. Work Includes providing all labor, supervision, materials, equipment, utility services and tests
necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the Owner.
B. Provide house sewers from street utility including required applications and related fees.
Coordinate and include in price all special connection details.

Provide products produced by a manufacturer listed as an Acceptable Manufacturer in this section
or European manufacturers of approved equal quality and reputation as approved by the
Architect.
Page 209 of 429

1. All Local Codes
5. ASSE
3.16 SUBMITTALS
3.17 FLOOR DRAINS, ROOF DRAINS AND FLOOR RECEPTORS
3.17.1 FLOOR DRAINS
A. Cast-Iron Funnel Floor Drains (FFD) :
1. Area of Application: Mechanical rooms & any machine drain.

2. Standard: ASME A112.6.3.
3. Pattern: Funnel floor drain.
4. Body Material: Cast iron.
5. Seepage Flange: Required (in case of floor fill & water insulation membrane).
6. Anchor Flange: Required (in case of floor fill & water insulation membrane).
7. Clamping Device: Required (in case of floor fill & water insulation membrane).
8. Outlet: Bottom.
9. Top or Strainer Material: Cast iron grate .
10. Top Shape: Round.
11. Funnel: Required.
12. Trap Material: Cast iron.
13. Trap Pattern: Standard P-trap.
B. Cast-Iron Floor Drains (FD-1):
1. Area of Application: Bathrooms & pantries.

3. Pattern: Sanitary drain.
5. Seepage Flange: Required.
6. Anchor Flange: Required.
Page 210 of 429
7. Clamping Device: Required.
8. Outlet: Bottom.
9. Coating on Interior and Exposed Exterior Surfaces: Not required.
10. Top or Strainer Material: Nickel bronze or stainless steel.
11. Top Shape: Square, or as per architect specs & drawings.
12. Funnel: Not required.
13. Flushing Fitting: Not required.
C. Cast-Iron Garage Drains (GD):
1. Area of Application: Basements parking areas.

3. Pattern: Garage drain, heavy duty trucking area drain.
5. Sediment Bucket: Required solid free standing sediment bucket.
6. Seepage Flange: Required (in case of floor fill & water insulation membrane).
7. Anchor Flange: Required (in case of floor fill & water insulation membrane).
8. Clamping Device: Required (in case of floor fill & water insulation membrane).
9. Outlet: Bottom, no hub or threaded outlet.
10. Top or Strainer Material: Cast iron.
11. Top Shape: Round.
D. Trench drain (TD):
1. Standard: ASME A112.6.3 for trench drains.

2. Material: Ductile or gray iron.
3. Flange: Anchor or Seepage.
4. Clamping Device: Required.
5. Outlet: Bottom, End or Side as applicable.
6. Grate Material: Ductile iron or gray iron.
7. Grate Finish: Painted.
8. Dimensions of Frame and Grate: as indicated on drawings.
9. Top Loading Classification: Extra Heavy-Duty, Heavy Duty or Medium Duty as applicable
to design.
23.1
3.17.2 FLASHING FITTING
A. Roof vent cap flashing fitting: Cast iron, size to cover base flashing roof membrane, caulking or
threaded extension type.
Page 211 of 429

3.17.3 GREASE INTERCEPTOR
A. Coated steel grease interceptors as per drawing schedule, enzyme type, bearing the P.D.I. Seal
certifying conformance to Standard PDI-G101, complete with removable baffles, flow control
device, deep seal trap with cleanout, bottom debris trapping leg, and gasketed non-skid aluminum
cover with lock and lift ring.
B. Installation accessories shall include a type "E" interceptor body extension of height to suit invert
of underground drainage pipe for buried interceptors.
3.17.4 OIL INTERCEPTOR
A. Coated steel grease interceptor enzyme type, with removable baffles, flow control device, deep
seal trap with cleanout, bottom debris trapping leg, gasketed non-skid aluminum cover with lock
and lift ring, combined probe and fail safe solenoid shut-off valve assembly, and a remote, wall
mounting electronic monitoring panel with integral UL certified 220/24 volt transformer.
B. Installation accessories shall include a type "E" interceptor body extension of height to suit invert
of underground drainage pipe for buried interceptors.
23.2
3.17.5 DRIP PAN
A. Examine the drawing, and in cooperation with the Electrical Trade confirm the final location of
piping no closer than 2'-0" (600 mm) from a vertical line to electric motors and controllers, panel
boards, or similar equipment.
B. Where the installation of piping cannot comply with the requirements of foregoing paragraph,
obtain approval from the Engineer to relocate the piping as far away from the electrical equipment
as possible and provide drip pans as follows :
1. Provide and erect a gutter of 18 gauge galvanized steel under every pipe which is within 2'-
0" (600 mm) of being vertically over any motor, electrical controllers, switchboards, panel
2. Each gutter to be welded and made watertight, properly suspended and carefully pitched to
a convenient point for draining. Provide a 3/4" drain, in vicinity of nearest floor drain
terminated in a manner where drip will be noticed or as otherwise approved.

over any such motor, and extending 2'-0" (600 mm) in all direction’s beyond the motor, over
which such piping has to run
Page 212 of 429
3.17.6 . GULLY TRAP
1. UPVC gully trap dimensions as shown on drawings and available in local market complete
with access and trap for pipe sizes up to 315mm, as shown on drawings.
2.1 INSTALLATION GENERAL
A. All materials shall be new and installed in a first class manner.
B. All drainage piping, unless otherwise indicated or required by code, to be pitched at a minimum
rate of 1:100 (1/8 inch per foot) in direction of flow. Branch connections to stacks or main drains
shall not be made in a manner which will permit backflow.
C. All vent piping shall be arranged to drain any condensate back to waste piping.
D. Isolate all fixtures from high pressure zones by connecting branch waste a minimum of 1.2 m (4
feet) downstream or 2.1 m (7 feet) upstream of stack or house drain offset.
2.2 CLEANOUTS
A. Install cleanouts above floor at the base of each soil, waste stack where access to clean out at
base of stack is not available.
B. Install cleanouts on horizontal soil & waste lines, minimum 15.2 m (50 feet) on centers and at
each 90 degree change of direction.
C. Install stainless steel cleanout marker at each cleanout location under carpet.
2.3 FLASHING FITTINGS
A. Terminate all vent pipes through sleeves at flat roofs at a coordinated elevation. General
Contractor to install base flashing up around exposed pipe. Install cap flashing and extend to
required height above roof.
2.4 FLOOR DRAINS AND FLOOR RECEPTORS
Page 213 of 429

A. Provide floor drains, roof drains and floor receptors in locations as indicated on the plumbing,
HVAC drawings, Architectural drawings and as otherwise required to collect discharge from
indirect waste piping.
B. Where possible cast drains into concrete slab. When drains cannot be poured in place provide
drain sump receiver and under deck clamp.
C. Provide a minimum 1 meter horizontal offset on all leaders at ceiling below roof drain. When
piping cannot be positioned for minimum offset provide separate expansion joint vertical position
directly beneath roof drain.
D. Flashing collars to be set even with or lower than water proof membrane and to be clamped in
with clamping device.
E. Provide 100mm wide flange on all drains installed in slabs with liquid membrane.
F. Drain Application Schedule:
2.5 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
A. Excavation and backfill is covered in civil specifications. Contractor is responsible for

coordination of trench routing, slope and elevations. Confirm that all of the following methods
are complied with.
B. Provide all excavation and backfill in accordance with the following procedures.
1. Excavation, to be in such manner that buried items can be laid to the alignment and depth
indicated; excavate only so far in advance of pipe laying as approved.
2. Width of trenches
a. Hold to a minimum consistent with the type of material encountered and the size of the
pipe being laid.
b. Width at the top of the trench: not more than 600mm plus outside diameter of pipe.
c. Contractor is responsible for fine grading of trench bottom for pipe pitch and for fine
excavation to accommodate bells of pipe and fittings.
Page 214 of 429

SECTION 221329 SANITARY SEWERAGE PUMPS
C. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and
D. The requirements specified in this section apply to all related sections in this Division. The
C. Work includes providing all labor, supervision, materials, equipment, accessories, services and
tests necessary to complete, make ready and set to work for acceptance by the Owner, all pumps
for the plumbing systems in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.
D. Provide factory start-up for sewage ejectors and sump pumps.
B. Acceptable manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of products of types and

than 5 years. Provide products produced by a manufacturer listed as an Acceptable
Manufacturer in this section as approved by the Architect/Engineer.
3.21 SUBMITTALS
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data including printed technical literature, installation
instructions, and catalog cuts for materials, parts, devices, finish, dimensions, detail of valving
and piping arrangements, wiring diagrams of prewired controllers, required control wiring and
power wiring diagrams. Written description of sequence of operation, pump curves indicating
service conditions, written operating instructions including start-up and shut-down. Maintenance
data including written instructions on items requiring periodic maintenance and parts list and
certification that pumps have been hydraulically tested for pressure and flow.
3.22 SEWAGE PUMPS (SUBMERSIBLE)
A. Compact lifting station.
1. Furnish and install all factory package prefabricated lifting station. Including the control
panel, level sensor elements. With factory test certificates - pump set should be designed by
manufacture to operate in 120F liquid and with free pass of soiled by 75% from discharge
Page 215 of 429
size
2. Pump and motor to be easily removable from pit by means of an automatic metal to metal
faced discharge connection with sliding guide bracket and guide bars. Furnish and install a
mix-flush valve mounted on the pump liquid end to eliminate sludge and grease cake build
up and sedimentation in the pit.
3. The set should be provided with side handles for ease of handling, Pre-installed delivery
pump and unions.
4. Materials
a. Material of construction : PE
b. Casing: Cast Iron Class 30
c. Impeller: vortex, channel impeller type or with grinder device, SS.
a. Shaft: Stainless Steel
b. Wearing Rings: Slotted type grit resistant
c. Foot Elbow: Cast iron, epoxy coated.
d. Base: Cast iron, epoxy coated.
e. Guide Rail Supporting Element: Cast iron, epoxy coated.
f. The Guide Rail and Chain: Cast iron, epoxy coated.
5. Motor
a. Submersible type capable of running dry continuously.

b. Class F insulation to 155oC.
c. Degree of protection : IP 68
d. Minimum of sustaining ten starts per hour
e. Junction chamber with terminal board to be separated and leakproof.
6. Mechanical Seals: Tandum, double seal with tungsten carbide faces running on an
independent oil chamber.
7. Cable: Hypalon jacketed type SPC
B. Control Panel
1. Duplex control panel in NEMA 3 cabinet to include the following:
a. Circuit breaker type starters

b. HOA selector switches
c. Running lights
Page 216 of 429
d. Manual alternator
e. Alarm bell and reset with silencing button
f. Dry contacts for remote annunciation
C. Level Controls
Five mercury displacement level regulators with cable.
D. Cover and Frame-Steel
1. Size as indicated on drawings

2. Steel type 13mm thick reinforced checkered plate designed for pedestrian traffic.
E. Accessories:
 Each set should be equipped with the required number of float switches, gate valve, non
return valve.
 End connection for inlet, outlet, cables an ventilation.
3.23 ALARM ANNUNCIATION
D. Provide remote contacts for alarm connections to alarm panels provided by another trade.
E. All wiring to panel to be provided by Electrical Contractor.
F. Alarms shall be provided for the following :
2. Submersible Sewage and Waste Water Sump Pumps High Water Alarm & Power Failure.
3.24 SHOP COATINGS
B. Steel and Iron Surfaces: Prime and paint.
Machined, Polished and Nonferrous Surfaces: Coat with rust preventive compound
4.1 INSPECTION
B. Verify that structures, piping and equipment are compatible.
Page 217 of 429

4.2 ADJUSTMENTS
E. Pump Operation
F. Control Operation
G. Alarm Operation
H. Alignment
4.3 INSTALLATION
I. Completely align and level pumps, motors and bases. Where pumps and motors are shipped as
a unit, realign them in the field.
J. Grout base plates completed to provide to rigid non-deflecting support.
K. Secure pumps to bases with proper size anchor bolts
L. Install and align mechanical seals in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
M. Construct all apparatus of materials and pressure ratings suitable for the conditions encountered
during continuous operation.
N. Provide casing connections for vent, drain, suction and discharge pressure gauges.
O. Balance impellers and all other moving components statically and dynamically.
P. Match centrifugal pump impellers and casings so that at specified operating conditions, the
impeller diameter is not more than 90% of the maximum diameter impeller which can
satisfactorily operate in the casing.
SECTION 221413 FACILITY STORM DRAINAGE PIPING
Page 218 of 429

C. Provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions, and Division-1 Specification
D. The requirements specified in this section apply to all related sections in this Division. The
27.1
B. Work includes providing all labor, supervision, materials, equipment, accessories, services and
Specifications.
27.2
D. Acceptable manufacturers: firms regularly engaged in manufacture of piping, fittings, and

E. Cast, stamp or roll manufacturer's name on each pipe length, and cast stamp or roll manufacturer's
F. Standard Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, ANSI, ASTM, CS,
No Hub and Cast Iron Soil ASTM A-888 & Cast

Iron Soil
Pipe and Fittings Pipe Institute Standards No.301
Page 219 of 429


Cast Iron Screwed Drainage ANSI B16.12
Fittings

Weight

Point Higher Than
538C.
ASTM-B260-62T
UPVC Piping & Fittings Schedule

40DWV ASTM D–1785&D-2665
4.7 SUBMITTALS
C. Product Data: submit manufacturer's data including printed technical literature, installation,
D. Submit piping schedule showing manufacture, pipe or tube weight, fitting type, and joint type for
each piping system.
Page 220 of 429

H. Service Weight Cast Iron Soil Pipe (SVCI)
4. Pipe: Service weight centrifugally spun cast iron soil pipe hub and spigot coated inside and
out; ANSI A1125.1; ASTM A74.
5. Fittings: Hub and spigot, cast iron drainage fittings.
6. Joints:
Neoprene rubber gasket, compression; CISPI HSN-72; ASTM C-564.
Lead and oakum caulked; Type 1-FS-QQ-C-40
I. Hubless Soil Pipe
4. Pipe: No-hub weight, cast iron soil pipe, coated inside and out, to ASTM A 888 labeled with
the CI mark of quality and performance CISPI 301-72.
5. Fittings:
b. No-hub weight cast iron
6. Joints:
c. Rubber sealing sleeve and solid, non-corrugated shield with stainless steel ASTM C 564
d. Rubber sealing sleeve and cast iron bolted coupling; CISPI 301-72; MG Coupling Co.
J. Polyvinyl Chloride (UPVC)
7. Pipe: Rigid drain waste and vent unplasticized, normal impact; schedule 40 ASTM D – 1785
& D – 2665
K. High density poly ethylene (HDPE)
1. Pipe: Rigid drain waste and vent unplasticized, normal impact; schedule 40 ASTM D – 1785
& D – 2665
27.3
C. Polyethylene Tape - Field Applied

Page 221 of 429
D. Polyethylene - Mill Wrapped

27.4
4.10 INSTALLATION
C. General
work.
buildings.
application of specified coatings (if any). During construction, properly cap all lines and
equipment nozzles so as to prevent the entrance of sand, dirt, etc. Each system of piping to
be flushed prior to testing for the purpose of removing grit, dirt, sand, etc., from the piping
for as long as time as is required to thoroughly clean the system.
Page 222 of 429

22. Except for hub-and-spigot, clay, and similar units of pipe, provides factory-applied plastic
end-caps on each length of pipe and tube. Maintain end-caps through shipping, storage and
handling as required preventing pipe-end damage and eliminating dirt and moisture from
inside of pipe and tube. Where possible, store pipe and tube inside and protected from
weather. Where necessary to store outside, elevate above grade and enclose with durable,
waterproof wrapping. Cap, plug or otherwise close ends of installed piping when not being
worked on to prevent the entrance of debris.
D. Joints
m. Weld pipe joints only when ambient temperature is above -18oC.

n. Bevel pipe ends at a 37.5o angle where possible, smooth rough cuts, and clean to remove
o. Use pipe clamps or tack-weld joints with 25mm long welds; 4 welds for pipe sizes to
p. Build up welds with stringer-bead pass, followed by hot pass, followed by cover or filler
q. Do not weld-out piping system imperfections by tack-welding procedures; refabricate to
Page 223 of 429
r. At Installer's option, install forged branch-connection fittings wherever branch pipe is
gaskets.
g. Tees
h. Couplings
Resulting joint is minimum of 3 times as long as thickness of tube, and brazed using B-CuP
series filler metal.
i. Jointing system to be "T-Drill" or approved equal. Obtain written approval of deduct

Page 224 of 429

C. General
D. Storm Drainage Piping: fill with water to produce at least 6 meters’ head at highest point of
section tested. Let stand with no loss of level for a period of four hours
UPVC PN 10 pipes All inside buildings above

A for gravity sewer Tapered sleeve with ground Storm piping
schedule 40 solvent cement joints, systems.
according ASTM and rubber ring joints.
D1785
Page 225 of 429

HDPE High density
polyethylene pipe All Underground Storm
B PN 16 According to Molded HDPE Fitting piping systems.
DIN 8074/8075 –
PE100
SECTION 221426 FACILITY STORM DRAINS
Page 226 of 429

B. Common Work Results for Plumbing, Section 220500 applies to work of this Section.
C. Facility Storm Drainage Piping, section 221413, applies to work of this section
D. The requirements of this section apply to equipment specified elsewhere in the specification.
E. Earthwork civil specifications apply to work of this section.
A. Work Includes providing all labor, supervision, materials, equipment, utility services and tests
necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the Owner.
B. Provide house sewers from street utility including required applications and related fees.
Coordinate and include in price all special connection details.

Provide products produced by a manufacturer listed as an Acceptable Manufacturer in this section
or European manufacturers of approved equal quality and reputation as approved by the
Architect.
6. All Local Codes

10. ASSE
4.16 SUBMITTALS
Page 227 of 429
4.17 ROOF DRAINS
A. Cast-Iron Roof Side Drains (RD-1):
1. Standard: ASME A112.6.4, for parapet roof drains.

3. Outlet: Back or Angle as applicable.
4. Grate Material: Bronze.
B. Cast-Iron, Large-Sump, Roof Drain (RD2, RD-3):
5. Standard: ASME A112.6.4, for general-purpose roof drains.

6. Body Material: Coated cast iron.
7. Combination Flashing Ring and Gravel Stop: Required.
8. Flow-Control Weirs: Required.
9. Outlet: Bottom.
10. Extension Collars: Required.
11. Under deck Clamp: Required.
12. Expansion Joint: Required.
13. Sump Receiver Plate: Required.
14. Dome Material: Rough bronze.
15. Perforated Gravel Guard: Stainless steel.
16. Non-puncturing clamp ring with internal water guard.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
5.1 FLOOR DRAINS AND FLOOR RECEPTORS
A. Provide floor drains, roof drains and floor receptors in locations as indicated on the plumbing,
HVAC drawings, Architectural drawings and as otherwise required to collect discharge from
indirect waste piping.
B. Where possible cast drains into concrete slab. When drains cannot be poured in place provide
drain sump receiver and under deck clamp.
C. Provide a minimum 1-meter horizontal offset on all leaders at ceiling below roof drain. When
piping cannot be positioned for minimum offset provide separate expansion joint vertical position
directly beneath roof drain.
Page 228 of 429

D. Flashing collars to be set even with or lower than water proof membrane and to be clamped in
with clamping device.
E. Provide 100mm wide flange on all drains installed in slabs with liquid membrane.
F. Drain Application Schedule:
5.2 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL
B. Excavation and backfill is covered in civil specifications. Contractor is responsible for

coordination of trench routing, slope and elevations. Confirm that all of the following methods
are complied with.
C. Provide all excavation and backfill in accordance with the following procedures.
3. Excavation, to be in such manner that buried items can be laid to the alignment and depth
indicated; excavate only so far in advance of pipe laying as approved.
4. Width of trenches
a. Hold to a minimum consistent with the type of material encountered and the size of the
pipe being laid.
b. Width at the top of the trench: not more than 600mm plus outside diameter of pipe.
c. Contractor is responsible for fine grading of trench bottom for pipe pitch and for fine
excavation to accommodate bells of pipe and fittings.

SECTION 223330 ELECTRIC DOMESTIC WATER HEATERS
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions, and
Page 229 of 429
29.1
tests necessary to complete, make ready and set to work for operation by the Owner, all domestic
water heaters for the plumbing systems in accordance with Drawings and Specifications and as
approved by the Architect/Engineer.
B. Provide factory representative start-up for all water heaters.

29.2

required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five
years. Provide products produced by a manufacturer listed as an Acceptable Manufacturer in this
section as approved by the Architect. All equipment shall comply with ASHRAE, AGA and
ASME, ASTM, UL/FM Control. Guarantee tanks against leakage due to corrosion for ten years
from date of acceptance.
29.3
5.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data including printed technical literature, installation
instructions, and catalog cuts for materials, parts, devices, finish, dimensions, detail of valving
and piping arrangements, wiring diagrams of prewired controllers, required control wiring and
power wiring diagrams. Written description of sequence of operation, efficiency data, flue
requirements, storage and recovery and firing capacity, written operating instructions including
start-up and shut-down. Maintenance data including written instructions on items requiring
periodic maintenance and parts list.
29.4
5.7 STORAGE ELECTRIC WATER HEATER
A. The electric water heater shall be of the cylindrical, pressure type, comprised of inner tank, outer
jacket, immersion type electric heating elements, thermostat electric control box, pressure and
temperature relief valve, water connections and sturdy floor mounting legs or wall brackets
suitable for the type of heater used.
B. The inner tank shall be constructed of heavy gauge welded steel, designed for a working pressure
of 150 psi, and hydrostatically tested to 300 psi, at the factory. The tank shall be glass lined with
vitreous porcelain enamel tank liner. The tank shall be provided with stainless steel cold water
dip tube to carry the incoming cold water to tank bottom to prevent mixing with heated water,
and with anti-siphoning opening at top to prevent siphoning out of contents the event of water
supply shut-off.
C. The outer jacket shall be of heavy gauge steel, rust proofed with two coats of anti-rust paint inside
and outside and smoothly finished with durable backed-on high gloss enamel.
Page 230 of 429
D. The space between the tank and the other jacket shall be filled with blanket glass fibre insulation
of adequate thickness for minimum heat loss.
E. The heater shall be provided with a magnesium anode rod to protect the heater against electrolytic
corrosion.
F. A 1/2" combination temperature and pressure relief valve shall be fitted to the heater at the factory
directly immersed in the water at the top of the heater. The relief valve shall be of the self-closing,
lever operated type with thermo-bulb extension factory set at 125 psi and 210 deg.
G. Heating element shall be equipped with separate contactor and high limit temperature control to
cut-off the energy in the event of overheating.
H. The heating elements shall be controlled by one thermostat to cut off all heating elements
simultaneously.
I. The thermostat shall be the adjustable type with a range of temperature adjustment not less than 90
to 190 deg. F. it shall be of the immersion type with bulb immersion directly into the water.
J. The heater shall be provided with an electric control box mounted on the heater at the factory and
shall contain the contractors, thermostat necessary transformer and junction block. It shall be fully
wired and tested at the factory ready for installation with simple connection to the power supply.
PART 30 PART 2 – EXECUTION
6.1 INSTALLATION
A. Secure skid supports to bases with proper size anchor bolts.
B. Pipe all relief valves indirectly to floor drains.
C. Follow manufacturers recommendations for piping arrangement and as indicated on the drawings.
D. Make complete all electrical connections and local high and temperature alarms with extension to
BMS.
E. Perform all tests.
Page 231 of 429

SECTION 224000 PLUMBING FIXTURES
B. Common Work Results for Plumbing, Section 220500 applies to work of this Section.
C. The requirements of this section apply to equipment specified elsewhere in the specifications.
D. Architectural specifications and drawings.

Page 232 of 429
31.1
A. Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services and tests necessary to
complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, all plumbing fixtures and trim in
accordance with Drawings and Specifications.
31.2
A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of plumbing fixtures and trim of types
and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not
less than 3 years. Provide plumbing fixtures and trim produced by a manufacturer listed as an
Acceptable Manufacturer in this section. Provide all fixtures of the same manufacturer unless
otherwise noted.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of WW-P-541d Federal Specification.

31.3
6.5 SUBMITTALS
instructions, and catalog cuts for each type of plumbing fixtures and trim.
B. Samples: Submit samples when manufacturers catalog information does not clearly indicate
construction details or aesthetics of fixtures and related equipment, or as directed by Architect.
31.4
Refer to architectural specifications, interior designer requirements and the detailed sanitary fixture
plumbing schedules.
6.7 WATER CLOSETS
A. For models and types refer to architectural specifications and the attached schedules.
B. Angle stop with flexible supplies chrome-plated.
C. Sanitary spray hose shall be provided for all water closets 1.00 M long, chrome-plated, flexible
hose with a conical end at its free end and 15 mm (1/2") union to an angle cock, the conical end
shall be equipped with an eye to use with a hook to hang the hose to the wall.
31.5
6.8 SHOWERS
Page 233 of 429

A. For showers and controls refer to architectural specifications and the attached schedules.
31.6
6.9 WASH BASINS
A. For wash basins and faucets type and models refer to architectural specifications and the attached
schedules.
B. Trap 1 1/4" x 1 1/2" (32 x 40 mm) chromium – plated PP "p" trap with tubing to wall and
escutcheon similar.
6.10 BATH TUBS
A. For bath tubs type & model refer to architectural specifications and the attached schedules
B. Drain POP-UP Drain with overflow fitting and chromium plated wings.
31.7
6.11 KITCHEN SINK
A. Basin: for model and type refer to architecture specification
B. Waste: Continuous waste connection 1 1/2" chrome plated brass tubing

31.8
6.12 JANITORS SERVICE SINK
A. For model and type refer to architecture specifications.
B. Waste: PVC standard "P" trap with drain fitting and stainless steel strainer
31.9
6.13 GENERAL
A. Vitreous Ware: Fired vitreous chinaware of the best quality, non-absorbent and backed so that
the whole mass is thoroughly fused and vitrified, producing a material while in color, which when
fractured will show a homogeneous mass, close-grained and free from pores; glaze and finish to
be thoroughly fused and united to the body without discoloration, chips or flaws, and free from
craze; warped or otherwise imperfect fixtures will not be accepted.
B. Enameled Cast Iron: Acid resistant cast in one pour of sufficient thickness to form fixtures of the
best quality; after the iron has been rubbed smooth, apply the enamel coating to the surfaces
where it is required and thoroughly fuse without discoloration, chip or flaws, and free from craze;
coat un-enameled exposed surface with one coat of factory applied oil paint.
Page 234 of 429

C. Stainless Steel: Seamless drawn and of uniform gauge to form fixtures of the best quality; where
welding is required all seems to be ground smooth and polished to match adjacent metal finished;
undercoat underside to provide sound and condensation barrier.
D. Exposed Trim: all fittings, escutcheons, faucets, traps, exposed piping, brass, chrome plated over
nickel plate with polished finish; visible hangers chrome plated over nickel plate.
E. Provide supply stops with renewable seats for each plumbing fixture.
31.10
6.14 FIXTURES AND ACCESSORIES FURNISHED IN OTHER DIVISION SECTIONS
A. Provide all roughing for fixtures furnished under other division, set fixtures in place and make
all final connections thereto
31.11
6.15 FIXTURE SUPPORTS
A. Provide all hangers, supports, brackets, etc., for the proper installation of water closet, urinals,
lavatories, sinks, etc., requiring support. Supports to be in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations and when built into partition or walls, to be set as the construction progresses.
7.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine conditions under which plumbing fixtures and trim are to be installed. Notify Architect
in writing of conditions detrimental to proper
B. Completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
32.1
7.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install plumbing fixtures and trim as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions, applicable codes and regulations, and in accordance with recognized industry
practices to ensure that installation complies with requirements and serves intended function.
B. Coordinate with other work, as necessary to interface installation of plumbing fixtures and trims
with other work.
C. Fasten plumbing fixtures securely to supports on building structure. Secure supplies behind or
within wall construction to provide rapid installation.
Page 235 of 429

D. Set all steel and fiberglass, shower receptors and flexible base mop basin in a leveling bed of
cement grout.
E. Provide a stop valve in an accessible location in the water connection to each fixture whether
fixture is provided by this Contractor or not.
F. Install chrome plated escutcheons at each wall, floor and ceiling penetration in exposed finished
location and within cabinets and millwork.
G. Seal (caulk) all fixtures to walls and floors using G.E. silicone sealant. Match sealant color to
fixture color.
H. Adjust water pressure at drinking fountains, faucet and shower valves to provide shape flow and
stream.
I. Replace washers of leaking or dripping faucets and stops.
J. Clean fixtures, trim, and strainers using manufacturers recommended cleaning methods and
materials.
K. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures, water coolers and trims.
32.2
A. Upon completion of installation of plumbing fixtures and trim, and after fixtures are water
pressurized, test fixture to demonstrate compliance with requirements. Where possible correct
malfunctioning units, retest to demonstrate compliance, otherwise remove and replace with new
equipment and retest at no cost to Owner.
Page 236 of 429

TABLE OF CONTENTS
DIVISION 23 – HVAC
SECTION 23 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
SECTION 23 05 25 PAINTING.
SECTION 23 05 30 HANGERS, SUPPOTING FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENTS.
SECTION 23 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS.
SECTION 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC WORKS.
SECTION 23 05 93 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING
SECTION 23 07 13 HVAC INSULATION.
SECTION 23 09 00 BUILDING MANGMENT SYSTEM (BMS)
SECTION 23 11 00 FUEL OIL SPECIALTIES.
SECTION 23 13 00 FACILITY FUEL STORAGE TANK
SECTION 23 31 13 METAL DUCTS
SECTION 23 34 00 FANS.
SECTION 23 37 13 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, GRILLES AND LOUVERS
Page 237 of 429

SECTION 23 41 00 AIR FILTERS.
SECTION 23 73 00 AIR HANDLING UNITS.
SECTION 23 81 26 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
SECTION 23 81 29 Variable Refrigerant Flow HVAC Systems
ASAYEL AL-OMRAN HVAC TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION KNOWLEDGE ECONOMIC CITY – KEC

SECTION 23 05 00 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
SECTION 23 05 00
COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC
PART 1- GENERAL
A. The requirements of the Contract Documents, including the General Conditions and/or Supplementary
General Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this division. Mechanical
work includes heating, ventilation and air conditioning and plumbing.
B. In case of conflict between these requirements and the general requirements of division (1) refer to issue
for the Project Manager for direction.
Page 238 of 429

C. Drawings are diagrammatic and are a graphic representation of contract requirements to the best
available standards at the scale required.
D. Riser diagrams and schematic diagrams generally indicate equipment connections to be used for various
systems. Provide all work shown on diagrams whether or not it is duplicated on the plans.
E. Specifications include incomplete sentences. Words or phrases such as "the contractor shall," "shall be,"
"furnish," "provide," "a," "an," "the," and "all" have been omitted for brevity.
F. Except where modified by a specific notation to the contrary, the indication and/or description of any item,
in the Drawings or Specifications or both, carries with it the instruction to furnish and install the item
complete with all appurtenances or accessories necessary to complete any required system, regardless
of whether or not this instruction is explicitly stated as part of the indication or description.
G. Specifications and Drawings are complimentary and are to be taken together for a complete interpretation
of the work.
H. Drawings of necessity utilize symbols and schematic diagrams to indicate various items of work. Neither
of these have any dimensional significance nor do they delineate every item required for the intended
installation. Install the work in accordance with the diagrammatic intent expressed on the electrical and
mechanical drawings, and in conformity with the dimensions indicated on final architectural and structural
working drawings and on equipment shop drawings.
I. Certain details appear on the drawings which are specific with regard to the dimensioning and positioning
of the work. These details are intended only for the purpose of establishing general feasibility. They do
not obviate field coordination for the indicated work.
J. Derive information as to the general construction from structural and architectural drawings and
specifications.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Where used in this document and accompanying drawings, the following words are defined as listed:
1. "Provide" to furnish, install and connect up complete and ready for safe and regular operation of
particular work referred to.
accessories.
4. "Work" labour, materials, equipment, apparatus, controls, accessories and other items required
for proper and complete installation.

7. "Indicated," "shown" or "noted" as indicated, shown or noted the contract documents.
Page 239 of 429

8. "Similar" or "equal" in materials, weight, size, design and efficiency of specified product.
9. "Reviewed," "satisfactory," "accepted," or "directed" as reviewed, satisfactory, accepted or

directed by or to Engineer.
10. "Architect," "Engineer," "Project Manager," Owner's authorized representative" the party or
parties responsible for interpreting, accepting and otherwise ruling on the performance under
"This Contract."
11. "This Contract", "The Contract" the agreement covering the work to be performed by "The
Contractor."
12. "The Specifications," "The Section, Part, Division of the Specifications" the documents specifying
the work to be performed by "The Contractor."
13. "Other," "Other Contractor," "Other Sub-Contractor," "Other Trade" persons, parties, or trades
responsible for work of the project other than the Contractor.
14. "Project Manager" or “Construction Manager" is defined as the Owner's authorized

representative.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND STANDARDS
A. Make the complete installation in accordance with all state and local municipal codes, all applicable codes
and authorities having jurisdiction, and the applicable requirements and standards of the following:
All American standards
ASA - American Standards Association
AGA - American Gas Association
IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Code
PDI - Plumbing and Drainage Institute
SBI - Steel Boiler Institute
EN - European Norms
ANSI - American National Standards Institute
ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers
ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers
ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials
AWS - American Welding Society
AWWA - American Water Works Association
IBR - Institute of Boiler and Radiator Manufacturers
AMCA - Air Moving and Conditioning Association
MSS - Manufacturer's Standardization Society of the Valve and Fitting Industry
NEC - National Electrical Code
UL - Underwriters Laboratories
AHRI - Air-conditioning, Heating and Refrigeration Institute
SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association
NFPA - National Fire Protection Association
UBC - Uniform building code
Refer to the Architect for decisions on any items or requirements noted in the specifications or drawings
which conflict with the standards listed above. Provide all work necessary to comply with these
requirements at no extra cost to the Owner.
Page 240 of 429

1.4 ORGANIZATION OF THE WORK
A. Implement the work called for under this contract simultaneously with the work of other Trades in a manner
such as not to delay the overall progress of the project. Be prepared to furnish promptly to other Trades
involved at the project all information and measurements relating to the work which they may require.
Cooperate with them in order to secure the harmony necessary in the interest of the project as a whole.
C. Keep a competent superintendent in charge of the work. Replace such superintendent if unsatisfactory
to the Construction Manager.
D. Maintain a complete file of Contract and shop drawings at the Site available for inspection by the
Construction Manager. Upon installation, initial and date shop drawings.
E. Provide every facility to permit inspection or observation of the work by the Construction Manager during
the course of construction.
F. Be responsible for work until its completion and final acceptance; replace any of the same which may be
damaged, lost or stolen, without additional cost to the Owner.

A. Make all workmanship, equipment and materials supplied under this contract acceptable to the Owner
and his Representatives, who have the power to reject any items which in their judgment are not in full

A. Obtain and deliver a final Certificate of Approval from the applicable inspection authority having
jurisdiction. Make delivery to the Construction Manager for transmittal to the Owner upon completion of
the work and before final payment. Pay all charges made by the inspection authority and include their
cost in the bid.
B. Include the procurement of and payment for all permits, certificates and fees for the performance of the
work in compliance with codes, applicable laws and municipal regulations including those from local
utilities for services.
1.7 SCOPE OF WORK

A. The Specifications and the accompanying drawings are intended to secure the provisions of all material,
labour, equipment, and services necessary to install complete, tested, and ready for operation the
Mechanical Systems in accordance with the Specifications and Drawings. Provide all systems complete
with necessary appurtenances and minor auxiliaries, including offsets to clear interferences and supports
which are not shown but are needed to make each system complete in every respect. Provide all work
described in the Specifications and not shown on the Drawings, or vice versa, in complete working order.
If mention has been omitted of any item of work or material, necessary for completion of the system, then
such items must be and are hereby included.
B. Contractors design item:
Page 241 of 429

1. Verify and provide external static pressure calculation for all duct work with all fittings and
accessories based on the approved workshop drawing. This applies for all fans, fan coil units
and air handling units, according to the relevant technical specifications requirements.
2. Verify and provide pressure drop calculations on the side piping of HVAC system, based on the
approved workshop drawing and according to the relevant technical specifications requirements.
3. Provide analysis of sound level spectrum in different spaces, according to the relevant technical
specifications requirements.
4. Verify and provide calculations of the net positive suction head on all pumps, based on the
approved workshop drawing and according to the relevant technical specifications requirements.
5. Provide complete design and calculations for the seismic and vibration control system of all
mechanical and electrical equipment, according to the relevant technical specifications
requirements.
6. Provide analysis of the water treatment and chemical treatment system concerning raw water,
blow down water, etc, according to the relevant technical specifications requirements.
7. Verify and provide smoke calculations showing smoke flow rate, smoke temperature and the fan
flow rate, and provide complete selection of the smoke fans including fire rating and pressure
drop based on the approved workshop drawing and according to the relevant technical
specifications requirements.
8. Verify and provide calculations for the expansion tanks capacity based on the approved
workshop drawing and according to the relevant technical specifications requirements.
9. Provide computer selection, according to the relevant technical specifications requirements, of
all mechanical equipment and devices including, but not limited to:
 Chillers.
 Cooling towers.
 Boilers and accessories.
 Air handling units.
 Fan coil units.
 Fans.
 Pressure reducing valves.
 Variable air volume and constant air volume boxes.

B. Before submitting a proposal, the Contractor is responsible for visiting the site of the work and becoming
thoroughly familiar with all conditions and limitations. The submission of a proposal will be construed as
evidence that such an examination has been made, and later claims for labour, equipment or materials
required for difficulties encountered which could have been foreseen had such an examination been made
will not be recognized.
C. Verify all grades, elevations, dimensions, and clearances at the site.
D. Examine all work prepared by others to receive the work of this Division and report any defects affecting
installation to the Project Manager for correction. Commencement of work will be construed as complete
acceptance of preparatory work by others.
Page 242 of 429

E. Existing conditions, equipment, material, and sizes are shown for reference only. Verify existing
conditions and bring any discrepancies to Engineer's attention in writing prior to submission.
A. Prior to purchasing equipment or materials, submit a list of proposed manufacturers.
B. Shop drawings which are submitted out of sequence or without supplemental information necessary for
proper evaluation of the submission are subject to delays in processing.
C. Shop drawings must bear the General Contractor's stamp certifying:
1. That he has checked the submitted subcontractor's shop drawings.
2. That the submitted shop drawing is fully coordinated with all interfacing trades and with other
trades where interference may occur.
3. That the submitted shop drawings are in conformance with the contract documents, except for
the following substitutions and/or changes.
1 ---
2 ---
3 ---
etc. Signed "
1. Catalogue information and factory assembly drawings, as required for a complete explanation
and description of all items of equipment.
4. Scale composite drawings, by the sheet metal subcontractor, showing all duct work, piping,
lighting fixtures, main conduit runs, and drainage piping above the hung ceilings and in the
mechanical equipment rooms. The drawings will indicate pipe and duct sizes and their elevation
above the floor. Obtain layout of plumbing, fire protection and electrical work from the respective
contractor for inclusion on the composite drawing. The signature of each contractor on the
composite drawing will attest to full coordination of these drawings.
E. Materials installed or work performed without acceptance of materials is done at the risk of the Contractor,
and the cost of removal of such material or work which is judged unsatisfactory for any reason is at the
expense of the Contractor.
Page 243 of 429

1. Number of copies and type of paper complies with the requirements of Division (1) "General
requirements".
consist of catalogue sheets displaying other items which are not applicable.
G. Shop drawings and other submissions which are submitted for review will be returned with a Shop
Drawing stamp indicating actions based on reviews that are made and Contractor's responses that may
be necessary. Actions noted regarding "REVIEW" and "RESPONSE" portions of the shop drawing stamp
are defined as follows:
1. Review Portion
a. Incomplete: Item submitted without Contractor's stamp as stated above.
b. No Exceptions Taken: Contractor may install the items submitted in conformance with the
plans and specifications.
c. Rejected: Item submitted fails to meet criteria in specifications and/or drawings.
d. Comments Attached: Additional sheet has been attached to the shop drawing submittal and
is being returned to the Contractor; additional sheets may include comments which could not
be made on the submittal due to limited space or may request additional information.
e. Note Marking: Notations made directly on the shop drawing submittal.
2. Response Required by Contractor Portion
a. Confirm: Contractor to confirm that he will comply with comments made under items 1d or 1e
above; if the Contractor agrees with the comments, proceed with the fabrication and
installation.
b. Resubmit: Contractor to resubmit shop drawings for review based upon paragraphs 1a and
1c and may also be required to resubmit under paragraphs 1d and 1e.
1.10 RECORD DRAWING

A. Before commencing work, procure complete set of black and white prints of Contract Drawings.
Page 244 of 429

B. Maintain prints in field office and permanently record, in colored pencil, on such prints, at time of
occurrence, deviations from Contract Drawings, due to:
1. Field Coordination
2. Addenda
3. Bulletins
D. Make drawings available for Engineer periodic inspection and submit for review with As-Built Drawings.

A. Before commencing work, procure complete set of lithotracings of Contract Drawings on 4 mil mylar or
Transparencies and upon completion of works contractor shall submit 2 sets on CD or tape, computer
reproducible as built drawings of the HVAC works
B. Neatly revise to conform with Record Drawings.
C. Conspicuously indicate major deviations in Mechanical Equipment Rooms by specific reference to shop
drawings of these rooms and provide an accurate and complete record of the work as installed.
D. Submit up-to-date "in progress" prints to Project Manager when requesting payment for work installed.
E. Upon completion of work, submit signed and certified lithotracings as As-Built and referenced Shop
Drawings, along with marked up prints of Record Drawings, to Project Manager for acceptance.

A. Coordinate the work of this division with the work of all other Contracts and the utility company and so
arrange that there will be no delay in the proper installation and completion of any part or parts of each
respective work wherein it may be interrelated with that of this Contract so that generally all construction
work can proceed without delaying the completion of the project. Forward all communications of a
coordinating nature to the Project Manager and Engineer via the General Contractor.
B. Examine contract drawings and specifications for all other trades relating to this project, verify all
governing conditions at the site, and become fully informed as to the extent and character of the work
required and its relation to other work in the building. No consideration will be granted for any alleged
misunderstanding of the materials to be furnished for work to be done.
C. Scaled and figured dimensions with respect to the items are approximate only; sizes of equipment have
been taken from typical equipment items of the class indicated. Before proceeding with work, carefully
check all dimensions and sizes and assume full responsibility for the fitting-in of equipment and materials
to the building and to meet architectural and structural conditions.
D. Coordinate work with other disciplines. Confer with other contractors whose work might affect this
installation; and arrange all parts of this work and equipment in proper relation to the work and equipment
of others, with the building construction and with architectural finish so that this work will harmonize in
service, appearance, and function.
Page 245 of 429

E. Install exposed piping and duct work to provide the maximum amount of headroom but in no case less
than 7 feet, on its own or when overlapped with other trades above the finished floor. Install piping and
ductwork concealed in areas where hung ceilings or other furred spaces are indicated.
F. Refer to the Architectural Drawings for ceiling heights, locations and types of hung ceilings and furred
spaces.
G. Furnish to the General Construction, detailed advance information regarding all requirements related to
work under other Divisions and/or Sections. Furnish sizes, accurate data, and locations of any and all
pads, pits, chases, sleeves, and slots through floor slabs, walls, foundations, ceilings, roof, and other
special openings required for work under this Division.
H. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide sepia drawings for trade coordination. The sepia of this
"coordination" drawing will be circulated in timely fashion to the other trades for indication of their work to
permit coordination. Attend coordination meetings held in location and at frequencies in accordance with
the directions of the General Contractor. When coordination is complete to the satisfaction of the General
Contractor, "sign off" the coordination drawings. See "SHOP DRAWINGS AND OTHER INFORMATION
REQUIRED."

A. Owner-furnished equipment will be delivered, crated or otherwise packaged to the site delivery point
selected by the Project Manager. The Contractor is responsible for accepting delivery of all
Owner-furnished items which are under his trade jurisdiction and place them in their final location.
B. Where items cannot be immediately placed in their final position, the Contractor is responsible for storing
and protecting all Owner-furnished items until the time of their final installation. The contractor is
responsible for the care and protection of the items until acceptance by the Owner. Coordinate delivery
of Utility Company furnished equipment with the delivery policy of that company.
1.14 PROTECTION, MAINTENANCE AND PRODUCT HANDLING OF HVAC- EQUIPMENT

A. Deliver and store Mechanical equipment at the site, properly packed and crated until finally installed.
Store materials in spaces as designated by the General Contractor/Project Manager. Investigate each
space through which equipment must be moved. If necessary, have equipment shipped from
manufacturer in crated sections of size suitable for moving through restricted spaces.
B. Adequately protect uninstalled and installed equipment and materials against loss or stealing, damage
caused by water, paint, fire, plaster, moisture, acids, fumes, dust or other environmental conditions, or
physical damage, during delivery, storage, installation and shutdown conditions. Replace any damaged
or stolen material without extra cost to the Owner, except for the equipment that has been handed-over
to the Owner or the Tenants.
C. Provide effective protection for all material and equipment against damage that may be caused by
environmental conditions. Do no work when conditions of temperature in area or moisture on materials
or substrates are not in accordance with material manufacturer's recommended conditions for installation.
D. Maintain all equipment and systems installed, until final acceptance by the Project Manager and the
Owner's consultant. The operation of the equipment by the Owner does not constitute an acceptance of
the work. Work will be accepted only after the Contractor has adjusted his equipment, demonstrated that
it fulfills the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications, and has furnished all required certificates.
Page 246 of 429

E. Provide effective protection against damage for all materials and equipment during shipment, and storage
at the Project Site. Cover all stored equipment to exclude dust and moisture. Place stored equipment on
pallets or racks with appropriate weather cover.
F. After duct work, piping and equipment are installed, cover openings to prevent entrance of water and
foreign materials. Close openings with temporary metal or plastic caps.
G. Protect all rough and finished floors and other finished surfaces from damage which may be caused by
construction materials and methods. Protect floors with tarpaulins, drip pans and oil-proof floor covering.
Protect finished surfaces from welding and cutting splatters with baffles and splatter blankets. Protect
finished surfaces from paint droppings, adhesive and other marring agents with drop cloths. Protect other
surfaces with appropriate protective measures.
H. Deliver materials to Project Site in manufacturer's original unopened containers with manufacturer's name
and product identification clearly marked thereon.
I. After completion of project, clean the exterior surfaces of equipment furnished in this Division including
concrete residue.

A. Provide Equipment and Materials required for installation under the Specifications new and without
blemish or defect. Provide equipment and materials which will meet with the acceptance of authorities
having jurisdiction over the work. Where such acceptance is contingent upon having the products listed
or labelled by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., or other test laboratory, provide products so listed or
labelled. Where no specific indication as to the type or quality of material or equipment is indicated,
furnish a first class standard article.
B. Wherever a manufacturer of a product is specified and the terms "other approved" or "approved equal" or
"equal" or "similar to" are used, the substituted item must conform in all respects to the specified item.
Consideration will not be given to claims that the substituted item meets the performance requirements
with lesser construction. Performance as delineated in schedules and in the Specifications indicate
minimum performance. In many cases, equipment is oversized to allow for pick-up loads, derating and
future loads which cannot be delineated under the minimum performance.
C. Provide all equipment of one type (such as fans, pumps, coils, etc.) produced by one manufacturer.
D. Substituted equipment where permitted and accepted must conform to space requirements. Replace at
Contractor's expense any substituted equipment that cannot meet space requirements, whether accepted
or not. Make any modifications of related systems as a result of substitutions at Contractor's expense.
E. Note that shop drawings, or other information submitted in accordance with the requirements hereinbefore
specified, do not assure that the Engineer, or any other Owner's Representative, attests to the
dimensional suitability of the material or equipment involved. Engineer’s failure to object to shop drawings
does not invalidate the Drawings and Specifications if in conflict; unless a letter requesting such change
is submitted and accepted on the Owner's authorized representative. Letterhead.
F. Substitutions of equipment for that listed on the schedules or designated by model number in the
Specifications will not be considered if the item listed or described is not a regular catalogued item shown
in the current catalogue of the manufacturer and been successfully used for a period of not less than five
years.
Page 247 of 429
A. Access doors as required for operation and maintenance of concealed equipment, valves, controls, pull
boxes, etc., shall be provided by the General Contractor under another section of the specification.
B. Coordinate and prepare a location, size, and function schedule of access doors required and deliver to a
representative of the installing Trade and the Engineer for acceptance.
1.17 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
A. After completion of all required equipment and system tests and unless specifically noted elsewhere in
these specifications, provide at owner's/operator's convenience, knowledgeable personnel and necessary
equipment to reasonably instruct and demonstrate the operation and maintenance of said equipment and
system. Arrange for the related manufacturer or authorized representative to assist with this orientation.
The orientation shall be a minimum of five (5) days in addition to start up time.
B. Before requesting acceptance of work, furnish 5 copies in bound form of a complete instruction manual,
typewritten or printed.
C. Include the following in the instruction manuals:
3. Description of system or equipment
5. Maintenance
c. Recommended list of spare parts and cost (3 - 5 year of operation)

Page 248 of 429
d. Schedule of recommended maintenance
7. Manufacturer's data: Where multiple model, type and size listings are included, clearly and
conspicuously indicate those that are pertinent to this installation.
a. Description - literature, drawings, illustrations, certified performance charts, technical data,

etc.
b. Operation
d. Parts list
e. Names, addresses telephone, and fax numbers of recommended repair and service
companies
f. Guarantee data
1.18 GUARANTEES AND CERTIFICATIONS
A. Guarantee all work to be free from leaks or defects. Replace or repair, as directed by Engineer, defective
materials or workmanship, as well as damage to the work of the Trades resulting from same for the
duration of stipulated guarantee periods.
B. The duration of guarantee periods following the date of acceptance of the entire work is as follows:
1. For work not otherwise specified, one year.

2. For heating systems, one year.
3. For air conditioning systems, one year.
4. Extension of guarantee to include one continuous heating season, from November 1 to April 1
shall be included as a separate bid item.
5. Extension of guarantee to include one continuous cooling season, from May 1 to October 1 shall
be included as a separated bid item.
C. Submit certification attesting to the fact that specified performance and other criteria are met by all items
of equipment.

A. As the project progresses, the Engineer and the Architect, at their discretion, will perform site visits to
observe the mechanical and electrical installations. At the conclusion of these site visits, punch lists will
be issued to the appropriate Contractor for the deficiencies in the work of his trade. Complete all work
and perform all corrective measures as required by the punch lists. After this corrective and completion
work has been accomplished advise the Project Manager and the Engineer in writing that every item on
the punch lists has been completed.
Page 249 of 429
32.3 1.20 TRAINING
A. The Contractor shall instruct and train personnel, designated by the Owner for the purpose, in the
operation and maintenance of every part, device and equipment in the systems with particular emphasis
on proper start-up and shutdown procedures, preventive maintenance and lubrication procedures with
the recommended lubricants overhaul and major maintenance methods, adjustment and calibration of
instruments and controls, the use of special tools and safe practices.
B. The Owner will bear all the expenses of his personnel allocated for this purpose.
1.20 EQUIPMENT SPECIFICATION AND SELECTION FOR PROJECT

All visible components of the HVAC System shall be selected to coordinate with the interior design concept of
the architect.
The interior design concept includes the following general principles.
Finishes
The material finishes shall be selected form the following alternatives:-
- Anodized aluminium.
- Galvanized steel or stainless steel.
- RAL 9006 factory applied powder coating.
Shape
The components shall be selected to be:
- Square.
- Rectangular.
Form
The components shall be selected to have straight lines and square edges with no chamfered or rounded
features.
Screws
All screws used for fixing of above items when visible must be fully countersunk. No Philips head (cross),
flat head screws, dome heads, standard hexagon heads, or nails shall be used visible. Only Allen head,
torx head, or pug nose screws are allowed.
Samples
Samples of all visible components shall be submitted to hpa for approval before any order is passed.
Page 250 of 429

Setting out
The contractor shall use the setting out information included in the architect’s drawings, particularly wall
elevations and reflected ceiling plans when preparing the installation drawings.
Construction IAQ Management Plan
To protect the heating, ventilation, and air conditioning (HVAC) system during construction, control pollutant
sources, and interrupt contamination pathways, the contractor is required to develop and implement an
Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) management plan after installation of all finishes and completion of building cleaning
but before occupancy. The plan should include strategies for compliance with the following requirements:-
- During construction, meet or exceed the recommended control measures of the Sheet Metal
and Air Conditioning National Contractors Association (SMACNA) IAQ Guidelines for Occupied
Buildings under Construction, 2nd Edition 2007, ANSI/SMACNA 008-2008 (Chapter 3).
- Protect stored on-site and installed absorptive materials from moisture damage.
- If permanently installed air handlers are used during construction, filtration media with a minimum
efficiency reporting value (MERV) of 8 must be used at each return air grille, as determined by
ASHRAE Standard 52.2 1999 (with errata but without addenda1). Replace all filtration media
immediately prior to occupancy.
A copy of a draft Construction IAQ Management Plan should be issued prior to commencement on site, for
review and approval by CLIENT. The contractor is required to provide a statement at the end of construction
summarizing how the plan was implemented on site. The contractor is responsible for ensuring that both
plan and implementation are sufficient to achieve LEED Core & Shell IEQ credit 3.
END OF SECTION 23 05 00
Page 251 of 429

SECTION 23 05 25 Painting
SECTION 23 05 25
Painting
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and
Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.
B. General Requirements for Plumbing & HVAC Works, Section 15000, apply to work of this Section.
C. The requirements of this Section apply to equipment specified elsewhere in the specification.

A. The work includes the providing of all labor, supervision, materials, equipment, accessories, services and
tests necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the Owner.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, including printed technical literature.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. All exposed and un-insulated pipes, ferrous supports, gantries, brackets and steelwork in the Contract
works shall be painted in accordance with this section of the Specification.
Page 252 of 429

B. The contractor shall obtain from the supplier of any paint or similar product detailed instructions for the
use of that product, specific to the conditions found on the contract. These shall include details of storage,
preparation of steelwork, application method and conditions, over coating and any other relevant points.
C. The contractor shall comply with the manufacturer's instructions for the use of any product, unless these
are in conflict with the requirements of this specification. Areas of conflict shall be brought to the attention
of the Owner's Authorized Representative.

A. SURFACE PREPARATION
15. Prior to surface preparation the steel surfaces shall be cleaned of dirt, grease, loose rust and
other contaminants.
16. No pipe shall be used which has corrosion.
17. The contractor shall ensure that all pipe work shall be delivered from the factory thoroughly blast
cleaned to acceptable quality, and suitably protected to prevent rust formation before application
of the paint scheme. The surface roughness after cleaning shall not exceed peak-to-trough
amplitude of 80um.
18. Prior to application of primer steel surfaces shall be cleaned of dirt, grease and other
contaminants. Any rust present shall be completely removed by blast cleaning or wire brushing
to the standard noted above. Severely pitted steelwork shall not be used.
19. Galvanized steel shall be degreased by scrubbing with a warm detergent solution (2%
Teepol or equivalent) followed by water washing, followed by treatment with a mordant solution
followed by water washing once the surface has returned black. Any areas where the surface
does not turn black shall be re-cleaned and re-treated.
20. The quality of surface preparation specified must be obtained at the time of priming.
21. Areas to be welded shall be masked off prior to priming, and re-prepared and primed to the same
quality after welding.
2.3 PAINT SCHEME

A. The criteria in the following clauses shall be used to define which scheme should be used in a given
situation where not specifically given in the paint scheme schedule.
1. SCHEME P/1: Internal un-insulated steel pipe work and internal steel support systems (in a dry
place).
2. SCHEME P/2: Internal insulated steel pipe work (in a dry space away from the building
perimeter, where condensation is likely to occur only in exceptional cumstances. Includes pipes
which are insulated with an integral vapour barrier.)
3. SCHEME P/3: External and light well insulated steel pipe work and all steel support systems (
in a position in which condensation is likely to occur from time to time, and in which the paint is
unlikely to be maintained).
4. SCHEME P/4: Internal un-insulated steel pipe work and internal steel support systems (in a
position in which condensation is likely to occur from time to time, and in which maintenance of
the paint is possible).
5. SCHEME P/5: External galvanized steel pipe work and external galvanized steel
supports.
6. If the Contractor has reason to believe that the conditions will in fact be more onerous than those
in the relevant clause above, he shall draw this to the attention of the Owner's Authorized
Representative.
Page 253 of 429
B. The various paint schemes shall be as detailed below (DFT shall mean dry film thickness):
1. SCHEME P/1:
 Surface preparation : As above
 Primer: Zinc phosphate oïl/alkyde primer, 40 microns DFT
 Finishes : Oil/alkyd finish (color specified elsewhere)
2. SCHEME P/2
 Surface preparation : As above
 Primer: Zinc phosphate oil/alkyd primer, 40 microns DFT.
3. SCHEME P/3
 Surface preparation : Type 1
 Primer: Zinc phosphate oil/alkyd primer, 40 microns DFT
 Barrier coat (1): High build bituminous coating, chocolate brown, 100 microns DFT
 Barrier coat (2): High build bituminous coating, black, 100 microns DFT
4. SCHEME P/4
 Surface preparation : Type 1
 Primer : Zinc phosphate oil/alkyd primer, 40 microns DFT
 Barrier : Oil/alkyd MIO barrier coat, 75 microns DFT
 Undercoat : Oil/alkyd undercoat, 40 microns DFT
 Finish : Oil/alkyd finish
5. SCHEME P/5
 Surface preparation : Etch prime
 Barrier: Cold tar epoxy, 125 microns DFT
C. Where a Contractor wishes to modify the specified paint scheme he shall demonstrate that the proposed
alternative is at least equivalent to the specified scheme, and that it will not create compatibility problems
with any adjacent scheme.
D. All paints in a single scheme shall be supplied by the same manufacturer.
E. Primers in which red oxide (red iron oxide) is the primary colouring agent shall not be used.

A. The Contractor shall demonstrate by means of samples submitted before commencement of the work,
the methods he intends to use and the quality of work that will be achieved.
B. All work adjudged by the Owner's Authorized Representative to be worse in quality than the samples
shall be rejected.
C. All painting shall be carried out by skilled painters under competent supervision.
D. Each coat of paint shall be applied to a clean and suitable surface to produce a continuous film of paint
of uniform and even thickness.
E. As soon as the priming coat has dried, an extra stripe coat of paint shall be applied to all edges, corners,
cervices, bolt heads, welds and any similar areas, using the same paint as for the primer but in a
contrasting shade.
Page 254 of 429
F. The dry film thickness shall be measured after each coat has dried. Wet film thickness measurements
shall not be used, other than for control purposes.
G. The adhesion of the paint scheme shall be measured and carried out on representative areas chosen to
be non-obtrusive in the final condition. Areas worse than that standard shall be cleaned to bare metal and
re-painted.
H. The test areas shall be touched-up in accordance with this Specification
2.5 DAMAGED SURFACES

A. The Contractor take all necessary precautions to minimize damage to steal and to paint coatings during
handling, installation and thereafter.
B. Where damage or breakdown has occurred, or in any other place where the paintwork does not comply with
this Specification the Contractor shall touch-up to an equivalent standard to the ub\damaged paint, and in
such a way that the areas of touch-up shall not be visually apparent.
C. The Contractor shall demonstrate to the Owner's Authorized Representative that his proposals for touching-
up shall include details of surface preparation, area of overlap, type and thickness of paint to be used and
any other relevant features, shall produce work in accordance with this Specification.
2.6 PIPEWORK IDENTIFICATION

A. Pipe work identification shall be in accordance with the pipe work Identification Specification system
should be conformed to building identification system necessary coordination should be done to have the
same shape and quality of work.
PART 3 EXECUTION (NOT APPLICABLE)
Page 255 of 429

SECTION 23 05 30 HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND PIPING SPECIALTIES
SECTION 23 05 30
HANGERS, SUPPORTS AND PIPING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions, and Division
1 - Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. The requirements specified in this section apply to all related sections in this Division. The requirements of
all related sections, elsewhere in this division also apply to this section unless specified to the contrary.

tests necessary to complete and made ready and set to work for operation by the Owner, all piping
specialties in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.
A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of piping specialties, of the types,
materials and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less
than 5 years approved by the Engineer.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes and the standards outlined in
section 15000.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, including printed technical literature, installation
instructions and catalog cuts.
B. Submit shop drawing details of all piping, before construction. Show the locations and details of anchors,
guides, expansion loops and joints, hangers, etc. Include the manufacturer's figure numbers.
C. Submit samples of each item.

Page 256 of 429
D. Submit shop drawings indicating the location of all seismic braces and provide a legend giving load
information and model selection prior to installation. Have load calculations reviewed and certified by a
Structural or Mechanical Engineer. Submit to Engineer for approval.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Fabricate hangers, supports and sway braces in accordance with ANSI B31.1 and MSS SP-58 and SP-89.
B. Use components for intended design purpose only. Do not use for rigging or erection purposes.
2.2 PIPE HANGERS

A. Finishes:
a. Pipe hangers and supports: galvanized painted with zinc-rich paint after manufacture.
b. Use electro-plating galvanizing process or hot dipped galvanizing process.
c. Ensure steel hangers in contact with copper piping are copper plated or epoxy coated.
B. Upper attachment structural: Suspension from lower flange of I-Beam.
a. Cold piping NPS 2 maximum: malleable iron C-clamp with hardened steel cup point setscrew, locknut
and carbon steel retaining clip.
i. Rod: 9 mm UL listed, 13 mm FM approved.
b. Cold piping NPS 2 1/2 or greater, hot piping: Malleable iron beam clamp, eye rod, jaws and extension
with carbon steel retaining clip, tie rod, nuts and washers, UL listed, FM approved where required to
MSS-SP58 and MSS-SP69.
C. Upper attachment structural: Suspension from upper flange of I-Beam.
a. Cold piping NPS 2 maximum: Ductile iron top-of-beam C-clamp with hardened steel cup point
setscrew, locknut and carbon steel retaining clip, UL listed FM approved where required to MSS
SP69.
b. Cold piping NPS 2 1/2 or greater, all hot piping: Malleable iron top-of-beam jaw-clamp with hooked
rod, spring washer, plain washer and nut UL listed, FM approved where required.
D. Upper attachment to concrete.
a. Ceiling: Carbon steel welded eye rod, clevis plate, clevis pin and cotters with weldless forged steel
eye nut. Ensure eye 6 mm minimum greater than rod diameter.
b. Concrete inserts: wedge shaped body with knockout protector plate UL listed FM approved where
required to MSS SP-69.
E. Shop and field-fabricated assemblies.
a. Trapeze hanger assemblies: MSS SP-89.

b. Steel brackets: MSS SP-89.
c. Sway braces for seismic restraint systems: to MSS SP-89.
F. Hanger rods: threaded rod material to MSS SP-58.
Page 257 of 429

a. Ensure that hanger rods are subject to tensile loading only.
b. Provide linkages where lateral or axial movement of pipe work is anticipated.
c. Do not use 22 mm or 28 mm rod.
G. Pipe attachments: material to MSS SP-58.
a. Attachments for steel piping: carbon steel galvanized.

b. Attachments for copper piping: copper plated black steel.
c. Use insulation saddles for hot pipe work.
d. Oversize pipe hangers and supports for insulated pipes.
H. Adjustable clevis: material to MSS SP-69, UL listed FM approved, where required clevis bolt with nipple
spacer and vertical adjustment nuts above and below clevis.
a. Ensure "U" has hole in bottom for riveting to insulation shields.

I. Yoke style pipe roll: carbon steel yoke, rod and nuts with cast iron roll, to MSS SP-69.
J. U-bolts: carbon steel to MSS SP-69 with 2 nuts at each end to ASTM A563.
a. Finishes for steel pipe work: galvanized.

b. Finishes for copper, glass, brass or aluminum pipe work: black with formed portion plastic coated or
epoxy coated.
K. Pipe rollers: cast iron roll and roll stand with carbon steel rod to MSS SP-69.
2.3 RISER CLAMPS

A. Steel or cast iron pipe: galvanized black carbon steel to MSS SP-58, type 42, UL listed FM approved
where required.
B. Copper pipe: carbon steel copper plated to MSS SP-58, type 42.
C. Bolts: to ASTM A307.
D. Nuts: to ASTM A563.
2.4 INSULATION PROTECTION SHIELDS

A. Insulated cold piping:
a. 64 kg/m3 density insulation plus insulation protection shield to: MSS SP-69, galvanized sheet carbon
steel. Length designed for maximum 3 m span.
B. Insulated hot piping:
a. Curved plate 300 mm long, with edges turned up, welded-in centre plate for pipe sizes NPS 12 and
over, carbon steel to comply with MSS SP-69.
2.5 CONSTANT SUPPORT SPRING HANGERS

A. Springs: alloy steel to ASTM A125, shot peened, magnetic particle inspected, with +/-5% spring rate
tolerance, tested for free height, spring rate, loaded height and provided with Certified Mill Test
Report(CMTR).
Page 258 of 429

B. Load adjustability: 10 % minimum adjustability each side of calibrated load. Adjustment without special
tools. Adjustments not to affect travel capabilities.
C. Provide upper and lower factory set travel stops.
D. Provide load adjustment scale for field adjustments.
E. Total travel to be actual travel + 20%. Difference between total travel and actual travel 25 mm minimum.
F. Individually calibrated scales on each side of support calibrated prior to shipment, complete with
calibration record.
2.6 VARIABLE SUPPORT SPRING HANGERS

A. Vertical movement: 13 mm minimum, 50 mm maximum, use single spring pre-compressed variable spring
hangers.
B. Vertical movement greater than 50 mm: use double spring pre-compressed variable spring hanger with 2
springs in series in single casing.
C. Variable spring hanger to be complete with factory calibrated travel stops. Provide certificate of calibration
for each hanger.
D. Steel alloy springs: to ASTM A125, shot peened, magnetic particle inspected, with +/-5 % spring rate
tolerance, tested for free height, spring rate, loaded height and provided with CMTR.
2.7 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS

A. Fabricate equipment supports not provided by equipment manufacturer from structural grade steel
meeting requirements Structural Steel Specifications. Submit calculations with shop drawings.
2.8 HOUSE-KEEPING PADS

A. For base-mounted equipment: Concrete, at least 100 mm high, 50 mm larger all around than equipment,
and with chamfered edges.
B. Concrete: refer to Cast-in-place Concrete specifications by Structure Division.
2.9 PIPE SLEEVES
A. Sleeve Material Schedule:
Sleeve Material
Designation
1 1.31mm, galvanized steel.
2 Standard weight galvanized steel pipe.
Standard weight galvanized steel pipe with a continuously welded water stop of
3
8mm steel plate extending 150mm all around.
Coated cast iron sleeve with caulking recess, flashing flange and flashing clamp
4
ring.
B. Sleeve Sizes:
Page 259 of 429

1. Floors and fire rated partitions - 15mm maximum clearance between outside of pipe (or
insulation on insulated pipes) and inside of sleeve.
2. Non-fire rated partitions - 40mm maximum clearance between outside of pipe (or insulation on
insulated pipes) and inside of sleeve.
C. Sleeve Length Schedule:
Location Sleeve Lengths

Equal to depth of floor construction, including finish. In waterproof floor construction,
Floors
sleeves to extend minimum of 50mm above finished floor level.
Equal to depth of roof construction, including insulation plus 100mm. Provide threaded
Roofs
or caulked counter flashing to extend down over roofing membrane on pipe.
Walls Equal to depth of construction and Partitions terminated flush with surfaces.
D. Sleeve Caulking & Packing Schedule:
Designation Caulking &Packing Requirements

Pack space between pipe and sleeve with oakum or hemp and caulk watertight with
A
lead.
Pack space between pipe and pipe covering and sleeve with mineral wool and
B caulk watertight. See detail on drawing for fire rated partitions, walls and floor
requirements.
E. Sleeve Application Schedule:
Sleeve
Location Sleeve Caulking
Type
B
Membrane waterproof floor, roof and wall
4 Note: Another trade will carry membrane
construction.
up around sleeve and down inside sleeve
Non-membrane waterproof floor, roof & wall
2 A&B
construction where flashing is required.
1 Interior walls and partitions B
2 Floors B
3 Exterior Walls and Ground Floor Slab A
F. Contractor is responsible for coordinating openings, sleeves with other.
G. Contracts and he will perform core drilling if an opening is required.
2.10 PIPE ESCUTCHEONS

A. Escutcheon inside diameter to closely fit pipe outside diameter or outside of pipe insulation where pipe is
insulated. Escutcheon outside diameter to completely cover pipe penetration hole in walls, floors, partitions
or ceilings.
B. Application Schedule:
Location Escutcheon Material
Page 260 of 429

Anodized aluminum (color to be selected and
Finished Spaces
approved by Engineer), chrome plated brass.
Unfinished Spaces; excluding
Plain brass, cast iron or aluminum.
mechanical and equipment room
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine area and condition under which the piping specialties are to be installed. Notify Engineer in writing
of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory
3.2 PIPE SLEEVES

A. Provide pipe sleeves of types indicated for each pipe passing through walls, partitions, floors and roofs.
B. Provide code complying packing and caulking between pipe or pipe insulation and sleeve as indicated in
the preceding schedule and in the details on the drawing. Finish with smooth appearance even with sleeve
surface.
3.3 PIPE ESCUTCHEONS

A. Provide escutcheons on all exposed piping passing through walls, floors, partitions and ceilings.
B. Provide close fitting metal escutcheons on both sides of piping through fire rated walls, floors, partitions and
ceilings, whether exposed or not. See detail on drawing.
C. Hold escutcheons in place with internal spring tension or set screws.
Page 261 of 429

SECTION 23 05 48 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS
SECTION 23 05 48
VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS
PART 1 GENERAL
A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions and Special and Division-1
Specification sections, apply to work of this section.
B. The requirements specified in this section apply to all related sections in this Division. The requirements
of all related sections, elsewhere in this division also apply to this section unless specified to the contrary.
C. The requirements of this section apply to equipment specified elsewhere in Division 16.

A. Provide complete engineered design for seismic restraining type support systems for all floor and ceiling
mounted mechanical and electrical equipment, piping, ductwork, electrical conduit, cable trays,
switchgear, transformers, panels, and etc. in accordance with these specifications and the contract.
B. Provide seismic restraining type vibration isolation systems to eliminate transmission of movement from
the equipment to the structure or connected piping or conduit systems. All vibration isolation devices to
be of the seismic restraint type.
C. All reference herein to methods and techniques of equipment support apply to Mechanical, Plumbing,
Fire Protection, and Electrical systems.

A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of products of types and capacities required and
described herein, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 10
years. Submit project listing to this effect. Provide products produced by a single manufacturer.
B. Standard Compliance: Federal Spec. WW-H1716, ASA Code for Pressure Piping, ASTM A 575-73, MSS
SP-58-67, MSS SP-69-66, ANSI Code for pressure piping.
C. All hanging, restraining and isolating methods and techniques to be as indicated on the documents, in
BOCA and SMACNA Guidelines for Seismic Restraints of Mechanical Systems and Plumbing Systems,
1982 Edition, NFPA 13, 1982 UBC, ANSI A58.1, 1981, Title 24 CAC, GSA, and ATC-3. Where techniques
are proposed that deviate from those detailed in the contract documents, they must be clearly detailed
and stamped by a Professional Engineer as indicated under submittals.
Page 262 of 429

1.4 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES
A. Contractor shall secure from the approved manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic control
equipment to have the following responsibilities:

2. Provide piping and equipment isolation systems and seismic restraints as scheduled or
specified.
4. Provide installation instructions, drawings and field supervision to assure proper installation and
performance.
5. Purchased and/or fabricated equipment must be designed to safely accept external forces of ½
G load in any direction for all rigidly and resiliently supported equipment, piping and ductwork
without failure and permanent displacement of the equipment. Life safety equipment such as
fire pumps, sprinkler piping, emergency generator, and machinery, must be capable of safely
accepting external forces up to ½ G load in any direction without permanent displacement.
Substitution of "Internally Isolated" mechanical equipment in lieu of the specified isolation of this
section must be approved for individual equipment units and is acceptable only if above
acceleration ratings are certified in writing by equipment manufacturer and stamped by a
licensed civil or structural engineer and are approved by the Architects.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data including printed technical literature and catalogue cuts,
C. Submit for review full detailed drawings and calculations indicating all methods and devices specified in
the contract documents. To restrain the equipment without failure while subject to an external lateral force
of ½ G acceleration.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 PRODUCTS GENERAL

A. It is the objective of this specification to provide the necessary design for the control of excessive noise
and vibration in the building due to the operation of machinery or equipment, and/or due to interconnected
piping, ductwork or conduit. The installation of all vibration isolation units, and associated hangers and
bases, to be in accordance with the details shown in the contract documents.
B. All vibration isolators to have either known non-deflected heights or calibration markings so that, after
adjustment, when carrying their load, the deflection under load can be verified, thus determining that the
load is within the proper range of the device and that the correct degree of vibration isolation is being
provided according to the design.
C. All isolators to operate in the linear portion of their load versus deflection curve. Load versus deflection
curves to be furnished by the manufacturer and must be linear over a deflection range of not less than
50% above the design deflection.
Page 263 of 429

D. The theoretical vertical natural frequency for each support point, based upon load per isolator and isolator
stiffness, not to differ from the design objectives for the equipment as a whole by more than +/-10%.
E. All neoprene mountings to have a Shore hardness of 30 to 60 +/-5, after minimum aging of 20 days or
corresponding averaging.

A. Restrain equipment and components to safely accept a ½ G external lateral force without failure while
maintaining all equipment, piping, ducts, and conduit, etc. in a captive position. Seismic restraints not to
short circuit isolation systems or transmit objectionable, non-rotating or reciprocating vibration noise.
Restraint systems to be Types I, II, III, IV or V as described herein.
B. No cast-iron legs may be used unless indicated on the equipment shop drawings and approved prior to
purchase.
1. Restraint, Type I: To comply with general characteristics of spring isolators having a minimum
O.D. to O.H. of .8 to 1 and minimum run out of 50% to solid. To incorporate built-in snubbing
restraint in all directions. To be capable of supporting equipment at a fixed elevation during
equipment erection. Cast or aluminum housings, unless ductile iron, are not acceptable. System
to be field bolted or welded to deck with ½ G acceleration capability.
2. Restraint, Type II: Each corner or side to incorporate a seismic restraint having a minimum 15
mm thick resilient pad limit stops working in all directions. Restraints to be made of plate,
structural members or square metal tubing concentric within a welded assembly incorporating
resilient pads. Angle bumpers are not acceptable. System to be field bolted or welded to deck
with ½ G acceleration capability.
3. Restraint, Type III: Metal cable type with approved end fastening devices to equipment and
structure. See details on drawings. System to be field bolted to deck or overhead structural
members using two sided beam clamps to steel or appropriately designed insert for concrete.
All parts of system including cables, clamps, excluding fastenings are to be single vendor
furnished to assure seismic compliance. When Type III system is used with isolated equipment
slack with 13 mm cable deflection.
4. Restraint, Type IV: Double deflection neoprene isolator encased in ductile iron or steel casing
minimum 8 mm static deflection. System to be field bolted or welded to deck with ½ G
acceleration capacity.
5. Restraint, Type V: Non-Isolated equipment to be field bolted or welded (powder shots not
acceptable) to structure to resist seismic forces specified. Bolt diameter and embedment data
must be shown in certified calculations stamped by a licensed engineer.

A. Isolate all floor or ceiling mounted reciprocating equipment and all rotating equipment ( FANS , AHU FANS
,FCU’s , PUMPS, … etc ) above 1.5 kW from the structure by use of seismic restraint type vibration
isolators of a design not requiring separate directional snubbers except where indicated. Manufacturer's
rail or base mounted packaged equipment may be rigidly restrained to concrete housekeeping pads if
isolators of the type specified herein are factory installed between the equipment and the base.
1. Isolator Type A: Spring isolators to incorporate the following:

I. Minimum diameter of 0.8 of the loaded operating height.
2. Corrosion resistance where exposed to corrosive environment with:
Page 264 of 429

I. Springs cadmium plated or electro-galvanized.
II. Hardware cadmium plated.
III. All other metal parts hot-dip galvanized.
3. Reserve deflection (from loaded to solid height) of 50% of rated deflection.
4. Minimum 6 mm thick neoprene acoustical base pad on underside, unless designated otherwise.
5. Designed and installed so that ends of springs remain parallel and all springs are installed with
adjustment bolts.
6. Non-Resonant with equipment forcing frequencies or support structure natural frequencies.
7. NOTE: This isolator must be accompanied by seismic restraint Type II.
C. Isolator Type B: Spring isolators to be same as Type A, except:
1. Provide built-in vertical limit stops with minimum 6 mm clearance under normal operation.
2. Tapped holes in top plate for bolting to equipment when subject to wind load.
3. Capable of supporting equipment at a fixed elevation during equipment erection. Installed and
operating heights shall be identical.
4. Adjustable and removable spring pack with separate neoprene pad isolation.
5. Housing to be designed to accept ½ G of acceleration.
6. Does not require separate seismic restraint when bolted or welded to the structure to meet
D. Isolator Type C: Spring hanger rod isolators to incorporate the following:
1. Spring element seated on a steel washer within a neoprene cup incorporating a rod isolation
bushing.
2. Steel retainer box encasing the spring and neoprene cup.
3. NOTE: This isolator type must be used with seismic restraint Type III.
E. Isolator Type D: (Same as Seismic Restraint, Type IV):
1. Double deflection neoprene isolator encased in ductile iron or steel casing minimum 8mm static
deflection. System to be field bolted or welded to deck with ½ G acceleration capacity.
F. Isolator Type E: Elastomer hanger rod isolators to incorporate the following:
1. Molded unit type neoprene element with projecting bushing lining rod clearance hole.
2. Neoprene element to be minimum 45 mm thick.
3. Steel retainer box encasing neoprene mounting, capable of supporting equipment or piping up
to four times the rated load in case of isolator failure.
4. Clearance between mounting hanger rod and neoprene bushing shall be minimum of 3 mm.
5. Minimum static deflection of 9 mm.
6. NOTE: This isolator must be used with seismic restraint Type III.
G. Isolator Type F: Combination spring/elastomer hanger rod isolators incorporating the following:
1. Spring and neoprene isolator elements in a steel retainer box. Neoprene element to be double
deflection type with a minimum thickness of 45 mm. Single deflection elements are
unacceptable. Springs must be seated in a neoprene cup with extended rod bushing through
bottom of box.
2. Characteristics of spring and neoprene as described in Type A and Type E isolators.
Page 265 of 429
3. NOTE: This isolator must be used with seismic restraint Type III.
H. Isolator Type G: Pad type elastomer mountings to incorporate the following:
1. 18 mm minimum thickness.
2. 3.5 Kg/cm² maximum loading.
3. Ribbed or waffled design.
4. Minimum 2.5 mm deflection per pad thickness.
5. 1.5 mm galvanized steel plate between multiple layers or pad thickness is required if multiple
layers are used.
6. A suitable bearing plate to distribute load must be located on top pad layer if equipment support
cover 3/4 of the pad area or less.
I. Isolator Type H: Pad type elastomer mountings to incorporate the following:
1. Laminate canvas duck and neoprene.

2. Maximum loading 70 Kg/cm².
3. A suitable bearing plate to distribute load must be located on top pad layer if equipment support
covers 3/4 of the pad area or less.
4. Minimum thickness to be 12 mm.
J. Isolator Type I: Isolated Clevis:
1. Vibration isolation manufacturer to provide an isolated clevis hanger for pipe support that
combines a unit clevis or rod roller hanger and a Type (C, E or F) isolation hanger into one
assembly.
2. System to be recompressed to allow for rod insertion and standard leveling.
3. Deflections and type to be as listed in "Equipment Installation" in Part 3 of this section.
K. Isolator Type J: Rail Type Spring Isolators:
1. Rail type spring isolators to provide steel members of sufficient strength to prevent flexure during
equipment operation.
2. Springs to be the same as Type A with seismic restraint Type II or seismic restraint Type I or IV
isolation.
L. Isolator Type K: Pipe Anchors:
1. Vibration isolator manufacturer to provide an all directional acoustical pipe anchor, consisting of
a telescopic arrangement of two sizes of steel tubing separated by a minimum 12 mm thickness
of heavy duty neoprene and duck or neoprene isolation material. Vertical restraints to be
provided by similar material arranged to prevent vertical travel in either direction. Allowable
loads on the isolation material not to exceed 35 Kg/cm² and the design to be balanced for equal
resistance in any direction. Isolation to be bolted or welded to structure.
2.4 EQUIPMENT BASES

A. Integral Structural Steel Base, Type B-1
1. Reinforced as required to prevent base flexure at equipment start-up and misalignment of driver
and driven units. Centrifugal fan bases complete with motor slide rails drilled for driver and
driven unit mounting template.
Page 266 of 429
B. Concrete Inertia Base, Type B-2
1. Vibration isolator manufacturer to furnish rectangular structural concrete forms for floating
foundation. Bases for split case pumps to be large enough to provide support for suction and
discharge base elbows. The base depth to be a minimum of 1/10 of the longest span, but not
less than 125 mm or greater than 355 mm. Forms shall include minimum concrete reinforcement
consisting of 12 mm bars or angles welded in place on 150 mm centres running both ways. A
layer 38 mm above the bottom and an additional top layer of reinforcing steel as above for all
bases exceeding 3 mm in one direction. Isolators to be set into pocket housings which are an
integral part of the base construction and set at the proper height to maintain a 25 mm clearance
below the base. Bases to be furnished with templates and anchor bolt sleeves as part of this
system.
C. Isolated Curb, Type B-3
1. Curb mounted rooftop equipment to be mounted on structural spring isolation curbs that
directly sit on roof construction and are flashed and water-proofed into roof's membrane
waterproofing system. Manufacturer's curb shall not be used.
2. All spring locations to have removable waterproof covers to allow for spring adjustment
and/or removal.
3. Curbs to be sound attenuating type which will utilize standard 50 mm roof insulation installed
by the roofer for sound attenuation or will require 50 mm of interior lining if specifically noted
on schedules or drawings.
4. All spring mounts to be as Isolator Type A.
5. Curbs to be rated for ½ G of acceleration and shall be wind restrained for 180 kmph (110
mph) wind loads.
7. Package Options:
a. Curbs to include a means of incorporating a sound barrier package, Type SBC-3 consisting
of two layers of waterproof sheetrock. This barrier to be supplied and installed in the field by
the appropriate contractor.
b. An elevation kit, Type EK-1, to allow for up to 200 mm of roof pitch.
9. Curbs to be Type P-6000 having a minimum of 25 mm rated static deflection.
D. Roof Isolation Rail System, Type B-4
1. Rooftop fans, condensing units, exterior ducted air handling units, etc., to be installed on
continuous equipment support piers which will combine a regular equipment support and an
isolation system into one assembly.
2. The system to be designed with 50 mm or 75 mm static deflection steel springs which are
adjustable, removable and interchangeable after equipment has been installed.
3. Rails to use type spring mounts as called out for Type A.
4. The system to maintain the same operating and installed height both with and without the
equipment load and to be fully restrained during wind load conditions allowing no more than
6 mm motion in any direction.
Page 267 of 429

E. Isolated Rail Base, Type B-5
1. Rails to be constructed from structural steel angles as required preventing flexure and
misalignment under load.
2. Each rail to be the full length of the supported equipment and be welded to a series of
vertically restrained spring isolators as Type B described above.
3. Angles to have bolt together ties at the ends and centre to form one rigid base platform.
4. System to be bolted or welded to deck and shall be designed for minimum ½ G of
acceleration.
F. Non-Isolated Curb, Type B-6
1. Non-Isolated curb mounted rooftop equipment to be mounted on structural curbs that meet
1 G acceleration criteria.
2. Curbs to accept standard 50 mm roof insulation installed in the field by the roofer and be
waterproofed in accordance with NRCA Standard.
3. Curbs to be welded or bolted to building steel or bolted to building steel or bolted to concrete
decks to attain acceleration criteria.

A. Elastomer Type FC-1
1. Manufactured of nylon tire cord and EPDM, both molded and cured in hydraulic presses.
2. Straight connectors to have two spheres reinforced with a moulded-in, external ductile iron
ring between spheres.
4. Rated 20 bar at 77C dropping in a straight line to 12 bar at 121C for sizes 40 mm to 300
mm, elbows to be rated no less than 90% of straight connections.
5. Sizes 250 mm to 300 mm to employ control cables with neoprene end fittings isolated from
anchor plates by means of 12 mm bridge bearing neoprene bushings.
7. Connectors bolted to grooved type couplings or gate, butterfly or check valves to have a
minimum of 1.6 mm flange spacer installed between connector and coupling flange.
B. Flexible Stainless Hose, Type FC-2

2. 50 mm pipe size and smaller with male nipple fittings.
3. 65 mm and larger pipe size with fixed steel flanges.
C. Unbraided Exhaust Hose, Type FC-3
Page 268 of 429

3. Maximum temperature 815C.
2.6 ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT
2.6.1 FAN COIL UNITS

A. The maximum permissible sound power levels in octave bands for fan coil units run at medium speed
shall be as follows:
Octave Band 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
re 10-12 Watts (NC-35) 64 56 49 46 43 42 41 40
B. The fan coil unit manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer's representative guaranteed sound power
levels by octave bands. Sound power level data submitted shall substantiate that the equipment types
and sizes operating in an installed condition as per plans and specifications shall conform to these
requirements.
C. The fan coil units shall be tested in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 36B-63 with ratings tabulated for
medium speed operation.
D. Should the Owner desire that units be checked for conformance to the above acoustical performance,
the cost of such test will be paid by the Owner provided that the test proves that the unit does conform?
Otherwise, the cost of such test and costs of corrective measures shall be borne by the manufacturer.
2.6.2 ACOUSTICAL PERFORMANCE WITHIN EQUIPMENT SPACES:

A. Equipment room noise levels and noise transmission to adjacent buildings shall comply with all Local Noise
Ordinances.
2.6.3 REFRIGERATION MACHINE ACOUSTICAL PERFORMANCE:

A. The maximum permissible noise levels under design operating conditions, when measured in accordance
with ARI Standard 575-73 specified methods and qualifications shall not exceed 90 dBA.
2.6.4 COOLING TOWER ACOUSTICAL PERFORMANCE:

A. The maximum permissible noise levels under design operating conditions shall be as follows:
COOLING TOWER NOISE

MAXIMUM SOUND PRESSURE LEVELS AT 50 FEET to achieve NC 40 at neighbour
Octave Band Louvered Face Cased Side discharge
2 76 74 77
3 71 72 76
4 68 70 75
5 61 66 71
6 53 60 67
In brief, the required sound pressure level resulted from cooling towers will be 57 dBA at 15 meters.
Page 269 of 429

2.6.5 ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT
A. Low Velocity Duct Lining: Low velocity supply, return and exhaust ductwork shall be installed with acoustical
lining where specified. Such acoustic lining shall be a minimum of 25 mm thick mat faced duct liner meeting
the requirements of NFPA 90-A, and be 25 kg/cu.m density fibreglass. Flame spread: maximum 25, fuel
contributed and smoke developed: maximum 50, suitable for duct velocity of 20 m/sec, dynamic loss
coefficient: maximum 1.2, K factor: maximum .036 , noise reduction coefficient: for 25mm thick lining:
minimum 0.75, Dimensions of lined ducts shown on drawings are the inside dimensions of the ducts after
the lining has been installed. Duct liner shall be adhered with 100% coverage Mechanical fasteners which
do not pierce the sheet metal shall be on 400 mm centres on top sections (when width exceeds 300 mm)
and on sides (when height exceeds 600 mm. All abutting edges of acoustic linings shall be folded under
and stapled to insure that all raw edges are sealed, and all exposed edges of acoustic linings shall be
installed with sheet metal nosing. An inner liner need not be provided to cover acoustic insulation except for
medium and high pressure ductwork or where duct velocity exceeds 12.5m/sec. Ductwork shall be provided
with an inner liner. The liner shall be .70mm min. 28% perforated galvanized sheet metal.
B. The following ductwork shall be acoustically lined:
1. Built-up casing walls and ceiling of all plenums except that lining shall be 50 mm thick 50kg/m3
density, and inner liner shall be used for all systems.
2. All supply, return and exhaust rectangular ductwork (except kitchen and laundry exhaust) within
mechanical equipment rooms. If the distance from fan discharge to shaft inlet or mechanical room
wall is less than 10 meters minimum, continue acoustical lining to a distance of 10 meters from fan
inlet and discharge.
3. Return air fan and toilet exhaust fan plenum walls and ceilings, except lining shall be 50mm thick
50kg/m3 density, (for walk-in fan plenums inner liner shall be used).
4. Upstream of toilet exhaust fans a minimum distance of 10 meters.
5. Transfer air ducts.
6. Downstream of fan coil units (full length).
7. Rectangular ductwork downstream of variable volume boxes a minimum of 4.5 meters.
8. Line all linear diffuser plenums with minimum 13mm liner.
9. Where shown on drawings.
2.6.6 SOUND ATTENUATORS

A. Factory pre-fabricated.
B. Shell:
1. Galvanized steel: minimum .90mm.

2. Leak proof at pressure differential 1990
C. Media:
1. Flame spread: maximum 25.

2. Fuel contributed and smoke developed: maximum 30.
3. Maximum 64 kglm3 density glass or mineral fiber packed under 5 percent compression.
4. Filler to be inert, vermin and moisture proof.
D. Internal Construction:
1. Galvanized perforated steel baffles: .85mm

E. Net Insertion Loss Ratings: Determined by duct-to-reverberant room test method at design airflow shall be
as per Table b
Page 270 of 429
SOUND TRAP DYNAMIC INSERTION LOSS (FORWARD FLOW
Octave Band 2 3 4 5 6
Type Ms 10 18 30 42 34
F. Maximum self-generated noise shall be as per Table below:
SOUND TRAP SELF-GENERATED NOISE AT 2000 FPM
Octave Band 2 3 4 5 6
Type Ms 54 52 50 47 48
G. Certified Tests:
1. Submit certified test data from approved laboratory for pressure drop and insertion loss ratings.
a. For square or rectangular attenuators: 610 x 610mm.
b. For round attenuators: 610mm.
2. Certification data for pressure drop and net insertion loss: based on tests of same attenuator.
3. Attenuators and tests: subject to inspection upon request of Engineer.
4. Similar to Industrial Acoustics Company.
PART 3 EXECUTION

A. Hangers or clamps installed in contact with copper or brass pipe, to be of copper or provide lead or
fiber shields between iron hangers and clamps to prevent electrolytic corrosion.
B. Furnish and install auxiliary steel required for pipe, conduit, cable tray, trapeze, supports, etc. Chain
straps, perforated bars, wire hangers or expansion shields are not permitted.
D. Anchor points: provide to permit the piping and raceway systems to expand and contract freely in
opposite directions from the anchored points. Anchors may be double bolt riser clamps and shall be
located halfway between guide points and no less than 1 per 30 meters run.
E. Guide points: Locate in piping system on either side of expansion joints and, or loops, as specified
herein and shown on drawings to permit free axial movement only in pipe main runs. Elbows at ends
of straight pipe runs flanking expansion joints or loops are considered expansion joints. Expansion
joints shall be installed to limit straight runs of hot water and hot water circulating pipe runs to 30
meters maximum.
F. Trapeze hangers with suspension rods having double nuts and securely attached to the construction
in an approved manner may be used in lieu of separate clevis hanger.
G. Maximum weights on hanger rods assuming a maximum operating temperature of 232C to be such
that stress in tension will not exceed 630 Kg/cm² the root area of threaded portion.
Page 271 of 429
H. Hangers on Underground Piping conduits: Provide hangers on all underground piping and conduits
beneath building when installed in unstable soil or in fill or in all cases where installed beneath
reinforced slabs on grade. Hangers to be clevis type with extra heavy rod and 50 x 50 (2" X 2") fish
plate sandwiched by two bolts and washers. Provide complete assembly with zinc chromate primer.
I. Isolation and seismic systems must be installed in accordance with manufacturer's written
instructions. Vibration isolators must not cause any change of position of equipment, piping or conduit
resulting in piping stresses or misalignment.
J. Mechanical equipment and piping to be isolated from the building structure by means of noise and
vibration isolators as scheduled on the drawings, or as described herein.
K. All piping and conduit 50 mm and over located in mechanical equipment rooms from connected
equipment for 15 m, to incorporate isolation hangers.
L. All mechanical (HVAC and Plumbing) piping and vertical risers to be isolated from the building
structure by means of noise and vibration isolation guides and supports as described herein.
M. Each fan and motor assembly to be supported on a single structural steel frame. Flexible duct
connections to be provided at inlet and discharge ducts.

A. All equipment whether isolated or not to be bolted to the structure to allow for minimum 1 G of acceleration.
Bolt points, diameter of inserts, and imbedment depth to be submitted as part of the submission for each
piece of equipment and certified by a licensed civil or structural engineer.
B. All structurally suspended, overhead equipment, isolated or non-isolated, to be four points independently
braced with Type III seismic restraining system.
C. Install seismic restraining system Type III taught for overhead suspended non-isolated equipment, piping,
electrical conduit or ductwork and slack with 12 mm cable deflection for isolated systems.
D. Seismically restrain all piping and ductwork and electrical conduit with Type III restraining system in
accordance with the following schedule:
1. Cast Iron Pipe:

a. Lateral Brace: Maximum 3.0 m intervals.
b. Longitudinal Brace: Maximum 6 m intervals.
c. Above lengths may be doubled if 1/2 G acceleration rated couplings are used.
2. Water, Steam and Condensate Pipe and Electrical Conduit, Schedule 10, 20, or 40 Weld or
Victaulic and all other raceway systems except surface metal raceway:
a. Lateral Brace: Maximum 12 m intervals.
3. Gas, Fuel, Oil:
b. Maximum 12 m intervals.
4. Ductwork:
c. At every turn and duct run ends.
Page 272 of 429
E. Place floor mounted equipment on 100 m (4") high reinforced concrete housekeeping pads properly
doweled or expansion shielded to deck to meet acceleration criteria. Mount vibration isolating devices
and related inertia blocks on concrete pad. Concrete work specified in Division 3.
1. Gas piping less than 25 mm I.D.

2. Piping and conduit in Electro – Mechanical rooms less than 35 mm (1-1/4") I.D.
3. Other piping less than 65 mm I.D.
4. All rectangular ducts less than 0.56 m² in cross sectional area.
5. All round ducts less than 700 m diameter.
6. All piping or conduits suspended by individual clevis hangers 300 mm in length or less from the
top of the pipe support to the bottom of the support for the hanger.
7. All top supported ducts suspended by hangers 300 mm (12") or less in length from the top of the
duct support to the bottom of the support for the hanger.
G. Where base anchoring is insufficient to resist seismic forces, supplementary restraints, such as seismic
restraint system Type III, to be located above the system's centre of gravity to suitably resist "G" force
levels. Provide equipment with additional lifting lugs to accommodate this requirement. This requirement
includes all water softeners, water filter, and vertical water heaters and other equipment where required.
H. For overhead supported equipment, overstress of the building structure must not occur. Bracing may
occur from:

I. Pipe risers through cored shafts require no further seismic bracing. (Core diameter to be maximum 50
mm larger than pipe O.D.)

B. Installation:

c. Water piping and boiler breeching within 15 meters (or 100 diameters if greater than 15
meters from connected rotating equipment and pressure reducing stations.
d. All water piping connected to reciprocating or rotating equipment up to 15 m from equipment
connection.
2. The isolators to be installed with the isolator hanger box attached to, or hung as close as possible
to, the structure.
3. The isolators to be suspended from substantial structural members, not from slab diaphragm,
unless specifically permitted.
Page 273 of 429

5. Horizontal suspended pipe 50 mm and smaller and all steam piping to be suspended by Type E
isolators with a minimum of 9 mm deflection. Water pipe larger than 50 mm to be supported by
Type F isolators with a minimum of 25 mm (or same static deflection for the first three locations)
as isolated equipment to which pipe connects, whichever is greater.
a. Type CIH hanger can substitute for the above.
6. Horizontal pipe, floor supported at slab to be supported via Type A, with a minimum static
deflection of 25 m or same deflection as isolated equipment to which pipe connects, whichever
is greater.
7. Vertical riser pipe supports under 50 mm diameter to utilize Type H.
8. Vertical riser guides, if required, to avoid direct contact of piping with building.
9. Pipe anchors, or guides where required, to utilize resilient pipe anchors, Mason Industries Type
ADA, or equivalent, to avoid direct contact of piping with building.
10. Riser sway supports, where required, to utilize two neoprene elements (Type G or H to
accommodate tension and compression forces).
11. Pipe Extension and Alignment Connectors: Provide connectors at riser takeoffs, cooling and
heating coils, and elsewhere as required, accommodating thermal expansion and misalignment.

4. Supplementary steel to be sized for a maximum deflection 2 mm at centre span.
5. Support water piping in shafts and floor supports entering shaft with Type G isolators or Type H
pad to prevent direct contact of piping with building structure.
6. Guide and anchor piping in shafts, as required, with approved mounting designs incorporating
Type H pad to prevent direct contact of piping with building structure.
1. The minimum operation clearance between the equipment frame or rigid steel base frame and
the housekeeping pad or floor to be 25 mm. Minimum operating clearance between concrete
inertia base and housekeeping pad or floor to be 50 mm
2. The equipment structural steel or concrete inertia base to be placed in position and supported
temporarily by blocks or shims, as appropriate, prior to the installation of the machine and
isolators.
3. The isolators to be installed without raising the machine and frame assembly.
4. After the entire installation is complete and under full operational load, to adjust the isolators so
that the load is transferred from the blocks to the isolators and so that all isolators are barely
free, remove shims.
5. Isolation mounting deflection to be the minimum specified or as scheduled on the drawings.
7. Verify that all installed isolator and mounting systems permit equipment motion in all directions.
Adjust or provide additional resilient restraints to limit equipment start-up lateral motion to 6 mm.
8. Prior to start-up, clean out all foreign matter between bases and equipment. Verify that there
are no isolation short circuits in the base, isolators or seismic restraints.
Page 274 of 429

3.4 SEISMIC RESTRAINT SELECTION FOR NON-ISOLATED EQUIPMENT
A. HVAC Equipment
1. All ceiling suspended piping and ductwork not excluded by diameter or distance requirement
from support.
a. Included are all in-line tanks and air separators.
Seismic Restraint Type III.
2. All ceiling mounted equipment including but not limited to fans, AHU's, tanks, stacks, VAV & CAV
boxes, and unit heaters.
NOTE: If VAV pr CAV box is rigidly attached to ductwork (no flex) it is considered part of the
ductwork.
3. All diffusers mounted in ATC ceilings to be four point independently cable braced to deck unless
ATC ceiling meets Seismic Zone II requirements. If this is met, use earthquake clips to secure
fixture to T-Bar structure.
4. All floor mounted equipment and tanks.

Seismic Restraint Type V.
5. Computer Room AC Units. Floor mounted computer room A/C units must be stand mounted.
Stand to be bolted to deck and A/C unit to be bolted to stand. Stand must be certified to meet 1
G acceleration criteria.
Base Type B-7.
6. Roof mounted A/C units. Curb mounted units to incorporate seismic restraint using a steel curb
or frame B-6000 welded or bolted to building steel or expansion bolted to concrete decks. Curb
must be certified to meet 1 G acceleration criteria.
B. Plumbing Equipment
1. All ceiling suspended piping not excluded by diameter or support length. This includes all
sanitary, domestic and drain lines.
2. All ceiling mounted equipment.

Page 275 of 429

3. All floor mounted equipment, including but not limited to tanks, stacks, boilers, domestic water
heaters, softeners, etc.
NOTE: Provide additional restraint Type III for water softeners, filters and vertical water
heaters.
C. Electrical Equipment
1. All ceiling suspended conduit not excluded by diameter or distance requirement from support.
2. All ceiling mounted equipment including trunking, cable tray, conduit, trapeze racks and bus
ducts.
NOTE: If equipment is rigidly fastened to conduit, diameter and distance requirement from
support applies.
3. All non-isolated floor and wall mounted equipment including transformers, switchgear, dimmer
racks (boards), etc.
4. All ceiling mounted lighting fixtures are to be independently hung and cable braced utilizing S.
R. Type III cables except as noted below. Fixtures, part of lighting grids to meet local codes for
suspension and be four points independently cable braced to deck unless A.T.C. ceiling meets
seismic zone II requirements. If this is met, use two earthquake clips per fixture to secure fixture
to T-Bar construction.
3.5 SEISMIC ISOLATION SELECTION FOR MECHANICAL & ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT

The following table is extracted from ASHRAE standards and it should be followed.
Type of equipment Isolation type Deflection

Emergency Generator B 25mm
Isolation Type B
Transformers 50 mm
Or S.R. Type I / Base Type B-5
Isolation Type B
Air condensing Units 25mm
Or S.R. Type I
Air Cooled Cond. Units or
(B-4) 50 mm
Chillers (Roof Mtd.)
300 rpm...100mm
301 - 500 rpm... 75mm
Cooling Towers B
501 - 800 rpm... 50mm
800 rpm and above 25mm
Page 276 of 429
Water Heaters B 25 mm
Centrifugal Water Cooled B 25 mm
Isolation Type B
Pumps (To 15 HP) 25 mm
Or S.R. Type I / Base Type B-5
Pumps (above 15 HP) S.R. Type I / Base Type B-2 25 mm
300rpm...85mm
301-450rpm...75mm
Isolation Type B 451-600rpm...65mm
Factory Ass. AHU Floor
Or S.R. Type I / Base Type B-2 601-750rpm...50mm
751-850rpm...35mm
850rpm and above...25mm
300rpm...85mm
301 - 450rpm...75mm
Isolation Type B 451 - 600rpm...65mm
Class 1 Fans Arr 1 & 3 Indoor
Or S.R. Type I / Base Type B-1 601 - 750rpm...50mm
751 - 850rpm...35mm
300rpm...85mm
301 - 450rpm...75mm
Class II & III Fans
751 - 850rpm...35mm
300rpm...85mm
301 - 450rpm...75mm
Class 1 Fans outdoor Arr 9 & 10
751 - 850rpm...35mm
Rooftop Pkg. AHU
B-3, SBC-3 75 mm
900 Kg (10 Tons) and Above
All Piping in Machine Room Spec. I & S.R.40 mm Type III
25 mm
(Water, Steam, & Gas)
Spec. I & S.R.10 mm Type III
Duct Work in Machine Room. 10 mm
Flexible Connections for Suction

& Discharge of Pumps Spec. (FC-1)
Heating and cooling coil in AHU Spec.(FC-2)

NOTE: S.R. = SEISMIC RESTRAINT
3.6 INSPECTION
A. On completion of installation of all vibration isolation and seismic restraint devices herein specified, the
factory representative or Professional Engineer retained by the Contractor to inspect the completed
system and report in writing any installation error, improperly erected isolation devices or other faults in
the system that could affect the performance of the system. Contractor to submit a report to the Project
Director, including the manufacturer's representative's final report, indicating all isolation reported as
Page 277 of 429

properly installed or requiring correction. Include a report by the Contractor on steps taken to properly
complete and correct the isolation work.

SECTION 23 05 53 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC WORKS
SECTION 23 05 53
IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC WORKS
PART 1 GENERAL

K. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Special Conditions and Division-1
Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.
Page 278 of 429

L. The requirements specified in this section apply to all related sections in this Division. The requirements

tests necessary to complete, make ready, and set to work for acceptance by the Owner, all sheet metal
work in accordance with Drawings and Specification.

A. Standards Compliance: Comply with the requirements of applicable local codes and the standards
outlined in section 15000.
1.24 SUBMITTALS
instructions and catalogue cuts for mechanical identification.
PART 2 PRODUCT
2.1 IDENTIFICATION
A. Valve Tags and Charts:
1. Valve tag to be 1.15mm thickness, 50mm diameter polished brass with stamp - engraved piping
system in 7mm high letters and sequenced valve numbers in 21mm high numbers. Fill engraving with
black enamel. Numbering system and system designations are to be as approved by the Project
Manager and Engineer.
2. Securely fasten the tag to the valve with a solid brass "S" hook and a solid brass jack chain.
3. For each page of the valve schedule, provide a glazed display frame fabricated of finished hardwood
or extruded aluminum, glass covered. Mount the frames where directed by the Project Manager.
4. In addition to the framed valve charts, furnish three bound copies of the valve chart.
B. Piping and duct Identification and Coding:
1. Provide semi-rigid plastic, color coded, pre-printed, snap-on pipe markers, identifying pipe contents
and direction of flow.
2. For external pipe diameters, including insulation, of less than 150mm, provide pipe markers, extending
360 degrees around the pipe.
3. For external pipe diameters, including insulation, 150mm and larger, provide pipe markers secured with
stainless steel spring fasteners.
4. Furnish pipe markers in accordance with the following:
Length of Colored
Overall Pipe O.D. (mm) Size of Letters (mm)
Field (mm)
20-32 200 15
40-50 200 20
65-150 300 32
200-250 600 65
Over 250 800 95
Page 279 of 429

Color Chart
Pipe Line Background Color Letter Color
Steam Yellow Red
Hot Water Yellow Red
Hot Oil Red White
Fuel Oil Yellow Black
Chilled Water Green White
Condenser Water Green White
Make-Up Water Green White
Feed Water Yellow Black
Gas Yellow Black
Supply/Return Air Blue White
Condensate Refrigerant Green White
Toilet/Generator Exhaust Blue White
Kitchen Hood Exhaust Yellow Black
5. Furnish 24 additional markers of each type for future use by the Owner/Operator.
6. Provide identification for all dampers, and for control dampers the position should be shown.
7. Provide identification for all equipment.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 VALVE TAGS AND CHARTS:
A. Install a valve tag on all installed valves and strainers.

B. Piping and duct Identification and Coding:
1. Where identification is to be applied to surfaces which require insulation, painting or other covering
or finish, install identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to
installation of ceilings, walls and partitions.
2. On exposed piping, apply markers on 9M centres of straight runs, at valve locations, and at points where
piping enters and leaves a partition, wall floor or ceiling.
3. On concealed piping installed above removable ceiling construction, apply markers as described for
exposed piping.
4. On concealed piping installed above non-removable ceiling construction, or in pipe shafts, apply
markers at valves or other devices that are made accessible by means of access doors or panels.
5. Apply markers at each item of equipment and other points of origination and termination.
6. Install markers in accordance with manufacturer's application procedures.
Page 280 of 429


SECTION 23 05 93 TESTINGS, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
SECTION 23 05 93
TESTINGS, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division-1
Page 281 of 429

B. The requirements specified in this section apply to all related sections in this Division. The requirements of
all related sections, elsewhere in this division also apply to this section unless specified to the contrary.
C. The requirements of this Section apply to work specified elsewhere in the Division 15 specification.

A. Testing, adjusting and balancing work shall be performed by a specialist company who is a member in good
standing of the AABC (Associated Air Balance Council) or the NEBB (National Environmental Balancing Bureau).
1.3 EXECUTION
A. Evaluation Of Mechanical Work Drawings
1. As soon as possible after award of contract , the testing and balancing agency shall carefully examine
a set mechanical drawings with respect to routing of services and location of balancing devices , and
shall report the results of the evaluation in writing to the consultant .
2. The set of drawings examined by the agency shall be returned to the consultant with the evaluation
report , marked –up to indicate locations for duct system test plugs , and any required revision work
such as relocation of balancing devices and locations for additional devices .
B. Site During Construction
1. After careful review of the mechanical work drawings and specifications , the testing and balancing
agency shall visit the site at frequent , regular intervals during construction of the mechanical systems
to observe routing of services , locations of testing and balancing devices , workmanship , and anything
else which will affect testing , adjusting and balancing .
2. After each site visit , the agency shall report results of the site visit to the consultant , in writing ,with a
copy to the owner , indicating the date and time of the visit , and detailed recommendations for any
corrective work required to ensure proper adjusting and balancing.
1.4 TESTING BALANCING AND COMMISSIONING.

A. When all air and water systems are completed the HVAC Contractor shall hire an Independent Air Balance
and Testing Agency to obtain complete balancing of system including each and every fan, trunk duct,
branch duct, coil, pump, water system, and heat exchanger. Leakage of air systems shall not exceed
leakage stated in sheet metal Specification Section 15. The Agency shall submit a testing and balancing
procedure for approval before starting work.
B. Air Balance and Testing Agency personnel shall have a minimum of 5 years of experience Testing and
Balancing Air and Water Systems in similar facilities.
C. Air Systems:
1. Run supply fan with all dampers in their summer position (minimum outside air). Duplicate normal
conditions as far as possible with clean filters in place, coils in operation, etc. Adjust for proper ratio of
outside and return air.
2. All dampers shall be in the fully open position including dampers in mains, branches and diffusers
(splitter dampers to be in normal position).
3. Take readings of fan RPM, static pressure at inlet plenum of fan, static pressure at discharge of fan,
voltage and ampere readings, cubic meters per hour (by means of duct traverse). Traverse shall be
Page 282 of 429

made on 150 mm centres in a straight section of ductwork. Note that for backward curved fans use
static pressure as check on cubic meters per hour. For forward curved fans use ampere reading and
RPM as check on cubic meters per hour.
4. Readjust fan speed to obtain between 105% to 110% of specified cubic meters per hour. This can be
done by changing speed in direct proportion to change in desired cubic meters per hour. Thus:
New RPM = Desired cubic meters per hour x Original RPMcubic meters per hour by Test
5. Starting with branch dampers and air terminals farthest from fan, adjust air terminals to desired cubic
meters per hour. Readings and tests of diffusers, grilles, and registers shall include required
meters/second velocity and test resultant velocity, required cubic meters per hour and test resultant
cubic meters per hour after adjustments. Verify all grille and diffuser "K" factors with manufacturer.
6. Readjust fan speed if necessary during balancing procedure. Note that where fans are specified to be
variable pitch sheaves, these should be adjusted and/or replaced with new fan belts as required. Where
fans are specified for fixed ratio sheaves replace with new sheaves and fan belts as required. Whether
sheaves are variable pitch or fixed ratio, they shall be replaced at no extra cost to the Owner, until
desired cubic meters per hour is obtained. Readjust ratio of outside air and return air.
7. Upon completion of all balancing tabulate final readings noted above for Engineer's approval.
8. Instruments used for balancing must have been calibrated within 6 months prior to balancing. Types of
instruments used and dates of calibration shall be listed on balancing report submit calibration
certificates.
9. After completion of tests submit itemized list to Engineer of fan speeds in RPM, ampere readings, floor
by floor and outlet by outlet air quantities in cubic meters per hour, and static pressure at each floor and
at each fan (suction and discharge) in millimetres of water gauge. For purposes of testing use pitot
tubes with inclined manometer to traverse duct cross sections.
10. General Design and Operating Temperature Criteria are related to the specified data on drawings,
specifications, sheets and the requirements of each space.
D. Water Systems
1. Hydrostatic Test Requirements

a. All piping, etc. shall be tested to a hydrostatic pressure at least 1 1/2 times the maximum operating
pressure but not less than 275 kPa for a sufficiently long time to detect all leaks and defects.
b. Where necessary, piping shall be tested in sections to permit the progress of the job. Hydrostatic
tests shall be performed in accordance with ANSI B31.1 by the Contractor in the presence of the
Engineer.
c. For ANSI Class 1033 kpa piping, test pressure shall be 1550 psig.
d. For ANSI Class 2067 kpa piping, test pressure shall be 2750 psig.
e. As a minimum, duration of test all full test pressure shall be six (6) hours for 1033 kpa class systems
and twelve (12) hours for 2067 kpa class systems.
f. After this test, the liquid shall remain in the system at full or reduced pressure for an additional six
hours. This period may be used for additional leak checking.
g. Any portions with leaks and/or defects shall be repaired and retested as described above.
h. Test pressures indicated in subparagraphs (b) and (c) above shall be measured or achieved at the
highest elevation point of the piping portion being tested. However, the test pressure at the lowest
point shall not exceed 1963 kpa psig for the ANSI Class 1033 kpa piping and 3445 kpa psig for the
ANSI Class 300 piping.
i. After hydrostatic testing and additional leak testing is complete, piping flushing and cleaning
procedure shall take place.
j. If piping has been previously flushed and cleaned prior to hydrostatic testing, no draining of the
piping system is required.
Page 283 of 429

2. Adjust balancing valves to obtain required flow and specified pressure drips across pumps, equipment,
and coils.
3. Where venture meters calibrated orifices or balancing valves are specified, test for litters per second
with portable or permanent type flow meters.
E. Testing of Automatic Controls: In cooperation with the control manufacturer's representative, adjust controls
to operate as specified. Testing personnel shall check all controls for proper calibrations and list all controls
requiring adjustment by control installers refer to BMS related specifications.
F. Testing of Coil and Heat Exchanger Performance:
1. After controls are operable test for coil performance in both heating and cooling seasons, in hottest and
coldest weather wherever feasible.
2. Record inlet and outlet dry bulb and wet bulb at each coil and heat exchanger. For coil banks with coil
sections under individual control test each coil section. Readjust flow through water coils to obtain
proper readings.
G. Air Leakage Tests for Low and Medium Pressure: Before insulation is applied run fan at design static
pressure and test all joints visually with a smoke trace pen.
1.5 FINAL TESTING AND BALANCING

A. Upon completion of the air conditioning system, the Air Balance Agency shall perform the following tests,
compile the test data, and submit seven copies of the complete test data to the Engineer for evaluation and
approval.
1. Test and adjust fan RPM to design requirements.

2. Test and record motor full load amperes vs. maximum allowable per motor manufacturer.
3. Make Pitot Tube traverse of main supply ducts and obtain design cubic meters per hour at fans.
4. Measure and record system static pressure, suction and discharge.
5. Measure and adjust system for design recirculated air, cubic meters per hour.
6. Measure and adjust system for design cubic meters per hour outside air.
7. Measure and record entering air temperature. (D.B. heating and cooling).
8. Measure and record entering air temperatures. (W.B. cooling).
9. Measure and record leaving air temperatures. (D.B. heating and cooling).
10. Measure and record leaving air temperatures (W.B. cooling).
11. Adjust all main supply and return air ducts to proper design cubic meters per hour.
12. Adjust all zones to proper design cubic meters per hour, supply and return.
13. Test and adjust each diffuser, grille and register to within 10% of design cubic meters per hour.
14. Each grille, diffuser and register shall be identified as to location and area.
15. Size, type and manufacture of diffusers, grilles, registers, and all tested equipment shall be identified
and listed. Manufacturer's ratings on all equipment shall be used to make required calculations.
16. Readings and tests of diffusers, grilles, and registers shall include required meters per second velocity
and test resultant velocity, required cubic meters per hour and test resultant cubic meters per hour after
adjustments.
17. In cooperation with the control manufacturer's representative, set adjustments of automatically operated
dampers to operate as specified, indicated, and/or noted. Testing agent shall report all controls not
operating as specified to the Project Manager.
Page 284 of 429
18. All diffusers, grilles, and registers shall be adjusted to minimize drafts in all areas.
19. This Air Balance Engineer or Technician shall make any changes in the pulleys, belts, and dampers or
the addition of dampers required for correct balance as required at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. The Air Balance Engineer or Technician shall prepare the water systems for balancing in the following
manner:
1. Complete air balance must have been accomplished before actual water balance begins.
2. Open all valves to full open position. Close coil bypass stop valves. Set mixing valve to full coil flow.
3. Remove all strainers and clean same.
4. Check pump rotation.
5. Check expansion tanks to determine they are not air bound and the system is completely full of water.
6. Check all air vents at high points of water systems and determine all are installed and operating freely.
7. Set all temperatures controls so all coils are calling for full cooling. This should close all automatic
bypass valves at coil and chiller. Same procedure when balancing hot water coils, set on full call for
heating.
8. Check operation of automatic bypass valves.
9. Check and set operating conditions of heat exchangers and chillers to design requirements.
C. Test and Balance Procedure - Phase Two:
1. Set chilled water and hot water pumps to proper litres per second delivery by adjusting the balancing
valve.
2. Adjust flow of chilled water through chiller.
3. Adjust flow of hot water through exchangers and heaters.
4. Check leaving water temperatures and return water temperatures through chiller and exchangers.
Reset to correct design temperatures.
5. Check water temperatures at inlet side of cooling and heating coils. Note rise or drop of temperatures
from source.
6. Proceed to balance each chilled water coil and hot water coil.
7. Upon completion of flow readings and adjustments at coils, mark all settings and record data.
D. Test and Balance Procedure - Phase Three:
1. Upon completion of Phase 1 and 2 the Balance Technician shall proceed with Phase 3 as follows:
a. After adjustments to coils are made, recheck settings at the pumps, chillers, and exchangers and
readjust if required.
b. Install pressure gauges on coil, read pressure drop through coil at set flow rate on call for full
cooling and on full heating. Set pressure drop across bypass valve to match coil full flow pressure
drop. This prevents unbalanced flow conditions when coils are on full bypass.
c. Adjust chiller bypass valve to same pressure on chiller.
d. Record and check the following items at each cooling and heating element.
e. Inlet water temperature
f. Leaving water temperature
g. Pressure drop of each coil
E. Cooling Tower Set:
Page 285 of 429

1. Perform field tests on cooling towers in full accordance with AABC Minimum Test Standards
Number 4. The approved agency shall conduct these tests and provide the following certified
information:
a. Pump and Cooling Tower nomenclature
b. Size and capacities
c. Pump Motor and Fan Motor information operating and characteristics.
d. Pump flows, discharge head, suction head, total dynamic head.
e. Fan cubic meters per hour and velocities.
f. Wet and dry bulb temperatures of inlet and outlet air flows.
g. Water temperatures of hot water, cold water, make-up water to blow down.
h. All information shall be complied on approved test sheet forms and submitted to the Engineer.
F. Duct Leakage Test:
1. Test all medium pressure ductwork and low pressure ductwork in mechanical equipment rooms, shafts,
and major duct runs.
2. All ductwork if necessary shall be repaired and retested to obtain minimum leakage allowed.
3. Tested sections of ductwork shall be visually marked with certification sticker and initials of field test
inspector. Tests and repairs shall be made before duct sections are concealed and/or insulated.
4. Leakage to conform to the following:
a. Low Pressure (0.50mmwg): Maximum 5% leakage
b. Medium Pressure (greater than 50mmwg): Maximum 2% leakage

SECTION 23 07 13 HVAC INSULATION
SECTION 23 07 13
HVAC INSULATION
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL
Page 286 of 429

tests necessary to complete, make ready, and set to work for operation by the Owner, all insulation in
B. This section includes:
a. Duct insulation.
b. Pipe insulation.
c. Equipment insulation.

A. Acceptable manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of insulation of the types and
materials, sizes and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service
for not less than 5 years as approved by Architect.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable Local codes and the standards outlined
in Section 15000.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Shop detail drawings, including method of attachment.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed data, catalogue cuts, test data and recommendations.
C. Samples, when requested.
D. Instructions: Installation instructions and method statement.
1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY AND STORAGE

A. Deliver material properly labeled, packaged and undamaged.
B. Do not store exposed to weather, provide suitable material to protect from damage.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION
2.1.1 General Insulation Requirements:
1. Insulation shall be applied on clean dry surfaces, after pressure testing inspection and release for
insulation application.
2. Insulation shall be continuous through wall, floor, ceiling openings and sleeves. Where insulated
piping or ductwork pierces fire rated partitions, walls and floors, substitute anhydrous calcium silicate
insulation with vapour barrier in lieu of mineral wool for a minimum of 200mm from wall in both
directions, to produce a hard surface for fire resistive packing.
Page 287 of 429

3. Insulation on cold surfaces where vapour barrier jackets are used shall be applied with a continuous,
unbroken vapour seal. Hangers, supports, anchor, etc. that is secured directly to cold services shall
be adequately insulated and vapour sealed to prevent condensation.
4. Insulation on indoor work shall have composite (insulation, jacket or facing, and adhesive used to
adhere the facing or jacket to the insulation. Insulation shall be flame retardant essentially non
combustible, and shall not produce toxic vapours or dense smoke when burned.
5. Accessories such as adhesives, mastics, coatings, cements, tapes, etc. for fittings shall have the
same component rating as listed above and shall be applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's
instructions including recommended coverage. Treatment of jackets or facings to impart
flame-and-smoke safety shall be permanent. The use of water-soluble treatments is prohibited.
6. The only exception to the above material requirements is where a material meeting these
requirements is not available from any manufacturer, in which case substitute items shall be subject
to individual approval by the Engineer.
7. Adhesives and coating shall be applied according to the manufacturer's standard insulation
instructions. No adhesive or cements shall be applied to ambient `temperatures below those
recommended by manufacturers.
8. Insulation pipe hanger shields shall be installed at hangers for insulated piping. At point of support,
pipe shall be protected by a 360 degree insert of high density, 689 kPa water proofed calcium
silicate, encased in a 360 degree galvanized sheet metal shield. Insert shall be of same thickness
as adjoining pipe insulation. Shield length and minimum sheet metal gauge shall conform to the
following schedule:
Pipe Size (mm) Shield Length (mm) Minimum Thickness (mm)

15 – 40 100 0.63
50 – 150 150 1.1
200 – 250 220 1.8
300 – 450 300 1.8
500 & up 450 1.8
9. Where insulation is specified for piping, insulate similarly all connection, vents, drains and any
piping connected to system subject to heat loss or gain.
2.2 DUCT WORK INSULATION

2.2.1 Insulate sheet metal as follows:
1. Air supply system casings and plenums including all equipment from air intake plenum to fan
discharge 50 mm type D-2, (exceptions as noted on plans).
2. Air conditioning system supply and return ducts in equipment rooms and in exposed areas (outdoor
or no false ceiling) - 50 mm type D-2.
3. Air conditioning supply and return air ducts in other than item.2 - 50 mm type D-1.
4. All outside air ducts and plenums containing a percentage of outside air on inlet side of air supply
systems. 25 mm type D-2.
5. As shown or indicated plans.
2.2.2 Insulation types:
A. Type D-1: Flexible Duct Insulation with Vapour Barrier.
Page 288 of 429

1. Flexible duct insulation shall be mineral fiber blanket thermal insulation with 24 kg/m 3 density
with maximum K factor of 0.036 W/m.K at 23C mean temperatures, with reinforced foil-faced,
flame resistant Kraft vapour barrier.
2. Insulation shall be secured with duct adhesive. All joints shall be sealed by adhering a 50 mm
sealing lap at all joints with vapour barrier adhesive or 75 mm strips of vapour barrier jacket
applied with vapour barrier adhesive.
3. Insulation shall then be fastened with 1.7 mm copper-clad wire or mineral wool cord on 300 mm
centres. On ducts over 600 mm wide, welded pins and clips shall be used on the underside.
4. Exposed round ducts shall have a white vinyl reinforced foil vapour barrier. Application same
except wires shall be omitted and blanket shall be secured by stapling 50 mm longitudinal lap.
Staples shall be coated with vapour barrier coating
B. Type D-2 Rigid Duct Insulation with Vapour Barrier.
1. Rigid duct insulation shall be mineral fiber blanket thermal insulation with 48 kg/m3 density with
maximum K factor of 0.036 W/m.K at 23C mean temperatures with ASJ exposed vapour barrier
facing.
2. Insulation shall be impaled over welded pins applied to duct surface on 300 to 450 mm centers.
Use a minimum of two rows of fasteners on each side of duct. Secure insulation with suitable
speed washers or clips firmly imbedded into insulation.
3. All joints and voids in the insulation shall be filled with Mineral Wool Cement. All joints, speed
washers and breaks in the vapour barrier shall be sealed with 75 mm wide strips of the vapour
barrier facing adhered with vapour barrier adhesive.
4. Exposed ductwork shall have a white vinyl reinforced foil vapour barrier facing. Care shall be
taken in sealing joints speed washers, etc., with matching 75 mm or 125 mm tape of vapour
barrier to insure good appearance.
C. elastomeric rubber insulation:
1. Use of closed cell elastomeric rubber flexible insulation as an alternative for the above with
thickness of 16 mm indoor and 32 mm outdoor.
2. Thermal conductivity (K) as indicated above for type D1, water vapor permeability (µ > 7000),
fire rating class 1.
3. Material shall be CFC and HCFC free.
2.3 PIPE WORK INSULATION

Piping systems described shall be insulated as follows, including all flanges, fittings, valves, expansion joints,
vents, drains and all other parts of the system. All piping subject to freezing such as in outdoor air or
discharge plenums or outdoors shall be insulated with twice the insulation thickness specified herein.
Insulation
Piping System Insulation Thickness
Type
1- below 50 mm = 40 mm
Primary and secondary Chilled water
2- 50 mm to 200mm = 50mm P-1
supply and return
3- 200 mm & Up = 65 mm
Refrigerant suction 25 mm P-5

P-1
Outdoor condenser Water 50 mm
Drain piping from fan coil units 25 mm P-2

cooling coil drip pans, and miscellaneous
25 mm P-2
piping subject to sweating
Page 289 of 429

Engine Exhaust 75 mm P-4
1- Up to 25 PSI = 25mm
Pump discharge 2- 30 to 100 PSI = 50mm P-3
3- 125 PSI and larger = 63mm
1- up to 100 mm =(2) layers 38mm
Thermal fluid (hot oil) 2- over 100mm = (2) layers 50mm P-4
2.3.1 Insulation types:
A. Type P-1 Glass Fiber for Cold Pipes

1. Insulation shall be glass fiber with a maximum K factor of 0.036 W/m.K at 23C mean temperatures
with factory applied vapor barrier jacket.
2. Piping insulation density is not less than 96 Kg/cu.m.
3. Longitudinal lap and 75 mm wide vapor barrier joint seal strips shall be adhered neatly in place
with vapor barrier adhesive. Factory applied self-sealing laps are acceptable.
4. Ends of pipe insulation shall be sealed off with vapor barrier coating at flanges, valves and fittings
and at intervals of not more than 7 meters on continuous runs of pipe.
5. Fittings and valves shall be insulated with molded fittings, mitered segments of pipe insulation or
0.45 kg fiberglass blanket, and compressed 2 to 1. Secure with copper-clad wire. Thickness to be
same as adjoining insulation (minimum of 25 mm thickness on fiberglass blanket). Flanges shall
be insulated with sectional pipe insulation extending a minimum of 25 mm beyond end of bolts.
Bolt area shall be filled with insulating cement. Fittings, etc. shall be vapor-sealed by applying two
1.5 mm thick coats of vapor barrier coating reinforced with glass fabric (10 x 10). Lap the glass
fabric at least 25 mm on itself and 50 mm on adjoining pipe insulation. If fiberglass blanket is used,
a smoothing coat of finishing cement must be applied before the vapor barrier is applied.
6. Concealed piping shall be banded in place with three aluminum bands per section, one over each
end of the joint sealing strip, and one in the middle of the section. Where self-sealing laps are
used, bands are not required.
7. All exposed piping shall have a factory attached, pre-sized glass cloth covered vapor barrier jacket.
Vapor-barrier jacket may be vinyl-coated embossed laminate.
B. Type P-2 Glass Fiber for Antis eat Insulation

1. Insulation shall be glass fibre with a maximum K factor of 0.036 W/m.K at 23C mean temperatures
with factory applied vapour barrier jacket.
2. Piping insulation density is not less than 96 Kg/cu. m.
3. Longitudinal lap and 75 mm wide vapour barrier joint seal strips shall be adhered neatly in place
with vapour barrier adhesive. Factory applied self-sealing laps are acceptable.
4. Fittings and valves for pipe sizes smaller than 200 mm shall be insulated and finished with
Insulating and Finishing Cement. On pipe sizes 200 mm and larger, use segments of the molded
insulation or molded fibreglass fittings wired securely in place. Flanges shall be insulated with
sectional pipe insulation extending a minimum of 25 mm beyond the end of the bolts. Bolt area to
be filled with mineral wool cement. Thickness of fittings, valve and flange insulation shall be same
as adjoining pipe insulation. Concealed fittings, etc., may be insulated with 0.45 kg fibreglass
blanket wrapped firmly under compression, 2 to 1 and secured with copper clad wire.
5. Concealed piping shall be banded in place with three aluminium bands per section, one over each
end of the joint sealing strip and one in the middle of the section. Where self-sealing laps are used,
bands are not required.
6. All exposed piping shall have a factory attached, white, all service jacket (ASJ). Exposed fittings,
etc., shall be finished with open weave glass fabric (10 x 10) smoothly adhered and coated with
lagging adhesive.
Page 290 of 429

C. Type P-3 Glass Fiber Pipe Insulation for heating Pipes
1. Insulation shall be moulded glass fiber with a maximum K factor of 0.036 W/m.K at 23C mean
temperatures with factory applied jacket.
2. Piping insulation density is not less than 120 Kg/cu. m .
3. Longitudinal lap and 75 mm wide joint seal strips shall be secured with outward clinch staples on
concealed piping and vapour barrier adhesive on exposed piping. Factory applied self-sealing laps
(SSL) are acceptable.
Insulating and Finishing Cement. On pipe sizes 200 mm and larger, use segments of the molded
insulation or molded fiberglass fittings wired securely in place. Flanges shall be insulated with
sectional pipe insulation extending a minimum of 25 mm beyond the end of the bolts. Bolt area to
be filled with mineral wool cement. Thickness of fittings, valve and flange insulation shall be same
as adjoining pipe insulation. Concealed fittings, etc., may be insulated with 0.45 kg fiberglass
blanket wrapped firmly under compression, 2 to 1 and secured with copper-clad wire.
5. All exposed piping shall be finished with a factory attached, all-service jacket (ASJ). Exposed
fittings, etc., shall be finished with open weave glass fabric (10 x 20) adhered and coated with
lagging adhesive.
D. Type P-4 Calcium Silicate Pipe Insulation.
1. Insulation shall be 132 kP per cu. m. density molded a hydrous calcium silicate with a maximum K
factor of 0.063 W/m.K at 93C mean temperature. Insulation shall be fastened in place with 1.7 m
copper-clad wire on 450 mm maximum centers.
i. All insulation shall consist of half-round sections in single-layer thickness.
ii. Multi-layered or multi-segmental insulation is unacceptable.
Insulating and Finishing Cement to a thickness equal to the adjoining pipe insulation. Fittings and
valves for pipe sizes 200 mm and larger shall be insulated with segments of the molded insulation
wired securely in place and finished with a smoothing coat of finishing cement.
3. Flanges shall be insulated with sectional pipe insulation extending a minimum of 25 mm beyond
the ends of the bolt. Bolt area shall be filled with mineral wool cement.
4. Flanges and welded joints shall not be covered until the piping has been hydrostatically tested per
section 15510 of this specification.
E. Type P-5 Cellular Glass

1. Install insulation in staggered layers. Tightly butt the longitudinal and circumferential joints and
wire the sections in place with type 304 stainless steel bands (12 mm x .5 mm) on 225 mm
centers. Install at least two bands per section of insulation. Install expansion joints in both
horizontal and vertical runs, fabricated in accordance with manufacturer's standards.
2. Insulate fittings, valves and flanges with premolded insulating covers wired in place with either
stainless steel bands or soft annealed stainless steel wires. Install beveled or tapered transition
sections between fittings and adjacent pipe. Pack voids in insulation with mineral wool blanket
insulation.
3. Finish insulation with an acrylic latex coating applied at a rate of 8 liters per 9m². While the
coating is still tacky, install an open-weave cloth, overlapped 100 mm, laid smooth and
thoroughly embedded in the coating. Before the surfaces become dry, apply a second coating
of acrylic latex at a rate of 16 liters per 9m². Completely cover the cloth with no portion visible
through the finish while wet.
2.4 INSULATION FOR EQUIPMENT AND SPECIAL SYSTEMS

Page 291 of 429
2.4.1 Classification
A. The following Cold Equipment shall be insulated with vapour barrier board insulation using Type E-1
insulation:
1. Centrifugal Refrigeration Equipment - 50 mm.

2. Chilled and hot Water Pumps, and Expansion Tanks - 25 mm.
3. Return Fans in Non-Air Conditioned Spaces - 25 mm.
4. Single Inlet Fans Downstream of Cooling Coils - 50 mm
B. The following Hot Equipment shall be insulated with semi-rigid insulation using Type E-2 insulation.
1. Generator 121C. Max. 25 mm.

2. Compression Tank - 121C max. 50 mm.
3. Heat Exchangers - 38 mm.
4. Steam Condensate Receivers - 50 mm.
C. The following hot equipment and system components shall be insulated with high temperature block
insulation using Type E-3 insulation:
1. Smoke Extraction Ducts – 50 mm.

2. Kitchen Range Exhaust Ducts and Fans - 50 mm.
3. Flues - 50 mm.
4. Flash Tank - 25 mm.
5. Blow Down Tanks - 25 mm.
2.4.2 Insulation Types

A. Type E-1 Mineral wool Rigid Equipment Insulation with Vapour Barrier.
1. Insulation shall be 96 kg per cu. m. density mineral wool with vapour barrier facing and having a
maximum K factor of 0.036 W/m.K at 23C mean temperatures.
2. Insulation shall be firmly held in place with copper-clad wire or pins and clips on 300 mm centres.
3. All joints and voids in the insulation shall be filled with mineral wool cement. All joints and breaks
in the vapour barrier shall be sealed with strips of the vapour barrier facing adhered with vapour
barrier adhesive.
4. Finish shall consist of imbedding an open weave glass fabric (20 x 20) into wet coating of lagging
adhesive over-lapping the seams at least 50 mm. A finish coat of lagging adhesive shall then be
applied.
5. Sections of equipment requiring periodic servicing such as heads and pumps shall be insulated
with flanged, sectional, gasketed vaportight aluminium sheet metal covers 1.2mm thick lined with
50mm 67 kg density mineral wool board.
B. Type E-2 Mineral wool Rigid Equipment Insulation for Hot Equipment.
1. Insulation shall be 96 kg per cu. m. density mineral wool having a maximum K factor of 0.036
W/m.K at 23C mean temperatures.
2. Insulation shall be firmly held in place with copper clad wire or pins and clips on 300 mm centre.
3. All joints and voids in the insulation shall be filled with mineral wool cement.
4. Over the insulation apply 25 mm galvanized wire netting secured to the bands or wires and pulled
down tight. Then apply 1 coat of Insulating and Finishing Cement troweled to a smooth finish.
Page 292 of 429
5. Exposed equipment shall be finished by embedding open weave glass fabric (20 x 20) into wet
coating of lagging adhesive overlapping seams 50 mm. A finished coat of lagging adhesive shall
then be applied.
6. Section of equipment requiring periodic servicing such as heads and pumps shall be insulated
with sheet metal cover lined with 67 kg density mineral wool board.
C. Type E-3 High Temperature Block Insulation for Hot Equipment.
1. High temperature insulation shall be 192 kg per cu. m. density molded hydrous calcium silicate
with a maximum K factor of 0.036 W/m.K at 79C mean temperatures.
2. Insulation shall be securely wired in place with copper clad wire or galvanized steel bands 12 x
0.4 mm on 300 mm centres.
3. All joints and voids in the insulation shall be filled and pointed with mineral wool cement.
4. Over the insulation apply 25 mm galvanized wire netting secured to the bands or wires and pulled
down tight. Then apply 1 coat of Insulating and Finishing Cement troweled to a smooth finish.
5. Exposed equipment shall be finished by embedding open weave glass fabric (20 x 20) into wet
coating of lagging adhesive, overlapping all seams 50 mm. A finished coat of lagging adhesive
shall then be applied.
2.5 WEATHERPROOFING FINISHES FOR OUTDOOR INSULATION
2.5.1 Duct work

A. For all Duct Work installed outside, exposed (no false ceiling) or inside equipment rooms. The insulated
surfaces shall be weather protected with a 0.5 mm thick aluminum jacket which has a factory applied
moisture barrier.
B. Where indoor insulation is subject to physical damage (below 1.5 m) or abuse install aluminum jacketing
equivalent to outdoor weatherproofing finishes.
C. Where ductwork insulation is subject to foot traffic or similar conditions provide galvanized steel stairs with
handrails or appropriate bridges over piping and to be included in the builders work with no extra cost to
the owner.
D. Duct work underground should be weather proofed same as above.
2.5.2 Pipe work

A. For all Pipe Work installed outside, exposed (no false ceiling) or inside equipment rooms. The insulated
surfaces shall be weather protected with a 0.6 mm thick aluminum jacket which has a factory applied
moisture barrier. For all applications where it is available, the jacketing shall be factory attached to the
insulation and installed per manufacturer's recommendation.
B. Where field applied jacketing must be used, it shall be applied with 50 mm overlap facing down from the
weather and shall be secured with an aluminum band 12 x .3 mm and seals applied on 300 mm centers
with bands applied directly over but overlaps. As an alternate, the jacketing may be applied with rivets.
Where jacketing is cut out or abuts an un-insulated surface, the joint shall be sealed with foam sealant.
C. Fittings and valves shall be insulated and finished with metered sections of the insulation with factory
attached aluminum jackets installed per manufacturer's recommendation.
D. All valves and coil hook-up should be cladded with aluminum jacket same as item A.
2.5.3 Equipment insulation
Page 293 of 429

A. Outdoor Equipment, The insulated surfaces shall be weather protected with two coats of mastic, with
open weave glass cloth membrane imbedded between the coats. Embed 38mm x 38mm .7mm perforated
galvanized steel angles on all corners in mastic. The total thickness of the coating shall be a minimum of
3 mm. or 0.4 mm aluminum jacketing with vapour barrier.
B. Where indoor insulation is subject to physical damage or abuse install aluminum jacketing equivalent to
outdoor weatherproofing finishes.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install insulation in accordance with approved installation drawings and manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Install insulation as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions, and in accordance with
recognized industry practices to ensure that installation complies with requirements and serves intended
purpose.
C. Coordinate with other work, as necessary to interface installation of insulation with other work.
D. Install insulation on pipe system subsequent to installation of heat tracing, testing and acceptance of tests.
E. Clean and dry pipe surfaces prior to insulating. Butt insulation joints firmly together to ensure complete and
tight fit over surfaces to be covered.
F. Cover valves, fittings and similar item in each piping system with equivalent thickness and composition of
insulation as applied to adjoining pipe run. Install factory molded, precut or job fabricated units except where
documents call for insulation to be another type.
G. Install insulation materials with smooth and even surfaces. Install each continuous run of piping with fall
length units of insulation with single cut piece to complete run. Do not use out pieces or scraps abutting
each other. Install pipe hanger insulation insert at all hangers of equal thickness to adjacent insulation.
Install insulation protection shields at each pipe hanger between jacket and hanger.
H. Install rigid pipe insulation inserts on all pipes passing through floor sleeves and through fire rated walls and
fire rated partition or ceiling openings in order to maintain required fire rated composite for sleeve caulking.
In lieu of this requirement, insulation may be deleted from hot pipes below 160oF at the point where they
pass through the building's construction.
I. Install all-purpose insulation jackets over all hot pipe insulation. Install a continuous unbroken vapour barrier
seal over all cold water pipe to prevent condensation on cold pipes and hangers, supports, anchors, etc.,
which are secured directly to cold pipes. For hot pipes, apply 76 mm wide vapour barrier type or band over
the butt joints.
J. Where insulation is specified for piping, also insulate all connections, vents, drains and piping connected to
the system which is subject to heat loss or gain.
K. Do not use staples on hot pipe insulation jackets if hot water heat maintenance system is used.
Page 294 of 429

ASAYEL AL-OMRAN BMS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION KNOWLEDGE ECONOMIC CITY – KEC
SECTION 230900 – BUILDING MANGMENT SYSTEM (BMS)
SECTION 230900
BUILDING MANGMENT SYSTEM (BMS)
PART 1 - GENERAL

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions (General
Requirements), apply to work of this Section.
B. General Provisions for HVAC Work, "Section 23 00 00 ", apply to work of this Section.
C. Testing and balancing "Section 23 05 93", apply to work of this Section.
D. General Provisions for Electrical Work, Section 26 05 00, apply to work of this Section.
E. Cable Trunks, “Section 26 05 36”, apply to work of this section.
F. Raceways, Boxes and Fittings, “Section 26 05 33”, apply to work of this section.

Work includes providing all materials, equipment, accessories, services, and tests necessary to complete and
make ready for operation by the Owner, Building Management System (BMS) in accordance with the
schematic diagrams, and schedule of points, performance narratives, and specifications.
Page 295 of 429

1.3 ABBREVIATIONS
A/C Air Conditioning

ANSI American National Standard Institute
ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers
BTL BACnet Testing Laboratory
BMS Building Management System
CD-RW Compact Disk with Read and Write capability
CPU Central Processing Unit
DDC Direct Digital Control or Direct Digital Controller
FAS Fire Alarm System
FCU Fan Coil Unit
HMI Human Machine Interface
HVAC Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning
I/O Input / Output
LAN Local Area Network
LCD Liquid Crystal Display
LED Light Emitting Diode
MCC Motor Control Centre
NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
PC Personal Computer
POT Portable Operator Terminal
RAM Random Access Memory
RFI Radio Frequency Interference
RH Relative Humidity
RTD Resistance Temperature Device
SCADA Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition
SMS Short Message Service (cellular phoned text messaging)
SQL Structured Query Language
UPS Uninterruptible Power Supply
VAV Variable Air Volume
VDU Video Display Unit
VFC Volt Free Contacts
VSD Variable Speed Drive
1.4 SYSTEM COMPONENETS

A. It is the intent of this specification to define a state-of-the-art distributed computerized Building Management
Page 296 of 429
and Control System which is user friendly, has known reliability, is extremely responsive, and which is to be
designed, installed, implemented, and supported by a local office of the manufacturer through people skilled
in providing functional and efficient solutions to building system needs.
The vendors shall make sure in their proposal to clearly separate between BMS, DDCs and field devices.
Three different sections will be provided, the first for the BMS and associated cables, BMS server, BMS
Workstation, Web Server, Firewall, etc. The second for the Ethernet field bus network adaptor, DDCs and
associated cables, terminal blocks, enclosures & panels, terminations, etc. and the third will be for field
instruments (valve Actuators, damper Actuators, sensors, transmitters, etc.). The proposal should be
structured in a manner that in case of failure of the BMS system on the Ethernet field bus network adaptor,
DDCs and field instruments stated in second and third sections will be capable of standalone operation and
performing all the requirements stated herein after in this specification.
B. The BMS shall be configured as a reliable local area communication network linked around each defined
control zone, with connecting DDCs and BMS operation workstation and BMS server, which shall be
provided by the IT discipline. The contractor shall have responsibility to coordinate with the IT discipline to
ensure performing specific functions as required. DDC outstations shall be strategically located throughout
the building, primarily inside E&M equipment rooms/BMS room and building services plant rooms. The
outstations shall communicate and report to the BMS server, which shall provide operator workstation the
status overview, historical database and support all user-operating facilities.
C. To allow evaluation of vendors and systems, a detailed technical proposal shall be provided and formatted
strictly in accordance to this outline. Vendor’s standard literature not complying with this format and content
requirement will not be considered or evaluated. Proposal requirements follow:
1. Proposed system complete with location and block diagram including central computer type and
memory, peripherals, communication interfaces, all LAN cards, all active hubs and repeaters,
network layout, distributed primary bus connected control/monitor panels with location, listing of
equipment directly connected to a primary bus controller, and secondary network drivers and
connected systems. Provide copies of required UL listing cards.
2. Compliance Checklist - Provide a specification paragraph-by-paragraph listing of strict word-for-
word compliance or non-compliance. For each item of conditional or non-compliance, spell out the
vendor's substitute response.
3. Computer based central
a. Day-to-day interactive operator interface description with sample English/Graphic

displays, penetration scheme for display/command and logical configuring, and examples
of alarms and data in various modes (disabled, fixed, not responding, etc.)
b. Short cut penetration schemes for direct graphic, point, and command access.
c. Color graphic system description with sample system displays, color graphic penetration
and command schemes, graphic creation means, library of symbols, and curve plot.
d. Interactive data editing scheme to modify the system database and parameters including,
but not limited to, operators, peripheral assignments, system configuration, text, time
schedules, point monitoring limits, event-initiated control, and control application program
parameters.
e. Electronic mail/messaging description and samples.
f. Data access control and security scheme.
Page 297 of 429

g. Report descriptions including selection scheme and sample reports.
h. Programming facility including language and canned packages of subroutines and intrinsic
functions.
i. Sample sequence of operation and flowchart display.
j. Sample custom report.
k. Sample text alarm message.
l. Sample of system and point descriptor text.
m. Technical description of all hardware components.
n. Sample alarm report.
o. Sample alarm acknowledgment report.
p. Procedure for setting up and displaying extended trend file reports.
4. Distributed control panel point architecture, memory, and battery.
a. Functional description.
b. Scan/Report speed and alarm detection speed.
c. Control and survival capabilities.
5. Communications network architecture, points, and panels.
a. Protocol description, host independent, bus-cut reaction.
b. Bus limitations, distances between active links and hubs, etc.
c. Number of devices on bus without repeater.
d. Error checking, collision prevention, recovery.
e. Controller internal architecture, communication cards, board-to-board communications,

Page 298 of 429
secondary bus drivers.
f. Point sharing/update scheme.
6. Available services for full system maintenance, software update and modifications, hardware spare
parts, add and changes, system training and training classes.
7. Contractor experience/capability, size.
a. Organization with key brief resumes.
b. 10-years history of local support of management, engineering, installation, and

maintenance locations and business.
c. Local experience on similar jobs with references.
d. Local facility description.
e. 30-year history of automation/management system evolution and ongoing support.
8. Vendors' standard specification data literature.
D. In case of any conflict between any parts of this specification or any other document elsewhere the material
with higher stated specifications must be used. Any conflict or technical misunderstanding should be
discussed during bidding phase. The consultant will be the only technical reference for the intents and
contents of this document and the contractors will have to follow consultant technical interpretation in case
of any conflict arising after bidding stage.
A. Scope
1. Supply and install Building Management System (BMS), Ethernet field bus network adaptor, Direct
Digital Controllers (DDCs) and Field Devices complete in accordance with the requirements of the
contract documents.
2. The BMS shall be of the latest technology having BACnet system and products (allowing for open
protocols), integrated and installed as a complete package with automatic temperature control
system. Manufacturers having BMS and fire control system will be preferred.
3. All BMS points shall have been remote and control via the internet and intranet network. All web
pages, firewall, antivirus software and necessary licenses and equipment shall be provided.
4. The system shall include all BMS computer software and hardware, BMS operator input/output
devices, direct digital controllers, automation sensors and control, wiring and piping.
Page 299 of 429

5. Provide the engineering, installation supervision and labor, calibration, software programming and
checkout necessary for a complete and fully operational system as specified hereafter.
6. Provide surge transient protection for all BMS and control equipment.
A. Acceptable Manufacturers/Installers
1. Subject to the requirements of the Contract Documents an installer approved by the Engineer and
complying with the following requirements shall carry out the supply and installation of the Building
Automation System:
a. Having a local office staffed with factory trained and certified engineers fully capable of
providing instruction, routine maintenance and emergency maintenance service on all
system components.
b. Having a 5-year successful experience record in the design and installation of

computerized building systems similar in performance to that specified herein and
prepared to provide evidence of this history as a condition of acceptance and approval.
B. Regulatory Requirements
1. The following codes and standards shall be applicable:

 ASHRAE 114: Energy Management Control Systems Instrumentation.
 ASHRAE 135-2016: Communication Protocol for Building Automation and Control
Networks.
 ASHRAE 90.1-2016
 BS 7671-2008/2015: Requirements for electrical installations (IEE Wiring Regulations,
sixteenth edition),
 BS 60529
 BS EN 1335-1-2000
 BS EN 527-1-2011
 NEC 348: Electric Metallic Tubes (EMT).
 ANSI / ASHRAE / IESNA standard
 NFPA92A: Recommended practice for smoke control system.
 ISO 9001
 ISO 9002
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit for the Engineer's review and approval qualifications and experience details of proposed
installer's project manager, project engineer, engineering staff and electronic technicians to be
involved with the supervision, engineering and installation of the BMS.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's specifications, for all components of the system including
installation instructions and system generation instructions.
Page 300 of 429

C. Material submittal: All products data should be provided for consultant approval including list of
materials used with complete part number, data points summary (schedule of I/0 points), drawings
that shows control over mechanical / electrical sections, sequence of operation (performance
narratives), complete technical catalogues of submitted devices which complies to the consultant’s
technical specifications. All submitted materials should be in English.
D. Shop Drawings: Submit layout drawings of all installed system components as follows:
1. Provide complete installation details for all devices such as: cable trunks, cables segregations,
conduits, pull boxes, field devices, etc.
2. Provide identification tags for all control equipment on the appropriate
mechanical / electrical sections.
3. All materials used within the drawings have to be clearly identified by part number referring to
the final technically approved materials submittal.
4. Clearly show the actual cable routing, ceiling mounting, spacing of clamps and pull boxes.
5. Provide a legend for all symbols and abbreviations used in drawings / tables.
6. Provide complete “description table” for conduits and cables of each Local Control Panel (LCP),
FCU, detectors, trunk, etc. These tables must state the cable data (code, size, description,
service, type of carried signal, total number used, etc) as well as conduit data (code, size, type,
etc).
E. Method statement:
1. BMS Contractor shall provide method statement procedure for BMS system components testing
procedure. Scope of work shall include delivery to site, installation ,testing and commissioning
including but not limited to:
a. Recommissioning checks for field devices locations and positions as per manufacture
recommendations and considering site situations
b. Field device cable for end to end continuity beaks and short-circuits
c. Correct wiring termination and cable tag
d. CPU, power supply, Controllers and IO modules installation details as per manufacturer
recommendations
e. Panel Internal wiring diagram
f. DDC and Connection with MCC
g. Testing for Network gateways and communication networking
h. Server and Workstations installation
i. Software installations and graphics tests
j. Interfaces with third parties systems
k. Sequence of operation standalone and communicating with BMS.
F. As-built drawings: The BMS contractor shall provide As-built drawings (drawings with complete part
number of installed equipment’s and installation details for cables, conduits, etc.).
G. Operation and maintenance manuals: The BMS contractor shall provide Comprehensive and
complete interoperability documentation and method statement for third party systems. The BMS
Specialist shall provide separate interoperability documentation at the end of execution of the project,
which shall detail integrating BACnet objects, controllers or gateways from any
manufacture, connecting all the hardware of the proposed system to another BACnet system server
or link all the data in the proposed BMS to another system with all their attributes. This document
shall also include the BACnet Object ID of all the objects captured or generated by the system,
Page 301 of 429
database documentation, querying methods and full documentation to read and write BACnet data
with another system.
H. Special Environmental Requirements :
1. Resource efficient product data: Submit required information concerning project recyclability
(packaging), product recycled content, and product recyclability.
2. Environmental issues certification: Submit written certification stating that the products installed
are essentially the same as those defined by the Project requirements (specifications,
submittals, and/or test data) in terms of recycled content and recyclability.
1.8 ACCEPTANCE PROCEDURE

A. Forward to the Engineer submittal data relevant to point index, functions, limits, sequences, interlocks,
power fail-restarts, BTUH totalization , logs, software routines and associated parameters, and other
pertinent information for the operating system and database. Enter into the central computer and debug
approved software packages. Prior to on-line operation, perform in the presence of the Engineer a
complete demonstration and readout of the computer real-time responsibilities of surveillance and
command. This demonstration, having satisfactorily met previously approved submittals, shall, with the
Engineers written acceptance, allow commissioning the BMS for on-line operation.
B. Upon successful completion of system generation, the Engineer shall be requested in writing to inspect
and approve the satisfactory operation of the BMS, sub-system(s) and accessories. Upon receipt of a
detailed system adjustment list from the Engineer prepare an installation inspection report showing each
outstanding item on the system adjustment list. After all items appearing on the installation inspection
report are completed, make a second written request for system approval to the Engineer. As each or
all items are approved, enter an appropriate notation at the time of joint inspection on the system report
with counter signature of the Engineer. Make a copy of this report for the Engineer.
C. Where modification, alteration, addition or removal of hardware or software programs of the BMS or
related accessories is required for the purpose of eliminating point list items, off-line operation and testing
to implement them shall be done as required until such time as an acceptable performance of the BMS
has been established. Correct problems that occur within approved hardware or software in an
appropriate fashion. Any such occurrence shall not void previous approval; however, be responsible to
attend to and remedy such items within a reasonable amount of time.Maintain appropriate logs, schedule
and reports to reflect these items.
1.9 OPERATOR INSTRUCTION

A. Provide operator instruction both prior to Substantial Completion of the Project and throughout the
Maintenance Period as required.
B. During system commissioning and at such time acceptable performance of the Building Automation
System hardware and software has been established, provide on-site operator instruction to the
Employers operating personnel. Perform operator instruction during normal working hours by a
competent installer representative familiar with the BMS software, hardware and accessories.
C. At a time mutually agreed upon during system commissioning as stated above, give instruction, for the
periods required by the Engineer, but no less than 50 hours to the Employer's designated personnel on
the operation of all equipment within the BMS and describe its intended use with respect to the
programmed functions specified. Operator orientation of the automation system shall include, but not be
limited to, the overall operational program, equipment functions (both individually and as part of the total
integrated system), commands, system generation, advisories, and appropriate operator intervention
required in responding to the system's operation. Use an Operation and Maintenance Manual prepared
for this project in addition to the instruction. Provide three copies of the Operation and Maintenance
Manual.
D. Provide to the Employers designated personnel additional instruction, for the periods required by the
Engineer, but no less than 150 hours. This instruction shall provide a description of the chronological
Page 302 of 429
information flow from field sensors, contacts and devices to the centrally located BMS. The overview of
the system’s communication network shall provide a better understanding to the operator of the interplay
between initiating devices, Field Processing Units, system communications, and their importance within
the operation of the BMS.
E. Provide set of passwords for the operator to allow full access to all systems and software to allow full
control and ability to change or re-configure any parameter or output without exception
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM STRUCTURE AND CONFIGURATION
A. Provide system of modular design and consisting of a Central Processing Unit, Direct Digital Controllers
(DDCs) and Operator Station(s). A multiplexed communications network shall interconnect these basic
system elements.
B. The basic elements of the BMS structure shall be built up of only standard components kept in inventory
by the BMS supplier. The components shall not require custom doing other than setting jumpers and
switches, adding firmware modules or software programming to perform required functions.
C. Provide the following system components:
1. In the Building Management System:

a. BMS server.
b. BMS Operation Workstation.
c. Color LCD display for Server and Operation respectively.
d. Web server.
e. The fire wall network equipment
f. Two high-speed color printers.
g. Two Dot Matrix printers
2. Automation level :
a. Automation level including all required direct digital controllers DDCs, unitary controllers for
FCUs and VAV box controllers.
b. DDCs enclosures should be IP66 for outdoor mounting and IP55 for indoor mounting.
3. Field devices distributed about the buildings:
a. All field devices, which are part of HVAC system automatic temperature controls, plumbing,
fire fighting, fire alarm or electrical systems.
b. All supplied equipment should be designed and manufactured to operate and function with
no performance degradation under the following operating conditions :
i. Voltage : 220V ± 10% .
ii. Frequency : 50Hz ± 1% .
iii. Temperature: 0 to 50 C .
iv. R.H. : 20% to 90% non-condensation.
2.2 ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
Page 303 of 429

Ensure all monitoring system equipment is compatible, and does not adversely affect any other equipment
installed in the same location. Ensure all monitoring system equipment meets the requirements of:
4. BS EN 60950.
5. BS 6527 (EN 55022).
6. BS 6667 Part1 and BS EN 60801-2.
7. BS 7671 (IEE Wiring Regulations).
8. BS EJN 55014.
9. CE Electromagnetic interference regulations.
2.3 CENTRAL PROCESSING EQUIPMENT
A. General
1. The BMS server is to control operator input/output, data transmission to and from the Field
Processing Units and to perform all software functions as specified hereafter.
B. Memory Backup
1. In the event of Central Processing Unit or memory storage failure, the operator shall not be required
to manually re-enter system data. Supply the necessary hardware and software to allow periodic
dumping of operator-entered data onto another storage media. Also, provide necessary hardware
and software to reload this data when changes, additions, or failures cause this data to be lost in the
computer memory.
2. Incorporate a data storage management system in the operator facilities, which warns against
impending on-line storage overflow and allows for data archiving to and retrieval from off-line non-
volatile media. Ensure the system prompts the operator at pre-defined intervals to carry out the data
archiving procedure.
3. Provide a UPS to maintain the CPU's volatile RAM for a minimum of 30 minutes.
C. BMS Expansion shall be applicable as follows
1. The BMS, as installed, shall incorporate a minimum of 20 percent additional hardware (field)
points without adding controllers or I/O Point Interface Modules (PIM). The number and type of
the installed spare points shall be uniformly distributed between the installed
controllers. Network architecture shall allow unlimited expandability by the addition of new sub
networks and associated routers, gateways, etc.
2. The BMS as installed shall be expandable, at minimum, to incorporate the following in addition
to the above:
a. A minimum of 200 percent additional hardware (field) points with the addition of
CCP, DGP and UC.
b. A minimum of 200 percent additional system diagrams in addition to those required
to meet these specifications.
c. A minimum of 3 No. additional Operator Interface Workstations.
d. A minimum of 5 No. additional interfaces to low voltage building systems of a
similar nature to those integrated under this contract.
Page 304 of 429
e. The BMS performance shall not be degraded in any manner and shall meet all
performance criteria detailed in these specifications.
2.4 OPERATOR WORK STATIONS
A. Provide all operator input/output devices, which utilize ASCII (American Standard Code for Information
Interchange) code and interfaced to the BMS with standard EIA (Electronic Industries Association) hardware.
B. The Operation Workstation Station (OWS) Real time operating system shall be true multi-tasking providing
concurrent execution of multiple real time programs and custom program development. "Switching" from
foreground applications to background applications where the background applications are suspended is
NOT acceptable.
C. Provide capability to allow operator I/O devices to communicate by an RS-485, over Ethernet network or
over telephone lines through a modem interface.
D. Group all operator I/O devices into stations which control and monitor building activity. These stations shall
have the capability to be comprised of multiple I/O devices that can all be used simultaneously. The
characteristics of each station shall be on-line definable and totally independent of each other.
E. Each device shall be defined as to what type or types of system feedback it shall receive. This assignment
shall be independent for each device.
1. Alarm Printers minimum specifications:
a. Minimum print speed of 300 characters/second. Slower speed printers shall not be acceptable
when printing in normal quality.
b. Selectable character sizes
c. Sprocket paper feed.
d. Top-of-page, skip and tab control.
e. The printers shall accept continuous fan-fold paper with a width equivalent to A3 size (297
mm by 420 mm).
f. Constructed for heavy duty-cycle environment.
g. 24 x 24 dot matrix printer
2. Report Printers minimum specifications:
a. Scalable fonts.
b. Single or double bin paper trays, capable of printing A3 size (297mm x 420mm) and A4 size
(210mm x 297mm).
c. Page feed and page discharge controls.
d. Color and black and white printing capability without changing ink or toner cartridges.
e. 1200 dpi black and white and 600 x 300 dpi color.
f. Laser jet technology.
3. Operation Workstation (OWS)
a. The Operation Workstation shall incorporate energy efficiency and power saving measures.
Page 305 of 429

b. Provide a computer (PC) based CPU, with the latest state-of-art technology; the following is
the minimum configuration of an Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM), such as HP, IBM,
etc. with one of the latest Intel Xeon, processors available in the market. The PC shall be
provided with a minimum of 24 GB of RAM and a 32-inch LCD or LED. Two 500 GB SATA
hard disk, one high speed DVD Writer,10/100/1000 Ethernet network interface card,
integrated raid 5 for both SATA/SAS (RAID level 0, 1), operating system of windows server
2012 R2standard edition or Windows 10 pro, application software package and licenses, shall
also be provided. The workstation shall be equipped with power supply surge protection,
English/Arabic keyboard, a mouse, speakers and a backup device.
4. Server
a. Software:
(i) Software shall be based on the open BOS platform. The BMS
(ii) Server shall be a genuinely scalable solution, based on modern software
architecture. The software shall be capable of running natively on Windows or
Linux operating systems. No virtualization solutions are allowed. The system shall
utilize industry standard operating systems, networks and protocols. The system
shall support open protocols, including at least LonWorks, BACnet, and Modbus.
No external gateway solutions are applicable.
(iii) The BMS Server Software shall support a true Client-Server architecture,
enabling the server application to be run separately from the client application.
(iv) Whenever required, it shall also be possible to run both applications on the same
computer. Client connections to the server must utilize TCP/IP network (e.g.LAN,
Internet). The server application shall be able to handle many simultaneous client
connections from a number of workstations.
(v) The internal software architecture of the BMS Server Software shall support
service oriented architecture, enabling adding and removing of the services
during the life cycle of the project. It is not allowed to compile server application
code after installation into the target system.
(vi) It shall also be possible to develop new services to the framework according to
the manufacturer’s development API specifications. It shall be possible to support
new field bus protocols by implementing new network interface drivers.
(vii) The BMS Server shall include a SQL database for centralized storage of system
events, trends and logs. The system shall include centralized alarm dispatching
features for all connected systems, using e.g. GMS and email
(viii) The data structure of the BMS Server shall be based on XML data model, which
includes modeling of systems and devices in a standard manner.
(ix) The data model shall describe the structure of the building and the control.
(x) The data model shall define at least the following elements:
i. Structure of building - floors, spaces, etc.
ii. Pump – AHUs, heating system, access control, etc.
iii. Devices – fans, pumps, doors, cameras, etc.
iv. Effect areas of devices
(xi) The data model shall be transferred to BMS Server as XML files, describing the
building structure and the control model. The XML schemas shall define the
structure and elements used in these files.
a. Hardware:
(i) The server shall be rack mountable in standard 19” equipment rack of maximum 4U
height. Manufacturer of IBM, HP, etc.
(ii) Processor: Contractor shall provide an Intel Xeon processor - family E5. Latest available
family’s version at the time of ordering shall be provided; if E5 v4 family is launched,
processors from E5 v3 family are not accepted.
(iii) Minimum memory of 128 GB ECC memory
(iv) Network of 10/100/1000 Ethernet interface.
Page 306 of 429

(v) Minimum of RAID 5 SAS Hard Disk.
(vi) Hot-swappable power supply.
(vii) Hot-swappable cooling fans.
(viii) Calculation:
1. Based on the BMS manufacturer’s recommendations and the physical total
number of I/O points, Contractor shall provide by justified calculations - for each of
the servers - the choice of the:
a. Processor’s number of cores.
b. Contractor shall not use the Hyper-Threading technology in order to meet
the required number of cores; Contractor shall provide a physical number
of cores equal or greater than the required number.
c. CPU frequency.
d. RAM.
e. Storage capacity (calculated at maximum frequency).
f. The total average CPU load shall not exceed 30%. The server storage
hardware shall be calculated for 5 years, configured using hardware RAID
5 and designed to use less than 60% of the available space. Calculation
shall clearly state the analog tags’, the discrete tags’, and the string tags’
number in addition to the update’s rate.
(ix) Hard drives: Server RAID System shall have integrated RAID 5 with on board RAID
controllers.
5. Enclosure:
a. Servers shall be rack mounted in a standard 19” racks complying with EIA/ECA-310-E and
IEC 60297 Mechanical structures for electronic equipment - Dimensions of mechanical
structures of the 482.6 mm (19 in) series:
b. Enclosure Accessories: Contractor shall be responsible for providing fans, shelves, drawers,
special power wiring, ground connections, cables, connectors, appurtenances, and adapters
of any kind necessary to accommodate the system installation, operation, testing, or
maintenance.
6. Integrated Data Display
a. The Color LCD shall output system graphic displays. These graphic displays shall detail all
mechanical, electrical, and fire systems.
b. The graphic display shall have a minimum screen diagonal measurement of 32 inches. Full
HD 1080P , minimum resolution of 1920 by 1080 with Hz minimum refresh rate.
c. An operator request for a graphic display shall cause the associated system to be
automatically selected and outputted on the viewing screen. The operator request shall be
entered via the "specific building" and "specific system" level of identification specified
hereinafter under SYSTEM FORMAT.
d. When a point is in alarm on the LCD, the operator shall be able to display associated graphic
with a single keystroke.
e. Each graphic display shall consist of two distinct sections: a static section and a
dynamic section. The static section shall consist of elements that usually do not change with
time or point condition. The dynamic section shall consist of elements that usually do change
with point conditions.
f. Each static section shall be capable of being associated with any number of dynamic sections.
Page 307 of 429

g. A minimum capability of 256 different static sections shall be provided.
h. The elements of a static section shall include, but not be limited to:
(i) Lines.
(ii) Symbols.
(iii) Character strings (single/double sized).
i. The elements of a static section shall be capable of outputting in any color.
j. A static section does not have to be associated with a dynamic section to be used as chromatic
output.
k. The dynamic section shall accommodate a minimum of 40 elements.
l. The elements of a dynamic section shall include, but not be limited to:
(i) Point identifier.

(ii) Point expanded identifier.
(iii)Real time value.
(iv) Engineering units.
(v) Mode units.
(vi) Symbols.
(vii) Lines.
(viii) Text strings.
(ix) Digital values.
m. The elements of a dynamic section shall be capable of outputting in any colors; for any one
of the conditions specified hereinbefore under Color LCD Unit.
n. Symbols shall be a pictorial illustration of the point condition. This illustration shall not be
dependent on the type of sensor/device being represented.
o. A chromatic system graphic display shall update the dynamic elements to the current point
condition at least every one seconds.
p. Symbols shall include, but not be limited to:
 Boiler.
 Central Processing Unit.
 Chiller.
 Circuit Breaker, Closed.
 Circuit Breaker, Open.
 Coil, Cooling.
 Coil, Heating.
 Damper.
Page 308 of 429
 Detector, Fire.
 Detector, Flame.
 Detector, Smoke.
 Detector, Thermal.
 Electrical Ground.
 Emergency Power, Battery.
 Fan.
 Filter.
 Fire, Annunciation.
 Fire, Control Panel.
 Fire, Hose Station.
 Fire, Speaker.
 Fire, Sprinkler.
 Fire Suppression, Halon.
 Fire Suppression, Water.
 Flow Arrow.
 Keyboard.
 Panel, Lighting.
 Pumps.
 Switch, Closed.
 Switch, Open.
 Transmitter.
 Transformer.
 Valve, Three-Way.
 Valve, Two-Way.
q. Lines shall include, but not be limited to:
 Vertical.
 Horizontal.
 Diagonal.
r. Character Strings shall include alphanumeric characters and shall be capable of a minimum
of 60 characters length.
s. Any dynamic element shall be capable of being used many times on a single chromatic
graphic display.
t. Data to be displayed within a graphic shall be assigned regardless of physical hardware

address. Graphics are to be on-line programmable. Points may be assigned to multiple
graphics and shall also contain calculated or pseudo points. Points (physical and pseudo)
shall be displayed with dynamic data values with optional text descriptors, status or value,
and engineering unit. Coloration shall be used to denote status and alarm states. In addition,
animation shall be used, to confirm operator commands (e.g., fan and pump rotation, and
graphical motion). All points shall be dynamic and shall continuously update anytime their
field status or value changes. Points shall be commanded from any graphic directly via mouse
selection. Arrows shall be included in to show flow direction for pipeworks , fans and pumps.,
u. Penetration within a graphic hierarchy shall display each graphic name, as they are stacked
to facilitate operator understanding. The "backtrack" of names shall permit the operator to
move upward on the hierarchy by mouse click on the stacked backtrack. The backtrack shall
show at least the previous four penetration levels. The operator shall be provided the option
of showing each graphic full screen size with the backtrack as a horizontal header or by
showing a stack of graphics.
Page 309 of 429
v. The operator shall be provided with a means to directly access any graphic or any point
without going through the penetration path. Direct access to graphics shall be by menu
selection wherein the operator may optionally enter the name of the graphic system desired
or select the desired graphic via cursor positioning on a scroll bar listing of all graphics.
Graphics shall also be selected by entering, or selecting via scroll bar of all system points, the
user address of any point within the graphic. Graphics shall also be assigned to any tool bar
icon for single stroke selection at any time.
w. In addition to dynamic graphic system wide multi level data and functional penetration
procedures, each operator shall be provided with a unique button tool bar selector. Upon
operator sign-on, the operator’s unique tool bar shall display on the screen. The system shall
allow each operator to easily assign multi step operator functions to any tool bar button.
Buttons shall be operator-programmable.
x. By partial data entry, a wild card search utility shall be provided. For example, by entering
"Room," all points with the word "Room" in their name shall be listed. The wild card search
utility shall be used for point data access by point name or by point attribute, when searching
alarm history files by date range or for critical alarms only, and by searching the operator
activity files by date range.
y. To enable operators to view graphics in greater detail, a zoom/pan display feature shall be
provided via a diagonal click-and-drag mouse operation.
7. On-Line Graphic Generation
a. A program shall be provided to allow the operator to create or modify chromatic graphics on-
line as herein before specified under Color LCD Display.
b. System advisories, change-of-state output, operator acknowledgement, and issuance of field

control commands shall not be inhibited on any operator input/output device, including Color
LCDs during creation or modification of a chromatic graphic.
c. When a static or dynamic element is being added or deleted, the element will flash until an
execute or ignore command is entered.
d. Chromatic graphics shall be saved/restored on the same Save/Restore device specified

hereinafter under Database Save/Restore.
e. Operator advisory messages shall be provided to indicate illegality of generating certain

graphics.
f. All graphics should be agreed in the development stages during the commissioning including
end user approval
g. Any changes of system graphics should be minimal and backup factory setting to be saved.
Page 310 of 429

8. Controller Support.
a. The OWS shall provide complete utilities necessary for management of the network of digital
controllers and devices. Each controller shall be provided with a user definable name. Provide
software to execute and observe diagnostics of any remote device connected to the primary
bus and the ability to deactivate and restart the device.
2.5 AUTOMATION LEVEL
A. DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLLER (DDC)
1. Provide Digital System Controller BACnet Building Controllers (B-BC) and BACnet
Advanced Application Controllers (B-AAC) . All DDCs shall BTL certified (BACnet/IP) that
shall perform its assigned control and energy management functions as a stand-alone unit.
Furthermore, it shall be communicating with the BMS. The digital system controller shall be
peer to peer communicating and shall perform its full control and energy management
functions, regardless of condition of communications network.. BACnet/IP controllers on the
Ethernet Data Link/Physical layer shall be able to act as a Master to allow for the exchange
and sharing of data variables and messages with any other controller connected on the
same communication network. Slave controllers are not acceptable. These stand-alone
capabilities shall include, but not be limited to:
a. Control
i. Provide control algorithms, which shall be resident in the DDC to permit ON /OFF,
Proportional, Integral and Derivative control modes in any combination to meet the
needs of the application. Other control modes such as adaptive, incremental, floating
or two positions must be available to adapt according to job needs.
ii. Perform all control in a digital manner using the digital signal from the
microprocessor-based controller converted through electronic circuitry for
modulation of electric actuators.
iii. Ensure that more than one control loop can be coupled together in a cascade
configuration.
b. Energy Management
i. Provide the DDC to be capable of performing all the energy management functions
necessary to reduce energy consumption. These programs shall include, but not be
limited to:
– Supply air re-set using space load demand.
– Economizer control.
– Optimal start/stop using an adaptive algorithm to prevent the need for manual
adjustment of parameters.
– User tailored programs. The library of routines available in firmware must be
capable of generating additional programs as may be required for specific user
requirements. These should include, but not be limited to:
 Chiller efficiency.
 Intermediate season (dead zone) control.
 VAV fan matching & supply fan control (airflow control).
 Trending of variables.
 Historical data storage.
Page 311 of 429

 Totalizing.
 Holiday programming.
 Occupancy Schedule.
2. Local Display and Adjustment Panel: Provide the DDC with a digital display, programmed
to display analog variables, binary conditions, off normal scans and other analog or binary
information required for analysis and adjustment of the system being controlled. The display
panel shall contain visible indication lights to indicate, automatic operation, manual or
override operation, a test and associated trouble light, alarm indication and an auxiliary light
associated with the special purpose auxiliary function keys. Manual switches shall also be
included to be used in testing and commissioning phases.
3. The associated keyboard shall contain numerical keys to call-up the desired point and type of
value to be displayed and have several special dedicated keys for such functions as manual-
auto, test and function and value enter, as an aid to the operator. The digital display should also
have the capability to call points by there associated operator defined names.
4. Adjustments of control variables shall be conveniently available at the controller through the
keyboard and display. These adjustments shall include, but not be limited to, proportional gain,
integral rate, the velocity and acceleration constants associated with incremental control and
on/off values of two-position control.
5. Different protection levels shall control data access and modifications of specific parameters.
6. DDC shall provide at least two serial data communication ports for simultaneous operation of
multiple operator I/O devices such as printers, personal computers, and portable Operator's
Terminals. The outstations shall allow temporary use of portable devices without interrupting the
normal operation of permanently connected modems, printers or network terminals.
7. All Point interface modules (PIM) shall be easily exchanged and the failure of one PIM shall not
affect any other PIM. Field terminations shall be such that the removal of a failed PIM shall not
require the removal and reconnecting of field device cable terminations.
8. All Point interface modules (PIM) shall be such that all output points can be manually positioned
via an onboard on-off-auto or potentiometer dial as applicable to the individual BMS point.
9. Provide LED on the PIM to indicate the status of each PIM.
10. Additional outlets must be provided for each DDCs for UPS interface ,DDCs power ratings must
be considered and added to the UPS capacity.
B. Field Programmable
1. The controller shall contain all necessary mathematics including fixed formulas for psychometric
calculations, logic, utility functions and all standard energy calculations and control functions in
ROM to be available in any combination for field programming the unit.
2. The controllers processors shall be 32 bit.
3. Final field programs shall be stored on EEPROMS.
C. Expandability:
1. The DDC shall be expandable by adding additional field interface units that operate through
the processor of the DDC. The processor in the DDC shall be able to manage remote field
interface units thereby expanding its control loop and energy management point capacity.
D. Calibration Compensation:
1. To maintain long term analog accuracy in the controller sensing circuits, the DDC shall
sense the voltage being supplied to the resistance sensing element and through firmware
compensate for power supply changes due to long term drift or drift due to ambient
temperature changes at the power supply.
Page 312 of 429
E. Associated Hardware
1. Use electric actuators and sensors that are compatible with the output of the DDC.
F. Variable Air Volume Box Individual Room Controller (Application Specific Controller ASC)
1. Provide stand-alone Bacnet control and link to BMS. Provide a BTL controller allowing
programming, monitoring and all possible and applicable control applications on the BMS
network. The VAV ASC shall be capable of totally monitoring and controlling all VAV box aspects.
Supply air pressure compensation control is also required. Provide also room thermostat with
Digital LCD Display complete with temperature set point selection, and on/off switch. The room
temperature controller must also be provided with duct temperature sensor to perform automatic
changeover.
2. Transformer. ASC power supply shall be fused or current limiting and shall be rated at a
minimum of 125% of ASC power consumption.
G. Fan Coil Unit Room Temperature Controller (Application Specific Controller ASC):
1. Provide stand-alone Bacnet room temperature controller BTL certified with all its associated
cables, cable trays, mounting accessories. Provide also room thermostat with Digital LCD
Display complete with temperature set point selection, three-speed fan selection and
automatic fan selection switch, and on/off switch. The room temperature controller must
also be capable to perform automatic changeover based on pipe thermostat decision in
case of two pipes FCU and must be equipped with Heating/Cooling switch in case of 4 pipes
FCU. In 2 pipes FCU, electrical heater will only be used in intermediate season. For Energy
Management purposes, Occupancy switch will shut fan coil unit off in case of un-occupancy
and start it back in case of occupancy detected. For FCU serving corridors, temperature
setpoint should be adjusted by BMS through duct temperature sensors.
2. Transformer. ASC power supply shall be fused or current limiting and shall be rated at a
minimum of 125% of ASC power consumption.
H. Diagnostics:
1. The DDC shall contain in its program a self-test procedure for checking the indication lights
on the digital display, and by means of a nondestructive memory, check the computer.
2. Provide software to check the execution of all required automatic control sequences and
produce a report for Engineer approval.
I. All Controllers should have a minimum of 20% installed spares in Memory, processing units and each
type of input/ output points.
J. Cabinet:
1. Enclose the DDC in a metal cabinet .Construct the cabinet such that it can be mounted and
electrical terminations made during the construction phase of the Project. Remove the DDC
electronics to be added at a later stage, i.e. commissioning of the system. Segregate terminals
into groups carrying different voltages in accordance with BS 7671 (IEE regulations). The cabinet
color finish will be full glass to BS 4800 shad number 18E55
2. Provide the DDC cabinet with a key lock. All cabinets on each installation shall utilize one master
key.
3. The DDC cabinet shall be properly earthed.
4. Electrically terminate all control wiring and system communications inside the DDC cabinet.
5. The cabinet and wiring should be designed in a manner to facilitate future maintenance needs.
6. All electronics should be installed in a NEMA enclosure suitable for the environment in which
they are located. IP65 cabinet shaded for outdoor installations and IP54 for Indoor installations
Page 313 of 429

7. Panel or enclosures shall have 20% spare space for future addition of BMS
8. Field cabling shall be terminated on a terminal strip. strain relief to be provided.
9. Power supply / transformer calculations to be provided.
K. Ensure the DDCs preserve existing software and data for a period of not less than 72 hours while
the electrical power supply is lost. Should the DDC go off any reason, this will be reported to the
BMS.
L. Ensure the DDCs are suitable to operate normally within the following environmental ranges:
1. Voltage : 220V ± 10%

2. Frequency : 50Hz ± 1%
3. Temperature: 0 to 50 C
4. R.H. : 20% to 90% non-condensation.
M. All controllers shall be equipped with an operating terminal for local maintenance and monitoring.
N. Outstation Interfaces With Sensors and Operating Devices:
1. Binary inputs - Electrical power for contacts shall be provided by the outstation.
2. Binary outputs - The contact output signals rated at 2A inductive shall be suitable for operating
remote devices with 220 V 50 Hz coils.
3. Binary inputs and outputs - If the BMS Contractor's system requires any form of interfacing other
than those for the systems detailed above he shall provide all necessary interfacing elements
for each remote sensor and device.
4. Where voltage change of state is used, it shall be the BMS Contractor's responsibility to ensure
that the remote sensors and operating devices, including those supplied by others, are
compatible with the system offered.
5. The BMS Contractor shall supply and install all necessary interfacing devices for control panels,
motor starters and packaged equipment being monitored e.g. boiler, chillers, pressurization
units, etc. interfacing devices shall include but not limited to kWH transducers, voltage and
current transducers including CTs and VTs if any.
6. Analogue input - Outstations shall be able to accept standard input ranges (4-20 m Amp, 0-1
volts DC, 0-10 volts DC).
7. It shall be the BMS Contractor's responsibility to check the signal range of any devices supplied
by others. Any transducers required to produce suitable signals shall be provided and installed
as part of this Contract.
8. Conversion to engineering units and alarm levels shall be provided by the system software in
the outstation. Overall resolution between sensors and outstations shall be better than ± 1% of
the input range span of the sensor transducer combination.
9. All analogue temperature sensors shall have a resolution not exceeding 0.25o C, accuracy better
than ± 0.5oC and stability at least equal to platinum resistance thermometers of Class 1 standard
to BS 1904.
10. Analogue outputs - Output signals shall be either (4-20 ma, 0-1 volt DC, 0-10 volts DC).
11. For all AHUs supply a unitary DDC for the control and monitoring of the various aspects of each
AHU separately (one controller for each AHU and one AHU per controller).
12. Every LCP should contain at least one DDC controller C/W all it's input/output modules.
13. All LCPs should be fed from UPS power supply.
Page 314 of 429

2.6 FIELD DEVICES
A. All electric switching devices shall be selected for the applied load and UL listed and labeled for the
application and environment to which they are applied. Miscellaneous, electric, pneumatic, and
mechanical devices shall include:
1. Control and measuring devices shall have the following limits of accuracy.
 Temperature : ± 0.5oC
 Pressure : ± 5% of the measured value.
 Humidity : ± 2 % RH.
2. Airflow measuring stations required to accomplish the specified control sequence shall be
furnished under this section but installed under the sheet metal section. Airflow measuring
stations shall be of heavy gauge metal construction, and shall be furnished with an air
straightening section with an open face area of not less than 97% , air flow measuring must
be complete with LCD.
a. Each airflow measuring station shall measure airflow by means of a network of static
and total pressure sensors factory positioned and connected in parallel to produce
an averaged velocity pressure. The measured velocity pressure converted to airflow
(CFM) shall have accuracy within 2% of the full scale throughout the velocity range
from 700 to 4,000 fpm when measured under ideal laboratory conditions. The
location of stations shall meet manufacturer's guidelines.
b. The maximum resistance to airflow shall not exceed 0.6 times the velocity head. The
unit shall be suitable to withstand temperatures up to 250F.
3. Averaging Elements:
a. Shall be used on ducts having a cross-sectional area exceeding 0.6 m2 and shall
have a minimum capillary length of 5m.
b. The capillary element shall be serpentine across the whole duct.
c. Where the span of the element is less than 1m then it shall be fixed with purpose-
made clips and may be unsupported across the duct.
d. Where the span of the element is above 1m then it shall be supported on Unistrut or
similar rigid support.
Page 315 of 429

4. Airflow Velocity Sensor including transducer and cable sensor shall be provided for measuring
air flow in ducts. Air velocity measured value shall be converted to DC 0-10 V or 4-20ma output
signal. The sensing element film must be independent from the flow direction and insensitive
to any kind of dirt in the air flow. The depth of the sensing element must be selected according
to duct cross section and design air velocity.
Sensor shall be installed on ducts where air flow is quite apart from damper and register.
Measuring accuracy shall be +/-(0.2 m/s +3% of measured value) at temperature of 20C ,
Humidity of 45% RH , 1013hPa
5. Smoke dampers where indicated on the plans shall conform to the UL555S Leakage Class
specified. Damper actuator shall be UL listed and suitable for the application and following
the same specs. The operating ambient temperature of the actuator shall be suitable for the
intended application.
6. Automatic control valves 50 mm and smaller shall be screwed type, and valves 65 mm and
larger shall be flanged. Valves shall be ANSI-rated to withstand the pressures and
temperatures encountered. Valves shall have stainless-steel stems and spring loaded
Teflon packaging with replaceable discs.
a. All modulating straight-through water valves shall be provided with equal-percentage
contoured throttling plugs. All three-way valves shall be provided with linear throttling plugs
such that the total flow through the valve shall remain constant regardless of the valve's
position. Valves shall be sized for a pressure drop equal to the coil they serve.
b. All modulating steam valves shall have a linear characteristic for 90% of the closing stroke
and equal-percentage for the final 10%
7. Butterfly valve construction shall be ductile iron ASTM A536 body with aluminum bronze
disc, stainless steel type 410 shaft, stainless steel type 316 taper pin, carbon steel key,
carbon steel lever & screw and carbon steel stop plate. Where butterfly valve is installed,
install orifice plate as per HVAC Valves specifications.
8. Chilled water Butterfly valves shall have backup batteries for fail safe operation.
9. All valves shall be minimum 16 bars rated and comply with BS EN-60534.
10. Dynamic, Modulating, Pressure Independent Control Valves (PICV) shall be provided where
indicated in the design drawings complete with integrated membrane based pressure
controller.
Pressure independence balancing and control, two pressure/ temperature knobs for differential
pressures verifications . Linear flow control at all valve settings with automatic flow limiter.
Minimum and maximum flow settings with ability to fully close-off function , Authority of 100% ,
valve leakage accuracy must not exceed 0.5%. PICV valve must complete with modulating
actuator for combined Control/PICV valves.
11. All automatically controlled devices, unless specified otherwise elsewhere, shall be provided
with motorized actuators sized to operate their appropriate loads with sufficient reserve
power to provide smooth modulating action or two-position action and tight close off.
12. Safety high limit shall be 135 degrees manual reset type when provided in the exhaust or
return air and 10 degrees above the anticipated high temperature when provided in the
supply air.
13. Safety low limit shall be manual reset six-meter limited fill type responsive to the coolest
section of its length.
14. Duct smoke detectors have to be able to send smoke signal to both Fire Alarm Panel (FAP)
and BMS at the same time.
15. Pressure Switches for Air Systems shall meet the following:
a. An IP54 to IEC 60529 transmitter housing for an indoor application & IP65 to IEC 60529
housing for outdoor application.
b. SPDT switch rated for 10 A min. at 120Vac.
Page 316 of 429
c. Set point trip adjustment with scale to indicate setting.
d. Switches used for filter differential pressures shall also have a display of the monitored
differential pressure.
e. Dead band adjustment.
f. Select range such that it covers from zero duct static pressure relative to the exterior of the
duct up to a static pressure between 20- 50 % in excess of the maximum static pressure
that could be encountered in the duct relative to the duct exterior. Typically :
g. For low pressure commercial duct use a range of 0-500pa.
h. For medium pressure duct use 0-1500pa.
i. For high pressure duct use a range of 0-2500pa.
j. Temperature range of -18deg. C .to 71 Deg.c.
k. Manual reset.
16. Air Flow Switches
a. Shall be selected for the correct air velocity, duct size and mounting attitude.
b. Where special atmospheric conditions are required or detailed in the Motor Control Panel
drawings the parts of the switches shall be suitably coated or made to withstand such
conditions. Any variations from standard shall be detailed in the Contract and it will be
subject to Engineer approval.
c. Shall be suitable for mounting in any plane.
d. Accuracy should not be less than ± 5% of the measured value.
17. Water Flow Switches
a. Shall be selected for the correct water velocity and pipe size and mounting attitude.
Accuracy should not be less than ± 2% of the measured value.
18. Level Switches
a. Shall be selected for the fluid type, system pressure and have adjustable differentials. They
may be:
i. Conventional float type.
ii. Capacitance type.
iii. Conductivity type.
b. Where conductivity types are offered they shall include all probes (including earth).
c. Float switch shall meet the following:
i. Polypropylene float, PVC cable.
ii. 13A running current @ 120vac,11A current @ 240vac.
iii. SPDT type.
iv. Operating temperature of 0 Deg.C. to 71 Deg.C.
v. Operating pressure of 180 KPa.
19. Room Temperature Detectors
a. Shall have sensitivities such that a change at the detector of 0.2 ⁰C from the stabilized
condition is sufficient to start modulating the corrective element.
b. Shall operate on extra-low voltage and be suitable for mounting on British Standard conduit
boxes.
c. Should have a range from -10 to 50C.
Page 317 of 429

20. Room Thermostats
a. Shall be suitable for mounting on British Standard conduit boxes and complete with LCD
screen
b. Shall have sensitivities such that a change at the detector of 0.2 ⁰C from the stabilized
condition is sufficient to start modulating the corrective element
c. Sensor Measuring ranges shall be
i. -40 to +70°C, 0 to 100% r.h
ii. 0-10 V or 4 -20 mA output,
iii. Operating voltage AC24 V or DC13.5…35 DC
iv. Capacitive Humidity measurement.
v. IP-65 housing with display
d. Where room adjustment is required, this facility shall include mechanical stops to limit the
amount of adjustment.
e. Manual override shall only be provided when required or stated on the drawings.
f. Room thermostat shall directly control cooling coils / heating elements, or shall be
connected to the BMS system through standard protocol Bacnet Mstp or BacnetIP.
g. Outdoor mounting kit and accessory to be provided for outdoor station as indicated in
drawings
21. Duct Mounted Temperature Detectors
a. Duct mounted temperature sensor shall meet the following:
i. Stainless steel probe of length between 1/3 & 2/3 of the duct width.
ii. 100 or 1000 ohm platinum RTD with a minimum temperature coefficient of resistance
of 0.00375ohm/ohm/deg.C must be used.
iii. Monitored temperature to be reported with an accuracy of ± 0.5 deg.C.
iv. Provide two wire 0-10 V or 4-20 mA RTD transmitter where necessary to meet
monitoring accuracy requirements provide a 3-wire or 4-wire configuration.
v. Duct mounted moisture/water proof housing with conduit fitting.
22. Temperature and Humidity Cleanliness Monitoring system:
a. To be provided for clean rooms
b. The number of particles and the temperature and humidity of suspended particles at each
measurement point can be monitored in real time
c. The system shall indicate the following : online particle counters, temperature and humidity
sensors, multi –point monitoring software and alarm system
d. The material and finish of Clean room sensors must be coordinated with Clean room
specialist covering the required accuracy and material
23. Industrial type Temperature Transmitter (Chilled water and Hot water pipes)
a. Platinum RTD, PT-100 ohm
b. Sensor Measuring ranges shall be from 0 to +50°C, 0-10 V output, active sensor, power
supply 24 Vac/Vdc (3-4 wires) or 4 -20 mA output , passive loop, power supply 18 to 30 Vdc
(2 wires).
c. ABS IP 65 housing, with display.
Page 318 of 429
d. Supplied with stainless teal 316L well and anti condensation grease.
e. Features:
i. Units of measurement : °C, °F
ii. Accuracy * : ±0,5% of reading ±0,4°C
iii. Response time : 1/e (63%) 5 sec. (ambient)
iv. 1/e (63%) 20 sec. (air tight)
v. Resolution : 0,1°C
vi. Type of sensor :Pt 100 class A as per DIN IEC751
vii. Type of fluid : Water
f. Housing Features:
i. Housing : ABS
ii. Fire-proof classification : HB as per UL94
iii. Protection : IP65 (air tight model)
iv. Display : 5-digit LCD.Dimensions 50 x 15 mm
v. Height of the digits : 10 mm
vi. Cable grip : for cables Ø 7 mm max.
g. Technical Specification:
i. 3-4 wires passive Loop 4-20 mA (power supply 18/30Vdc), 2 wires maximum
ii. load : 500 Ohms (4-20 mA) minimum load : 1 K Ohms (0-10 V).
iii. Electro-magnetically compatibility : EN61326
iv. Electrical connection screw terminal block for cables Ø 1.5 mm² max.
v. Working temperature : 0 to + 50°C (ambient model)
vi. Storage temperature : -10 to +70°C
vii. Environment : Water
h. Thermowell mounted temperature sensors shall meet the following:
i. Rigid stainless steel probe of length which is at minimum,20% of the pipe diameter.
ii. 100 or 1000 ohm platinum RTD with a minimum temperature coefficient of resistance
of 0.00375ohm/ohm/deg.C must be used.
iii. Monitored temperature to be reported with an accuracy of ± 0.25 deg.C.
iv. Provide two wire 4-20 mA RTD transmitter where required with a temperature range
that is appropriate for the application.
v. where necessary to meet monitoring accuracy requirements provide a 3-wire or 4-
wire configuration.
vi. Stainless steel 316L thermowell.
vii. Provide thermal grease to aid temperature sensing.
i. Should have a range from:
i. 0 to 50C, for duct Mounted Temperature Detector.
ii. 0 to 70C, for chilled Water Circuit Temperature Detector.
iii. 0 to 120C, for condenser Water Circuit Temperature Detector.
iv. 0 to 120C, for Hot Water Circuit Temperature Detector.
Page 319 of 429
j. Duct mounted averaging element detectors shall have a minimum sensing length of 5m.
k. Multiple thermistor beads will not be acceptable.
24. Industrial type Differential Pressure Transmitter (Chilled water and Hot water pipes):
a. General Features:
i. 4-20mA
ii. 0.25% accuracy class
iii. Ranges 30 psi through 20,000 psi
iv. – 40 to +125°C temperature capability
v. All welded pressure construction
vi. Proven polysilicon thin film sensor
vii. Precision ASIC based electronics
viii. High EMI/RFI immunity rating
ix. Highly configurable
x. Voltage and current outputs
xi. Choice of electrical connections
b. Housing Features:
i. Housing : ABS
ii. Fire-proof classification : HB as per UL94
iii. Protection : IP65 (air tight model)
iv. Display : 5-digit LCD.Dimensions 50 x 15 mm
v. Height of the digits : 10 mm
vi. Cable grip : for cables Ø 7 mm max.
c. Environmental Specifications
i. Temperature:
ii. Compensated –40 to 125°C (–40 to 257°F)
iii. Operating –40 to 125°C (–40 to 257°F)
iv. Storage –40 to 125°C (–40 to 257°F)
v. Humidity: 0 to 100% R.H., no effect
d. Ratio metric Output

i. 0.5-4.5 Vdc, 3 wire 5 Vdc ±0.5 Vdc 3.5mA
ii. Current Output 4-20mA, 2 wire 9-36 Vdc
iii. Reverse Polarity & Mis wired Protected: Yes
iv. Insulation Breakdown Voltage: 100 Vac
v. Insulation Resistance: Greater than 100 megohms at 100 Vdc
vi. CE Compliance: Per EN 61326: 1997+ A1: 1998 +
vii. A2: 2001, Annex A (Heavy Industrial
Page 320 of 429

25. Industrial Type Pressure Transmitter (Chilled water and Hot water pipes):
a. Digital pressure transmitter with piezoresistive measuring cell and metallic welded
membrane
b. Highest plant safety through piezoresistive measuring cell and metallic welded membrane.
c. Quick setup with freely adjustable measuring range without presetting for easy
commissioning reduces costs and time.
d. Used For Non-hazardous area
e. Output: 4-20mA HART
f. Aluminum Housing
g. Gland M20, IP66/68 NEMA4X/6P Electrical Connection
h. ±0.15% Reference Accuracy
i. 316L Process Connection
j. 316L Membrane Material
k. Fill Fluid: Silicone oil
26. Industrial Type Flow Switch (Chilled water and Hot water):
a. Flow switch for monitoring and displaying relative mass flow rates of liquid media in the
range from 0.03 to 3 m/s
b. Configurable with software ReadWin 2000 or FieldCare for quick configuration and reliable
storage of device settings.
c. Top housing section which can be rotated 310° and rotatable display make it possible to
read the measured values in all orientations.
d. Used for Non-hazardous area
e. Plug ISO4400 NPT1/2 Electrical Connection
f. Power Supply; 18-30VDC
g. Output:; 1x switch PNP
h. Display: Digital
i. Measuring range: -20...85oC, 0.03-3m/s
j. Adjustment;: on site
k. Process Connection: Thread ANSI 1/4NPT, 316L
27. Pressure Detectors
a. Shall be suitable for the medium and the working temperatures and pressures. The pressure
detector shall be capable of withstanding a hydraulic test pressure of 1.5 times the working
pressure.
b. Connections shall be suitable for 8 mm o.d. Copper tube.
c. Ductwork versions shall be supplied with air connections permitting their use as static or
differential pressure detectors.
d. The Set point shall fall within 40 % - 70 % of the sensing range of the detector.
e. The detector shall have sensitivity such that a change of 2% from the stabilized condition
shall cause modulation of the corrective element.
f. Detector must be provided with LCD
28. Actuators
Page 321 of 429

a. General
i. Shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturers recommendations.
ii. Shall have a sufficient torque to open and close valves and dampers against the
maximum out of balance pressure across them.
iii. Shall have position indicators unless fitted to terminal units.
iv. All Dampers and valve Actuators must be Spring Return, suitable for the System
operation.
b. Control Damper Actuators
i. Shall be of the type where the damper spindle passes through the actuator and is
secured by a U clamp.
c. Actuator Additional Features
i. Required when detailed in the Motor Control Panel Equipment Schedules or the
Performance Section of the Specification.
– Auxiliary Switches Shall have changeover contacts suitable for 220V-a.c. 2 amp
rating.
 Modulating Motors Auxiliary Switch packs containing at least two electrically
independent switches one for each end of the motor travel, adjustable for
operation over at least half the motor travel.
 Two-positions Motor one electrically independent switch.
– Feedback Potentiometer
– One potentiometer whose resistance varies proportionally with the actuator
travel.
– Fail Safe
 Auxiliary spring or power pack for fail-safe conditions.
 The spring shall be rated for a minimum of 1000 operations.
 The power packs shall have their batteries trickle charged and each full
charge shall be capable of operating the actuator ten times. The battery
shall require no maintenance and shall have a life of at least 5 years.
 Both fail-safe devices shall have sufficient torque to open or close valves
and dampers against the maximum out of balance pressure across them.
– Valve close off
 All Valve actuators must have sufficient torque to close against 1.5 of the
ESP of the sec. chilled water head according to the ASHRAE
recommendations.
29. Flow Measurement (WATER)
a. Shall be of the Orifice Plate/Differential Pressure Transmitter type.
b. The BMS Contractor shall select suitably sized equipment to give the minimum pressure
drop commensurate with accurate measurement (±1).
c. Attention is drawn to the necessity for good flow conditions onto the devices and the
manufacturer's minimum straight pipe dimensions.
d. Orifice plates shall be provided complete with carrier rings.
e. The pipe work specialist shall install all PIPEWORK mounted equipment.
f. Differential pressure switches shall be connected to the flow measurement devices using 8
mm o.d. copper tube, isolating valves and fittings in accordance with the manufacturer'
recommendations.
Page 322 of 429
g. The BMS Contractor shall ensure compatibility between the flow transmitters and BMS for
accurate monitoring of flow rates.
30. Gas Detection (Carbon Monoxide)
Carbon monoxide detecting system shall be installed to cover the car park area. Carbon
monoxide gas detecting equipment shall be as manufactured by Sieger Limited or
International Gas Detectors Or Equal Approved. The detector shall provide an output signal
proportional to the CO concentration in the detector vicinity. The output signal shall be 0 – 10
V DC or 4- 20 m Amp. The number of CO detector indicated in the design documents is the
minimum number to be provided, however, the system supplier shall consider the actual
coverage area of the supplied detectors as per manufacturer recommendations.
31. Infra Red Room Temperature Detector
a. Surface mounted type, sensing temperature remotely far from 6m lengths in area 1m.
b. Scale range shall cove a band of 15o C - 26o C, accuracy of 0.05o C and sensitivity
of 0.1o C.
c. Shall be suitable for mounting on British Standard conduit boxes.
32. Provide linear precision resistance elements and resistance averaging elements for
temperature sensing. Their range shall be -295 o C to 1370.
33. Limited range sensors shall be acceptable provided they are capable of sensing the range
expected for the point at the specified accuracy.
34. Sense filter pressure drop for each filter bank specified on the point list by means of a
differential pressure sensing device which closes and latches an electrical contact when the
filter pressure differential exceeds an adjustable pressure range setting.
35. Provide differential pressure sensing devices for all fans, specified in the point list.
36. This point shall be used as start/stop feedback for points specified as status on the point list.
37. Water flow for each pump shall be indicated by means of a differential pressure switch that
opens an electrical contact as the differential pressure falls below a pre-adjusted pressure
range setting.
38. For all close-coupled pumps use auxiliary contacts provided with motor controls for start/stop
feedback indication.
39. Water flow analog sensors shall be provided complete with flow element and shall be an all
solid state precision industrial type with stainless steel meter body, maximum error of not more
than.5% of span, and 4 to 2O ma output. Sensor shall be rated for 16-bar minimum and
installed in strict accordance to the manufacturer's instructions complete with three-valve
manifold for calibration and maintenance.
40. Kilowatt transducers shall be of the integrated electronic type with accuracy of .2% of scale.
Page 323 of 429
For balanced (such as motors) three phase loads, two current transformers (CT's) shall be
provided and for unbalanced loads, three CT's shall be provided. Two or three potential
transformers (PT's) shall be provided as recommended by the manufacturer for the
application. Output shall be 4 to 20 ma. Suitable CT's and PT's shall be provided and installed
unless specifically specified with other equipment.
41. Use voltage and current transformers provided with motor starters to provide signals to the
CPU for KW monitoring.
42. Provide all control points requiring remote control point adjustment with the control devices
that will hold the last requested output regardless of CPU malfunction or power failure to the
control panel.
43. All two position-switching devices shall have concealed adjustment unless detailed otherwise
and approved by the Engineer. If hand-reset feature is required, it will be detailed in the Motor
Control Panel Drawings. All two position-switching devices shall operate on 220 V a.c. and all
accessible live parts shall be shrouded. An earth terminal shall be provided.
44. Freon Leakage Detector:
The detector shall be of the semiconductor type with a measuring range of 0 - 3000 ppm. The
detector shall have a maximum concentration of not less that 10000 ppm. The detector shall
have a quick response for both reaction and recovery. The detector shall have long service
life not less than 3 years. The temperature and RH sensitivity of the detector shall not exceed
0.02 %. The degree protection of the detector shall be suitable for the area of use i.e. not less
than IP65. The output of the detector shall be 0 – 10 V DC or 4- 20 m Amp to be connected to
the DDC.
45. Water Leakage Detection
A. Water leak detection system shall be installed for continuous protection from the risk of water within
critical areas of the building where there is a route for water pipe (data center, IT rooms, electrical rooms
...and where indicated in design documents) .
B. The water leak detection system shall identify any abnormal presence of water on any point of its
connected sense cables, to the nearest meter
C. In the event of a leak, an audible alarm is triggered and the dry contact is activated. The panel’s touch
screen display shows the time and date of the alarm, the type of fault and the location of the leak to the
nearest metre. Dynamic zone maps highlighting faults shall be indicated on the water leakage panel’s
screen.
D. The sense cable shall perform the following functions continuously
i- Detection of the presence of water at any point along its length
ii- Location of the leak to the nearest meter
iii- Detection of a cut or break at any point
iv- Digital communication of the nature and location of the fault to the digital unit
E. The sense cables shall be connected via male and female connectors. A microcontroller shall be
embedded in the sense cable to ensure digital and independent leak detection and communication
between each sense cable and the digital monitoring unit.
F. The sense cable shall be made of an abrasive-resistant material. The sense cable shall be made of light
and flexible material in an easily identifiable colour.
G. The digital touch screen monitoring unit shall be a microprocessor based complete leak locating system.
It shall receive data processed and transmitted by each sense cable as well as raising the alarm. It shall
be supplied from the same supplier as the sense cables.
Page 324 of 429

H. There shall be configurable dry contacts available in the system to enable remote monitoring and control.
The dry contacts shall indicate normal and alarm condition. The relay position shall be identified by a
luminous indicator located on the motherboard of the digital unit. Any interruption in power shall be
indicated by a specific dry contact.
I. RS-232, RS-422/485 serial ports with Modbus communication protocol shall be available on the digital
monitoring unit to be interfaced with BMS. An Ethernet port shall be available on the monitoring unit, for
providing network functionalities.
J. Warning labels shall be placed on the sense cable approximately every five (5) metres. Hold-down clips
shall be used to fix the sense cables every one (1) metre.
46. Air Quality Sensor:
The air quality sensor shall be suitable for operation in rooms or ducts as intended in the
design. The sensor shall be microprocessor-based with the capability to sense CO2 and
volatile organic compounds with accuracy of 0.03% . The sensor shall have an output signal
of 0 – 10 V DC or 4 – 20 m Amp. The sensor shall be complete with any processor to produce
an output signal ready for the associated ventilation DDC.
2.7 METERING SYSTEM
General
The metering system comprises :
- Main workstation
- Ethernet controller
- BTU meters
- Domestic water meters
- KWH meters
- Gas meters
1. Main workstation
The Central Processing Unit (CPU) is to control operator input/output, data transmission to and
from the metering calculators and to perform all software functions as specified hereafter.
Provide a computer (PC) based CPU, with the latest state-of-art technology; the following is the
minimum configuration of an Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM), such as DELL, LENOVO,
HP, etc. with one of the latest Intel processors available in the market. In addition to Report Printer
2. Billing software
System must be supplied with billing software complete with all necessary hardware & software
accessories.
3. Ethernet Main Controller
General Features:
 M-Bus central unit with integrated Web server.

 Compatible with www.bill24.ch online cost allocation.
 Up to 120 or 250 M-Bus meters.
 5.7" LCD touch screen and plain text in various languages.
Page 325 of 429

 Data logger with plug-in data memory (optional).
 10 MB Ethernet interface.
 For integrating telephone modems (analog, ISDN, GSM).
 RS485 interfaces.
4. BTU metering station (comprising Heat calculator, flow meter and two paired temperature
sensors)
a. Heat Calculator:
Heat calculators must be easily accessible for reading, and protected against heat and
electromagnetic interference. Heat calculators must be clearly marked together with their flow
meter and temperature sensor pair. This is extremely important at multiple metering points
where confusion can arise. Energy meters should be complete with all software and LCD
screen communicating with M-Bus.
i. Measuring principle
Thermal energy is calculated from the flow rate of the heat carrier, taking into account its
physical characteristics (specific heat and density), and the difference between the forward
and return flow temperatures.
ii. General Features:
 Unique dynamic range.

 Measurement independent of water quality or magnetite deposits.
 High accuracy and long-term stability.
 Accurate invoicing of all heat generated and supplied.
 Monitoring of energy losses from piping.
iii. Installation
Heat meters must be installed according to a systematic concept, depending on whether

individual consumers are to be metered or an overall consumption balance is required. In the
latter case, all part - consumers must be metered – extrapolation of unmetered components
as a difference in the main measurement is not admissible since it usually causes significant
errors. Installation recommendations the installation and commissioning of heat meters is a
specialist’s task, demanding the greatest care and expertise. Compliance is required with EN
1434 Part 6 guidelines and the product operating instructions. Precision requirements can
only be met if the meter is installed correctly.
b. Flow meter
i. Electromagnetic Flow meter:
Provide electromagnetic flow meter for all pipe sizes.
Page 326 of 429

As well as the usual flow meters with a pulse output, option 2AIN also makes it possible to
use flow meters with an analogue output such as EM meters or orifice plates. When flow
meters with a pulse output are used, the pulse value indicates the volume to which one pulse
corresponds. This value should be selected as low as possible, in the interests of high
resolution and continuous measurement.
The point of installation is of crucial importance since the volume-to mass conversion is
performed at the temperature specified under "installation location". Because flow/return
definitions can lead to misunderstandings, above all in refrigeration systems, the terms "hot
side" and "cold side" are used for greater clarity. In heating systems, for example, the return
flow loop is the cold side of the heat circuit. Flow meters should preferably be installed in
piping sections near room temperature. This makes for greater accuracy and extends service
life.
Electromagnetic Flow Meter General Features:
 High accuracy (0.5% minimum).

 Large measuring range.
 Negligible pressure loss.
 No moving parts (no wear).
c. Temperature measurement
For temperature measurements, the Heat calculator uses paired platinum temperature
sensors (Pt100 to DIN IEC 751). When pairing sensors, the two most similar ones from a large
number are chosen to form one pair; the maximum divergence within the pair must not exceed
0.05°C. In conformity with EN 1434-2, sensors can only be paired if they have the same type
of installation and the same length. Careful attention must also be paid to sensor installation
and wiring. These are considered in the heat meter standard EN 1434 Parts 2 and 6.
All sensors must be calibrated in factory and supplied with its calibrated certificate.
5. Refer To electrical and mechanical specifications for KWHR meters, Water meters and Gas meters
2.8 DATA COMMUNICATIONS.
A. The DDC communications network shall support true peer-to-peer protocol allowing sensor sharing,
inter DDC event programs and global application programs without the presence of a host processor.
Each DDC shall have equal rights for data transfer and shall be designated as the communications
master but each device on the bus shall be capable of taking over the function of bus monitor to
assure that loss of any single device will not cause total bus failure. Where the proposed DDC system
does not allow for true peer-to-peer communication/data sharing between DDC and where the
system relies on a single master building controller/coordinator with distributed equipment, the BMS
Contractor shall provide a redundant master building controller for each building to take over the
functions of the failed building controller automatically.
1. Every DDC must be capable of transmitting/receiving messages to/from another DDC as well as
to all DDCs on the bus. Additionally, every DDC must be capable of transmitting/receiving
message to/from other DDCs located on another bus.
2. All messages transmitted must be positively acknowledged as received or negatively
acknowledged as not received. Negative acknowledgements shall immediately force a
retransmission of the message.
Page 327 of 429

3. Bus connected devices with no messages to transmit must send an "I'm OK" message each bus
cycle. Lack of an "I'm OK" message after successive retries shall constitute a communications
or device failure and be recognized as such by the bus and shall be recorded as not responding
on the system printer.
4. Full communications shall be sustained as long as there are at least two operational devices on
any segment of the bus.
5. Global data (all station messages) is to be available for use by any device on the bus as inputs
or outputs to its resident control programs.
6. Each DDC is to be provided with a communications watchdog to assure that an individual DDC
cannot permanently occupy the bus. If a DDC is determined to be "babbling", it shall be
automatically shut down and a flag set to annunciate this fact.
7. For a data integrity, all data streams are to be Manchester encoded to attain at minimum
Hamming distance (minimum number of bit errors that could cause an undetected error) of eight
and all messages are to contain a CRC 16 bit check-word.
8. Error recovery and communication initialization routines are to be completely distributed, i.e.,
resident in each bus-connected device.
9. Software counters are to be provided for cold starts, warm starts, privilege violation, illegal
instructions, address errors, bus errors, and zero divide as a diagnostic tool. Error types and
counts are to be operator accessible.
10. Use security recognition code at least at the start of data exchange, where a telephone system
is used. Ensure the device disconnects automatically in the absence of the correct security code.
11. Ensure that the communication system speed can operate a speed of at least 1000 logged
values and associated values per minute.
12. Ensure that all DDCs automatically synchronize their real time clocks with that of the system.
B. Multi bus communications capability is to be provided allowing exchange of data and execution of
programs across individual peer buses.
C. Communications between the central system and fire and security panels shall be via a U.L. 864
listed and approved supervised redundant transmission network.
D. Networking
1. IP Network: All devices that connect to the WAN shall be capable of operating at 10/ 100
megabits per second.
2. IP To Field Bus Routing Devices:
a. A Network Controller shall be used to provide this functionality.
b. These devices shall be configurable locally with IP crossover cable and configurable via
the IP network.
c. The routing configuration shall be such that only data packets from the field bus devices
that need to travel over the IP level of the architecture are forwarded.
E. Field Bus Wiring and Termination
1. The wiring of components shall use a bus or daisy chain concept with no tees, stubs, or
free topology.
2. Each field bus shall have a termination resistor at both ends of each segment.
A. Enterprise Network:
The system shall be capable of communicating over a Ethernet LAN. When connected to the LAN each
OWS shall be able to access data residing in any primary communications bus that is connected.
Page 328 of 429

Graphics anywhere in the connected architecture shall be viewable and fully functional, i.e. view a
system, read an analog value, command a point, change a set point, from any connected OWS. A
minimum of 20 OWSs shall be capable of interconnection on the LAN. All controller outstations shall
be inter-connected to the communication field bus and linked to the computer system via Ethernet -
field bus network adaptor. The details of the Ethernet-field bus network adaptor shall be proposed by
the BMS manufacturer depends on the field-bus technology applied. Open standard industrial field bus
such as BACnet/IP/Lonworks shall be used.
The adaptor shall be operated over the Ethernet network standard 10/100 Base-T connections. The
units shall include supporting for IP configuration protocols and telnet remote management.Standard
advanced technologies shall be supported including:
1. Client/server architecture with industry standard LAN operating systems, including Windows
LAN.
2. Standard LAN protocols for TCP/IP communications over Ethernet and Token Ring.
3. Variety of industry standard wiring configurations including unshielded twisted pair Thin-net,
token ring, and fiber optics.
B. Peer-To-Peer Network Layer:

Ethernet Field Bus Adaptor and DDCs shall directly reside on single or multiple networks such that
communications shall be executed directly between controllers and Ethernet Field Bus Adaptor on a
peer-to-peer basis at a selectable speed from 19,200 baud up to 1 Megabit.
C. Telecommunications:
OWS shall be capable of auto dial / auto answer from the host system to a remote system and or
remote standalone DDC panels via Ethernet network. The OWS when connected to a remote site
shall be capable of complete control and monitoring of all the points at the remote site as described
for OWS connected to the network. Points on the remote site that change state from normal to alarm
or other significant event shall also initiate an AutoDial sequence to establish a connection and
transmit it’s alarm condition to the host location.
D. Third Party Interface System. The successful bid vendor will supply all necessary hardware and
software, to create a communications interface between the proposed HVAC and electrical subsystems
(e.g. chillers, fire alarm system, lighting control systems, etc.) and that vendor’s proposed BMS. The
physical data link between the proposed BMS and the HVAC subsystem must be twisted pair wiring
via an RS485 or RS232C protocol. The following functionality must be supported by the proposed
interface:
1. Read status and analog value point information from the subsystem at the proposed BMS
central station.
2. Command subsystem points to a digital state or to an analog value from the proposed BMS
central station.
3. Incorporate all subsystem points within the proposed BMS schedule, trend, energy
management routine, or graphic display functionalities.
4. Supporting the configuration of subsystem devices on the proposed BMS central station will be
an asset
Page 329 of 429

2.9 SOFTWARE INTERFACES
A. Interface with Chillers: The BMS shall interface with the Chillers microprocessor controller to read at
minimum:
1. Entering and leaving chilled water and condensed water temperatures

2. Chilled water temperature set point
3. Stage status
4. Stage fault
5. General alarm
6. Operating pressure
7. Running hours
8. Low pressure alarm.
9. KWR
10. Compressor discharge temperature
11. Number of compressor starts
12. VSD operating frequency
13. VSD alarm
14. Any available data requested by the operator
B. Interface with Variable Speed Drives: The BMS shall interface with the Variable Speed Drives to read
and write at minimum:
1. Start /Stop
2. Speed Control
3. Speed feedback
4. fault
5. General alarm
6. Running hours
7. Current, voltage, Power factor ,KWR
8. Frequency
C. Interface with Soft starters: The BMS shall interface with the Soft starter to read and write at minimum:
1. Start /Stop
2. Speed Control
3. Speed feedback
4. fault
5. General alarm
6. Running hours
Page 330 of 429

D. Interface with Variable Air Volume Boxes Controllers: The BMS shall interface with the VAV
Controllers to read and write at minimum:
1. Temperature set point.

2. Temperature reading
3. Air flow
4. Damper opening position
5. Damper feedback status
6. General alarm
E. Interface with CRAC units: The BMS shall interface with the CRAC units to read and write at
minimum:
1. Temperature set point.

2. Temperature reading
3. Status
4. General alarm
F. Interface with Generators and POP through Mod-Bus: The BMS shall interface with the Generators
to read and at minimum:
1. Oil pressure
2. Low fuel pressure alarm
3. Hi Oil temperature alarm
4. Hi Water temperature alarm
5. Frequency
7. fault
8. General alarm
9. Fail to start alarm
10. Battery alarm
11. Running hours
12. Load
13. Demand
G. Interface with UPS through Mod-Bus : The BMS shall interface with the UPS to read at minimum:
1. Frequency
3. fault
4. General alarm
5. Running hours
Page 331 of 429

H. Interface with Power meters through Mod-Bus: The BMS shall interface with the Power meters to
read at minimum:
1. Current
2. Phase Current
3. Voltage
4. Phase Voltage
5. KWHR
6. Power factor
7. KVA
8. Any available data requested by the operator.
I. Interface with Transformer : The BMS shall interface with the Transformer to read at minimum:
1. Current
2. Phase Current
3. Voltage
4. Phase Voltage
5. KWHR
6. Power factor
7. KVA
8. Hi temperature alarm
9. General alarm
J. Integration With Elevator Management System:
1. The BMS shall interface with Elevator Management System for monitoring all parameters and
actions
K. Integration With Lighting Management System :
1. The BMS shall interface with Lighting Management System for monitoring all alarms,
parameters and actions including lights damages and On/Off status
L. Life Safety (Fire Alarm System) Software Interface
1. The BMS shall monitor the Life Safety Systems including fire alarm and smoke control
functions.
a. Fire Alarm & Voice Evacuation system, BACnet-based
b. BACnet-based fire detection systems supporting BACnet BIBB AE-LS-B as well as objects
Life Safety Point and Life Safety Zone as per the PICS (Protocol Implementation
Conformance Statement) document must be able to be integrated for best deployment of a
building automation and control system. The following functions must be supported:
i. Alarms and events from the fire detection system must be identified clearly and
unambiguously.
ii. Signaling device states must be displayed as per the BACnet standard.
Page 332 of 429
iii. Instruction texts must be able to be added to detectors and zones
iv. Situational and floor plans as well as dynamic symbols must be used for visualization.
v. A technical hierarchy, e.g. building, building part, zone, detector, must be provided to
the operator
M. Security Systems Software Interface
The BMS shall monitor the security systems (CCTV and access Control) subpanels and devices for
alarms, events and actions through IP interface considering operator requirements
N. Integration with Refrigerators Bacnet/IP or Modbus/IP :
1. The BMS shall interface with the Refrigerators to read write at minimum:
a. Temperature set point.
b. Temperature reading
c. Hi & low Temperature alarms
d. On/Off status
e. Door Status
f. Power Failure
g. General alarms
h. Any other available signals as per operator requirements
O. Integration with Air Pressure Monitor:
1. The BMS shall interface with the Air Pressure Monitor to read:
a. Temperature set point.
b. Temperature reading
c. Humidity
d. Air flow
e. Air quality
f. Pressure /Differential Pressure
g. Communication loss or failure
h. General alarm
P. Car Parking Control System Software Interface
1. The BMS shall monitor the Car Parking Control system subpanels and devices for alarms
,events and actions through IP interface considering operator requirements
2.10 FURNITURE
A. Provide the following furniture to highly quality standards complying with BS EN 1335-1 and BS EN 527-1 and
per Architectural Specifications approved by the Engineer.
Page 333 of 429

1. Computer Desk.
2. Printer Desk.
3. Side Table.
4. Height adjustable chairs.
5. 19” 42U Equipment Rack
2.11 SYSTEM OPERATION
A. System Format
1. Divide points in the BMS into four systems, which are: 1) Fire; 2) HVAC, 3) Plumbing & Drainage,
4) Electrical Energy System Operation.
2. The BMS shall locate a point to be monitored or controlled with a unique 3 level structural point
identifier. The first level (or "specific building") of the point identifier shall contain and identically
label a subset of BMS points. The second level (or "specific system") shall contain and identically
label a subset of points contained in the first level. The third level (or "specific point") shall contain
and label a point contained in the second level. The grouping of these points into their respective
levels shall not be dependent upon their hardware locations.
3. Character String labels for each of the three levels shall be used to form the point identifier. A
character string label shall consist of up to four alphanumeric characters for the first level and up to
three alphanumeric characters for the second and third levels. Level 2 and Level 3 IDs shall not be
determined by the point's electronic hardware address.
4. A minimum of 12 alphanumeric characters shall also be used on all output devices to further identify
or label each level of the point identifier for system output.
B. Input Process
1. Provide the operator with the ability to select one of four general types of commands based upon
his password clearance. The total selection shall include 1) Command points, 2) Information points,
3) Build Parameters, 4) Modify parameters. Those commands not available to the operator (by his
password clearance) shall be deleted from the LCD display. The LCD shall respond to a command
type selection with a menu of specific commands available to that operator.
2. The operator shall have the ability to enter memory changes as specified hereafter through the on-
line standard, alphanumeric keyboard.
3. The operator shall have the ability to select one of three entry modes based on his degree of
capability and familiarity with the system. These modes shall include the HELP MODE, DIRECT
MODE, or EDIT MODE.
4. The Help Mode (prompting) shall prompt the operator through each step showing his available
options. At the end of the Help Mode input command, the system shall show the operator the
DIRECT MODE COMMAND STRING.
5. The Direct Mode shall allow the experienced operator to input the alphanumeric command string
directly; thereby executing the command with a minimum of keystrokes.
6. The Direct and Help Mode inputs shall be checked for accuracy by the CPU and expanded for
operator review prior to execution.
7. The Edit Mode shall be used for Database Generation and update. Database modification and
generation shall be done while the system is on-line.
Page 334 of 429

8. The command shall be entered as an alphanumeric Character String of no less than 3 characters.
Point identifiers shall be entered as previously stated. The use of point codes, codebooks, look-up
tables, numeric identifiers, etc., shall not be acceptable.
9. Where the command requires data such as limits, set point, and time, the value shall be entered in
the same engineering units as the controlled variable.
10. The operator shall be capable of editing any number of incorrect characters without having to retype
the entire line.
11. An operator input shall not inhibit Change of State (COS) reporting.
12. An operator input shall be echoed back on the associated output device. The operator shall then
be able to either execute the input.
13. The BMS shall supervise all operator inputs to ensure that all inputs are correctly and properly
executed. Operator input assistance shall be provided (On-Line Interactive Help) whenever a
command cannot be executed because of operator input errors. The BMS shall explain to the
operator in words and phrases why the command cannot be executed. The system shall point to
the incorrect field as well as state at the bottom of the screen what type of error it is. The provided
(On-Line Interactive Help facilitates also operator training and enhance his understanding of the
system operation.
14. The BMS shall automatically cancel the operator input when the operator input is not executed
within 30 seconds.
15. The system shall be capable of dumping and loading selected or all database parameters (such as
seasonal limits, programmed start/stop, etc.).
C. Prompting
1. A prompting program shall be provided which will allow the operator to query the system as to the
required command format.
2. The operator shall query the system by entering the command mnemonic followed by a "?".
D. Database Generation
1. Provide the system with the ability to enable future Users to custom program their system software
on-line. Modifications, additions, and deletions can be made to the system software. Access to
this function will be password restricted.
2. Capabilities shall be provided to size and resize the database, define all interface hardware and
communication trunks, define all point parameter characteristics, and to order system level IDs to
customize report format outputs.
3. All field hardware, including communication trunks, DDCs, and point modules shall be modified on-
Page 335 of 429
line to accommodate hardware changes.
4. A specific point's software characteristics shall be modified on-line to accommodate hardware

changes along with control strategy requirements. These changes shall include, but not be limited
to:
a. Level 1, Level 2. and Level 3 identifiers along with their associated expansions.
b. System timers including heavy equipment delays, change-of-state feedback delay timers, and
adjust point delay timers.
c. Point type characteristics including limits and differentials, engineering units, mode units, filter
tolerance, and status pairs.
d. Change-of-state output parameters including COS type, COS priority level, definition of critical
and latchable alarms, and printout and acknowledgement requirements.
e. Application feature eligibility.
5. Computation points and profiles shall be modified, added, or delete online.
6. Hardware and software interlock sequences shall be changed on-line which includes adding,
deleting, or replacing slave points in existing sequences, the replacement of master points or the
addition and/or deletion of sequences.
7. Totalization, energy systems optimization and fire applications shall be modified on-line where
applicable due to previous changes made utilizing this feature.
8. Interactive prompting shall be used to direct the operator throughout the program. Interactive
prompting shall use a fill-in-the-blank, walk-through method to queue and edit operator entered
parameters.
9. Following program access at each step by addition, deletion, or modification process, parameters
required will be individually requested of the operator and error checking will take place at each
step. All entered parameters shall be kept in temporary storage throughout the entry process to
allow parameter changes at any time.
10. The System shall provide a Point Involvement Summary to identify a point's involvement in various
system applications. This summary shall identify feature involvement such as in Interlocking,
Computations and Energy Systems. A summary may be requested on any level basis.
11. Diagnostic software shall be available in the operator workstation, BMS server, portable
maintenance computer and each distributed intelligent controller and shall be independently
executed. The diagnostic software shall be stored in non-volatile memory. The software shall assure
that the board within the system is operating and communicating with others properly. If the software
detects a fault, a message shall be directed to the Operator Workstation and/or other designated
peripherals. In addition, the software shall also initiate the LED indicator associated with that board
to indicate the fault.
Page 336 of 429

12. Diagnostic software shall be initiated by power up or on operator keyboard request. Once initiated,
the software shall continuously monitor on-line system operation and report any fault detected.
13. The following software shall be included, regardless of whether specifically required to perform
functions described in this Specification.
(i) Plant start/stop program.
(ii) Interlocking.
(iii) Energy measurement and metering calculation program.
(iv) Run time totalization program.
(v) Historical trending and data collection.
(vi) Power failure restart program.
(vii) Standard Energy Management software including optimum start and/or stop, night
purges, enthalpy control (economy cycle), power peak demand forecasting and
load shedding, load cycling, and load reset.
(viii) Control point reset program.
(ix) Direct Digital Control program.
(x) Rotational point program.
(xi) Auto changeover program for duty and standby drives.
(xii) Time proportional control.
(xiii) Operation schedule (time clock) control based on time of day and calendar date
(including holiday override). Each item of plant shall have an independently
adjustable start and stop time. Each controller shall store up to 20 time schedules.
(xiv) Derived alarms (alarms resulting from series of logic comparisons).
(xv) Sequential control.
(xvi) Power failure and fire restart control to avoid simultaneous starting of items of
plant.
(xvii) Optimization
14. The ability to develop control strategies using standard operators which include arithmetic
operations (add, divide, multiply, subtract, square root, etc.) timers, logic comparisons (less than,
greater than, high select, low select, etc), logic sequences (if.then) boolean operators (or, and, nor,
and, etc.) and other similar functions.
15. Plant Start/Stop Program
(i) The software shall permit each item of plant, or plant system where applicable, to
be assigned individual start/stop times, as a result of time or interlock sequences.
(ii) At the request of the operator a system summary of all programmed points shall
be obtainable, with status conditions. It shall be possible to obtain summaries for
Page 337 of 429
individual systems, or all systems, displayed on either the operation workstation or
the printer.
16. Interlocking
(i) All plant interlocking with the exception of safety interlocks shall be achieved
through software. In the case of safety interlocks these shall be carried out via
hard wiring by other and also through software to prevent 'mismatch' alarms. It
shall be possible to change the interlocking scheme via the operator workstation
at any time, via password access. The interlock chain for each device shall be
displayed in a simple and easily understood format so that the method of control
of that device may be understood by reading the operation workstation.
17. Energy Measurement and Metering Calculation Program

(i) The software shall include a program to calculate the energy used by chiller plants
or any other nominated plant. This program shall form the basis of an energy
totalization program so that at any time the operator may obtain a summary of the
energy used with costs. For the cost calculations the software shall be capable of
totalizing for unit rates, standing charges, maximum demand rates, etc.
(ii) The program shall be capable of accepting signal data from analogue sensors and
pulsed inputs to provide energy calculations by totalization of single signals or by
integration of multiple signals. The visual output, in whatever form, shall be in the
relevant energy units (with options for conversion e.g. therms to kWh) for net
usable energy, delivered energy and primary energy.
(iii) The program shall, where required, provide information regarding chiller
efficiencies with alarm points for any calculated figure which falls below a specified
setting. Such calculations shall be automatically carried out once per day, or on
demand, with the result recorded on the printer. Operators shall be able to call up
such information at any time, for display on the operation workstation or printed
out, in terms of the previous days figures or an immediate review of the figures for
the day in hand up to the time of the request.
18. In terms of the various forms of metering the program shall be capable of providing the following:
Electrical Energy
(i) Weekly, monthly, quarterly and annual records of electrical consumption in kWh.
The monthly figures shall be available to choice by calendar month or by four-
weekly periods. The quarterly figures shall be available to choice by three calendar
months or thirteen-week periods. The annual figures shall be selected by the
calendar year, or twelve month periods or any 365 consecutive days.
(ii) The operator shall have the option of storing the data for specified periods and
requesting a printout at specified times. If the operator does not specify these
criteria the following programmer shall be initiated:
1. Daily totals printed at 00.01 a.m. Average.
2. Daily and weekly totals printed at 00.01 a.m. every Monday and the daily
figures may then be dumped.
3. Weekly and monthly totals printed at 00.01 a.m. on the first day of each
month and the weekly figures may then be dumped
4. Monthly and quarterly totals printed at 12.00 noon on the first day of January,
April, July and October and the monthly figures may then be dumped.
Page 338 of 429
5. Quarterly and annual figures shall be printed at 12.00 noon on January 1st
each year.
6. Monthly, quarterly and an annual figures printed out complete with energy
costs.
Maximum Demand
(i) Half-hourly records of maximum demand shall be printed each day at 00.01 a.m.
and all but the highest figure (and its time of occurrence) shall be dumped.
(ii) At the start of each calendar month the daily maximum figures for the previous
calendar month shall be printed out and all but the highest figure (and its time of
occurrence) shall be dumped.
(iii) At the end of each year the highest values of each calendar month for the previous
year shall be printed out at 12.00 noon on January 1st.
Flow
(i) Flow rates shall be summated to provide a daily flow total. If lesser periods of
integration are requested they shall be available (to a minimum of one hour).
(ii) The daily figures shall be printed out each day at 00.01 a.m. The weekly figures
shall be printed out at 00.01 a.m. each Monday and the daily figures dumped.
(iii) The previous month's figures shall be printed out at 12.00 noon on the first of each
month and the weekly figures dumped.
(iv) The previous year's figures shall be printed out at 12.00 noon on January 1st and
the monthly figures dumped.
19. Run Time Totalization Program

(i) Run Time Totalization Program shall be provided for application to all items of plant.
The system shall initiate an identifiable alarm output whenever the preset limit has
been exceeded for the particular item. The Contractor shall co-ordinate with the
Building Services Contractor to propose a schedule of preset limits to be entered
and used during testing and commissioning.
(ii) The run time total shall be accessible by command from the operator, who shall
also be able to reset the limits or zero the count for each item, using suitable
password access.
20. Historical Trending and Data Collection

(i) Each controller shall store trend and point history data for all analog and digital
inputs and outputs.
21. Any point, physical or calculated, may be designated for trending. Three methods of collection shall
be allowed:
(i) Defined time interval.
(ii) Upon a change of value.
(iii) Whenever a value is out of range.
22. Each controller shall have a dedicated RAM-based buffer for trend data, and shall store 96 samples
for each physical point and software variable, including an individual sample time/date stamp.
Page 339 of 429
Points may be assigned to multiple history trends with different collection parameters.
23. Point history is a proactive system tool shall be built in each controller for records/ samples all
system points including physical, calculated, hardware, and software points. The point history
feature automatically records the last ten change of states for every binary point (DI/DO) and
samples every analogue point (AI/AO) every half hour for 24 hours. Point history samples are stored
in the controller and can be also archived at operator workstations (OWS). At operator workstation,
point history is displayed as part of the point focus display can be accessed from any report. Point
history can be viewed at a portable operation workstation connected to the controller.
24. Trend and change of value data shall be stored within the controller and then uploaded to the trend
database(s). Uploads shall occur based upon one of the following: operator-defined interval,
manual command, or when the trend buffers are full.
25. The system shall provide a configurable data storage subsystem for the collection of historical data.
Data can be stored in either Microsoft Access or SQL database format.
26. To enable operators to easily access stored data, the system shall provide the capability to store
historical data in more than one file system (i.e., removable media, separate hard drives, or a
remote network file system).
27. Provide the capability to perform statistical functions on the historical database without having to
design special queries. On a specified data interval, provide functions for calculating of the
following:
(i) Average.
(ii) Arithmetic mean.
(iii) Maximum/minimum values.
(iv) Range – difference between minimum and maximum values.
(v) Standard deviation.
(vi) Sum of all values.
28. Provide a trend viewing utility that shall have access to all database points.
29. Provide database access through an Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) interface – a standard
Application Programming Interface (API) for accessing data from relational databases.
30. It shall be possible to retrieve any historical database point for use in displays and reports by
specifying the point name.
31. The trend viewing utility shall have the capability to view up to 32 data sources at one time in a
tabular or graphical format.
32. Graphic displays shall be able to be single or stacked graphs with on-line selectable display
characteristics, such as ranging, colour, and plot style.
Page 340 of 429

33. It shall be possible to display trend data in histogram (X-Y plots) format as well as area and bar
graphs.
34. Display magnitude and units shall both be selectable by the operator at any time without
reconfiguring the processing or collection of data. This is a zoom capability.
35. Display magnitude shall automatically be scaled to show full graphic resolution of the data being
displayed. This function shall also be operator selectable.
36. The display range shall consist of magnitude and units fields. The units are seconds, minutes,
hours, days, and months.
37. Provide a wild card capability when specifying a display range for data retrieval within the historical
database. Wild carding will allow the operator to easily specify relative time based date ranges for
the retrieval of data. The following wild cards will be used:
(i) NOW - This keyword specifies the current date/time. The

value is set at the exact time the database request
is made.
(ii) TODAY - This keyword specifies the current date.
(iii) D - This keyword indicates a specific number of days.

Example: TODAY-8D
(iv) H - This keyword indicates a specific number of hours.

Example: NOW-3H
(v) M - This keyword indicates a specific number of

minutes. Example: NOW-5H30M
(vi) 12/12/97 12:00:00 PM - This keyword indicates a specific date/time.
vii) 12/12/97 23:00:00 - This keyword indicates a specific date/time.
38. A time offset capability shall be available to assist in a operator’s analysis. The offset visually shifts
the data being displayed to allow a operator to concurrently view information without having to scroll
the display.
39. The system shall be capable of printing a hard copy record of the trends as they are displayed on
the workstation.
40. Operation Schedules

(i) A spreadsheet types software schedule for time-of-day scheduling and override
scheduling of building operations shall be provided as the following:
1. Weekly schedules, by system.
Page 341 of 429

2. Temporary override schedules, by system.
3. Special “Only Active If Today Is A Holiday” schedules, by system.
4. Monthly calendars.
5. Holiday scheduling system, including the ability to define floating holidays.
(ii) Weekly schedules shall be provided for each piece of equipment with a specific
time use schedule. Each schedule shall include columns for each day of the week,
as well as holiday and special day columns for alternate scheduling on operator-
defined days. Equipment scheduling shall be accomplished by simply inserting use
and non-use times into appropriate information blocks on the spreadsheet.
(iii) It shall be possible to define one or more master holiday schedules to allow the
operator to define in one location the holidays for all associated schedules.
Systems requiring the operator to change holiday definitions on a schedule by
schedule basis shall not be accepted.
(iv) Standard weekly schedules shall be inactive on a holiday. The system shall allow
the operator to include in a schedule group a schedule that will only be active if
today is a holiday.
(v) In addition, temporary override schedules may be inserted into schedule groups
for modifying operating schedules. After overrides have been executed, the
original schedule will automatically be restored.
(vi) Schedules shall be provided for each system or sub-system in the facility. Each
schedule shall include all commandable points residing within the system. Each
point may have a unique schedule of operation relative to the system use
schedule, allowing for sequential starting and control of equipment within the
system. Scheduling and rescheduling of points shall be accomplished easily via
the system schedule spreadsheets.
(vii) Monthly calendars for a 12-month period shall be provided that allows for simplified
scheduling of holidays and special days in advance. Holidays and special days
shall be operator-selected with the pointing device or keyboard, and shall
automatically reschedule equipment operation as previously defined on the weekly
schedules.
(viii) The changes of schedules made from the operator workstation shall directly modify
the controller schedule database. Systems that require permanent schedule
changes to be made with a program editor shall not be acceptable.
(ix) Formatted schedule displays shall be provided for each system. These shall
include all schedule data and associated parameters.
(x) Selection of a single menu item or tool bar button shall print any displayed schedule
on the system printer for use as a building management and diagnostics tool.
41. Power Failure Restart Program

(i) The restart program shall sequentially start all required plant on resumption of
power to prevent high starting current on the mains distribution. The program shall
also provide for similar sequential starting for the normal plant start-up conditions.
(ii) The restart program shall control all, or essential, plant under generator start-up
conditions or restart after mains power failure.
Page 342 of 429

(iii) By detection of both mains failure and the generator running (on load) a sequence
start-up program shall be activated to phase-in selected plant. All change-of-state
alarms during the restart condition shall be suppressed until the plant is running
normally. In installations with more than one generator the BMS shall select a
restart program for sequentially starting plant dependant upon the number of
generators running.
(iv) When normal power is restored, either after a power failure or after the use of the
stand-by generator, the program shall have the option of being initiated either by
operator command or automatically and shall sequentially start all plant on a
suitable time basis to prevent high starting current on the mains distribution. The
program shall also provide for similar sequential starting for the normal plant start-
up conditions.
42. Control Point Reset Program

(i) The software shall provide the facility for resetting control points of nominated
variables from the operator workstation. Access to the resetting procedure shall be
via two levels of password. When required by the specified controls performance
for any plant, the resetting shall be carried out automatically e.g. compensated
control.
(ii) Any changes carried out shall be displayed on the operator workstation and
printed.
(iii) Where the set point has associated limit conditions and is reset then the alarms
shall be inhibited for a period of time set in the BMS.
(iv) All parameters associated with the DDC loops shall be adjustable with suitable
password access from the keyboard.
43. Direct Digital Control (DDC) Program

(i) The Program shall permit the DDC of process loops through the BMS. The
program shall be such that it may be set to provide on/off, proportional (P),
proportional plus integral (P + I) and proportional plus integral plus derivative (PID)
control as necessary for each of the control loops detailed in the Specification.
(ii) The software shall be suitable for at least four sequential stages of control, the
provision of dead zones between stages, control point reset, compensated stages
and hardware and software override functions.
(iii) The Contractor shall be responsible for setting up the software parameters for each
process loop, including the setting of the proportional bands, integral times and
derivative rates, which shall all be site adjustable and recorded in engineering
units. All settings shall be such that each process loop performs within the required
tolerances and that there is no hunting (cycling) of final control elements.
(iv) A complete schedule of settings shall be provided at practical completion. The

facility shall also be provided for the operator to change, via password access, the
settings for all process loops.
44. Rotational Point Program

(i) The Program shall initiate the alternating of control point designations (such as
duty and standby, lead and lag) under any one of the following circumstances:
1. On a calendar basis e.g. every week, month.
2. Once a predefined hours run total has been reached.

Page 343 of 429
3. Changeover shall occur at a predetermined time e.g. 01.00 hours and shall
only occur when the plant is off except in the case of 24 hour plant.
45. Auto changeover Program for Duty and Standby Drives

(i) In the event of a duty drive failure any rotational point program associated with the
drives shall be disabled and the standby drive shall be commanded to start.
(ii) The rotational point program shall be re-enabled when the failed duty drive is
cleared by an operator command at the keyboard.
46. Maintenance Required Schedule Program

(i) When selected points (detailed on the BMS Point Schedules) enter an alarm/fault
condition, they shall be automatically entered into a maintenance required
Schedule which can be displayed at the operator workstations. A point can only
be taken from the schedule and hence back into the normal system program by an
operator command at the operator workstation.
47. Maintenance Program

(i) The Program permits the setting up and operation of a planned maintenance
programme for all plant within the building. The program shall cover:
1. Routine servicing and maintenance programming requirements.
2. Breakdown routines and instructions.
3. Spares Schedules and stock Control.
4. Costing and billing routines for labour, materials and spares.
5. Equipment and plant data.
6. Plant and control settings.
48. Optimization
(i) Optimization programs shall be provided for energy conservation and shall
calculate the optimal morning start and evening stop times for the HVAC plant,
based on occupancy time, building thermal mass, measured internal space and
outside conditions. The programs shall be suitable for both heating and cooling
systems and shall be self adaptive, i.e. they shall make corrections to the
programmed characteristics in accordance with the accuracy of the previous 21
predictions. The program shall start the plant in a boost condition which shall be
terminated by either occupancy time being reached or by occupancy temperature
being achieved whichever is sooner.
(ii) The program shall be written such that the boost period shall only be terminated
once per day. The program shall also incorporate facilities for maintaining the
internal space temperature of the building above a predetermined minimum level,
and the maximum relative humidity below a given level, outside occupancy hours.
These settings shall have differentials set in the BMS. The program shall take
account of the day of the week, occupancy patterns and holidays.
(iii) Different starting and/or stopping times shall be possible for each item, or plant,
which is controlled by this program. If at any time during the defects liability period
the lowest measured space temperature is not within 2oC of set point within 30
minutes of occupancy start time the Contractor shall provide daily attendance until
one week after the error(s) is (are) corrected unless the problem is caused by plant
failure.
Page 344 of 429

(iv) The program shall store the following information and print out on a daily basis if
required:
1. Plant start time.
2. Outside air temperature at plant start time.
3. Lowest Inside air temperature at plant start time.
4. Time boost cycle terminated.
5. Lowest inside air temperature at boost termination time.
E. Operator Access Control
1. The BMS shall be capable of restricting any operator commands to any point at any specified
device.
2. The BMS shall also be capable of restricting any specified operator command to a specified point
by specified operator at a specified device. Inhibitors shall be removed through the use of a
software password.
3. There shall be a minimum of 50 individual system access requests (passwords), each individually
identifiable and each changeable through keyboard entry while the system is on-line.
4. A properly entered system access request shall cause the BMS to output a message each time an
operator gains system access. This message shall include the operator's initials in alphabetic
characters as well as the time and the date of system access. The hard copy recording device shall
be individually specified for each input device.
5. The user's name, up to 24 characters, shall appear on the LCD when an individual has gained
access to the system.
6. Operator inputs executed under valid system access requests shall be recorded on the hard copy
device. This record shall contain the operator command and the time and date of input execution.
7. An operator command shall be provided to terminate all operator-input capability that was
previously available by valid system access requests.
8. The BMS shall automatically terminate all operator input capability that was previously available by
valid system access after a predetermined time (1 to 10 min) from the execution of the last operator
input requiring a valid system access request.
9. Each individual password shall have an expiration timer associated with it. The length of time for
each password shall be entered into the system when that password is defined.
10. Valid system access requests and associated operator initials shall be added, changed or deleted
on-line via a keyboard entry. All changes shall be made at the strictest level of access.
Page 345 of 429

11. The system shall be capable of generating a summary to show the password definition.
12. The summary of all passwords shall show: 1) Password Initials; 2) 24Character Name; 3) Time Out
Value; 4) Degree of Capability per Keyword Class. At no time, however, shall the actual password
numbers be printed.
13. Also, a summary of an individual's password shall be available by using the individual's three-
character initials.
14. A summary shall be available of password levels required at a Station.
F. Information Access
1. The system shall be capable of attaining BMS point status information from any designated output
device with a specified access command. The point status shall consist of a point's three levels of
identification, numerical value (analog points) and associated engineering units, and individual
function labels indicating that the point is Locked Out/unlocked, On-Line/Off-Line, and is in the
Alarm (Off-Normal)/Normal condition.
2. The output following such a command shall contain the status of a single point, all points grouped
under a specified second level, or all points grouped under a specified first level (unless stated
otherwise).
3. The output following such a command shall also contain the date and the time of command
execution.
G. Point Display
1. The System shall be capable of displaying the status of a single point or all points grouped under a
specified second level and refreshing this display on the LCD with the current point status at least
every 20 seconds.
2. When displaying the status of a point, its high and low limits (if applicable) shall be displayed. The
display shall also contain the system associated with the point.
H. System Logs/Reports
1. Provide a System Log that contains the point status of all points within a System Type specified by
the operator input.
2. The system shall be capable of automatically initiating a log based on a pre-selected time schedule
as detailed under the WEEKLY SCHEDULING section of this specification.
3. Ensure the total number of logging channels available for each outstation is not less than 20% of
the total physical points on that station.
4. Provide sufficient DDC memory to log the equivalent of five days data at 15 minutes intervals for at
least 25% of the total number of physical points in the DDC.
Page 346 of 429
5. Ensure each logged value is associated with :
a. Point reference.
b. Unit of measurement.
c. Date and time measured.
d. Initiating status value.
6. Points being displayed on the LCD will be dynamic and if they change condition, will not require the
operator to request a scan of the points.
7. The system shall be capable of generating useful logs such as Alarm history, Operators activities,
Controller alarm history, Controller current alarms, etc.
8. Standard Reports: The pre-defined reports shall include as a minimum All Point, Alarm Summary,
Alarm Suppressed, Manual Mode, Device Status, Alarm Limit, Schedule Download Status,
Command List Definition (all), Command List (selected), Command List Initiators, Command List
Names, Event Definition, Global Data Transfer, and Run Time reports.
9. Custom Reports: An integrated Custom Report Writer capability shall be provided to allow the user
to format reports of any mix of text, points with status, value and descriptors, and perform
calculations, or add graphs. The user shall have the capability to modify the defined reports or
design unique reports that collect and disperse different combinations of data from the system and
modify or add to the BMS Custom Report Writer macro’s which control the data collection process.
A custom report drop down item under the report bar item displays a report dialog box that allows
the user to schedule, run and view these reports. Spreadsheet packages that require off-line
execution or manual translation of date files from one program format to another are not acceptable.
10. Database Reports: Reports shall be provided for time programs (per controller), each time control
schedule command (sorted by time or by point name), time programs overridden (for following 365
days), text descriptors (per controller), parameter files and parameters (per controller), listing of all
operators, listing of all customer PC programs and custom reports, multiple point group display (per
HVAC System), point data record {each point; listing point name, related graphic, point description,
enable/disable, analog alarm limits (4), alarm text, fixed value/status, alarm delay time, fixed mode
status, alarm status, trend status, alarm lockout status, digital run time, last change (date/time), and
alarm delay time}.
11. Trend Reports: OWS shall allow the operator to randomly select point archival. Each system point
(hardware and software) shall be assigned to PC archive files for display at user selected intervals
of 10 seconds to 24 hours. Trend data hysteresis shall be programmable down to .01 of the
engineering unit of the data sampled. Each point trend file shall have a user assigned archive
duration of a day, a week, a month, or a year. For any duration period selected, the file shall retain
one full duration period while it collects another (i.e., after collecting data for May, May is retained
in total as June data is accumulated).
Multipoint, multicolor trend data shall be displayed in curve plot, spread sheet, or columnar format
and can be output to screen, file or to a printer.
12. Dynamic Trend System: Dynamic trends shall be provided with up to eight users selected points
per trend. This information shall be printed and displayed in numeric, bar chart, curve plot, pie
Page 347 of 429
chart, as selected by the operator. Graphic plots shall allow a unique color for each point.
As new point values are sampled, they shall be processed, scaled, and dynamically attached to
the plot being displayed. Sample interval shall be user selected from five seconds to sixty minutes.
I. Alarm Summary
1. Provide an Alarm Summary, which contains the point status of all points, specified by the operator
input and in the alarm condition.
2. Point alarms shall be classifiable as critical or non-critical. Critical alarms shall include smoke
evacuation and pressurization fans trip alarms, Diesel pump fault, Generator general alarm, Chillers
General Alarms. Critical alarms shall be immediately displayed in a dialog box of the color monitor.
Alarm hysteresis shall be field programmable to reduce nuisance alarms. All alarms shall be
directed to the user selected alarm printer and OWS disk. Display shall include as a minimum time
and date of occurrence, indication of alarm condition, analog value or status, user address, and
alarm message. Symbols for critical points in a graphic display that are in an alarm state shall flash
red for alarm and yellow for warning. Upon alarm acknowledgment, flashing shall cease.
3. Alarm silencing shall be by selecting the "silence" button of the dialog box or by authorized
operator's acknowledgment. In all cases, alarm acknowledgment shall only be allowed by operators
of access level 2 or better.
4. An unacknowledged alarm indicator shall be provided on the color monitor display to alert the
operator how many unacknowledged alarms are in the system.
5. The System shall be capable of automatically initiating an Alarm Summary based on a pre-selected
time schedule as detailed under the WEEKLY SCHEDULING Clause of this Section of the
Specifications.
J. Off-Normal Summary
1. Provide an Off-Normal Summary that contains the point status of all points specified by the operator
input and in the Off-Normal condition.
2. The System shall be capable of automatically initiating an Off-Normal Summary based on a pre-
selected time schedule as detailed under the WEEKLY SCHEDULING Clause of this Section of the
Specifications.
K. Lockout Summary
1. Upon operator request the System shall output a Lockout Summary that shall list only those points
presently in the Locked out condition. In addition, all logs and summaries shall display a locked out
indicator for those points.
2. Logs and summaries shall indicate on a per point basis the lock/unlock status of each point through
the use of special characters or flags.
3. The program shall automatically Lock or Unlock points based on a pre-selected time as detailed
under the WEEYLY SCHEDLTLING Clause of this Section of the Specifications.
L. COS Reporting
Page 348 of 429

1. The BMS shall be able to detect any change in each point's status as specified hereafter and be
able to report this change-of-state (COS) to the operator.
2. All COS outputs shall contain a descriptor, system formatted point ID, point data, engineering units
and date and time.
3. The alarm messages shall not be restricted by word lists or any other pre-coding method. These
messages shall be generated by the operator on-line, using his choice of text. Composition of any
one alarm message shall not retract the composition of any subsequent alarm message of text.
4. Change-of-state reporting shall be provided during the output of operator requested logs and
summaries.
5. Color LCD change-of-state reporting shall be by priority and by predetermined operator color
assignment for operator acknowledgement.
6. When multiple change-of-states are received, they will be output on a hardcopy device
chronologically. That is, in the order of occurrence.
7. Hardcopy recording of change-of-state acknowledgements by the color LCD shall be printed as

they occur.
8. The BMS shall output multiple changes-of-state by the three levels of priority designated when the
database was generated.
9. The system shall be capable of enabling future users to specify whether a change-of-state requires
acknowledgement or not.
10. The BMS shall inhibit the reporting of associated analog and binary COS upon HVAC system
shutdown. Upon restart of the HVAC system the analog and binary alarm reporting for associated
points shall remain inhibited for an operator predetermined time. If any of these points are still in
alarm after that time delay, they shall then report as specified in the point chart.
M. Advisories
1. Provide a Lockout Summary which contains the point status of all points specified by the operator
input and in the Locked Out condition.
2. The System shall be capable of automatically initiating a Lockout Summary based on a pre-selected
time as detailed under the WEEKLY SCHEDULING Clause of this Section of the Specifications.
3. The System shall continuously interrogate its hardware for failure and/or tampering and report to
the operator, in English language, all changes in hardware status. Advisories shall include at least
the following:
a. System can/cannot communicate with point.
b. System can/cannot communicate with Direct Digital Controller.

Page 349 of 429
c. DDC is operational/not operational.
d. System can/cannot communicate with Operator Device(s).
e. A power failure has been detected at (Time) (Date).
f. System can/cannot communicate with I/0 devices.

4. Logs and summaries shall indicate on a per point basis the hardware communications status of
each point through the use of special characters or flags. These indicators shall be kept current
with the BMS advisories.
5. The System shall provide a Hardware Status Summary to allow an operator to review the condition
of all field hardware and communication lines. This summary shall indicate if communications are
normal or not and if a point type is incompatible to what has been defined in the database.
N. Database Save/Restore
1. Provide a program which will allow the saving/restoring/swapping of operating data. This operating
data is that data bank which keeps current with actual building conditions and contains the systems
operator enterable parameters which are time consuming to reenter manually, but which the
operator does not ordinarily change to meet the building’s operator requirements.
2. The same bulk storage unit specified before under CPU loading shall be used as the
Save/Restore/Swap Device to save/restore/swap these system operating parameters.
O. System Initialization
1. The software supplied as part of the BMS shall consist of the Operating system including all feature
programs as specified herein and a complete database to include all hardware address
assignments, English language identifiers, operator station assignments, COS response handling,
point type assignments, event program interaction assignments, and equation assignments for
each point as needed to meet all BMS requirements will be generated on-line.
2. All software, for the entire BMS shall be loaded from the CPU load device to the memory it must
reside in for operation. Where this includes read/write program memory utilized by field, or
input/output processing units, data transmission to these devices shall use the existing multiplexed
communications network herein before identified under system structure.
3. A UPS to restore the operation of the system in case of power failure for a period of at least 30
minutes should also be provided. The UPS status and alarms will also be monitored by the BMS.
4. Should A.C. line power be cycled upon resumption, the Central Processing Unit shall automatically
restart and output a message indicating that a power failure occurred with the time and date of
occurrence. A system restart shall initialize processors and communications, update all time
programs to proper programmed operating times, and compare all BMS conditions, before and after
the power failure, outputting only the changes as a COS.
Page 350 of 429

2.12 BASIC OPERATIONAL FEATURES
A. Binary Capabilities
1. The BMS shall be capable of monitoring binary sensors. The present contact condition of the two-state
device shall be continuously stored in memory and represented as a binary engineering unit. Each
binary engineering unit shall consist of a three character alphanumeric descriptor. The BMS shall have
the capability of defining a unique binary engineering unit pair for each binary point in the system.
These units shall be individually assigned to each binary point and not be dependent on hardware
location or hardware condition.
2. The complete operator output for a binary monitoring point shall consist of the English language,
system formatted point descriptors, the correct binary engineering unit, indications that the point is in
an Off-Normal or Alarm condition as herein before specified under COS Reporting and indication.
3. For each individual binary point an Alarm or Off-Normal condition can be assigned to either state of the
field device. This assignment shall be for COS reporting based on a priority interrupt technique herein
before defined.
4. The BMS shall have the capability of providing two-state control of field devices. The operator
commands shall be used to control the field device state using the input process as herein before
defined. Descriptive mnemonics, suggesting each construction which the operator desires to execute,
shall be used as the actual command. These commands shall be grouped in pairs, one per state.
Each binary output point shall be programmed to respond to only one unique command pair. These
command pairs shall include at least: OPN/CLO for Open/Closed, TES/RES for Test/Reset, and
STA/STO for Start/Stop.
5. Feedback shall be employed on all start/stop points to ensure that a monitored device (motor, controller
reset, etc.) received the command instruction(s) and responded as commanded by the operator or by
the system. A feedback delay timer shall be employed to temporarily suppress COS reporting following
command input to allow adequate response time by the controlled equipment. This timer shall be
unique for each point. Any system request not responding as commanded shall cause an operator
advisory message to be output.
6. Any start/stop point shall have the capability of being designated as a "heavy equipment" point as
detailed on the point list. After a Start command is sent to a heavy equipment point, no subsequent
heavy equipment start commands shall be sent to heavy equipment points until a time delay has
elapsed within a particular power system.
7. Heavy equipment points may be specified in up to eight power systems.
8. The BMS shall be capable of automatically initiating Start and Stop commands as detailed in the
WEEKLY SCHEDULING Clause of this Section of the Specifications.
9. Field points shall remain in their present operating condition if a power failure occurs anywhere within
the BMS.
B. Three-Mode Control
1. Three-Mode Control shall provide the capability for an on/off/auto operation, with a start/stop point
(equipment point) placed under either system control ("Manual" mode) or under control of a local
Page 351 of 429
controller ("Auto" mode).
2. The BMS shall have the capability to define a unique status and mode pair for each point under Three-
Mode Control.
3. The local controller may either directly control the equipment point, or may furnish a binary input to
permit the system to issue starts and stops in response to the controller's demands.
C. Analog Capabilities
1. The System shall measure, transducer transmit and display Analog values for those analog points
detailed in the point list. The Analog Input shall be variable current type (4-20 Ma) or variable voltage
type (0-10V).
2. All displays and logs shall express analog point values in terms of the digital value, proper engineering
units and negative sign of the measured variable. Values shall be displayed with up to 7 digits, (or 6
digits plus decimal place) as required. Analog inputs shall have a resolution of 12 bits or better.
3. The BMS shall have the capability of allowing the designation of a unique three character analog
engineering unit for each analog point in the system. These units shall be provided for both change-
of-state output labeling and data requests.
4. Standard temperature displays shall have end-to-end (sensor to readout) accuracy within ±0.5 F.
Critical temperatures, as indicated on the point list, shall have end-to-end accuracy within ±0.25 F
over the expected range.
5. The System shall use the U.K. customary system of measurement and shall be capable of conversion
to the S.I. (Standard International) metric system of measurement without hardware changes.
6. There shall be 128 individual ranges provided, each of which may be designated by future users as
linear, series of linear approximations, split ranges, or square root extractions of exponential functions.
Each range shall have the capability of being uniquely designated for the system of measurement
herein mentioned above.
7. The System shall compare all analog readings to predetermined high and low limits and annunciate
each time a value enters or returns from an Alarm/Off- Normal condition.
8. Unique high and/or low limits shall be supplied for each analog point in the System.
9. Each high and low limit shall have an associated unique limit differential (sensitivity level) specifying
the amount by which a variable must return into the proper operating range before being annunciated
as a return to normal.
10. All limits and differentials shall be entered on-fine by the operator in units of the measured variable.
Page 352 of 429

11. The System shall be capable of automatically entering limits and differentials based on a pre-selected
time as detailed under the WEEKLY SCHEDULING Clause of this section of the specifications.
12. Upon an analog COS, the BMS shall output the point identifier, the current analog value and associated
engineering units, an indication of whether this value is high (H) or low (L), and the time and date of
the alarm.
13. Each alarm shall be distinguished as either a high or low condition.
14. The System shall be able to respond to analog point value transitions above high limit, below low limit,
and to the normal condition, by starting or stopping selected equipment in a defined sequence.
15. An analog limit and differential summary shall be provided which contain high and low limits and limit
differentials of all analog points specified by the operator input.
16. The System shall be capable of automatically initiating a Limit and Differential Summary based on a
pre-selected time as detailed under the WEEKLY SCHEDULING clause of this section of the
specifications.
17. Protect all inputs against spurious out of range signals including those caused by contact noise or
bounce.
18. Ensure errors caused by analog-to-digital conversion do not exceed 0.25% of the operating range of
the field device.
D. Analog Point Adjust
1. Remote adjustment of thermostat, controller set points and/or dampers shall be provided from any
designated input device for reset points specified in the point list. The reset values shall be reported
without loss of COS reporting in terms of analog engineering units which corresponds to the controlled
variable; C, BAR, M3/HR, etc.
2. The operator input data shall be the same as the reset points output data. For example, to adjust the
set point of a space temperature controller from 21o C to 24 o C, the adjustment value of 75 shall be
input by the system operator.
3. The program shall automatically adjust points based upon a pre-selected time and value as detailed
under the WEEKLY SCHEDULING Clause of this Section of the Specifications.
4. Feedback shall be employed so that in the event that the point fails to respond or responds with the
wrong value, or drifts from the set point value by ±2 %, a change-of-state message as herein before
defined shall be output by the system. A feedback delay timer shall be employed to temporarily
suppress COS reporting following command input to allow adequate response time by the controlled
equipment. This timer shall be unique for each point.
5. Loss of an electrical circuit to the Central or Direct Digital Controller shall not affect the set points; they
shall remain at their last commanded value.
E. Auto Shutdown
Page 353 of 429

1. The BMS shall automatically inhibit the COS reporting of analog and binary points upon their
associated HVAC fan system shutdown. COS reporting of these associated analog and binary points
shall remain inhibited for an operator predetermined time upon restart of the HVAC fan system. This
time should be sufficient to bring the controlled environment back to satisfactory operating conditions.
If any of the associated analog and binary points are in their alarm condition after the time delay, the
system shall automatically report the COS status as specified for those points.
2. Include a plant protection routine to enable operator to select and automatically run items of plant (such
as pumps, etc) for short period during out of season shutdown. Ensure run periods are adjustable by
the operator.
3. Ensure plant protection routines are overridden by the normal seasonal sequence of plant operation.
2.13 ENERGY MANAGEMENT FEATURES
A. Energy Manager
1. Provide a supervisory routine, which shall improve the energy efficiency of the building HVAC systems.
This feature shall oversee the execution of all Energy Management features as function as an executive
software system for them. That is, it shall establish priorities and execution times for all of the energy
related features (Load Manager, HVAC Manager, Chiller Manager).
B. Load Manager
1. The Load Manager (LM) feature shall provide a means to reduce electrical energy usage. The control
algorithms shall be designed for use with electrical energy control, but applications to other energy
sources shall be possible without software revisions.
2. The Load Manager feature shall be controlled and serviced by the Energy Manager, the supervisory
program that coordinates the activities of all energy application features. The Load Manager shall be a
supervisory program overseeing the functions of Demand Limiting. The Load Manager shall be
provided to support either Imperial or Metric units of measurement.
3. Each Load Manager system shall be assigned a unique identifier and expanded identifier as specified
herein before under SYSTEM FORMAT. The unique identifier shall be used to request operator relevant
data pertinent to Load status. The expanded identifier shall be used to further identify or label the LM
system. A minimum of 32 LM system shall be able to be defined.
4. Load Manager systems, points and parameters shall be defined on-line by the user. Any additions,
modifications or deletions shall be made on-line.
a. Demand Limiting/Load Shed during emergency power supply
All equipment is connected to power supply mains in a flexible way to run all equipment during
emergency power supply. The BMS will take the necessary action to manage power
consumption during supply failure in the optimum way.
The BMS will shed the equipment’s with lower priorities to give priority for equipment’s with
higher priorities and based on a pre-defined priority assignment. The BMS will continuously
monitor the load on the emergency generator to make sure that no overload occurs.
Page 354 of 429
1. Fire Mode:
During fire mode, the following equipment shall have the priority to operate:
 Smoke fans and related dampers.

 Toilet and kitchen exhaust fans.
 Emergency lighting.
 Economizer fans.
 Computer room cooling equipment.
2. Normal Power Failure Mode

During normal power failure, -with no fire mode the following equipment shall run using
emergency power from Diesel Generator:
(i) Computer room cooling equipment.

(ii) Toilet and kitchen exhaust fans.
(iii) Emergency lighting.
(iv) Booster and sump pumps.
(v) Lifts.
C. HVAC Manager
1. The HVAC Manager feature shall be controlled and serviced by the Energy Manager, the
supervisory program that coordinates the activities of all energy application features. The HVAC
Manager shall be a supervisory program overseeing the functions of Optimal Run Time, Supply
Air Reset and Enthalpy Switchover.
2. Each HVAC Manager system shall be assigned a unique identifier and expanded identifier as
specified herein before under SYSTEM FORMAT. The unique identifier shall be used to request
operator relevant data pertinent to HVAC status. The expanded identifier shall be used to further
identify or label the HM system. The whole Projects HVAC systems shall be able to be
defined.
3. HVAC Manager systems, points and parameters shall be defined on-line by the user. Any
additions, modifications or deletions shall be made on-line.
a. Optimal Run Time (Optimal Start/Stop)
(i) The Optimal Run Time (ORT) program shall control the start-up and shutdown
times of HVAC equipment during both the heating and cooling seasons to
provide the most efficient operating strategy during potentially energy wasteful
periods of the day. The ORT program shall base its control decisions primarily
upon occupancy schedules, outside air temperature, seasonal requirements,
and interior room mass temperature of the building.
(ii) For start-up, ORT program shall use outside air temperature and room mass
temperatures to "learn" the building's thermal characteristics through an
adaptive modeling technique. The adaptive model shall allow the system to
Page 355 of 429
predict how long the building shall take to warm-up (heating mode) or cool-down
(cooling mode) under different outside and inside temperature conditions.
(iii) For shutdown, ORT program shall use the outside air temperature and the
building thermal characteristics to determine how early it can shutdown the
system without adversely affecting ventilation requirements.
(iv) The ORT program shall analyze multiple building sensors to automatically
determine the seasonal mode and worst-case condition for every day of the
year.
(v) Analysis shall require only easily obtained occupancy schedule data and
desired mass temperatures for implementation.
b. Duty Cycling
(i) The Duty Cycling (DC) program shall cycle the HVAC equipment On/Off during
both the heating and cooling seasons to provide the most efficient operating
strategy during potentially energy wasteful periods of the day and conserving
electrical energy. The DC program shall base its control decisions primarily
upon interior room mass temperature of the building and configurable Hi and Lo
limits.
(ii) The DC program will calculate Off times to provide minimum energy
consumption.
(iii) The temperature sensor monitors each area affected by the duty cycling. If
feedback from the sensor indicates that the area is within comfort range, duty
cycling takes place.
(iv) If temperature approaches the limits of the comfort range, the OFF cycle is
reduced.
(v) Each price of equipment assigned to duty cycling will be assigned a minimum
and a maximum OFF times. A Minimum OFF time ensures that the equipment
is protected from damage due to short cycling. Maximum OFF time guarantees
that equipment is brought back into use before space control is jeopardized.
c. Chiller Log/Alarm: Provide print out of all variables/alarm measured/detected by chillers

computers. The measured variables output shall be hourly chiller log for 24 hours between
15th and 22nd July every year and then on single 24 hours print on the 15th day of each
month. However, all data from chillers computers shall be stored on the computer hard disk
in work sheet format for each hour of the 24 hours. The Contractor shall provide all wiring
from chiller interface box to BMS and shall obtain chiller's manufacturers complete data for
the worksheet report.
D. Chiller Manager
1. The Chiller Manager (CM) feature shall be controlled and serviced by the Energy Manager, the
supervisory program that coordinates the activities of all energy application features. The Chiller
Manager shall be a supervisory program overseeing the functions of Chilled Water Temperature Reset
Page 356 of 429
and Chiller sequencing. The Chiller Manager shall be provided to support either Imperial or Metric
units of measurement.
2. Each Chiller Manager system shall be assigned a unique identifier and expanded identifier as specified
herein before under SYSTEM FORMAT. The unique identifier shall be used to request operator
relevant data pertinent to Chiller status. The expanded identifier shall be used further identify or label
the CM system. A minimum of 32 CM systems shall be able to be defined.
3. Chiller Manager systems, points and parameters shall be defined on-line by the user. Any additions,
modifications or deletions shall be made on-line.
a. Chilled Water Reset: Chilled Water Reset (CHR) program shall be provided to
automatically reset the chilled water temperature to the highest possible value, which will
still satisfy the cooling coil requiring the greatest cooling.
b. Chillers (Boilers) Lead/Lag Sequence:
1. Chiller (Boilers) Lead/Lag Sequence (CBLLS) shall be provided to automatically

control chillers sequence of operations as well as chillers associated pumps. The
sequence will cycle the chillers on/off based on the chilled water load to provide
minimum energy consumption and increase mechanical equipment’s (Chillers
and Chilled Water Pumps) life cycle.
2. The sequence will use the main return chilled water temperature as a load
indication to calculate chillers requirements. T1 will be the temperature at which
Chiller#1 will have to be started, T2 will be the temperature at which two chillers
must be started and finally, T3 will be the temperature at which the three chillers
must be started. A configurable minimum Start/Stop time period will be used by
the sequence to prevent successive starts and stops in case the load cycles
within the boundaries of on of the limiting temperatures (T1, T2 & T3).
3. The sequence will also make sure to start the standby chillers in case any chiller
fails to start.
4. The sequence will also keep track of the totaled start period for each individual
chiller. The sequence will, and based on these values exchange the chillers
starting order to reach an approximately equal. usage period for all chillers.
c. Condensed Water sequence
1. The Condensed Water Sequence (Cooling Towers Sequence), (CTS) will manage
the operation of the cooling towers, cooling towers fans speeds as well as the
condensed water circuit and associated condensed water circuit pumps. The
sequence will cycle the towers fans speed1/speed2/off based on the condensed
water load to provide minimum energy consumption and increase mechanical
equipment’s (towers, chillers and condensed water pumps) life cycle.
2. The sequence will use the main return condensed water temperature as a load
indication to calculate cooling towers requirements. A condition which must always
be satisfied is if the one chiller is started, at least two CTs must be started, if two
chillers are started, at least three CTs must be started, if the three chillers are
started, all the cooling towers must be started.
3. A second control factor is the two speeds fan motors used to reduce energy usage
in case of part load.
Page 357 of 429
4. Configurable minimum Start/Stop time period will be used by the sequence to
prevent successive starts and stops in case the load cycles within the boundaries
of the limiting temperatures.
5. The sequence will also keep track of the totaled start period for each individual CT.
The sequence will, and based on these values exchange the CTs starting order to
reach an approximately equal usage period for all CTs.
d. Condensed Water Anti-Surge Protection Valve
The condensed water anti-surge protection valve sequence (ASP), will continuously
monitor the temperature of the cooling towers discharge water header, to keep the
temperature of the condensers input above a minimum limit.
If the temperature of the cooling towers discharge water header is detected below the limit,
the ASP sequence will automatically respond and modulate the anti-surge bypass valve
correspondingly to keep the temperature above the limit.
The ASP sequence will mainly be useful in part load where the cooling towers discharge
water temperature will decrease and anti-surge bypass valve will mix a part of the cooling
towers supply water with the cooling towers discharge water to attain the required
temperature.
e. Secondary Pumps Lead/Lag Sequence (SPLL)
1. The secondary pumps lead/lag sequence (SPLL) will manage the operation of the
secondary pumps. The sequence will cycle the pumps start/stop based on the
secondary supply water to provide minimum energy consumption and increase
mechanical life cycle.
2. The sequence will also keep track of the totaled running period for each individual
pump.
2.14 PROGRAMMING APPLICATION FEATURES
A. Trend Log
1. A program shall be provided which outputs a log on a time interval basis. This program shall
provide the operator with the ability to place a total of 48 points on four individual Trend Logs and
the ability to assign the trend interval from 1-120 minutes.
2. The operator shall be able to store up to 19 time intervals of each Trend Log before printing.
Page 358 of 429

3. Adding, changing or deleting a trend point, assigning the Trend Log period, or outputting the Trend
Log shall be performed without any loss of change of-state reporting on the designated hardcopy
device.
4. Trend Log report information shall be listed in vertical columns. Staggered columns are not
acceptable.
5. The initiator's name shall appear in the heading of the Trend Log as well as a directory of columnar
placement.
6. Application
a. Weather Data
Process signals from the outdoor temperature and relative humidity sensors installed in the
fresh air intake of one AHU. Using the psychometric calculation program, calculate the wet
bulb, dew point temperature and enthalpy. Provide trend log, on one hour interval, for dry
bulb, wet bulb, relative humidity, dew point and enthalpy.
Provide percent clearness factor as detected by dust sensor.
b. Central Equipment Energy Use Provide trend log, on one hour interval, for the following:
(i) Total building load (tons of refrigeration).

(ii) AHU load.
(iii) Chilled water total flow and supply/return temperatures.
(iv) Chilled water return temperature from each AHU.
Provide the above data for at least one complete year of operation on floppy disks.
B. Alarm Messages
1. The System shall be capable of allowing operator definition on-line of a minimum of 1000 alarm
messages with each individual message having a minimum length of 60 characters. The
characters in each message may be comprised of any standard typewriter keyboard
alphanumeric character.
2. Capability shall be provided to assign alarm messages to system messages including the
following but not be limited to:
a. A points alarm condition COS.
b. A point's off-normal condition COS.
c. A totalized point's warning limit COS.
d. Hardware elements advisories.
3. The System shall output an assigned alarm message with the "Message requiring
Page 359 of 429

acknowledgement" and the hardcopy "Change Record" for the system messages herein
mentioned above. No other output shall separate an advisory from its alarm message.
4. Alarm messages shall be defined, modified, or deleted on-line by the operator. Any system
keyboard device shall have this capability.
5. The System shall provide an Alarm Message Summary to provide a current list of all alarm
messages and their assignments.
C. User Defined Points
1. The System shall have the capability to allow each Color LCD to automatically display any three
selected system points when an operator has gained access to the system. These points may
be any combination of point type selected by the operator.
2. These points shall be on-line assignable and may be changed at any time as required by operator
interface requirements.
3. Each point will be definable by descriptor field, followed by a data field, followed by an engineering
unit, analogue points only. The descriptor field shall be any alphanumeric character the operator
desires.
4. A summary shall be available to review assigned points for any or all devices in the system.
D. Weekly Scheduling
1. The System shall be capable of automatically initiating equipment or system commands based
on a pre-selected time schedule for those points specified as programmable. This time schedule
shall provide program times for each day of the week (Saturday through Friday) on a per point
basis.
2. The operator shall be capable of entering, changing or deleting program times having one minute
resolution on-line. COS reporting shall not be inhibited while making on-line changes to program
parameters.
3. The System shall provide a minimum of 500 unique time schedules for each time programmable
point unless specified otherwise.
4. Any point not responding to a program function command shall automatically generate a change-
of-state output as herein before defined.
5. An additional time program day shall be provided for holidays. The System shall be provided with
the capacity to handle a minimum of 366 consecutive holidays.
6. The start of a holiday program shall be programmable up to 31 days in advance.
Page 360 of 429

7. The System shall automatically perform programmed function based on a pre-selected time.
Programmed functions shall include but not be limited to:
a. System logs and summaries.

b. Start or stop a point.
c. Locking or unlocking control, COS input, or both on a point.
d. Add, delete 'or modify analog limits and differentials.
e. Adjust operation position of a point.
f. Change a point's operational mode.
g. Open or close a point.
h. Enable, disable, lock, unlock, or execute an interlock sequence or computation profile.
i. Begin or end totalization on a point.
j. Modify totalization values and limits.
k. Begin or end an energy system.
l. Modify a load's parameter.
m. Modify Demand Limiting and Duty Cycle targets.
E. Structured User Programming Language
1. Interlocking
a. An Interlocking program shall be provided to permit events to occur based on a changing

condition of one or more "master" points. An Interlocking program shall consist of "slave" points
whose condition shall be controlled and/or monitored based on the condition of the associated
master points.
b. Each interlocking shall be assigned a unique identifier and expanded identifier as specified
herein before under SYSTEM FORMAT.
c. Interlocking shall be defined on-line by the user. Any additions or deletions shall be made
on-line.
d. The following interlocking types shall be available as a minimum:
(i) Single master, multiple slaves.

(ii) Multiple "OR" logic masters, multiple slaves.
(iii) Multiple "AND" logic masters, multiple slaves.
e. An interlocking process shall only be triggered when the designated master(s) undergo a
change-of-state (COS). This COS shall be either a contact state change (e.g., contact change
from Open to Closed) or a logical state change (e.g., state change from Normal to Abnormal).
This trigger condition shall include, but not be limited to:
(i) Contact Stage Change
Closed contact condition.
Open contact condition.
(ii) Logical State Change
Page 361 of 429

- Abnormal condition.
- Normal condition.
- Analog high alarm state.
- Analog low alarm state.
- Trouble condition.
- Not-trouble condition.
f. When a master undergoes a COS, a slave shall respond in one of two ways based on the trigger
condition of master. This slave response shall include, but not be limited to:
(i) START command.

(ii) STOP command.
(iii) OPEN command.
(iv) CLOSE command.
(v) COS lockout.
(vi) Control lockout.
(vii) Lockout COS and control.
(viii) Unlock COS.
(ix) Unlock Control.
(x) Unlock COS and control.
(xi) Release the Start/Stop command on a given priority.
(xii) No action.
g. Any binary contact, hi/low limit of any analog point including a "Computed Point" shall be
capable of being utilized as a master for interlocking. The interlocking shall be capable of using
the same master to monitor or command multiple slaves. Any slave shall be capable of being
a master to multiple slaves.
h. Interlocking as specified herein shall not be restricted to intra building or intra communication
line application. The controlling master(s) may be in a building or communication line while the
controlled slave(s) are in another building or communication line.
The priorities of a slave's response in interlocking shall be:
(i) When conflicting requests are present at different priority levels, the lower priority
action shall not be performed.
(ii) Whenever a priority level is released by an application feature the next highest
priority request shall be performed.
(iii) Each time a priority Start or Stop request is made, the command shall be issued
only if there is no higher priority request.
(iv) Manual requests shall override any other previous command and shall cause all
other priority levels to be released.
(v) If any of the hardware used by the software point is off-line, the command shall not
be issued. However, the request and its priority shall be saved.
Page 362 of 429
(vi) If the point is locked for command input, command shall not be issued; however,
the request and its priority shall be saved. When the command input capability is
unlocked, the highest priority request shall be issued to the point.
i. The Interlocking program shall be provided to allow the operator to assign an overall process
priority to each interlock process. This priority shall range form the highest (1) to the lowest
(16).
j. Operator commands shall be provided to, but not be limited to:
(i) Define SM interlock process.

(ii) Define OR logic interlock process.
(iii) Define AND logic interlock process.
(iv) Lock/unlock interlocks process.
(v) Enable/disable interlocks process.
(vi) Execute/terminate interlocks process.
(vii) Request Interlock Type Summary.
k. Operator output information shall be available from the computations. It shall be output upon
operator request or preselected time as detailed under the WEEYLY SCBEDLTLING Clause of
this Section of the Specifications.
2. Computations
a. The Computations program shall provide the user with a library of user oriented equations.
Input data for these calculations shall be obtained from appropriate system points, operator-
entered constants or the results of prior computations equations. Results of any computations
equation shall be displayed on any operator determined display device and these results shall
be used as a master in an interlocking sequence.
b. The Computation Profile concept shall be provided to use a high-level control strategy for the
execution of predefined computations in their proper sequence. This shall provide for the
organized and controlled activation of the operator-defined computation sequence.
c. Each Computation and Profile shall be assigned a unique identifier and expanded identifier
as specified herein before under SYSTEM FORMAT.
d. Computations and Profiles shall be defined on-line by the user. Any additions or deletions
shall be made on-line.
e. The following computation equations shall be available as a minimum:
(i) Energy transfer rate for chiller system.

(ii) Chiller coefficients of performance (KW/Ton).
(iii) Point average.
(iv) General summation.
(v) WB and DP temperature calculation from DB and RH inputs.
(vi) Enthalpy calculation from DB and RH inputs.
(vii) Total loop load calculation.
Page 363 of 429

Operator output information shall be available from the computations in a minimum of two
types of summaries. It shall be output upon operator request or preselected time as detailed
under the WEEKLY SCBEDULING Clause of this Section of the Specifications:
(i) Computation Summary.

(ii) Profile Summary.
2.15 SMOKE CONTROL
A. When a fire alarm is initiated the System shall automatically operate any or all, but not be limited to
smoke dampers systems, smoke vent systems and building pressurization systems.
B. After activation of the Control System, the Building Automation System shall printout any smoke damper,
which failed to operate as commanded, the status of each equipment and smoke damper.
C. BMS shall automatically switch the systems operation to smoke control mode. The presence of smoke
at the air supply or return shall cause the air supply and return dampers to close and the fan to shut off.
These intake dampers are to be provided with a manual and automatic override operated from the control
console for re-opening the damper and starting the fan.
D. Refer to Automatic Control sequences section.
E. Coordinate with Fire Alarm Electrical subcontractor.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.1 CLEANING:
A. Final cleaning shall be as described in Section 01350.
B. Remove and recycle excess material as required by the construction waste management program
Section 01565.
3.2 INSPECTION
The standard of workmanship shall comply with the requirements of the Engineer or Engineer’s Representative
who shall carry out periodic inspections of completed work and work in progress. The Contractor shall include
for accompanying the or his nominated representative, on such inspections over the installation period. Any
work not to the Engineer or Engineer’s Representative satisfaction during such inspections shall be replaced to
a standard satisfactory to the Engineer or Engineer’s Representative , at no cost to the Contract, for the
subsequent inspection.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Adequate clearance space shall be left during installation for both removal of all demountable items and for
normal inspection, testing and maintenance access without removal.
B. 'Formica' engraving laminate labels, where required, shall be affixed by an adhesive, suitable for the
ambient conditions in the relative areas, to a flat easily visible surface on each item of equipment. For
Page 364 of 429
valve bodies where no flat surface is available the labels shall be hung from the valve yoke by means of a
brass chain of suitable gauge.
C. Removable gland plates shall be provided for all incomings and outgoings cables and shall be to the IP
rating of the control panel.
D. Provide identification tags for all control equipments on the appropriate
mechanical / electrical sections.
E. Components such as selectors, timers and relays with extra low voltage contacts must be supplied with
dust proof casings.
F. Conduits
1. All wiring shall be in steel conduits or metallic cable trunk as specified in the electrical section.
2. All conduits shall be installed in a concealed manner where possible and shall be installed parallel to the
lines of building.
3. Metallic flexible conduits shall be used for connecting any element to its conduit.
4. In damp areas, the conduit and related equipment shall be suitable for the application.
5. All conduits and cable trunks shall be identified at every 3 m, all conduits entering or leaving a box shall be
identified before and after passing through. The identification shall be down using a self-adhesive yellow
band.
G. Pull-box and function box
1. A pull-box shall be located at every 15 m. the contractor shall be responsible for the location and for
obtaining approvals from the owner.
H. In suspended ceilings, all boxes shall be installed on the structure
3.4 WIRING
Wiring terminations to all control equipment supplied by the Contractor shall be checked by him both for
compliance with the control wiring diagrams and interlocks with other equipment shown on plant equipment
Electrical and HVAC wiring diagrams.
All faults shall be rectified as soon as they are discovered unless they concern wiring carried out under a
separate contract, in which case they shall be recorded and the details passed via the Contractor for rectification.
The Contractor shall record all equipment settings and the actual values maintained in the controlled variables
during commissioning and submit these to the Engineer or Engineer’s Representative immediately on
completion of commissioning, prior to the production of operating manuals.
A. Wiring and Termination
1. Control and Communication cable size & type shall as recommended in writing by system
manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.
2. All input/output field cables shall be at least 18 AWG (0.8sqm) where a multi pair cable shall not
share analog & digital signals or digital outputs and digital inputs , wiring shall follow the following
rule:
(i) One multi-pair cable for analog input/output only.
(ii) One multi-pair for digital outputs only.
Page 365 of 429

(iii) One multi-pair for digital inputs only.
3. All the cable carrying analog signals shall be screened & shall have a drain wire.
4. Terminations shall be mechanically and electrically secure. Twist type wire nuts shall not be accepted
Insulated tinned copper lugs shall be provided.
5. Cable within panels or enclosures shall be installed in wiring guides.
6. All wiring terminations within field panels shall be terminated at terminal strip.
7. Cable run in vertical trunk shall have means of cable support, at minimum every 2m.
3.5 TRAINING
A. The Contractor shall provide to the operator training class outline prior to schedule training.
B. System supplier trained control engineer and technicians familiar with the hardware, software, and
accessories shall provide training sessions to the owner’s personnel.
C. The course shall include instruction on specific systems and instructions for operating the installed system
to include as minimum:
1. HVAC and MEP systems overview.
2. Operation of control system
3. Function of each component
4. System operating procedure
5. Programming procedures
6. Maintenance procedures
D. The contractor shall conduct a minimum of five (5) on-site sessions to owner’s personnel on the operation
of the BMS system. Operator orientation shall include, but not limited to, the overall operation program,
equipment functions (both individually and as a part of total integrated system), commands, systems
generation, advisories, and appropriate operator intervention required in responding to the BMs operation.
E. The training sessions shall be as follows:
1. Initial training – one day , after system is started up and at least one week before acceptance test. Manual
shall have been submitted at least two weeks to training so that the owner’s personnel can start to
familiarize themselves with the system before session.
2. First Follow-up – two days , approximately two weeks after initial training . and before formal acceptance .
These sessions will deal with more advanced topics and answer questions.
3. Warranty follow-up- 16 hours to be scheduled at request of the owner during the warranty period to cover
topics requested by the owner.
PART 4 – PERFORMANCE AND TESTS
4.1 GENERAL
The contractor is responsible for providing all equipments and materials needed for system testing as
requested by the engineer. This shall include but not limited to calibration equipment for all temperature ad
Page 366 of 429

pressure sensors and switches used, CO detectors, air quality sensors, duct smoke detectors, and all other
sensors and detectors utilized in the system. The contractor shall also provide calibration certificates for
all calibration devices. The Contractor will be responsible for any cost impact that may occurs due to any
information error or deviation from the requirements of the applicable standards.
Before the start of the testing, the contractor shall hand over to the owner representative all operation
manuals and software licenses and any other system documentations and as-built.
4.2 TESTING AND MAINTENANCE
The Contractor shall include for:
A. Prior to Commencement of Work on Site
Advising the Engineer or Engineer’s Representative nominated representatives on the operation of the
control system and the identification and correct sitting of control equipment, the wiring runs and wiring
connections.
B. During the Progress of the Site Work
Advising the Engineer or Engineer’s Representative nominated representatives on the correct sitting
and installation of controls and the correct wiring of the controls.
Particular attention shall be paid to the mounting of actuators, on valves, dampers, the correct linkages
from actuators to valves and dampers and that all controls and instruments are installed with adequate
clearance for removal. Clearances shall be such that all wiring connections may be visibly inspected
without removing the equipment. The work shall be carried out on the basis of regular visits throughout the
contract period.
C. When the Installation is Complete
Commissioning the complete control system supplied under this section of the Specification to provide the
detailed operation and performance figures.
The contractor is responsible to provide a complete commissioning procedure for consultant approval prior
to system commissioning. Commissioning procedure shall include and not limited to: drawings, complete
sequence of operation and equipment list check tables (with part number as per final approved materials
submittal).
D. Maintenance during Defects Liability Period
Providing all normal servicing and maintenance during the Defects Liability Period for all equipments
provided under his contract without extra cost during the project completion and warranty period .
Provide repair or replacement for any defected component without extra cost during the project completion
and warranty period.
Page 367 of 429
The BMS supplier has to inform the Employer by any software updates after project completion and their
costs.
E. Provide one year of warranty for all system components.
F. Provide 10% spare parts for each item in the list of material.
4.3 CONTROL SYSTEM
The complete thermostatic control system inclusive of ancillary equipment and interlocking shall be
commissioned to operate in accordance with the performance requirements of the Specification such that, under
all load conditions, it is stable.
The Engineer or Engineer’s Representative may wish to attend such commissioning and should be given
adequate notice of dates when this is to take place. Commissioning shall take place in the presence of the
Contractor's representative so that plant faults, affecting the putting to work of the system, can be remedied.
The Contractor shall record all equipment settings and the actual values maintained in the controlled variables
during commissioning and submit these to the Engineer or Engineer’s Representative immediately on
completion of commissioning, prior to the production of operating manuals.
The Contractor shall be responsible for replacing, correcting and resetting all faulty equipment in the complete
control system for the full defects liability period after final commissioning except that, where any item of
equipment is normally guaranteed for a period in excess of this, such responsibility shall extend to the full
guarantee period of such items.
4.4 CERTIFICATES
If the Engineer or Engineer’s Representative does not attend to witness tests on receipt of written notice as
given by the Contractor, then the tests shall be carried out by the Contractor, who shall sign and submit three
certified copies of such certificates to the Engineer or Engineer’s Representative.
The Contractor shall informally instruct the Client and his Authorized Representatives in the operation of the
complete system during testing and commissioning. In addition he shall include for a period of.... days for
formal instruction, after the completion of commissioning.
The Contractor shall be responsible for replacing, correcting and resetting all faulty equipment in the complete
control system for the full defects liability period after final commissioning except that, where any item of
equipment is normally guaranteed for a period in excess of this, such responsibility shall extend to the full
guarantee period of such items.
4.5 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
The Contractor shall prepare and supply Operating and Maintenance Manuals to the Engineer or Engineer’s
Representative. These manuals shall be provided within weeks of final commissioning and copies of the
manuals shall be provided. A draft copy shall be available at the time of practical completion.
Page 368 of 429
4.6 WITNESS TESTING
The Contractor shall demonstrate the operation of the complete control system to the Engineer or Engineer’s
Representative.
Witness testing shall commence after the completion of final commissioning.
Software Programs and Complementary Requirements
The Sub-Contractor/Controls Supplier shall give written notice if the Client is to be requested to enter into a
software licensing agreement. In no circumstances will the Client enter into such an agreement, which excludes
any term as to merchantability or fitness for purpose of the software supplied.
The Sub-Contractor/Controls Supplier shall enter into an Escrow Agreement with the Client prior to the
Contract being let in which a copy of the source code for the software shall be deposited with a third party.
Typically the third party will be a bank, solicitor, National Computer Center, or some other mutually agreed party.
If there are any changes to the source code, or software at any time then these changes shall also be made the
third party copy.
The Escrow Agreement shall be for a one-year period commencing after Final Acceptance of the Sub-contract
Works by the Engineer. The cost of the Escrow Agreement, including the costs of storage with the third party
shall be borne by the Sub-Contractor/Controls Supplier.
The following clause will be included in the Escrow Agreement: "In the event that the (name of the Sub-
Contractor/Controls Supplier) and its appointed agent cease to be in the business of maintaining the program
product the Client may invoke the Escrow Agreement to obtain access to the source code and supplementary
documentation which is held in Escrow. The Escrow Agent is currently (name and address of the third party
holding software).Escrow AgreementIn Consideration Of
The Client agreeing under the terms of his Agreement with the Management Contractor to the engagement
by the Management Contractor of the Sub-Contractor/Controls Supplier.
The Sub-contractor/Controls Supplier Undertakes That
1. The Sub-Contractor/Controls Supplier will deposit a copy of the source code for all of his software related
to the Sub-Contractor/Controls Supplier with a third party to be nominated by the Client.
2. If the Sub-Contractor/Controls Supplier shall at any time make any change to the source code, he shall
immediately deposit a revised copy with the said third party.
3. The Sub-Contractor/Controls Supplier will pay all costs and charges including those of the said third party
incurred in connection with this Escrow Agreement.
4. In the event that the Sub-Contractor/Controls Supplier or his appointed agent cease to be in the business of
maintaining the program product the Client may invoke this Escrow Agreement to obtain access to the source
code and supplementary documentation which is held in Escrow.
5. In the event that the Sub-Contractor/Controls Supplier or his appointed agent default or fail to undertake
maintenance of the program product the Client may invoke this Escrow Agreement to obtain access to the
source code and supplementary documentation which is held in Escrow.
PART 5 - POINT SCHEDULES
Page 369 of 429

5.1 GENERAL
The different functions required with each point are indicated in the schedule of Input/Output Points. Refer to
the other relevant HVAC Sections of the Specification for more details of these functions.
5.2 THE BUILDINGS
A. Provide power wiring to all DDC(S) and to all components controlled by DDC(S).
B. For electrical plumbing and fire protection systems, provide wiring from auxiliary contacts to BMS through
DDCS. Interlock fire alarm panel with BMS through software interface. Co-ordinate with electrical,
plumbing and fire protection systems supplier to supply all necessary auxiliary switches and devices
required for interface and connection with BMS.
C. For HVAC systems provide wiring from/to DDCS.
D. Coordinate with other contractors for complete functioning system.
E. Allow for input of all required data in Maintenance Management Program. All equipment/material
mentioned here in shall be monitored by Maintenance Management System.
F. The contractor shall approach all other contractors for required data and coordination.
G. The Contractor shall supply all required field devices for proper operation and function of system.
PART 6 - LIST OF RECOMMENDED MANUFACTURERS
1. Siemens (Switzerland).
2. Honeywell (U.S.A).
3. Johnson (U.S.A).
4. Schneider (France).
Page 370 of 429

SECTION 23 11 00 Fuel Oil Specialties
SECTION 23 11 00
Fuel Oil Specialties
PART 2 - GENERAL
B. General Requirements for HVAC Work, Section 15020, applies to work of this Section.
Page 371 of 429

tests necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, all fuel oil specialties work in
accordance with drawings and specifications.
A. Standards
1. ANSI
2. ASTM
3. U.S. Federal Specifications.
B. Regulatory Agency
1. Comply with requirements of all governing authorities having jurisdiction.
2.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings indicating sizes, types of materials, details, attachment and installations.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed data, catalog cuts, recommended connections and installation
methods.
C. Samples, when requested
D. Manufacturer's test data
E. Reports of field tests required.
A. Deliver materials properly identified as to type, size, etc., and undamaged.
B. Do not store exposed to weather, cover with suitable type material to protect from damage.
PART 3 - PRODUCTS
3.1 OIL FILL AND VENT TERMINALS
A. Furnish and install a fill cap at oil tank fill pipe terminal. Each fill cap shall have cast iron body; cast bronze
cap, gasket and key. Fill cap terminals shall be galvanized or cadmium plated
B. Vent Heads - Oil tank vent pipe terminal shall be provided with a weatherproof type vent head
3.2 FUEL OIL PUMP
A. Furnish and install fuel oil pump sets of sizes and capacities as shown in the drawings.
B. Each pump set shall consist of the following basic parts completely assembled, piped and wired and ready
for installation.
1. Fuel oil pumps: Comply with UL 343 and HI 3.1-3.5, single-stage,
Internal-gear, positive-displacement, rotary type. Include steel base; footmounted,
Page 372 of 429
Cast-iron housing; steel gears; bronze bearings; steel shaft; mechanical Seals; and built-in pressure
relief bypass.
2. Motor: explosion proof high effciecy type motor.
3. Duplex suction and discharge strainer of line size, fitted with two filtering baskets. The strainer shall
have a transfer handle for switch cover of filter baskets (refeer to point 2.4.D below).
4. Relief valves with an adjustable range of 172 to 1034 kPa, set at 861 kPa.
5. Gauges
6. Oil pressure regulator, Preferred Utilities type "V".
7. Oil pressure switches, syphon mounted, installed to operate lead/lag, pump failure back-up system.
8. Control cabinet : NEMA 12 construction mounted on structural steel frame, completely prewired and
containing the following components:
a. Pump motor circuit breakers.

b. Pump motor starters with overload protection and reset buttons.
c. Pump lead/lag system with lead pump selector switch.
d. Pump hand-off-auto switches.
e. Pump "ON" indicating lights.
f. Pump failure indicating light.
g. Control circuit power switch and transformer.
h. Numbered terminal strips and engraved nameplates.
i. 115mm alarm bell.
j. Additional contacts for a trouble audio/visual alarm at the building central alarm panel upon the
activation of any alarms at the fuel oil pump control panel.
k. System D.D.C. control equipment as shown.
l. Low level alarm for tank
C. Piping shall be ASTM53, schedule 40 black steel with malleable iron fittings. Provide check valves at each
pump discharge. Each pump shall be protected by an external relief valve. Include gate valves at the suction
and discharge of each pump.
D. Factory test the unit and provide a certificate attesting to the completion of a successful test.
E. Shop drawings shall include complete elementary and connection wiring diagrams, piping diagrams and
installation instructions.
3.3 FUEL PIPING
A. The fuel pipe shall be ASTM53, seamless, schedule 40 black steel.
1. Malleable-Iron Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.3, Class 150, standard pattern, with threaded ends
according to ASME B1.20.1.
2. Unions: ASME B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron with brass-to-iron seat, ground joint, and threaded
ends according to ASME B1.20.1.
3. Cast-Iron Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.1, Class 125.
4. Steel Welding Fittings: ASME B16.9, wrought steel or ASME B16.11, forged steel.
5. Steel Threaded Fittings: ASME B16.11, forged steel with threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1.
Page 373 of 429

6. Steel Flanges and Flanged Fittings: ASME B16.5.
7. Gasket Material: Thickness, material, and type suitable for fuel oil.
B. All buried fuel pipes should be coated with Synthetic fabric based tape which is impregnated and coated with
organic petroleum based compounds. Resulting anti corrosion highly resistant to mineral acids, alkalis, salts
and micro-organisms and highly impermeable to water, water vapour and gases coating. Coating tape should
be suitable for operation temperature range of 0 °C to + 55 °C.
3.4 FUEL PIPING ACCESSORIES
A. Flexible Hose: Flexible metal hose, corrugated type with braided wire sheath covering, close-pitch annular
corrugations, rated for a working pressure of at least 862 kPa (gage), 200 mm (125 psig, 8 inch) minimum
live length, flanged or screwed end connections as applicable, UL listed for flammable liquid service. Metal
for hose and braided wire sheath shall be stainless- steel, any type of ASTM 300-series.
B. Dielectric Unions: Union comprised of steel female pipe thread end and copper solder-joint end conforming
to dimensional, strength, and pressure requirements of ASME B16.39, Class 1. Steel parts shall be
galvanized or plated. Union shall have a water-impervious insulation barrier capable of limiting galvanic
current to 1 percent of the short-circuit current in a corresponding bimetallic joint. When dry, it shall be able
to withstand a 600 volt breakdown test.
C. Welding Filler Metal: ASME B31.4 and compatible with the materials to be welded.
D. Strainers: FS WW-S-2739 duplex basket type, with inlet and outlet on the same center line. Cast steel or
fabricated steel body, 40 by 40 mesh ASTM 300-series stainless-steel baskets. Open area of 1 basket shall
be 2 ½ times inlet or outlet piping area. Furnish 1 spare basket.
E. Gaskets: Provide 1 piece, factory cut, 1.60 mm thick, gaskets resistant to the effects of fuel oil and
manufactured of fire-resistant materials. Provide full-face gaskets for flat-face flanged joints, and ring gaskets
for raised-face flanged joints. Dimensions for gaskets shall be in accordance with ASME B16.21.
F. Bolting: Material for bolts and studs ASTM A307, Grade-B and for nuts ASTM A 194/A 194M, Grade-2.
Dimensions of bolts, studs and nuts ANSI B18.2.1 and ASME B18.2.2 with threads conforming to ASME B1.1
coarse type, with Class 2A fit for bolts and studs, and Class 2B for nuts.
G. Sleeves in Masonry and Concrete Walls, Floors, Roofs: Provide ASTM A53, Schedule 40 or Standard Weight,
zinc-coated steel pipe sleeves.
H. Sleeves in Other Wall, Floor, and Roof Materials: Provide minimum 26 gage zinc-coated steel sheet sleeves
in partitions and other than masonry and concrete walls, floors, and roof.
I. Floor, Walls, and Ceiling Plates: Plates shall be painted cast-iron, malleable iron, or steel.
J. Miscellaneous Metal: ASTM A 36/A 36M, standard mill finished structural shapes, hot-dip galvanized after
fabrication.
3.5 FUEL SPECIALTY VALVES
Page 374 of 429

A. Oil Shutoff Valves: UL 842; metal-body ball valve with threaded ends according to ASME B1.20.1 for pipe
threads.
B. Pressure-Reducing Valves: UL listed for fuel oil service. Include bronze body with 1035-kPa (150-psig).
C. Oil Safety Valves: UL listed for fuel oil service. Include metal body; brokenline, oil shutoff feature; and
minimum pressure rating 275-kPa (40-psig) minimum pressure rating.
D. Check valves DN50 and Smaller: Use general-duty valves that comply with MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze
body, bronze disc, suitable for fuel oil service, with "WOG" indicated on body. DN80 (3 Inches) and Larger:
MSS SP-71, Class 125, 1380- kPa (200-psi) CWP subject to suit system operating pressure, ASTM A 126
castiron body and bolted cap, horizontal-swing, weighted non-slam, bronze disc, flanged or grooved end
connections.
E. Direct acting backpressure sustaining valves.
1. Backpressure Sustaining Valve shall be suitable for the type of fuel used.
2. Valve shall be balanced design, direct-acting, diaphragm operated and spring loaded, easily field
adjustable from near zero to a minimum of 10% above the factory backpressure setting.
3. Valve shall have ASTM B62 bronze globe style body with threaded ends and have a renewable resilient
seat.
4. Diaphragm, seals and resilient seat must be suitable for the type of fuel
3.6 FUEL HOSE REEL
 Non sparking ratchet assembly stainless steel automatic spring rewind (Declutching arbor to prevent
damage from reverse winding) fuel Hose Reel with automatic nozel and hose swivel for marine ships
and jet-ski (Ø 1") with hose lentgh of 25 m as shown on drawings.
 Reel operating temperature range from 0 °C up to 60 °C with appropriate pressure rating suitable for
network pressure.
 All reel components (such as hose, valves, nozel…etc) shoule be suitable for fuel (gasoline/diesel)
application.
PART 4 - EXECUTION
4.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's recommendation.
Page 375 of 429

SECTION 23 13 00 Facility Fuel Storage Tank
SECTION 23 13 00
Facility Fuel Storage Tank
PART 5 - GENERAL
B. General Requirements for HVAC Work, Section 15020, applies to work of this Section.
tests necessary to complete and make ready for operation by the Owner, all fuel oil storage tank work in
accordance with drawings and specifications.
Page 376 of 429

A. Standards
1. DEC
2. NFPA
5.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings indicating sizes, types, location and method of installation.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed data, catalog cuts, recommended method of installation.
A. Deliver material in properly labeled packaged and undamaged.
B. Do not store exposed to weather.
PART 6 - PRODUCTS
6.1 FUEL STORAGE TANK
A. Furnish and install carbon steel, double layer Fuel Storage Tank with primary and secondary containment
walls and interstitial space containing leak detector, with anti-corrosion coating suitable for outdoor installation
at coast climate areas. For size, and capacity refer to drawings & BOQ.
B. The tank shall be constructed, tested and installed in accordance with NFPA & UL-142 recommendations
C. The tank manufacturer's statement that this tank conforms to local codes of Environmental Conservation
label must be permanently displayed.
D. Tank Painting:
1. Apply manufacturer's standard prime coat to exterior steel surface of tanks and supports.
2. Prepare exterior steel surface of tanks and supports.
3. Shop Cleaning: After fabrication, blast clean according to SSPCSP 6/NACE No. 3.
4. After cleaning, remove dust or residue from cleaned surfaces.
5. If surface develops rust before prime coat is applied, repeat surface preparation.
6. Apply manufacturer's standard prime coat to shop-cleaned, dry surface same
Day as surface preparation.
7. Apply manufacturer's standard two-component, epoxy finish coats with minimum coating thickness of
1000 micron.
E. Product Storage Requirements:
1. Tanks must be vented. Tanks are designed for operation at atmospheric pressure only, except for use
with vapor recovery systems providing the pressure or vacuum does not exceed 1 psi.
2. Tanks shall be capable of storing liquids with specific gravity up to 1:1.
o
3. Maximum temperature. Tanks shall be capable of storing fuel oil at temperatures not to exceed 65 C
at the tank interior surface.
4. Tanks shall be chemically inert to petroleum products.
F. Accessories:
1. Anchor straps - provide steel reinforced anchor straps for tank. Number and location of straps shall
be as specified by manufacturer.
Straps shall be standard as supplied by the tank manufacturer.
Page 377 of 429
2. Certification Plate label shall be permanently affixed to each tank.
3. Threaded pipe connection fittings on top or sides of tank as needed, for fill, supply, return, vent,
sounding, and gaging. Include cast-iron plugs for shipping.
4. Lifting Lugs: For handling and installation.
5. Ladders: Carbon-steel ladder outside tank.
6. Flanged Manways
a. The standard manways to be .56m I.D.

b. The manway will be furnished complete with UL listed gaskets, bolts and covers.
c. The steel manway cover shall have three 100mm NPT fittings welded in place.
d. Ladders: Carbon-steel ladder outside tank.
G. The manufacturer's price shall include the cost of all shipping permits and transportation to deliver the tank
to the jobsite.
H. The tanks shall be set on 300mm of pea gravel and anchored to a concrete foundation with fiberglass
hold-down straps as recommended by the manufacturer. Each strap shall be capable of withstanding the
buoyancy load for the tank diameter.
I. The manufacturer of the tank shall submit shop drawings of the tank for approval. The shop drawings shall
indicate the size, construction data, tapping connections, location of the tapings and hold-down installation.
J. Performance Warranty:
K. Tank manufacturer shall furnish a warranty stating as follows:
We warrant that our tanks if installed in accordance our instructions:
1. Will meet our published specifications and will be free from material defects in materials and
workmanship for a period of one year following date of original shipment;
2. Will not fail for a period of thirty (30) years from date of original shipment due to external corrosion;
3. Will not fail for a period of thirty (30) years from date of original purchase due to internal corrosion,
o
provided the tank is used solely with fuel oil at temperatures not to exceed 65 C.
4. Will not leak for a period of thirty (30) years from date of original purchase due to structural failure
(defined as breaking or collapse) provided the installation is performed and validated by a qualified
installation contractor and the tank is used as stated above.
L. Level monitoring and alarm functions of the tank gauging systems follows:
1. Automatic tank gauging should be considered which illustrate the exact fuel level inside each tank on
monitor as well as any level alarm can be adjusted according to operator desire.
2. Low level on tank: Flashing display on gauge and sounding of local alarm on BMS control system.
Alarm silencing pushbutton silences bell, display continues to flash until situation corrected.
3. Output shall be 4-20 m adc which shall interface with strip chart recorder.
PART 7 - EXECUTION
7.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with approved shop drawings and manufacturer's recommendation.
7.2 ADJUSTMENTS
A. When the system is energized make all required adjustments and test as per manufacturer's
recommendations for leakage.
Page 378 of 429

PART 8 - MANUFACTURERS
IAC or any approved equal manufacturer.

SECTION 23 31 13 Metal Ducts
SECTION 23 31 13
Metal Ducts
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Special Conditions and Division-1

A. The work includes the providing of all labour, supervision, materials, equipment, accessories, services and
tests necessary to complete, make ready, and set to work for acceptance by the Owner, all sheet metal work
in accordance with Drawings and Specification.
Page 379 of 429

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of sheet metal ductwork products of
the types, materials, and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for
not less than 5 years, as approved by Engineer.
B. Installers: Firms with at least 5 years of successful installation experience on projects with sheet metal
ductwork systems similar to that required for this project.
C. Standards Compliance: Comply with the requirements of applicable local codes and the standards outlined
in section 15000.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
instructions and catalogue cuts for sheet metal ductwork materials and products.
B. Manufacturer Certification.
C. Submit for checking and approval shop drawings of all sheet metal work drawn to a minimum scale of
1:50. Obtain approval of these shop drawings from the Architect before any fabrication upon this ductwork
is commenced. In addition to the layout of the ductwork, indicate the type of seams and joints, the method
of applying acoustical lining and noising, details of fire dampers and any other details the Architect may
request in reference to sheet metal work. Submit such details prior to or with the first duct layout drawings.
Indicate the elevation of bottom of ducts above finish floor on the drawings. Refer to "SHOP DRAWINGS
AND OTHER INFORMATION REQUIRED, Specification Section 15000."
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 SHEET METAL DUCTWORK

A. All ductwork, sheet metal flues, register boxes, air changers, dampers and all auxiliary work of any kind
necessary to make the various air conditioning, ventilating and heating systems of the building complete and
ready for satisfactory operation shall be furnished and installed. All ductwork shall be constructed in
accordance with the latest edition of SMACNA Duct Construction Standards.
B. All ductwork indicated on drawings is schematic. Ductwork shall be set up and down, offset, change in duct
size and/or location to meet field conditions and coordination between trades without additional cost to the
owner.
C. Dimensions given on drawings of all acoustically lined ducts shall be clear inside dimension.
D. A snap lock seam shall not be permitted.
E. Use gasket type joint when dissimilar metals are joined.
F. All galvanized ductwork shall be hung with galvanized hangers.
G. Access doors as specified elsewhere shall be provided in the ducts wherever required for access to fusible
link dampers, controls, and all equipment concealed inside the ducts.
H. Unless otherwise noted, all ductwork shall be substantially built of lock forming quality galvanized steel
having a galvanized coating of 33 grams for both sides of 0.1 sq. m. of sheet. Ducts shall have approved
joints and seams smooth on the inside with a neat finish on the outside. Duct joints shall be as airtight as
possible, with laps made in the direction of air flow and no flanges projecting into the air stream. All angles
shall be galvanized.
Page 380 of 429

I. Tapers for low pressure ducts shall be constructed in accordance with SMACNA standards. When a taper
is used in a "diverging" air flow and the duct size increases, the sides are to be pitched to maximum of 20
degrees to prevent turbulence or an additional increase of static pressure. When a taper is used in a
"contracting" air flow and the duct size is decreasing, the sides are to be pitched to a maximum of 30
degrees.
J. Where space conditions permit, full radius turns shall be used at offsets in low pressure ducts radius = duct
width.
K. Where space conditions do not permit a short radius, vaned elbow or square elbows shall be used. All
square elbows shall be fitted with double thick turning vanes.
L. When it is impossible to offset a low pressure duct around an obstruction or when it is necessary to make
provisions for vertical hangers of the ceiling construction passing through ducts, the obstruction shall be
encompassed with a "streamliner".
M. Install manual dampers, automatic dampers (provided by control manufacturer) fire dampers, smoke
dampers, grilles, registers, diffusers, register boxes, access doors, etc., as indicated on the drawings
described elsewhere in the specifications and as required for a complete system ready for operation.
Balancing dampers shall be provided in each branch, split or tap connection of low pressure ducts unless
otherwise noted on plans. Quadrant dampers shall be furnished and installed in locations shown on plans.
N. Exact dimensions of register boxes must await approval of grilles, and exact locations shall be submitted for
approval, otherwise any changes directed after installation shall be made without additional cost to the
Owner. All register boxes and other openings must be kept tightly closed during construction to keep out
rubbish.
2.2 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK

A. Low pressure ductwork is defined as ductwork in the systems where velocities do not exceed 10 m/sec and
static pressures do not exceed 500 Pa at fan discharge.
B. All low pressure ductwork shall be galvanized steel, except where otherwise specified, with gauges as
follows, and constructed and braced so not to deform, break of fail to support its own weight.
Sheet Metal Duct Gauges - Low Pressure
Duct Width Sheet Metal Gauge and thickness

(mm) (mm)
Up to 600 (24) 0.6
601 to 760 (24) 0.6
761 to 1220 (22) 0.8
1221 to 1800 (20) 1.0
over 1800 (18) 1.2
C. Total air outlet volume for low pressure duct systems, measured by means of a velometer, shall be at least
95% of actual fan supply (measured by means of duct traverse taken with a pitot tube and water manometer.)
2.3 MEDIUM PRESSURE DUCTWORK

Page 381 of 429
A. Medium pressure ductwork is defined as ductwork in systems where velocities exceed 10 m/sec and static
pressures do not exceed 1500 Pa.
B. All medium pressure ductwork shall be galvanized steel except where otherwise specified, with gauges, as
follows, brace and construction so as to support its own weight and not to break, rattle or deform under
pressure.
Sheet Metal Duct Gauges - Medium Pressure
Duct Width Sheet Metal Gauge and Thickness

(mm) (mm)
up to 600 (22) 0.8
601 to 760 (20) 1.0
761 to 1200 (18) 1.2
1221 to 2030 (16) 1.5
over 2031 (16) 1.5
C. Total air outlet volume for medium pressure duct systems, measured by means of a volume meter, shall be
at least 98% of actual fan supply (measured by means of a duct traverse taken with a Pitot tube and water
manometer) i.e., maximum 2% leakage.
2.4 KITCHEN EXHAUST DUCTS

A. All kitchens cooking equipment exhaust ductwork shall be constructed of minimum 1.6 mm thick black iron.
B. Ducts shall have welded seams and 50 mm x 50m x 6 mm matched angle iron joint connections. All joints
shall be ground smooth, fitted and welded to make connections grease-proof and airtight. The exterior of
all kitchen cooking equipment ventilation ducts shall have welded 38 mm x 38 mm x 3 mm angles, punched
for securing block insulation. Provide 457 mm x 457 mm access doors on side of horizontal duct at 4.5 m
spacing. Access doors shall be same as duct gauge, and shall be located not less than 50 mm above
bottom of duct to provide a drip lip. All horizontal ducts shall be pitched back to hoods 1mm per 30 mm or
maximum pitch attainable. Provide residue trap and cleanout provisions at base of each vertical risers.
Kitchen exhaust ducts shall contain no dampers, turning vanes or obstructions.
2.5 BREECHINGS AND FLUES

A. Smoke breechings and connections shall be constructed of not lighter than 1.6 mm black steel sheets and
shall be made up in sections with 38 mm flanged ends, or with 50 mm x 50 mm x 6mm steel angles for
bolting sections together and with 38 mm x 38 mm x 6 mm brace angles all around breeching at the middle
of sections which are over 1524 mm in length. Angles shall be riveted or welded to the steel sheets. Bolts
and rivets shall be spaced more than 150 mm on centers.
B. Seams of smoke breeching sections shall be riveted with 6 mm diameter rivets at not more than 100 mm
centres for girth seams and 150 mm centres for longitudinal seams, or they shall be continuously welded on
the outside. Steel angles 25 mm x 25 mm x 3 mm shall be riveted to the underside of rectangular breechings
on 1 m centres to support wire mesh for block covering, which shall be securely wired to projecting legs of
angles in holes punched on 200 mm centres. Breechings shall be gas tight. Adequate provision shall be
made for expansion into the chimney openings.
C. Where other than rectangular smoke breeching is specified or indicated on drawings, the joints shall be
telescoped and riveted.
Page 382 of 429

D. Smoke breechings shall be hung from the structure. Hangers for supports shall be not less than 19 mm
diameter steel rods, spaced not more than 2.4 m apart. Steel beams shall be inserted where required. Use
63 mm steel angles as stiffeners for hangers at top and bottom side of breeching.
E. Each smoke breeching shall be equipped with hinged cleanout doors not less than 381 mm x 381 mm in
size. One such cleanout door shall be provided at the end of smoke breechings. When the horizontal run
of smoke pipe exceeds 5 meters additional cleanout doors shall be provided and shall be so spaced that
the distance between cleanout doors shall not exceed 5 meters. Unless otherwise specified or approved,
cleanout doors shall be installed in sides of smoke breechings.
F. Breading and flues are identified on the drawings.
2.6 PREFABRICATED SECTIONAL CHIMNEY

A. Provide a pre-fabricated sectional chimney as shown and sized on the drawings and as specified herein.
B. Chimney is to be factory constructed and delivered to the site ready for final assembly.
C. Chimney shall be constructed in 1.2 meter long sections, flanged on either end and sealed tight.
D. The chimney shall be manufactured of double wall construction with Type 304 insulation between the walls.
1. The outer wall or jacket shall be 2.4mm stainless steel.

2. The inner wall shall be type 304 stainless steel, 3mm thick.
3. The spacing between the chimney walls shall be filled with a minimum of 50mm high temperature
insulation having a K-factor of .24 at 24C.
E. The chimney base shall be provided with an access door to permit easy inspection and cleaning, and shall
be provided with a Type 304 stainless steel drain pipe of no less than 25mm diameter.
F. Joints between sections shall be flanged and sealed air tight.
G. Chimney shall be properly supported, anchored and guyed as per the manufacturer's installation
instructions.
H. Allow proper provisions for thermal expansion of the chimney.
I. Provide all necessary components for a complete installation, manufactured by a single manufacturer.
J. The chimneys identified on the drawings
2.7 ACCESS DOORS IN SHEET METAL WORK

A. Wherever necessary in ductwork, casings or sheet metal partitions, this Contractor shall provide suitable
access doors and frames to permit inspections, operation and maintenance of all valves, controls, fire
dampers, filters, bearings, traps, or other apparatus concealed behind the sheet metal work. All such doors
shall be of double construction of not less than .9 mm sheet metal and shall have sponge rubber gaskets
around their entire perimeter. Doors in insulated ducts or insulated casings shall have rigid fibreglass
insulation between the metal panels.
B. All access doors in sheet metal ducts shall be hung on heavy flat hinges and shall be secured in the closed
position by means of cast zinc clinching type latches. Where space conditions preclude hinges, use four
heavy window type latches. Doors into ducts shall in general not be smaller than 300 x 300 except for
access door to fire dampers which will depend on size of fire damper.
Page 383 of 429

C. In no case shall access to any items or equipment requiring inspections, adjustments, or servicing require
the removal of nuts, bolts, screws, wing nuts, wedges, or any other screwed or loose device.
D. Each sheet metal chamber shall have access doors for access to all parts of the system. Doors shall be
fitted with cast zinc door latches, two per door. Latches shall be operable from both sides of casing. As per
SMACNA Details Hinges shall be extra heavy, zinc plated hinges, minimum of three per door. The doors
shall be felted or provided with rubber gaskets so as to make them airtight. The doors shall be made with
inner and outer sheets 50 mm apart so that they may be properly insulated and properly operated. Doors
shall be a minimum size of 500 mm x 1200 mm.
2.8 VOLUME DAMPERS

A. Furnish and install all dampers required for all systems to accomplish the intent of the drawings and
specifications.
B. Dampers to be located at every branch have more than two outlets.
C. All dampers requiring modulating or two position controls shall conform to construction and finish as
indicated under Section of “Automatic Controls BMS”. Dampers are to be installed in frames properly
caulked to prevent leakage when closed. All automatic louver dampers for modulating air flow shall be of
the opposed blade type. Leakage not to exceed 17 M3HR at 100 mm w.g.
2.9 BACK DRAFT DAMPERS (NON RETURN DAMPER)

A. The casing should be constructed of gauge 18 or 20 formed galvanized steel sheet. And the casing flange
width to be 25-30 mm .
B. Blades to be fabricated from aluminum sheet 0.5 mm thickness in mill fish.
C. Aluminum blades are fixed to the frame through a galvanized steel rods( axels) for rigid construction.
D. Aluminum blades are fitted with nylon bushes for corrosion resistance rattle free and smooth operation.
E. The blades shall be positioned on 50 mm minimum centers up to 100 mm maximum centers resulting in a
high free area to provide minimum resistance to air flow.
2.10 PRESSURE RELIEF DAMPER

A. All pressure relief dampers to be 2 hour fire rated and tested according to BS 476 part 20 or equivalent
certified test, and to be used with INERGEN system.
B. Damper should be balanced with weighted flaps and to be fully mechanical operation, construction should
be galvanized steel with epoxy powder coat finish.
C. Bearings should be stainless steel or bronze, shaft should be stainless steel and .
2.11 FIRE DAMPERS

A. Furnish and install fusible link fire dampers where shown on the drawings and in accordance with applicable
local regulations and NFPA – 90 A.
B. Dampers are required wherever ducts enter or leave shafts or pierce fire-rated construction.
C. Fire dampers shall be constructed of 1.6 mm galvanized steel, with fusible links designed to break at 74°C.
Page 384 of 429

D. The space between the damper sleeve and the masonry opening shall be packed with an approved sealant
similar to Dow Corning "Fire Stop Foam and Sealant".
E. Firmly attach the fire damper frame or sleeve to the wall.
F. Damper types are as follows:
1. Type I (2 hr.); with factory standard sleeve in air stream for air velocities up to 10 M/sec. 100% free area
out of air stream for all ducts less than 300 mm in height and air velocities greater than 10 M/sec.
2. Type II (3 hr.); with factory standard sleeve in air stream. For velocities up to 10 M/sec. 100% free area
out of air stream for all ducts less than 300 mm in height and velocities greater than 10 M/sec.
3. Spring loaded damper shall be provided for installation in vertical ducts and shall be same as above.
4. Provide an access door in the duct on the same side as the fusible link to permit ready access for
inspection and maintenance.
5. All fire dampers must be provided with an external device which indicates the position of the damper.
G. All fire dampers and sleeves should be labeled to (UL 555).
2.12 SMOKE DAMPERS - FIRE SMOKE DAMPERS

A. Furnish and install smoke dampers where shown on the drawings in accordance with applicable local
regulations and NFPA – 90 A. Fire/smoke damper system shall be subject to approval of the local fire
department.
B. In general, dampers are required to isolate air handling equipment from the remainder of the system and
wherever ducts penetrate smoke partitions. Where fire partitions are used as smoke partitions, dampers
shall be combination fire/smoke type as specified above.
C. Smoke and fire/smoke dampers shall be constructed 1.6 mm sheet steel with high temperature blade seal
and fusible links designed to break at 82°C.
D. Smoke and fire/smoke dampers shall be of the following types.
1. Type I; with factory standard sleeve and electric operator, models MA-418 or MP-2781 (220v/50 Hz).
2. Type II; parallel blade damper with electric operator 220v/50Hz. Use in discharge ductwork at supply
fan and return air where applicable.
3. Type III; Combination fire/smoke damper with factory standard sleeve, electric operation 220v/50Hz.
Damper shall close upon activation of smoke detector or firestat or shall stop upon breakage of fusible
link. Include factory wired damper reset switch on damper housing and end switches for override light
indication.
E. All fire/smoke dampers and sleeves should be labeled to (UL 555S).
F. Smoke dampers where indicated on the plans shall conform to the UL555S leakage class specified. Damper
actuator shall be UL listed and suitable for the application.
2.13 DRIP PANS AND DRAINS

A. Examine the drawings, and in cooperation with the Electrical trade confirm the final location of all electrical
equipment to be installed in the vicinity of piping. Plan and arrange all overhead piping no closer than 600
mm from a vertical line to electric motors and controllers, switchboards, panel boards, or similar equipment.
B. Where the installation of piping does not comply with the requirements of foregoing paragraph, where
feasible, the piping shall be relocated.
Page 385 of 429

C. Furnish copper gutters as follows:
1. Provide and erect a gutter of 1 mm cold rolled copper under every pipe which is within 600 mm of being
vertically over any motor, electrical controllers, switchboards, or the like.
2. Each gutter shall be soldered and made watertight, properly suspended and carefully pitched to a
convenient point for draining. Provide a 75 mm drain to nearest floor drain or slop sink, as approved.
3. In lieu of such separate gutters, a continuous protecting sheet of similar construction, adequately
supported and braced, properly rimmed, pitched and drained, may be provided over any such motor,
and extending 600 mm in all directions beyond the motor, over which such piping has to run.
D. Each coil section composing the coil bank of a built up rig shall have an individual drain pan extending 300
mm past the front edge of the coil with a minimum 50 mm vertical lip downstream of the coil. The top edge
of the lip shall be turned backward. The pans shall be connected with galvanized pipe to permit drainage to
the floor drain. Pans shall be minimum 1.7 mm galvanized iron and shall be pitched to the drain.
2.14 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS

A. All fan and air supply unit connections, both at inlet and discharge shall be made with an approved flame
proof fabric, so as to prohibit the transfer of vibration from fans to ductwork connecting thereto, without air
leakage. The materials between the clamps shall have sufficient slack so as to prevent tearing due to fan
movement.
B. The flexible connections shall be a minimum of 200 mm total length and held in place with flanged
connections or heavy metal bands securely attached, to prevent any leakage at the connection points.
C. Flexible connections shall be fabricated from a flame proofed fabric.
2.15 ALUMINUM DUCTWORK

A. Where indicated, provide aluminum sheet complying with ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003.
B. For aluminum ductwork provide aluminum support materials except where materials are electrically
separated from ductwork.
C. Bracing and construction must be in accordance with latest SMACNA duct construction standards.
D. Aluminum ductwork shall be provided for the following systems:
1. Kitchen dishwasher exhaust.

2. Laundry, dryer and iron/folder exhaust.
3. Outdoor intake, spill, exhaust and mixed air plenums.
4. Ductwork exposed to outdoor elements.
5. Exhaust ducts from locker room showers, up to the trunk duct.
6. Laboratories indicated in plans.
7. Provide dielectric joints between aluminum and steel.
2.16 STAINLESS STEEL DUCTWORK

A. For all exposed un-insulated connections to kitchen equipment and where indicated on the drawings, provide
stainless steel ducts; Type 304, with polished finish where exposed to view in occupied spaces, mill finish
elsewhere. Protect finished surfaces with mill applied adhesive protective paper, maintained through
fabrication and installation.
Page 386 of 429

B. Provide continuous welded construction.
C. Support, bracing, hangers and fasteners to be of same material.
D. Where used for moisture laden air, pitch duct to convenient point to allow for drainage. Provide 24mm plastic
drain pipe and run to nearest drain, or as approved.
E. Hand and automatic dampers shall be stainless steel, of the same type specified for the system.
2.17 DUCT SUPPORT AND HANGERS

A. The ducts will be supported by the appropriate supports at intervals of no more than 4 m whenever the
greater of the ducts is less than 1 m, and intervals of no more than 2 m whenever the greater side of
the ducts is more than 1 m.
B. Ducts positioned outside will be bracketed every 2 m and raised from ground using the appropriate wind
braces. Whenever positioned horizontally, they must be inclined at a sufficient angle to encourage water
drainage.
2.18 DAMPERS, GRILLES AND AHU CONNECTION

A. Accessories such as volume dampers, fire barriers, and ducts coils, and so on, will be provided with
independent support in such a way that their weight does not bear on the ducts.
B. All the openings of the ducts facing outside (external air inlet, internal air expulsion, and so on) will be
equipped with the appropriate screens to prevent the entry of brads.
C. Wherever indicated , the ducts will also be provided with the appropriate test points for the velocity
sensors and inspection doors for cleaning and inspection all along the route The inspection doors can
be built using same sandwich panels used for the ducts in combination with the appropriate section
bars , and will be equipped with liners that ensure sufficient pneumatic seal.
D. The connections between the air handling units and the ducts will be made using the appropriate
vibration damping joints in order to reduce all vibrations .The ducts will be provided with independent
support in drier to prevent the weight of the ducts from being transferred to the flexible couplings. The
connection to the air handling unit will also permit easy uncoupling for normal system maintenance.
Whenever the vibration damping joints positioned outside, they will be rendered waterproof.
2.19 SMOKE DUCT

A. Dedicated system duct work: duct work used in the dedicated system for smoke evacuation to be
fabricated from black steel sheet metal with a (3 mm) thickness to withstand the temperature of smoke
for two hours, joints and fabrication to be as per kitchen ductwork section.
B. Non dedicated system ductwork: ductwork used in the non dedicated system smoke evacuation such as
return air, exhaust air and fresh air duct, to be constructed from at least 1 mm galvanized steel sheet
metal or higher thickness according to the temperature of smoke and to stand the smoke temperature for
two hours.
2.20 FIRE RATED DUCT WORK

Fire rated duct work to be fabricated from black steel sheet metal with a thickness not less than 1.6 mm
to withstand the high temperature for at least two hours, joints (if any) and fabrication to be as per kitchen
ductwork section.
Page 387 of 429

2.21 HVAC CASING
A. All air casings and plenums shall be constructed of 1.5mm galvanized iron braced and stiffened on outside
by means of 50mm x 50mm x 6mm galvanized steel angles, or with 15 mm standing seam panels not to
exceed 660 mm width. Standing seams are to have additional right angle bend and shall be capped with
No. 1.2 mm galvanized "U" cap over entire length of seam. All joints shall be caulked to make them airtight.
The bottom of all air chambers at the floor shall be casketed to prevent air leakage.
B. Casings shall be supported on floor curbs. The bottom of all air casings at the floor and at any other
connection to masonry shall be riveted to 38 mm x 38 mm x 3 mm galvanized steel angles which have been
secured to masonry with expansion shields and caulked tight with cement.
C. Provide angles above and below access doors and frames for access doors. See "Access Doors in Sheet
Metal Work" for construction of doors.
D. This Contractor shall be responsible for any additional bracing required for stiffness including roof deck of
casings. The roof deck shall be braced and supported from the structure, if required.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install ductwork in accordance with approved shop drawings and conditions at the site. Advise Architect in
writing of any condition which prevents the approved duct installation.
B. Provide opening in sheet metal ductwork for installation of smoke detectors. Securely install air-tight housing
and sampling tubes furnished by the Electrical Contractor.
C. Provide 25 mm test ports with standard weight piping caps at all ideal locations for obtaining air. Test
readings, static pressure, duct traverses temperature etc.
D. Laundry Exhaust Ductwork:
1. Do not put screws, etc. on the inside of any sheet metal duct. Lint will "snowball" if caught by any
protrusion.
Page 388 of 429

SECTION 23 34 00 Fans
SECTION 23 34 00
Fans
PART 1 GENERAL


A. The work includes the providing of all labour, supervision, materials, equipment, accessories, services and
tests necessary to complete, make ready, and set to work for acceptance by the Owner, all fans in

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of fans of the types and materials, sizes
and capacities specified herein and on the drawings, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than 5 years, as approved by Engineer.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable Local codes and the standards outlined in
section 15000 and equivalent European certifications.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings indicating size, type, location, details and installation requirements.
Page 389 of 429

B. Product Data: Manufacturer's printed data, catalogue cuts, test data, certified, acoustic performance,
weights manufacturer's recommendations, etc.
C. Test Reports: Factory certified fan performance curves.
D. Operational and Maintenance Manual: Manufacturer's instruction for operation and maintenance.
E. One set of spare fan belts for each fan after final balancing is complete.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 CENTRIFUGAL FANS

A. Operating limits of fans shall be as per AMCA 99.
B. Fans shall be rated in accordance with Air Movement and Control Association Inc. AMCA standard
procedures, fans shall be labeled with AMCA seal and shall bear the manufacturers test certification. Fans
shall be Class I, II or III as based on both operating pressures and maximum tip speed. Outlet velocities
shown are maximum. Units shall be of manufacture as noted on plans.
Class Pressure Rating (mm wg)
Class I up to 95.25
Class II 95.26 to 171.45
Class III 171.5 to 323.85
C. All blades shall be air foil, or backwardly inclined from the direction of rotation for non-overloading power
characteristic. Wheels shall be both statically and dynamically balanced after assembly, and accurately
aligned before shipment. The Contractor shall check for alignment and correct any misalignment occurring
during shipment. Blades shall be continuously welded to hub plate and inlet rim.
D. Shafts shall be of SAE 1040 hot rolled steel, accurately turned ground and polished. Fans shall be sized so
that the maximum speed for any given class is no more than 80% of the first speed.
E. Fan housing shall be of air tight construction with the side sheets fastened to the scroll sheets either by a
lock seam or a continuous weld. Fan outlet shall have a rolled, sloping type cut-off to minimize air pulsation
at the discharge velocity. On double width fans, a double sloping "Vee-type" cut-off shall be provided. Fan
inlet cone shall be of one piece construction, spun and contoured to smoothly match the inlet rim of the fan
wheel inlet, and discharge duct collars shall be drilled or punched at regular intervals or flanged to facilitate
connection of duct work.
F. Bearings shall be precision anti-friction, pillow block, either ball or rolled type, and shall be selected based
on an average minimum life of 100,000 full-load hours. Extended oilers shall be provided where bearings
are inaccessible due to fan arrangement or ductwork.
G. The fans are to be driven with V-belt drive, sized at 1.5 times the motor kw and shall be capable of varying
the fan speed 10% higher or lower than at the rating point. Sheaves shall be adjustable ratio type, they shall
be sized to give the required fan speed with motor sheave at the middle of its range of adjustment. Each
drive over one kw shall have at least two (2) belts. Below one kw, drive may be single belt, sized at 2.0
Page 390 of 429
times the motor power output. Belt guards with opening for RPM readings to be provided for all sheaves
and belts. Submit drive data for approval. Provide additional adjustable sheaves at no extra cost, if required
for balancing.
H. Drain connections to be provided at bottom of fan.
I. Access doors are required in all fan scrolls of fans over 900 mm wheel diameter. Doors shall be of the
quick-opening type, secured to the frame by hand grip bolts and provided with lift handles. Raised type
access doors shall be provided on all insulated fans (inner surface to be flush with the scroll).
2.2 IN-LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS

A. Characteristics and construction: as for centrifugal fan wheels, with axial flow construction and direct or belt
drive as indicated.
B. Provide AMCA arrangements 1 or 9 as indicated with stiffened flanges, smooth rounded inlets, and stationary
guide vanes.
2.3 AXIAL FLOW FANS (TUBE-AXIAL OR VANE-AXIAL)
Page 391 of 429

A. Casings: welded steel with welded motor support hinged or bolted access plates, streamlined inlet cone
and discharge bell sections.
B. Blade material: steel or aluminum.
C. Hub material: steel or aluminum.
D. Supports:
1. Floor mounted units: reinforced legs.

2. Ceiling suspended units: support brackets welded to side of casing. Extend grease lubrication
facilities to outside of casing.
E. Bearings: ball or roller with extension tubes to outside of casing.
F. Direct drive:
1. Adjustable or fixed blade wheels as indicated: totally-enclosed, air over motors.

2. Diameter of wheel hub: at least equal to that of motor frame.
3. Adjustable blades for varying range of volume and pressure. Provide permanent pitch angle
indication vernier scale on hub. Provide for automatic adjustment while in motion. Provide adjustment
stops to avoid overloading motor.
4. Variable speed drives: to NEMA ICS 7.1.
G. Belt drive:
1. Fixed or adjustable blade as indicated by externally mounted motors through V-belt drive. Provide
internal belt fairing, external belt guards and adjustable motor mounts.
2. Adjust blades for varying range of volume and pressure. Hubs shall facilitate indexing of blade angle.
Provide automatic adjustment stops to avoid overloading motor.
3. Variable speed drives: to NEMA ICS 7.1.
2.4 ROOFTOP FANS

A. Centrifugal utility fans, intended for rooftop mounting, shall conform in all respects to the criteria specified in
2.1 of this section.
B. Rooftop centrifugal fans shall be provided with a weather tight motor and fan drive enclosure.
1. Enclosure shall be formed of one piece, 1.4mm galvanized sheet steel securely screwed to the fan
base and scroll.
2. Enclosure shall be gasketed to prevent the infiltration of dirt and water.
3. Enclosure shall be provided with a 50mm diameter tachometer hole in line with the fan shaft. Provide
a rubber grommet to seal the hole.
C. Rooftop mushroom type fans are to be belt driven. The motor and belt drive are to be located beneath a
one (1) piece spun aluminum weather tight shroud.
1. The fan shroud is to be constructed of one (1) piece of heavy gauge spun aluminum securely screwed
to the fan base.
2. The fan wheel shall be backwardly inclined and constructed of heavy gauge aluminum, statically and
dynamically balanced.
Page 392 of 429

3. The curb cap/fan base shall be constructed of heavy gauge aluminum and shall fit tightly over the roof
curb.
D. Up blast rooftop fans shall conform to the criteria outlined above in paragraph
A, B, and C.
E. Up blast fans shall be provided with a drain on the fan shroud.
F. For supply fans, same as above but should be boxed in sand trap louver with cleanable filter equipped with
the fan as one part.
2.5 PROPELLER FANS

A. Propeller fans are to be belt driven, with the motor and drive securely mounted to the fan frame.
B. Fan panels are to be one piece heavy gauge galvanized steel with pinched mounting holes and spun tight
fitting fan venture.
C. Fan frame shall be heavy gauge formed galvanized steel mounted securely to the fan panel.
D. Propeller blades are to be constructed of dieformed galvanized steel, securely riveted to the propeller hub,
and statically and dynamically balanced.
E. Provide propeller fans with a heavy gauge factory fabricated combination motor and drive/fan inlet guard.
Provide a similar guard on the undriven side.
F. fans should be equipped with back draft damper and protection guard scream
2.6 AIR CURTAIN FANS

A. Provide air curtains of the length and where indicated on the drawings.
B. Air curtain housings to be heavy gauge galvanized steel or molded polycarbonate.
C. Fans are to be squirrel cage type, heavy duty, mounted on a single shaft and directly driven by a single
motor.
D. Provide electric heating coils of the capacitors indicated on the drawings.
E. Provide a thermal overload protector to shut off electric coil.
F. Provide a washable mesh aluminum air filter 13 mm thick, ASHRAE Standard 52 efficiency of 10%.
2.7 SMOKE EXHAUST FANS

A. Same specification and components as centrifugal single width, or axial single inlet.
B. Direct coupled rated for (2) hour at minimum smoke temperature of (400 Co).
C. All smoke fans shall be UL listed.
D. Refer to design schedules for fan selection

Page 393 of 429
2.8 FUME EXTRACT FANS
A. Fan shall be designed for use with fume extraction products.
B. The fan impeller shall be radial tip blade type made of die cast aluminium (none sparking) or welded steel
blade primed and lacquered.
C. The fan is manufactured in accordance with the following standard:89/392/EEC, 73/23/EEC and
89/336/EEC.
D. The fan motor shall have IP54 degree protection.
E. Fan casings shall be zinc covered steel plate.
F. Surface treatment: epoxy polyester powder paint.
2.9 KITCHEN EXTRACT FANS

A. Fan shall be designed for use with kitchen exhaust and will be centrifugal as item 2.1 above except that it
should be backward inclined with bottom discharge.
B. The fan must be selected to withstand the hot , greased exhaust air from kitchens and hoods and should be
400 C for 2 hours.
2.10 FANS - GENERAL

A. All fan parts shall be given a bonding coat before painting. After the cleaning and surface conditioning
process, but before final assembly, parts shall be spray painted with one coat of grey primer finisher. A
second coat of the same paint shall be applied to the exterior and all accessible interior surfaces after the
fan is assembled. Shafts shall be shipped with a rust preventative coating.
B. Vibration isolators shall be provided as specified on plans and schedules and in accordance with related
specifications section 15070.
C. In case of fans where more than one speed is specified isolators shall be selected for the lowest speed.
D. The motor and fan bases shall be welded or bolted to form a common base to prevent any uncommon
physical motion of the fan and motor.
E. Each fan shall be provided with an electrical motor and motor control, as specified on plans and schedules.
F. Submit certified fan performance curves.
G. Fan sound power levels at the inlet shall comply with AMCA 301 and to be no greater than the following:
Fan Type dba 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000
Page 394 of 429

Centrifugal
58 79 76 74 70 68 67
Forward curved
Centrifugal
Backward 60 84 79 77 74 72 70
inclined
Centrifugal
75 93 89 82 80 77 71
Aerofoil
Propeller 65 82 78 73 71 68 62
Tube Axial 81 103 93 88 86 81 75
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
Examine area and condition under which fan coil units are to be installed. Notify Engineer in writing of
conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory
3.2 INSTALLATION
Install equipment in accordance with approved shop and installation drawings.

Provide required field tests in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and Section 15950 Testing and
Balancing.
3.4 ADJUSTMENTS
Make adjustments as required for specified operation of equipment.
Page 395 of 429

SECTION 23 37 13 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, GRILLES AND LOUVERS
SECTION 23 37 13
DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS, GRILLES AND LOUVERS
PART 1 GENERAL
Page 396 of 429


A. The work includes the providing of all labour, supervision, materials, equipment, accessories, services
and tests necessary to complete, make ready, and set to work for acceptance by the Owner, all grilles,
registers and diffusers in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of grilles, registers and diffusers of
the types and materials, sizes and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in
similar service for not less than 5 years, as approved by Engineer.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes and standards as outlined
in section
1.4 SUBMITTALS
instructions and catalogue cuts for each type of grille, register and diffuser, accessory furnished, type of
control and finish.
B. Schedule: Submit a schedule of all grilles, registers and diffusers for approval before ordering the
equipment. Include the location, model number, size, capacity performance, noise criteria rating, and
acoustic performance, and accessories for each.
C. Certification.
D. Provide final finishes selected by Architect.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 GRILLES AND REGISTERS

A. All grilles, registers and diffusers have been selected at sound pressure levels, in all octave frequency
bands, not exceeding an NC-30 curve. Those submitted for approval must meet this criterion.
B. Review the drawings and specifications and assume full responsibility for the proper operation in
reference to the completeness capacity, construction and noise criteria rating of the air devices supplied.
C. Supply Register: Double deflection, with extruded steel adjustable horizontal face and vertical rear
louvers, 20mm spacing, key operated opposed blade damper and 1mm steel frame.
Page 397 of 429

o
D. Return Register: Aluminium, with fixed horizontal face louvers set at 30 , with 15mm spacing and vertical
opposed blade damper, key operated. Registers connected aluminium ductwork to be fabricated from
aluminium.
o
E. Return Grille: Aluminium, with fixed horizontal louvers set at 30 , with 15mm spacing. Grilles connected
to copper or aluminium ductwork to be fabricated from aluminium.
o
F. Return Grille/Access Door: Aluminium, with fixed 30 louvers with 15mm spacing parallel to hinge.
Construct unit to house a 600 x 600 x 25mm throw away fibreglass filter within ASHRAE Standard 52 76
efficiency of 20%. Include a continuous hinge and fasteners. Install grilles at horizontal ceiling mounted
fan coil units and where shown on drawings.
G. Coordinate access door location and provide final finish as approved by the Architect.
2.2 DIFFUSERS
A. Ceiling Diffuser Constant Volume Systems: Aluminium, square or rectangular necks with removable cores
and airflow patterns. Include equalizing grid and opposed blade damper.
B. Ceiling Diffuser, VAV Systems: Aluminium, round neck with removable core and air flow patterns as
indicated on the drawings, include equalizing grid on opposed blade damper.
C. Linear Ceiling supply Diffuser: As indicated on drawings, extruded aluminium, continuous length and
number of slots. Include integral vanes for flow control and air pattern adjustment and blanking sections
where shown. The diffuser should be supplied with the plenum box from the same manufacturer. And the
plenum must be insulated with 12 mm sound acoustic lining insulation meeting ASTM, NFPA
requirements.
D. Linear Ceiling Return Diffuser: As indicated on drawings, extruded aluminium, continuous length and
number of slots. Include integral vanes for flow control and blanking sections where shown.
E. Linear Sidewall Supply/return Diffuser: As indicated on drawing, extruded aluminium, continuous length
and number of slots. Include opposed blade damper and blanking sections where shown.
F. Adjustable jet nozzle with sizes and mounting styles shown on the plans and air distribution schedule.
Jet nozzle shall have a curved intake featuring superior aerodynamic and acoustical properties, housed
in a hemispheric casing with opposite swivel bearings and swivel range of +/- 30˚. Jet nozzle shall be
aluminum construction with white powder coat finish. Adjustable Discharge (+/- 30˚) with Twist Effect
G. Adjustable jet nozzle with twist element of sizes and mounting styles shown on the plans and air
distribution schedule. Jet nozzle shall have a curved intake featuring superior aerodynamic and acoustical
properties, housed in a hemispheric casing with opposite swivel bearings and swivel range of +/- 30˚. The
jet nozzle has wider spread and shorter throws for air distribution in narrow spaces. Jet nozzle with twist
element shall be aluminum construction with white powder coat finish.
H. Refer to the architect for final approval on colour and shape.
2.3 EXTERNAL LOUVERS

A. External louver for wall application for supply and exhaust. The louver is weatherproof with fixed blades
and a bottom rain lip. A bird screen (12.5 x 12.5 x  0.8 is fitted at the back of the louver.
B. Fixing: The louvers are fixed to the wall by means of screws. The WA – series has factory punched screw
holes in the margin. For fixing with a mounting frame (GR001), the frame and the louver have to be drilled
together on site.
Page 398 of 429

C. Construction: The margin and blades are manufactured out of extruded aluminium; satin anodized .The
mounting frame (GR001) is out of rolling formed galvanized steel.
D. Sand Filter: All external louvers for air intake use shall be complete with sand trap louver mounted directly
to rear of weatherproof fixed blade louver.
E. All louvers should be complete with bird screens.
2.4 SAND TRAP LOUVERS

A. Sand trap louvers shall be installed in all air handling units and fans supply air to protect the entry to the
external inlets of the air conditioning or filtration ducting systems and equipment.
B. The frame and blades shall be constructed of high quality extruded aluminium profiles.snd they shall be
general wall thickness 1.5-1.8 mm and 1.2-1.5 mm respectively.
C. Blades width will be 100 mm flush mounted sand trap louver should be also provided.
D. The lower part of the louver frame should contain of 20 mm drain holes arranged in two parallel row for
empting the captured sand or dust.
E. The sand trap louver should be complete with aluminium filter, opposed blade damper and both the filter
and the damper.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Examine area and condition under which grilles, registers and diffusers are to be installed. Notify
Engineer in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the
work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Furnish and install all grilles, registers and diffusers where shown on the drawings of sizes, types and
capacities indicated.
B. Refer to reflected ceiling plans for exact location of air devices.
C. Coordinate all design and margin construction with architectural requirements. Provide plaster fames for
all grilles, registers and diffusers installed in plaster ceiling and walls.
D. Provide 7mm sponge rubber gasket around the frame of the registers and grilles.
E. Furnish all registers and diffusers with an opposed blade damper. In addition, furnish ceiling diffusers
with an equalizing grid. Operate volume control dampers in branch ducts supplying linear diffusers
through the face by means of flexible cable connectors.
F. Where airflow pattern indicated on the drawings is other than 4-way, provide 4-way diffusers with
triangular 0.6mm sheet metal blank-off sections.
G. Adjust neck size to maintain proper face velocity. Install blank-off plate with sponge rubber edging to
prevent rattling.
Page 399 of 429

H. Provide collars, by the sheet metal sub-contractor, for all outlets and inlets, securely fastened to ductwork
with metal screws, clinch connections or other approved methods. Field measure ductwork openings for
collars to assure proper location in finished construction.
I. Where air devices require duct connections of a different size than that shown on the drawings, provide
those duct connections at no additional cost to the Owner.
J. Should the air distribution or sound level in any space prove unsatisfactory, in the opinion of the Engineer,
provide baffles or provide a different size or type of air device in order to make such conditions satisfactory
at no additional cost to the Owner.
K. Provide a shop prime coat finish on all grilles, diffusers, and registers. Finish all extruded aluminium
linear diffusers as determined by the Architect.
L. Provide fire damper in grilles, registers or diffusers installed in fire rated ceilings and walls.
M. Provide fire rated louver as indicated on the drawings on external fire rated walls .
N. In case of conflicting with the specifications of the architect exterior louvers notify the architect in writing
to obscene the final approval
O. Obtain architect approval for all air outlets and external louvers .

SECTION 23 41 00 Air Filters
SECTION 23 41 00
Air Filters
PART 1 GENERAL

Page 400 of 429


A. The work includes the providing of all labour, supervision, materials, equipment, accessories, services
and tests necessary to complete, make ready, and set to work for acceptance by the Owner, all filters
work in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.

A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of filters of the types, materials and sizes
required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years, as
approved by Engineer.
B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes and the standards outlined
in section 15000.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop drawings indicating type, size and location of air filters, details of holding frames, installation
requirements, efficiency, initial and final pressure drops, and gross media area.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets, plus independent testing lab certification of efficiency, pressure
drop, and dust holding capacity.
C. Samples, when requested.
D. Spare Filters required.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 F.C.U PRE – FILTERS

A. Air filters shall be medium efficiency, flat, disposable type, minimum of 10 mm thick.
B. Each air filter shall consist of a permanent corrosion resistant holding frame and a replaceable factory
assembled filter element incorporating a fine fibered synthetic medium. The permanent holding frame shall
be supplied with a suitable gasket and retaining clips to maintain a positive pressure seal between the frame
and the replaceable filter element. The holding frame shall be provided with matching rivet holes and a
peripheral gasket to facilitate installation and prevent leakage between the frames.
C. The average efficiency of the filter shall not be less than 85% by arrestance .
D. Filter assemblies and media shall comply with NFPA, local codes and any local Fire Department
requirements.
Page 401 of 429
E. Filter media shall be essentially non-combustible and shall not produce toxic vapours if burned.
F. Provide one complete set of filter replacements delivered to owner.
G. During construction, provide 10 mm deep filters in any system in operation. After construction, and prior to
issuance of work all filters are to be replaced with new.
2.2 PREFILTERS
A. The bank of filters shall be erected so that the filter elements can be installed and removed from the side
of the filter bank.
B. Pre-filters shall be disposable, 100mm deep type filters. The permanent holding frame shall be designed
to accommodate these pre-filters and be so constructed that pre-filters can be installed or removed
without disturbing the basic filter element. Initial resistance shall not exceed 0.17" W.G. when operating
at rated capacity. Efficiency shall not be less than 35%.
C. Provide and install a Dwyer Magnehelic Gage, on each filter bank of proper scale.
D. Unit shall be installed complete with pressure fittings for duct and flexible double column plastic tubing.
The range of pressure scale shall be from 0 to 50mm.
E. Where used in conjunction with package unit, provide factory fabricated 16 gauge steel, full housing with
access doors on both sides of the housing, and integral pre-filter section..
F. Filter assemblies and media shall comply with local codes.
G. Filter media shall conform to U.L. Class 1.
I. On built-up banks which are more than 4 frames high and 4 frames wide, provide a 75mm wide by 16
gauge, or heavier, steel stiffener strap vertically every two frames in width.
J. During construction provide 50mm deep pre-filters for any system in operation.
2.3 BAG FILTERS

A. Air filters shall be high efficiency dry 'V' shaped bag type.
B. Each air filter shall consist of a permanent corrosion resistant holding frame and a replaceable factory-
assembled filter element incorporating a fine-fibered all-glass medium. The permanent holding frame
shall be supplied with a suitable gasket and retaining clips to maintain a positive pressure seal between
the frame and the replaceable filter element.
C. The holding frame shall be provided with matching rivet holes and a peripheral gasket to facilitate
installation and prevent leakage between the frames.
2 3
D. Provide not less than 5 M of media area per 1700 M /HR.
E. The initial resistance shall not exceed pressure drop scheduled at 2.5 m/s. The average efficiency of the
filter shall not be less than 85% using atmospheric dust, per ASHRAE Test Standard 52-76.
F. The complete filter including frame shall not exceed .94m in depth. Filters installed in side access
housings shall not exceed 1.12m in depth.
Page 402 of 429

G. Where indicated, the bank of filters shall be erected so that the filter elements can be installed and
removed from the side of the filter bank.
H. Provide and install a Dwyer Magnehelic Gage, on each filter bank of proper scale.
I. Unit shall be installed complete with pressure fittings for duct and flexible double column plastic tubing.
The range of pressure scale shall be from 0 to 50mm.
J. Where used in conjunction with package unit, provide factory fabricated 16 gauge steel, full housing with
access doors on both sides of the housing.
K. Filter assemblies and media shall comply with local codes.
L. Filter media shall conform to U.L. Class 1.
M. On built-up banks which are more than 4 frames high and 4 frames wide, provide a 75mm wide by 16
gauge, or heavier, steel stiffener strap vertically every two frames in width.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install air filters in accordance with approved drawings and manufacturer's recommendations.
3.2 CONSTRUCTION FILTERS

A. Provide two complete spare sets from all types of filters described above for each air system as specified to
serve during construction and, testing and balancing periods.
1. One set installed before systems are turned on.

2. One set installed for each air system is ready for testing and balancing as specified under Section
15990.
B. Install one complete set of filters for all air system as specified upon final acceptance of each air system.
3.3 PACKING
All filters shall be kept in domestic packing until start up
Page 403 of 429

SECTION 23 73 00 AIR HANDLING UNITS
SECTION 23 73 00
AIR HANDLING UNITS
PART 1 GENERAL

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division
1 - Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.
of all related sections, elsewhere in this division also apply to this section unless specified to the
contrary.
Page 404 of 429

A. The work includes the providing of all labor, supervision, materials, equipment, accessories, services
and tests necessary to complete, make ready, and set to work for acceptance by the Owner, all air
handling units in accordance with Drawings and Specifications.

A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of air handling units of the types,
materials and sizes and capacities required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar
service for not less than 5 years. Provide air handling units produced by a manufacturer listed as an
Acceptable Manufacturer in this section. Furnish all like units from one manufacturer, as approved by
Engineer.
B. Standards Compliance: Make the complete installation in accordance with all state and local municipal
codes, all applicable codes and authorities having jurisdiction, and the applicable requirements and
standards outlined in section 23 25 00 :
C. Warranty
- Provide two years manufacturer’s warranty
- Warranty : include the whole unit .
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, including printed technical literature, materials,
construction, installation instructions, capacity and performance data for each type of air handling unit
furnished.
B. Shop drawings indicating size, location and details.
C. Operational and maintenance manuals.
D. Certified coil performance data.
E. Prior approval requirements:
- Manufacture name
- Figure number
- Engineering data
- Samples : if requested by owner
Part 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 AIR HANDLING UNITS
A. Units shall be the product of one manufacturer and of the type, size and capacity as set forth in the
schedule. The fan outlet velocities and coil and filter face velocities shall be within 5% of the values
specified in the schedule.
B. The units, as assembled, shall be complete with fans, DX coils, double insulated casing, filters, drives
and accessories. Each unit, including the fan enclosure, shall have essentially constant cross-sectional
dimensions as to width and height. Internal baffles shall be provided as required to prevent air bypassing
coils and filters. Provide factory fabricated mixing boxes where schedule or indicated on plan.
The casing shall consist of an independent structural frame, properly reinforced and braced for maximum
rigidity, having individually removable, flush mounted, insulated panels. The casing shall be of
sectionalized construction, consisting of individual fan section, coil section, mixing section, access
Page 405 of 429

sections, filter section, and drain pan. Sections shall be joined with continuous gasketing to form an air
tight closure. Sections shall be so designed that the method of joining can be performed with relative
ease and without damage to the insulation and vapor barrier.
The framework shall be constructed of structural rolled shapes having minimum thickness of 3mm or
die formed sheet steel having the minimum gauges set forth in the following schedules; standard
aluminum may be substituted for steel:
Maximum Individual Minimum Framework
Casing Cross-Section Thickness MM
Up to 2.8 sq.m. 2
2.81 to 4.4 sq.m. 2.75
4.45 sq.m. and up 3.5
C. Framework shall be designed with recesses suitable to receive enclosure panels, providing neat
appearance, airtight enclosure, and ease of panel removal.
D. Enclosure panels 1.1M2 in area and larger shall be constructed of not less than 1.5mm die formed sheet
steel., the panels shall be double skin unit sheets to be preprinted/ plasticized 1 mm thick for internal
and external with the individual panels recessed into intermediate structural members. Protection for the
insulation edges shall be provided around the perimeter of each panel. Protection shall be in the form of
a "U" shaped panel edge or in 15mm channels welded to the inside surface of each panel. Enclosure
panels shall be fastened to the framework by means of thread cutting sheet metal screws and shall be
sealed against air leakage by the use of continuous neoprene Casketing of 3mm minimum thickness.
All sections are to be rigid die formed and integrally welded construction of heavy gauge galvanized
sheet.
E. Inspection and service access doors shall be provided for access to the unit's interior, for filter removal
and for coil inspection. Doors shall be double wall, constructed as specified for enclosure panels. Doors
provided in access and filter sections shall be the full height and width of the section. Doors shall be
removable type provided with hinges and tight sealing latches.
F. The interior of all panels shall be insulated with not less than 68kg density fiberglass insulation having a
minimum thickness of 50mm neoprene coated K factor 0.038 W/m2 C maximum at 24 C.. The exposed
surface of the insulation shall be protected from air erosion and moisture penetration by means of a
minimum 1.6mm coating of a non-flammable fiber compound, sprayed on after the insulation has been
set in place. The insulation shall be fastened to the interior surface of the panel by means of adhesive.
The interior surface of the framework members shall be insulated as specified herein for the panels, or
shall be coated with fire resistant mastic in adequate thickness to prevent sweating. Insulation shall be
flame retardant and non-toxic when combusted.
G. All surfaces of the casing, framework, and panels exterior shall be protected by means of an initial
phosphate coating followed by one coat of zinc chromate primer and then finish painted, or in lieu
thereof, shall be hot dipped galvanized.
H. Structural rolled shaped or die formed sheet steel structural member’s equivalent in gauge to that
herein specified for framework, fastened directly to the structural frame, shall be provided for support
of the bearing housings so that enclosure panels are not required to support bearing housings.
I. Fans shall be double width double inlet, centrifugal type with scroll type housing. Rotating assembly
shall be certified to be statically and dynamically balanced.
J. For units supplying less than 17,000 M3/hr design conditions, the fan wheel shall be of the forward
curved blade type. Airfoil or backward inclined blade
Page 406 of 429

Type wheels shall be provided on all units supplying 17,000 M 3/hr or greater. Inlet guide vane with
linkage shall be provided on all fans that serve VAV operations. Fans will be mounted on structural
frame and internally vibration isolated.
K. Drives for fan motors 11kw and less shall be of the V-belt type, with adjustable cast iron motor sheaves,
capable of permitting a minimum of ±5% percent variation in fan speed. Two sets of fixed pitch drives
shall be supplied for all motors larger than 11kw. The first set is for initial start-up and the second set
will be installed at the field determined speed to facilitate balancing. Drive sheave dimensions and belt
number shall be sufficient to transmit the required power to the driven equipment with an efficiency of
not less than 95 percent. Drives shall have a service rating of 140 percent of the maximum estimated
load. The rpm indicated in the schedule shall be the mid-point setting for the drive. Each external drive
shall be provided with easily removable factory fabricated belt guards constructed of expanded metal
and finished to match the unit finish. Reinforced tachometer access openings shall be provided.
Internally or externally mounted motors shall be fully vibration isolated.
L. Shafts shall be properly sized, one piece, solid polished steel. Fan shafts shall not be operated at their
critical speeds. Fan shaft bearings shall be self aligning, pillow block regreaseable ball or roller type,
with grease fittings piped to and mounted on the exterior of the unit if the bearings are located within
the enclosure. They shall have an average life of 200,000 hours at design operation conditions.
M. Motors shall be NEMA standard 1,500 rpm, having ball bearings with grease lubrication. Motors shall
be mounted on an adjustable base in the locations shown on the contract drawings. to provide adequate
service clearances.
N. All drive components and moving equipment shall be individually vibration isolated.
O. Cooling coil shall be seamless copper tubes with heavy aluminium fins mechanically bonded to the
tubes. Coil shall be complete with male couplers, and factory operating charge of refrigerent and shall
be factory pressure and leak tested at not less than 200 psig (1380 Kpa). Fresh Air Handling Unit’s coil
shall be of seamless copper tubing, having copper fins mechanically bonded to the tubes, electro-tinned
for marine application. Any other coating to improve the coil life span can be evaluated. Capacities
shown in documents should be net capacities after applying the protective coil coating.
P. Coil headers shall be completely enclosed within the insulated coil casing section. The inlet and outlet
connections shall be extended a minimum of 150mm beyond the exterior of the coil casing through pre-
cut openings. Sealing collars shall be provided at the openings for the coil connections. Drain and
vent connections shall be furnished for each water coil and shall be located on the pipe connections,
external to the unit cabinet, for ease of access.
Q. Coils shall be provided in the capacity, quantity and arrangement for each air handling unit as noted in
the schedule on Contract Drawings. Unless otherwise noted in schedule coils shall have aluminum fins
on seamless copper tubes. Fins shall be mechanically bonded to the tubes (fins shall be maximum 10
per 25 mm) or helical type. Soldering or tinning shall not be used for bonding. Working pressure shall
be (1035 KPa) at 94C.
R. Coils shall be completely drainable by gravity through a header. Headers shall be fabricated of
seamless copper tubing. Coils shall be pneumatically tested at 1035 KPa under water. Each coil shall
have a galvanized sheet casing of 1.6mm minimum thickness. Intermediate center supports shall be
provided for all coils exceeding 1,371mm in length.
S. The fan and cooling coil sections shall each be provided with double floor construction, sandwiching a
layer of polystyrene insulation between the two layers of metal. Drain pans shall be provided with outlet
drain connections on both sides. The drain pans shall extend far enough to prevent carryover from the
cooling coil traveling past the tip of the drain pans without the use of eliminators. Drain pan shall be
insulated to match the casing with minimum 32 mm drain and rust resistant interior finish.
T. Interior baffles shall be provided around all sides of each coil to minimize air bypassing. Provision shall
be made to permit free drainage from each section. When two or more cooling coils are used with one
stacked above the other, individual drain troughs, piped to the main drain pan, and shall be provided at
the bottom of each of the upper coils.
Page 407 of 429

1- Plate heat exchanger (If required): heat exchanger of cross-flow type made of thin aluminum
plates. It shall be equipped with a by-pass damper
2- The heat exchanger shall have a stainless drip tray on both the supply air and extracted air side.
If the extract air flows downward through the cube, a droplet eliminator must be fitted
downstream of the cube. The casing shall have inspection covers.
3- The heat exchanger shall have sectionalized defrosting or defrosting according to the cold corner
principle.
U. Filter section and mixing shall be supplied by the air handling unit manufacturer, with the same casing
construction as before specified for other unit sections. The type of filters to be housed within the filter
section shall be of the type and efficiency indicated on the equipment schedule and section 23 41 00.
V. Energy Recovery Exhaust Unit where required: provide construction similar to above described for
AHU. Provide panel filter section, mixing box section with motorized dampers, ERC section, empty
section and fan section. For energy recovery coil (ERC) follow same specification of cooling coil.
2.2 UL TRAVIOLET LAMP
A. The UVC Lamp and Parabolic reflector fixture shall be factory assembled and tested. The power source
for the lamp is housed in an aluminum enclosure that will mount separately.
B. The UVC source with high output, low – pressure ( 3.0 Torr.) mercury laden argon- neon type that is
internally coated to reduce the effects of solarization which would typically reduce output and has a
bearing on overall lamp performance and life. The UVC source is a pure fused quartz type 219 shell,
properly doped with titanium oxide in order to filter out 99.999% of the 185 nm wavelength to avoid the
production of ozone.
C. The UVC source net output the lamps will be at least the intensity listed below in microwatts /cm2 at 36
inches in the 245 nm to 266 nm band while operating at nominal temperature in an air stream moving
at 400 fpm:
- 270 microwatts per/cm2 at 36 inches for the 24 inch lamps.
D. The UVC source design is based on a 4 – pin type connection, hot cathode, T6 diameter ( 19 mm). The
UV source shall be available in lengths of 12,18,24,30,40 and 60 inches.
E. To effectively irradiate the coil surface and drain pan, the UVC source shall be mounted on a
geometrically adequate, parabolic shape, back- reflector to redirect at least 90% of the total emitted
UVC onto the coil that will continuously clean the coil and drain pan, and kill odor causing mold and
fungus that may develop in an HVAC unit.
F. The reflector shall be built from a heavy duty single piece anodized aluminum extrusion, aluminum has
88% reflectance. Stainless steel reflector shall not be used as it has very low reflectance of 20%
G. The reflector shall be of aerodynamically shaped to be capable of aerodynamically shaped to be

capable of withstanding fast air velocities up to 2000 fpm without wobble, vibrations or noisy whistle.
H. In order to guarantee the adequate performance for a given coil, the vendor shall specify in detail, a
manufacture – approved layout of the number of UVC sources required their respective position
(distance from the coil and alignment on the coil). Adequate performance is defined by the IUVA
(International Ultraviolet association) guidelines as the irradiation intensity required so that a bacteria
requiring a lethal UV dose of 100,000 microwatts cm 2 will not survive more than 60 minutes anywhere
on the surface of the coil. In order to validate the performance of the proposed arrangement, the vendor
shall submit a manufacturer approved computers simulation showing the resulting bacteria kill – time
map of the coil.
Page 408 of 429

I. The power source will be an electronic type, rapid start with a power factor greater than 0.95 and an
energy conversion of at least 75% and have an output matched to the length of the UV lamp. The power
source will be protected from the air stream impurities by an adequate aluminum enclosure that will
enable it be mounted on rigid surface by way of screws. It shall be available in 110 V or 208/230 V AC
and able to operate in environments ranging from 35 0F to 170 oF temperature, with relative humidity up
to 100% and air velocities up to 2000 fpm at 1 meter in the 245 nm to 266 nm band while operating in
a 35oF air stream moving at 1000 fpm.
J. 10 Electrical requirements:
- UVC supplier shall provide power & wattage for each lamp in respected selections.
K. Each UVC source shall be clamp- mounted for easy installation, positioning and maintenance onto a
¾ inch anodized aluminum tube which is support structure. The support structure will field installed and
be adequately fixed with non – corrosive hardware so that the UVC source does not vibrate or loosen.
L. The fixture shall be CSA or UL certified
M. The UVC source (lamp) shall be guaranteed for 17,000 hours of operation and power source ( ballast)
shall be guaranteed for 5 years.
Part 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install units in accordance with approved detail and installation drawings.
B. Provide insulated drain line from AHU to nearest floor drain or indicated
3.2 ADJUSTMENTS
C. Make all required adjustments and place units in perfect operational condition.
D. Install unit as per manufacturer recommendations.
Page 409 of 429

SECTION 23 81 26 Packaged and SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
SECTION 23 81 26
Packaged and SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
SCHEDULE 0 - RELATED DOCUMENTS

Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.
B. General Provisions for HVAC Work, Section 15000, apply to work of this Section.
C. The requirements of this Section apply to equipment specified elsewhere in the specification.
SCHEDULE 1 - DESCRIPTION OF WORK

B. This section includes:
a. DX- split air conditioning units.

b. DX- packaged air conditioning units.
Page 410 of 429
c. Computer room air condition.
SCHEDULE 2 - QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of Equipment, materials and sizes required,
B. Provide equipment produced by a manufacturer listed as an Acceptable Manufacturer in this section.
C. Furnish all equipment of the same type from one manufacturer.
D. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes, codes and standards stated
in section 15000 and the following:
AHRI: Certify that the capacities of each model and size are in compliance with industry standard 440 89
for Room Fan Coil Units.
AHRI: Test and rate each model and size for sound in accordance with industry standard 443 71 for
sound ratings of Fan Coil Air Conditioners.
AHRI 210 - Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment.
AHRI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment.
Guarantee each unit to operate at the certified sound levels. Replace any unit which does not fulfill this
requirement.
Equivalent European certifications.
SCHEDULE 3 - SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, including printed technical literature, and catalog cuts
for each equipment, indicating connection details, dimensions and required clearances, and installation
instructions.
B. Schedule: Submit a schedule showing manufacturer, models, sizes, and capacities for approval before
ordering the equipment.
C. List of spare parts and its price to cover the operation of works for 3 years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
SCHEDULE 0 - DX SPLIT AIR CONDITIONING UNIT
2.1.1 DX - INDOOR UNITS

A. Unit shall be self-contained, packaged, factory assembled and prewired, consisting of cabinet and frame,
supply fan, electric heating elements, controls, air filters and refrigerant cooling coil.
B. Cabinet: Galvanized steel with baked enamel finishes, access doors or removable access panels with
quick fasteners [screwdriver operated flush cam type.] [locking door handle type with piano hinges.]
Structural members shall be minimum 18 gage (1.20 mm), with access doors or removable panels of
minimum 20 gage (0.90 mm).
C. Insulation: 50 mm thick neoprene coated glass fiber on surfaces where conditioned air is handled. Protect
edges from erosion.
Page 411 of 429

D. Supply Fan: Forward curved centrifugal type, resiliently mounted with V-belt drive, adjustable variable
pitch motor pulley, and rubber isolated hinge mounted motor.
E. Air Filters: 50 mm thick glass fiber disposable media in metal frames.
F. EVAPORATING COIL
Provide copper tube aluminum fin coil assembly with galvanized drain pan and connection.
Provide thermostatic expansion valves for units.
The unit should be mounted on frame to install drain tray and then drained to the nearest drain point
(indirect) through UPVC pipe.
2.1.2 AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNIT

A. Units of draw through design complete with fans, motors, drain pan, auxiliary drain pan and condensing
coil and compressor.
B. Refrigerant type shall be non-CFC type (like: R-134a, R-407c, R-410A or any equivalent refrigerant).
C. CONDENSING COIL
Provide copper tube aluminum fin coil assembly with subcooling rows.
Provide thermostat to cycle condenser fans.
D. COMPRESSOR
1. Provide hermetic compressor, resiliently mounted with positive lubrication, crankcase heater, high
and low pressure safety controls, motor overload protection, suction and discharge service valves
and gage ports, and filter drier.
2. Five minute timed off circuit shall delay compressor start.
3. Outdoor thermostat shall energize compressor above 14̊ C ambient.
4. Provide step capacity control cycling compressors.
5. Condensate Drain pan: Drain pan to direct condensate to condenser coil for re-evaporation.
6. Condenser Fan: Provide direct drive propeller fans, resiliently mounted with fan guard, motor
overload protection, wired to operate with compressor.
2.1.3 OPERATING CONTROLS

A. Provide low voltage, adjustable thermostat to control heater stages in sequence with delay between
stages, compressor and condenser fan.
B. Include system selector switch off-heat-auto-cool and fan control switch (auto-on).
C. Provide double acting thermostat with minimum two stages heating and 2 stage cooling.
D. Locate thermostat in return air.
SCHEDULE 1 - DX- PACKAGE OUTDOOR AIR CONDITIONING UNIT
2.2.1 GENERAL
Page 412 of 429

Roof mounted, self-contained single zone unit with electric heating elements and DX refrigeration.
Units to consist of cabinet and frame, supply fan, control, air filter, refrigerant cooling coil, compressor,
condenser coil and fans, motorized outside air damper, return damper, motorized exhaust damper.
Prefabricated roof curb to conform to requirements of related specifications and shall be minimum height
450 mm.
Conform to ANSI/ARI 210/240, rating for unit larger than 40 kW nominal.
2.2.2 CABINET
Cabinets: weatherproofing tested and soundproofing tested to ARI 270, dbA at 3 m free field.
Framing and supports: 2 mm thick welded steel, galvanized after manufacture, with lifting lugs at top of unit
and/or fork lift slots at bottom.
Outer casing: weather tight galvanized steel with baked enamel finish.
Access: removable gasketted hinged doors or panels with locking door handle type or screwdriver operated
flush cam type fasteners.
Insulation: neoprene coated glass fiber on surfaces, 50 mm thick, 32 kg/m 3density.
2.2.3 FANS
Centrifugal, forward curved impellers, backward inclined, or airfoil, statically and dynamically balanced. Multi
V-belt drive with adjustable variable pitch motor pulley, rubber spring isolated hinge mounted motor fan,
and motor integrally mounted on isolation base, separated from unit casing with flexible connections and
spring isolators.
Vibration isolators: 95% efficiency conform with related specifications 15070.
2.2.4 AIR FILTERS

A. 50 mm thick, 30 % efficiency, metal framed replaceable media or throwaway unless specified on
schedule.
B. To meet NFPA 90A, air filter requirements type Class 1 or type Class 2.
2.2.5 ELECTRIC HEATERS

A. Nickel chromium electric resistant type, 64.6 kW/m 2 – stage maximum density at 2.5 m/s, comply with
electrical requirements and specifications.
B. Controls:
Panel board with multi- stage or modulating SCR controller.

Indicating light centre.
Remote thermostats as indicated.
Fuse blocks (one per step unless otherwise specified).
Built-in control transformer.
Thermal cut outs: manual reset disc types, one per circuit, one linear bulb type automatic reset.
Page 413 of 429
Built-in un-fused disconnect switch.
Elements control: accessible with protection against no air flow, short and grounds and of self checking
type.
High limit temperature control: de-energize heating elements to protect against overheating.
Supply fan: start before electric elements are energized and continue operating until temperature reaches
minimum setting. Include switch for continuous fan operation.
Comply with Electrical Codes and specifications.
2.2.6 REFRIGERATION
Conform to CSA B52 and ANSI/UL 465 requirements.
Compressor/condenser section:
Semi-hermetic or hermetic compressors, vibration isolated with flexible suction and discharge
connections, oil sight glass, oil pressure switch, crankcase heater, and automatic pump down system
with control to liquid line solenoid valve.
Fans: propeller type with single piece spun venturi outlets and zinc plated guards. Motors shall be
sequenced for head pressure control.
Electrical system shall have operating controls, oil and refrigerant pressure protection, motor overload
protection, weatherproof electrical wiring with weatherproof, rain tight disconnect.
Include refrigerant piping with, sight glass, filter drier and valves.
Condenser: staggered copper tube, aluminum fin coil assembly with sub-cooling rows to provide 6 0C
sub-cooling.
Capacity reduction: cylinder unloading. Provide flooding for head pressure control for low ambient
operation down to 0 C̊ ambient temperature.
Refrigerant type shall be non-CFC type (like: R-134a, R-407c, R-410A or any equivalent refrigerant).
Evaporator:
Rated to ANSI/ARI 210/240.

Thermostatic expansion valve, with adjustable super heat and external equalizer.
Coil: NPS 1/2 or NPS 5/8 od staggered seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum fins and insulated
condensation pan.
Cooling coil condensate drain pans: designed to avoid standing water, to be easily cleaned or removable
for cleaning. Drain connection to have deep seal trap and be complete with trap seal primer.
2.2.7 CONTROLS
In addition to safety controls, provide smoke sensors in return to NFPA standards, low limit on supply and
freeze protection on water coils.
Single zone cooling control:
Zone sensor or room thermostat to activate cooling relay in control circuit cycling compressor. Provide
safeties and pressure controls. Condenser fans to operate in sequence.
When call for cooling is satisfied, relay is de-energized closing liquid line solenoid valve and pumps down.
On two compressor units provide separate circuits to evaporator and condenser.
Mixed air single zone unit:
Page 414 of 429

Motorized outside, return and automatic power exhaust or gravity, relief dampers with spring return
damper operator and control package to automatically vary outside air quantity. Outside air and
exhaust air dampers, normally closed.
Tight fitting opposed blade dampers with neoprene or suitable gaskets, bronze or synthetic bushings and
1% maximum leakage.
Damper operation: 24V, spring return motor with gear train sealed in oil, and heater for operation under
minus 180C.
Mixed air controls: maintain 13 0C mixed air temperature, lock out compressor below 140C ambient,
restart 170C.
2.2.8 REMOTE PANEL

Provide remote readout panel for each unit containing:
Signal lights indicating system status, heating system failure cooling system failure and dirty filters.
Check switches proving signal light operation.
System on-off switch .
Fan on-off switch.
Manual 6 h timer to override night-set back control.
Provide gauges in remote panel indicating outside air, mixed air, return air and discharge air temperatures for
each deck before heat exchangers.
SCHEDULE 2 - COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS (CRAC)
2.3.1 GENERAL
A. Air cooled CRAC units.
B. Refrigerant type shall be non-CFC type (like: R-134a, R-407c, R-410A or any equivalent refrigerant).
C. Ductable close air conditioning units with capacity as per schedule and humidifier and dehumidifier for
precise temperature and humidity control.
D. Particularly suitable for air conditioning technological, servers and IT room and all technological
applications in general.
E. The compressor allows the cooling capacity modulation according to the real internal load, particularly
efficient at the partial loads and optimizing the power absorbed and eliminating the start current.
F. Semi-graphic display 132x64 pixels, programmable software, record storage of 100 alarm, general alarm,
and automatic reset after blackout, integral LAN system, standby management, automatic rotation,
serious alarm.
G. Main accessories:
a. Remote user terminal.

b. Electric heater.
c. Humidifier.
d. Vibration isolation frame with rubber mountings.
e. Air distribution plenum.
Page 415 of 429
f. Sound absorber plenum for air outlet.
g. Interface electronic board.
2.3.2 AIR COOLED CONDENSING UNIT

A. Units of draw-through design complete with fans, motors, drain pan, auxiliary drain pan and condensing
coil and compressor, as follows:
B. Condensing coil:
a. Provide copper tube aluminum fin coil assembly with subcooling rows.
b. Provide thermostat to cycle condenser fans.
C. COMPRESSOR
a. Provide hermetic compressor, resiliently mounted with positive lubrication, crankcase heater, high
and low pressure safety controls, motor overload protection, suction and discharge service valves
and gage ports, and filter drier.
b. Five minute timed off circuit shall delay compressor start.
c. Outdoor thermostat shall energize compressor above 14 C ambient.
d. Provide step capacity control cycling compressors.
D. Condensate Drain pan: Drain pan to direct condensate to condenser coil for re-evaporation.
E. Condenser Fan: Provide direct drive propeller fans, resiliently mounted with fan guard, motor overload
protection, wired to operate with compressor.
2.3.3 OPERATING CONTROLS

A. Provide low voltage, adjustable thermostat to control heater stages in sequence with delay between
stages, compressor and condenser fan.
B. Include system selector switch off-heat-auto-cool and fan control switch (auto-on).
C. Provide double acting thermostat with minimum two stage heating and 2 stages cooling.
D. Locate thermostat in return air.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SCHEDULE 0 - INSPECTION
A. Examine area and condition under which fan coil units are to be installed. Notify Project Director in writing
of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until
B. Verify that proper power supply is available.
SCHEDULE 1 - INSTALLATION
A. Furnish and install factory assembled units of the types, sizes, capacities, and arrangements indicated
on the drawings and specified herein.
Page 416 of 429

B. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.
C. Coordinate installation of units with architectural and electrical work.
D. Supply units fully charged with refrigerant and filled with oil.
E. Scheduled performance is based on ARI 210 test conditions. Scheduled sound rating is based on ARI
270.

SECTION 23 81 29 Variable Refrigerant Flow HVAC Systems
SECTION 23 81 29
Variable Refrigerant Flow HVAC Systems
PART 1 - GENERAL
SCHEDULE 0 - RELATED DOCUMENTS

and Divisions, HVAC specification Sections, apply to work of this Section.
B. The requirements of this Section apply to equipment specified elsewhere in the specification.
C. Electrical Conditions and specifications
SCHEDULE 1 - DESCRIPTION OF WORK

SCHEDULE 2 - QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of units, types, materials and sizes required,
whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. Provide
equipment produced by a manufacturer listed as an Acceptable Manufacturer in this section. Furnish all
equipment from one manufacturer.
Page 417 of 429

B. Standards Compliance: Comply with requirements of applicable local codes and the following:
1. ARI: Certify that the capacities of each model and size are in compliance with industry standard
440-89 for Indoor Units or any equal approved certification.
2. ARI: Test and rate each model and size for sound in accordance with industry standard 443-71 for
sound ratings of Indoor Air Conditioners.
3. ARI 210 - Unitary Air-Conditioning Equipment.
4. ARI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Equipment.
5. Guarantee each unit to operate at the certified sound levels. Replace any unit, which does not fulfill
this requirement.
6. A certified VRF installer should install, connect, test, and balance the VRF system complete with its
associated piping and insulation work, and the local VRF agent should commission & startup the
system at cost of installer. Certificate or approval for installer by local agent and a certificate that
installer possess all required tools (list should be submitted) is a must. Technicians should also be
trained and certified for VRF installation by Factory Engineer. None certified installers or technicians
are not allowed or accepted.
SCHEDULE 3 - SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data, including printed technical literature, and catalog cuts
for each type of Indoor Unit and Outdoor Unit or computer selection printout indicating connection details,
dimensions and required clearances, and installation instructions.
B. Schedule: Submit a schedule showing manufacturer, models, sizes, and capacities for approval before
ordering the equipment.
C. Shop drawings including piping, joints and header with complete sizing and dimensions for the VRF
system.
D. Provide method of statement for the installation, connection, testing, balancing and commissioning of the
VRF units.
E. Provide startup recording (graphical and tables) using service checker equipment for a startup of VRF
system (showing date, site name and successfully operating for more than Five years).
F. Provide List of projects in Egypt indicating number of indoor units, outdoor units, special central control,
project name, location and total operational units in Egypt (for same brand provided in offer).
G. Provide a list of Factory Trained engineers on VRF installation and startup showing, name of engineer,
description of courses attended, and experience in installation and service of VRF projects (for same
brand provided in offer). Certificates of Factory Training and Certificates of excellence for VRF engineers.
H. List of tools used for VRF installation and maintenance including specifications and catalogue cut of
equipment and tools. Tools must be submitted or be available for inspection prior to approval of submittal.
I. Maintenance center tools and proof or previous usage and list of factory certified engineers and
technicians to work on tools with relevant maintenance courses.
J. Previous Certificates of excellence in installation and maintenance of VRF system (of same brand
provided in offer)
K. Provide List of Spare parts available at Local Agent
L. Provide stock available of similar units used in project available at local Agent.
Page 418 of 429

M. Provide List of VRF projects of same brand in Last Three years.
N. Provide List of VRF Projects of same brand under execution.
O. Provide Local Training VRF Facility availability.
P. Items E to Item O should be presented to engineer or available for inspection at installer and agent
facilities prior of approval of submittal.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
SCHEDULE 0 - GENERAL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The VRF heat pump systems shall be installed to provide heating or cooling to the areas via individually
controlled room units on the same refrigeration circuit. The outdoor equipment shall be Air Cooled Modular
Design Variable Refrigerant Volume (VRF) systems.
B. The VRF indoor & outdoor units should be complete with scroll compressors, fans, condenser, heat
exchanger, electronic expansion valve with 2000 control steps, control cables & all other accessories, as
per manufacture recommendations.
C. The VRF system shall be an Inverter Driven 2 Pipe Heat Pump system, which operates on energy efficient
R410A refrigerant. See attached schedule for details of equipment in project.
D. Each system shall be based on one modular outdoor air cooled condensing unit connected via a single
refrigerant circuit comprising suction and liquid pipe work for up to 64 indoor fan coil units, of different
types and capacities. The total load of which should not exceed the total outdoor unit’s capability index.
E. All Concealed indoor units must be complete with variable speed fan.
F. The system should have an integrated oil recovery system, no oil traps are allowed
G. The system should have Automatic refrigerant charging, Automatic leak detection & Auto addressing
functions
H. Outdoor units with frequency control from 52 HZ to 266 HZ, the outdoor units should not have an
equalizing pipe between the outdoor modules
I. The unit's sound level should not exceed 63 dB.
J. The refrigerant pipe work circuit can be extended up to 165 meters actual (190m equivalent length)
between the outdoor condensing unit and the furthest indoor unit on the circuit and may incorporate a 90
meters level difference without no oil traps., Piping should be extendable to 40metres from the first branch
. The level difference between indoor units on one system can be to 15 meters and total piping network
in single system can be up to 1000 meters.
K. Operation of the system shall permit either cooling or heating of each fan coil or all of the fan coil units
serving a common room. Each fan coil or group of fan coils shall be able to provide set temperature
independently via a local remote controller, an Intelligent Controller, an Intelligent Manager or a BMS
interface.
L. The system shall operate with Refrigerant HFC R410A (R32/R125 (50/50)), the installation to be in
accordance with BS EN378: 2000 Parts 1-4 and Manufacture’s design and installation instructions listed
in the VRF Installation Instructions, and Serviced in accordance with service manual.
Page 419 of 429
M. The units shall be manufactured and designed to standards relating to quality assurance under
N. ISO9001, ISO9002 and ISO14001.
O. Also be fully compliant with CE Regulations 1995 with respect to the following areas MSD89/392/EEC –
Machine Safety Directive, LVD73/23/EEC – Low Voltage Directive, and EMC Directive EMV89/336/EEC
– Electro-Magnetic Compatibility, and PED conformity.
SCHEDULE 1 - VRF INDOOR UNITS

A. Indoor unit shall consist of a fan, a heat exchanger and an electronic proportional expansion valve which
shall be controlled via computerized PID control which constantly, every 20 seconds measures and
assesses the status of the return air temperature, refrigerant inlet and outlet temperature.
B. During the cooling operation the electronic expansion valve (not less than 2000 steps) shall control the
degree of refrigerant superheat at the evaporator outlet. During the heating operation it shall control the
degree of refrigerant sub cooling at the condenser outlet.
C. The indoor unit printed circuit board shall be complete with power input fusing, address switches for a
variety of operation controls, emergency operation switch and fault/operation indication LED's. Fan
motors shall be thermally protected.
D. All Concealed indoor units must be complete with variable speed fan.
E. The indoor unit casing of ceiling concealed and cassette types, shall be fully insulated and sealed to
prevent condensation. The insulation shall conform to BS476 Part 7 fire rating.
F. All indoor units should be have a Multi Tenant option which useful in an apartment building, where multiple
tenants share one outdoor unit.
2.2.1 GENERAL
A. Provide the required units, types and capacities shown in the design schedules, BQ and Drawings
to fulfill designed load at actual capacities.
B. Submit a computer selection showing pipe size and length.
C. Provide a certificate that the system limitations are not violated or exceded.
D. All units shall be of the cooling/ heating type using the heat pump technique
E. Combination ratio should be maximum 105 %. Subject to manufacturer approval depending on

territory and application and ambient temperature.
F. Unrestricted positioning of the indoor units shall be at least 195m pipe run allowance with a height
difference of 90 m from the outdoor unit and up to 15m among the indoor units and up to 90 meters
for a single indoor and up to 1000 meter in single circuit.
G. Units shall be provided with low noise direct drive fan, motor, heat exchanger, electronic expansion
valve, drain pump built in for concealed & cassette models insulated drain pan and refrigerant filters.
2.2.2 MEDIUM STATIC CONCEALED CEILING UNIT

A. VRF indoor type FXSQ (false ceiling duct connection) unit with external static pressure for cooling (by
evaporator) or heating (by condenser) by use of refrigerant.
Page 420 of 429

B. The air can be taken in either through an optional, white, washable panel fitted with a washable long-life
filter or through an air duct. The air is expelled through a fixed installation duct. The indoor unit should be
compatible with the inverter outdoor unit.
C. Fresh-air admixing of 10-15% in relation to the nominal flow rate can be admixed via a punched aperture
(diameter 125mm).
2.2.3 RADIAL FAN:

Vibration-free and quiet running. Protected by a thermal contact.
2.2.4 AIR COOLER / HEATER:

Large surface area with HI-X Cu piping with profiled aluminium vanes. R410a counter flow design. Coil
no less than 3-rows deep, fabricated of 15mm O.D. copper tubes and aluminum fins mechanically
bonded to the tubes.
2.2.5 ELECTRONIC EXPANSION VALVE:

With stepping motor, 2000 steps for precise cooling unit adjustment between 0%-100%. This prevents
large temperature differences between room temperature and discharge temperature at partial loading.
2.2.6 DRAIN PUMP

Integrated into the unit as a standard fitting. Drain-up height 0.50 m. In units High Static Pressure, Wall
Mounted and Ceiling Suspended Units, drain pump to be considered as variation subject to Architectural
requirements and approval.
2.2.7 MICRO-PROCESSOR CONTROLLED:

Capacity-dependent refrigerant supply, controlled by minim 3 thermostats (set temp., heat exchanger
sensor (intake/outlet)) and a PID controller, operating mode dependent fan control, self-diagnosing,
malfunction code acquisition and evaluation, information system for servicing. Adjustment programming
deviant from the factory setting, e.g.
 Floating contacts suitable for use in BUS systems (LON-BUS, EIB) are programmable as an
external ON/OFF, emergency stop or window contact.
 Malfunction code history for troubleshooting
 Forced fan operation with multi model applications
 All PID controller thermistors can be polled
2.2.8 CONTROL EXTENSIONS AND OPTIONS:

 LONWorks, BACNET and Open Protocol TCP/IP interface,
 Additional KRP 4A51(FXYCP/KP/SP/ KRP 4A53 (FXYFP/BP/MP/HP/APLP/LMP) PCB, for
integration in GLT (see LV text),
 Additional KRP 2A51(FXYCP/KP/SP/BP/MP/LP/LMP), KRP 2A53 (FXYFP/HP/AP) PCB, for
integration in GLT (see LV text),
 Additional KRP 1B61(FXYCP/KP/SP/BP/MP/HP/LP/LMP), KRP1B2(FXYFP) KRP1B3(FXYAP)
PCB, for integration in GLT (see LV text),
 Additional DCS302A52 PCB, to integrate in GLT in conjunction with centralised control modules or
DBACS systems (see LV text),
 Centralised switch panel module,
 Parallel interface with 2 additional modules (set temperature and read temperature),
 Central Intelligent management system.
Page 421 of 429

The following remote controls should be available for connection with indoor units upon requirement
and engineer request (as option) :
 Hotel remote control Type I (with mode selector, flush mounted for mounting in
 the corpus of built-in cupboards): BRC2A51
 Hotel remote control Type II (without mode selector, flush mounted for mounting in the corpus
of built-in cupboards): BRC3A61
 Wireless remote control (separate receiver installed in the room): BRC4C62
 Unified ON/OFF controller for 16 Indoor groups
CE Declaration of Conformity
Comprising LVD73/23/EEC, EMV89/336/EEC and MSD89/392/EEC
SCHEDULE 2 - OUTDOOR UNIT
2.3.1 GENERAL
A. The outdoor condensing units shall be completely weather proofed to corrosion resistant type E1. Factory
assembled in a sturdy weatherproofed casing constructed from rust-proofed mild steel panels (Galbarian
Steel) coated with an electro-painted oven baked enamel finish. Also pre-charged, pre-wired and
completed with all necessary electronic and refrigerant controls for ease of installation and factory tested.
B. Units of weather proofed, anti corrosion enclosure, complete with compressors, fans, motors and
condenser coils
C. Hermetically type Scroll inverter compressor with one moving part and oil filter. Rotary or Twin Rotary
compressors with more than one moving part are not allowed.
D. Liquid receiver
E. The system should have an integrated oil recovery system, no oil traps are allowed
F. Oil equalizer system between compressors and condensers
G. Maximum size unit shall be designed to work with several indoor units (up to 64 units) connected to the
same refrigerant circuit
H. Automatic control system shall handle the conditions of the operation of any number of indoor units down
to one, the frequency of the inverter control to be determined electronically be sensing ambient
temperature, operational pressures and monitoring the exact requirements of all the connected indoor
units.
I. Ambient temperature should range from -5 C Dry Bulb Temp.(DBT) to 50 C DBT in the cooling operation
and from -5 C Wet Bulb Temp.(WBT) to 15.5C WBT in the heating operation
J. The system should have Automatic refrigerant charging, Automatic leak detection & Auto addressing
functions
K. The units to be equipped with the back-up function, which allow the other outdoor units to operate as
emergency to prevent the total shutdown of the system, even when one of the outdoor unit goes out of
order.
L. Outdoor units with frequency control from 52 HZ to 266 HZ, the outdoor units should not have an
equalizing pipe between the outdoor modules
M. Units shall be capable of controlling running hours of compressors to ensure the same lifetime.
Page 422 of 429

N. System should be have high COP (ex. Not less than 4.5 on size 24HP and 4.35 on size 36 HP and 3.7
on size 54 HP).
O. Provide control kit (element) in indoor units to enable connection with BMS or fire alarm system.
P. The VRF indoor & outdoor units should be complete with scroll compressors, fans, condenser, heat
exchanger, electronic expansion valve with 2000 control steps, control cables & all other accessories, as
per manufacture recommendations
2.3.2 MODULE HEAT EXCHANGERS

A. High-capacity condenser/evaporator, optimised for R410A refrigerant. Less refrigerant charge through
compact construction with Hi-X Cu seamless piping in counter-flow design and N-shape internal grooves,
with e-Pass circulation to achieve greater refrigerant sub-cooling for long piping runs. Specially profiled
aluminium vanes, chromatised and plastic coated for surface protection against corrosive air, acid rain
and saline air (e.g. for installations in coastal regions) to extend the overall useful life.
B. The fins are to be covered with an anti-corrosion Acrylic resin and hydrophilic film type E1. The pipe plates
shall be treated with powdered polyester resin for corrosion and rust prevention.
C. The heat exchanger should be approved and tested according to:
a. VDA Wechsel test: Where the plate passes 5 cycles of 7 days each containing:
i. 24 hrs of salt spray test SS DIN 50021

ii. 96 hrs humidity cycle test KFW DIN 50017
iii. 48 hrs room temperature & room humidity testing period (5 cycles)
b. Kestrinich test: Where the plate passes 40 cycles of 48 hrs each tested according to DIN 50017.
2.3.3 FAN
A. The outdoor fan impeller shall be of aero spiral type for vertical air discharge, designed for low noise
operation with manipulation on the fan blade edges to reduce turbulence and have a aero fitting discharge
grill. The fan motor shall be DC (Digital Commentator brushless motor) inverter speed control to maintain
constant head pressure control in all ambient conditions and modes of operation. Fan motors shall have
external static pressure of 78Pa.
B. Number of Aero-Spiral-Fans (Two fans only for size 14-18 HP, Three fans for size 26-48 HP and
Maximum of Six Fans in Size 54 HP).
2.3.4 COMPRESSOR (PER MODULE)

A. The compressor shall be of the high-efficiency Hermetically Sealed Reluctance DC (Digital Commutator
brushless motor) Scroll type (rotary or twin rotary are not allowed) with only one moving part employing
neodymium magnets with gas fed directly to the compression process.
B. The motor should be cooled by pressurized gas not by suction gas or evaporation of the refrigerant in the
motor to prevent overloading of winding and bearings which is cases by sporadic jumps in temperature if
suction gas is used for cooling.
C. Compressor should have no accumulator, rotary or twin rotary compressors with more than one moving
part are not accepted.
Page 423 of 429

D. Each outdoor unit shall have at least one inverter driven compressor electronically controlled and capable
of changing the speed linearly to follow the variations in cooling or heating load. In the cases of two or
more compressors there shall be duty balancing. This shall be by the use of HIDECS circuit (Hi Inverter
Drive and Electronics Control System) together with independent multi-variable PI (Proportional Integral)
control for the precise monitoring of status of the system. With optimum capacity control of one or two
standard drive compressors in accordance with load. All compressors should be fitted within the unit on
anti-noise mountings.
E. Capacity control of the outdoor unit shall be inverter controlled with following steps for Single Module: 20
steps for size 5 HP, 25 steps for size 8 HP, 25 steps for size 8 HP, 37 steps for size 10&12 HP, 51 steps
for size 14&16 HP, 55 steps for size 18 HP and Minimum 67 steps for the 54 HP size (with maximum
Three Modules). The frequency of inverter control shall be determined electronically by sensing ambient
temperatures, operational pressures and monitoring the exact requirement of all of the connected indoor
units, frequency should be controlled from 52 HZ to 266 HZ.
F. Modules 5-18 HP each should include an at least an inverter compressor with DC motor (digitally
commutated brushless DC motor), which is frequency controlled. This should be done by converting AC
voltage to DC voltage, using a rectifier and producing an independent controlled frequency. Mains
frequency and unit frequency should be de-coupled in the inverter.
G. There should be no residual frequencies and electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) should be complied
without restriction. Adherence to the directive EMV89/336/EEC is a must.
H. To prevent a lack of oil, dynamic oil balancing system should be applied by fitting to the inlet side and a
large surface area oil separator should be installed on the outlet side.
I. To optimise the supply of lubricant for several compressors, an automatic oil return cycle for the whole of
the system network should be periodically activated by the MICRO-PROCESSOR system controller.
J. No oil filters are allowed in the system.
K. The compressor, the electrical and thermal motor protection and the oil sump heating should be controlled
by the MICRO-PROCESSOR system controller
L. The unit's sound level should not exceed 63 dB(A)
M. Sizes 5&8 HP should contain one inverter compressor, Sizes 10&12 should contain One Inverter and
One Fixed speed compressor and Sizes 14-18 HP should have One Inverter compressor and two fixed
speed compressors.
2.3.5 COOLING CIRCUIT (PER MODULE)

A. The refrigeration circuit of the outdoor unit shall include a SCe-Bridge Circuit complete with solenoid
valves, 4 way valve(s), distribution headers, and capillaries, filters, shut off valves, service ports and
receivers.
B. And should be optimised for the use of R 410 A refrigerant. Cooling circuit should comprise refrigerant
collector, filter and oil separator.
C. System should optimise level of fill for the evaporator and overheating control for the heating mode by
way of an electronic injection valve (EEXV) with 2000 servo steps, controlled by the Micro-processor
system controller.
D. Dynamic E-Bridge circuit for optimum refrigerant sub-cooling, in addition to circuit for stabilising the liquid
pressure and the head of liquid in refrigerant collector.
SCHEDULE 3 - CONTROL AND SAFETY DEVICES:

Page 424 of 429
A. Control sensors should be builtfor
 low pressure
 high pressure
 refrigerant suction temperature
 oil temperature
 heat exchanger temperature
 Outside temperature.
B. Safety pressure switches should be for low and high pressure (manual reset should be possible from
remote control).
C. The unit should be equipped with shut-off valves for suction and liquid pipes and service connections with
Schrader valves. The refrigerant circulation is dried, evacuated and charged with the required refrigerant.
D. For selected sizes, subject to variations in site, zoning or application changes, Engineer can require same
capacity unit from manufacturer during constructions (but bigger/smaller footprint and weight or with
higher efficiency) prior to approval of submittal or during construction.
E. Micro-processor System Controller Micro-controller supported control and regulation of the process
sequence for both cooling and heating operating modes. Management functions for all sensors and
actuators, control and safety components and electrical drives.
F. Management of Basic Functions:
 Pam-Sinus Inverter Control: Continuous compressor capacity control as required.

 E-Bridge function: optimum refrigerant sub-cooling and collector level of fill control
 Oil Balance Circuit dynamic oil balancing system
 Oil Return Function: dynamic oil return mode
 Auto Restart: automatic restart after power failure
 Auto Initialisation: automatic detection and addressing of the indoor units on the system
bus
G. Management of individual functions:
 Low-Noise Operation: Noise-reduced operation, night time operation

 Demand: electrical peak load limiting and compressor sequence run-up
 Sequence start: automatic run-time compensation between compressors Several
modules (from size 18 upwards)
 Adaptation of the evaporation and condensation temperatures and outdoor temperature
H. Unit should have Self-diagnosis function for outdoor and indoor units over the communication data bus
with operator access via the local manual operating level and/or via the diagnosis tool: Service-Checker
- presentation and storage of all process parameters for effective system maintenance. Including
maintenance protocol print out
I. Auto Check function:
 The system shall employs the Auto check function for connection errors of the unit wiring and piping,
to be shown on the PC board in the outdoor unit.
 The system should record the last 5 minutes of operating data continuously to enable the analysis of
the data in case of any malfunction to identify the problem cause.
J. Auto Refrigerant Charge Function:
 The system shall have an automatic refrigerant charge function capable of calculating required
additional refrigerant charge due to pipe length and diameter and automatically adjust required
additional charge.
Page 425 of 429
K. Auto Leak detection Function:
 A leak detection feature that automatically calculates the volume of the refrigerant flowing in the cycle
depending on reference values of system's temperatures, pressures & refrigerant density & the types
& number of indoor units.
L. Auto Address function:
 The system should be capable of performing Auto address for indoor units without using dip switches
or rotary switches. Manual addressing is not allowed.
M. Anti-recycling timers.
 The condensing units shall be capable of sequential start when more than one unit is installed to
minimize circuit breakers size and current.
N. Auto Restart Function:
 Unit Should have an auto restart capability after power failure as standard.
O. Back-up Function.
 If a compressor failure occurs in system the remaining compressors ensures at least 66% system
capacity for three modules units. This function is activated at the outdoor unit.
 If a compressor fails in a module in a two or three module systems (module sizes 20-54 HP), this
module can be de-activated. The remaining module or modules then keep uphold the basic supply.
 The operator should be able to use the remote control to activate this function.
P. Oil Recovery Function
 The oil recovery cycle shall be automatic, occurring 1 hour after start of operation and then every 8
hours of accumulated operation. Oil separators should be standard with the equipment together with
oil equalization system between compressors and condenser, no oil traps are allowed.
Q. Optimization and Operational Safety Functions:
 When the system is initially commissioned, it operates in an automatic operating mode and creates
the individual system characteristic curve for optimum partial load operation. The respective
structural conditions (pipe network resistance, differences in height) are acquired during this
operating mode. This dynamic system pressure loss flows into the target pressure calculation as a
variable (evaporation temperature). This ensures a constant pressure and thus constant temperature
level at the heat exchangers, independent of partial load.
R. Electronics
 The outdoor electronic PCB’s shall be lead free with emergency operation switches, and service
mode switches, together with LED indications for the number of fan coils connected, the frequency
status and operational/fault indication. The control circuit shall have a pump down facility to enable
collection of the entire refrigerant charge in the system at the outdoor unit.
 The units shall have microprocessor control system incorporated to enable oil return, stability of
refrigerant flow and capacity balancing.
 The following safety devices shall be part of the outdoor unit;
 High and low pressure switches,
 Control circuit fuses,
 Crank case heaters,
Page 426 of 429

 Thermal protectors for compressor and fan motors,
 Over current protection for inverter
S. CE Declaration of Conformity
 Should comply with The Low Voltage Directive LVD73/23/EEC, EMC Directive EMV89/336/EEC and
Machine Directive MSD89/392/EEC.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
SCHEDULE 0 - INSPECTION
A. Examine area and condition under which the indoor VRF units are to be installed. Notify the engineer in
writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the work until
SCHEDULE 1 - INSTALLATION
A. Furnish and install factory assembled Indoor units of the types, sizes, capacities, and arrangements
indicated on the drawings and specified herein.
B. Install in accordance with the manufacturer instructions using tools approved by manufacturer.
C. Coordinate installations of the units with the architectural and electrical works
D. Supply units fully charged with refrigerant and filled with oil
E. Units shall be delivered along with refnet joints & refnet headers to facilitate installation & increase the system
reliability.
F. Pipes to be connected using non weld connectors “Lokring” to sizes 1 1/8 and welding above that size. Pipe
Ends should be covered by a Lokring Stopper in case indoor will be installed at later stage.
G. The installation company shall be Approved Manufacture Installers, whose installation engineers
H. shall have attended the relevant VRF Manufacture equipment courses. Proof of compliance may be requested before
approving submittal. Approval is given by a Manufacture Distributor. The
I. tendering contractor must state on his tender return submission the name of the specialist
J. Manufacture approved sub-contractor to be employed to carry out the VRF installation.
K. The installation of all internal and external units, refrigerant pipe work, inter-connecting wiring, testing shall be carried
out by the above stated approved Manufacture Installer.
Page 427 of 429

L. The approved VRF Manufacture installer shall on his cost get a Manufacture Distributor’s representative who should
witness the commissioning of the VRF system and do final inspection prior to startup. Installer should provide the
following for engineer and manufacturer representative:
 Record Pressure Test (Holding Pressure)

 As Built Drawings showing sizes and length of pipes per circuit.
 Draw and Record Pipe Lengths and diameter in sketch as built per circuit.
 Submit calculations of additional refrigerate charges.
 Addressing of Fan Coils by group address
 Complete and issue Documents and Certificates to Consultant/Client.
M. Contractor on no extra cost shall receive the following from manufacturer representative, and present to engineer for
record.
 Service recordings for at least 2 hours of operation upon start up using service checker
with a certified engineer having an experience of at least Five years in analyzing checker
recordings. And who has attended the relevant training course.
 Warranty after inspection and approval of installation works.
N. Should it deemed necessary full access should be afforded to the site during the installation of the VRF to allow a
Manufacture Distributor’s representative/engineer to verify that the installation methods being used comply and are
fully in accordance with the Manufacture VRF Installation Instructions, requirement in order that the equipment
warranties will not be invalidated.
O. Nominated Approved Manufacture Installers should have a certificate from Manufacture Distributor.
P. REFRIGERATION PIPEWORK
Supply, install, test and commission all interconnecting refrigeration pipe work between the outdoor unit
and the connected indoor units with sizing and thickness as recommended by manufacturer. Non
welding Lokring joints should be used in connecting sizes below 1 1/8 in most cases and Lokring
Stopper should be used if Indoor is going to be installed in a later stage..
The pipe work installation, charging, testing and commissioning shall be carried out by registered
refrigeration engineers, who shall be fully trained in the safe handling of refrigerants and trained in
brazing techniques. Technicians should be trained for welding and installing VRF systems by a
factory engineer and should be certified from manufacturer.
The installation shall be fully in accordance with British Standard BS EN378: 2000 Parts2-3 and
Manufacture’s design and installation instructions listed in the VRF Installation Instructions.
All pipe work installations shall be carried out in refrigerant quality soft or half hard drawn pre insulated
copper tubing to BS2871 Part 2: 1972 and complete with the appropriate Refnet headers and Refnet
joints.
Longest possible lengths of pre insulated copper pipe shall be utilized to minimize the number of joints
on site; appropriate refrigeration installation tools must be utilized to avoid the use of elbows. In case
specific location requires welding, Oxygen free dry Nitrogen (OFN) must be used and blown during
welding (no cold brazing is allowed) to avoid oxidation inside pipes. In case oxidation is found inside
pipe due to not using Nitrogen replacement without welding, pre insulated copper pipes could be
changes if requested by engineer and manufacturer.
Pipe work shall be properly and neatly fixed and supported at a minimum of 2 meter intervals and where
possible should be run on galvanised cable tray. All pipe work to be tagged with ID number
(Condensing Unit ref) at 3 meter intervals.
Pipe supports shall not restrict expansion or contraction of the pipe and restraint must not be applied to
Refnet joints or Headers. Every 15 meters in risers an expansion loop should be done in accordance
to pre insulated copper piping installation works.
Page 428 of 429

All pipe work (suction and liquid) to be insulated with slip on close cell electrometric pipe insulation (as
manufactured by Armaflex or equal and approved), fire rated to Class "O" Building Regulations 1985,
with a wall thickness of not less than 10mm in small sizes and 20 mm in large sizes. Insulation must
be protected when exposed to atmosphere by special paint or covered by an enclosure or cladding.
All joints, after pressure and leak testing, are to be properly glued and or taped as to provide a complete
seal to prevent any condensation, and shall be clearly marked for ease of identification.
After installation of pipe work, prior to connection to the condensing units, sealing of insulation joints and
starting of equipment, pipe work should be pressure tested using oxygen free dry nitrogen as out
lined below to 38 Bar (551 Psi), held for 24 hours and checked for leaks.
Step 1 Pressurize to 10.3 Bar (149 Psi) 3 minutes or longer

Discovery of major leaks
Step 2 Pressurize to 21.5 Bar (312 Psi) 5 minutes or longer
Step 3 Pressurize to 38 Bar (551 Psi) 24 Hrs minimum Discovery of minor leaks
The system shall then be vacuumed/dehydrated to 0.2 torr (-755mmHg) using a 2-stage vacuum pump
with non return valve in less than 2 hours and then held at that setting for 1 hour (minimum) to ensure
successful vacuum. If Vacuum was not reached in above timings, break vacuum with dry nitrogen up
to +0.5 bar and repeat the vacuum process again. All of the above works shall be carried out before
electrical connection is made to the fan coil units.
The additional refrigerant (HFC R410A) charge shall be calculated and weighed to accommodate the
actual installed and measured length of pipe work all in accordance to manufacture
recommendations and instructions listed in the VRF Installation Instructions.
The charging should be carried out with an appropriate charging station in the liquid phase and under
supervision, no charging without a weighting scale is allowed and recorded additional charge should
be recorded on each outdoor unit.
Q. CONTROL WIRING
2 2
a. All control wiring is to be carried out in 2 core 0.75mm - 1.25mm PVC non screened CY flexible
control cabling to BS6141 and BS6500 (To comply with CE Regulations 1995) colour coded and
separately marked at 3 meter intervals for ease of identification and maintenance.
b. A cross wiring check function should be present to identify any connection errors in the system &
give an obvious alert for it.
R. EQUIPMENT MAINTENANACE & WARRANTY
a. The sub-contractor shall supply all the specified equipment complete with one year’s warranty on
both materials and labour commencing on satisfactory hand-over of the complete system.
b. The sub-contractor shall include for a one-year maintenance contract on the complete installation,
with guaranteed maximum 48-hour response time. The sub-contractor shall ensure that the warranty
and maintenance contract he provides is underwritten and approved by Manufacture Distributor, and
shall provide to the employer documentary evidence of the same.
c. The maintenance contract, which must be in place within three months of project completion, shall
include for all works necessary to ensure that the three year equipment warranty given by
Manufacture is not invalidated, and shall provide documentary evidence to this effect.
Page 429 of 429

Mechanical Technical Specifications

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mechanical Technical Specifications

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mechanical Technical Specifications

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

BUSINES PARK - P0015-821

KNOWLEDGE ECONOMIC CITY - KEC

MECHANICAL & BMS WORKS

DIV 21-FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM

SECTION 210500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR FIRE SUPPRESSION

PART 1 PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

AIA - American Insurance Association

1.4 ORGANIZATION OF THE WORK

C. Keep a competent superintendent in charge of the work. Replace such superintendent if

1.8 EXAMINATION OF EXISTING CONDITIONS

B. Verify all grades, elevations, dimensions, and clearances at the site.

1.9 SHOP DRAWINGS AND OTHER INFORMATION REQUIRED

A. Prior to purchasing equipment or materials, submit a list of proposed manufacturers to the

C. Shop drawings must bear the General Contractor's stamp certifying:

1. That he has checked the submitted subcontractor's shop drawings.

F. Documents will not be accepted for review unless:

A. Before commencing work, procure complete set of reproducible transparencies of Contract

B. Neatly revise to conform to Record Drawings.

C. Conspicuously indicate major deviations in Mechanical Equipment Rooms by specific

E. Submit complete copy on computer diskette, with complete list of contents.

1.12 COORDINATION OF WORK WITH OTHER TRADES

H. Deliver materials to Project Site in manufacturer's original unopened containers with

1.15 EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

1.16 ACCESS DOORS IN FINISHED CONSTRUCTION

1.17 COMMISSIONING AND PERFORMANCE TESTING

C. Include the following in the operation and maintenance manuals:

a. Complete schematic drawings of all systems

a. Description - literature, drawings, illustrations, certified performance charts, technical

1. Valve identification to comply with MSSSP-25.

B. Motor Control Identification

C. Schedule and Charts

C. Any Material transported in a piping system will be color-coded. Positive Identification of

1.23 DRIP PAN

C. Furnish galvanized steel gutters as follows:

PART 2 BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS FOR FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEM

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of products of types and capacities

A. Sleeve Product Schedule:

Type Designation Sleeve Materials

1. #18 gauge, galvanized steel

Type Designation Caulking & Packing Requirements

1. Oakum, hemp or lead

2.1 GENERAL EXECUTION

1. Examine conditions under which equipment is to be installed. Notify Architect in writing of

C. Sleeve and Sleeve Caulking Application Schedule:

Sleeve Type Location Sleeve Caulking and Packing

Location Sleeve Length

B. Escutcheon Application Schedule:

G. DAMAGED SURFACES of equipment to be restored to original condition by cleaning and

H. UNFINISHED SURFACES to be painted as directed.

I. Hot SURFACES to be painted with approved heat resistant paint.

J. APPLY PAINT in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations.

END OF SECTION 210500

SECTION 210519 – Meters and Gages for Fire-Suppression Systems

Meters and Gages for Fire-Suppression Systems

1.0 INSTRUMENTS AND GAUGES

1.1 Pressure and Altitude Gauges

Generally, valve pressure gauges shall be installed at the following location